hp color LaserJet 9500n

service hp color LaserJet 9500hdn

hp color LaserJet 9500 series printer

service ____________________
© Copyright 2003 Trademark Credits
Hewlett-Packard Development
Company, LP Adobe® and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Reproduction, adaptation, or Incorporated.
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, and
as allowed under the copyright Windows® are U.S. registered
laws. trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
The information contained herein
is subject to change without TrueTypeTM is a U.S. trademark
notice. of Apple Computer, Inc.
The only warranties for HP UNIX® is a registered trademark
products and services are set of The Open Group.
forth in the express warranty Energy Star® is a U.S. registered
statements accompanying such service mark of the United States
products and services. Nothing Environmental Protection
herein should be construed as Agency.
constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Part number: C8546-90956
Edition 1, 9/2003
1 Product information
Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Product overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
External assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printer with packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printer physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Guidelines for selecting media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Supported media and capacity for input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recommended media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Special media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Storing print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Testing media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Media assessment tools and suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2 Service approach
Service approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Parts and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ordering supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Exchange program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
World Wide Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HP service parts information compact disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Customer care reseller sales and service support center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ordering related documentation and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Limited warranty for print cartridge and image drum life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Transfer unit and fuser warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
HP maintenance agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Onsite service agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3 Product configuration
Control panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Control panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Menu map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using a menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Retrieve job menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Paper handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting media for a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configure device menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Print Quality submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Output Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
I/O submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Resets submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

ENWW 3
Service ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Restoring the Service ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Converting the Service ID to an actual date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Settings and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Configure the control panel display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Configure the input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Boot key sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Hard disk reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
NVRAM initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Cold reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89

4 Product maintenance
Preventative maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Image transfer kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Image cleaning kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Image fuser kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Cleaning the printer and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
General cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Cleaning spilled toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Vacuum specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
First aid measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Cleaning the post charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Cleaning the separation guide, feed guide, and front fuser guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Cleaning the fuser input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Cleaning the registration roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Cleaning the other rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Cleaning the tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Non-HP print cartridges and image drums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Authenticating print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Storing print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Image drums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Storing image drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Firmware upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Downloading the new firmware to the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

5 Theory of operation
Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Major printer systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Printer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Sequence of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Timing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Flat flexible cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Connector location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Engine-control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
DC controller circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
DC controller operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
T driver circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Fuser control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Low-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
High-voltage power supply circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Post charger power supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Motors and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

4 ENWW
Formatter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
DIMM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Formatter heartbeat LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Laser/scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Dual-beam method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Laser control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Scanner-motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Color plane registration calibration control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Image formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Electrophotographic process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Paper-path system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Pickup/feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

6 Removal and replacement

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Removal and replacement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
General cautions during removal and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Required tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Flat flexible cable caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
DC controller and cable/connector damage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Potential damage areas while servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Toner cartridges (print cartridges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Process cartridges (image drums) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Waste toner bottle (toner collection bottle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Transfer cleaner (cleaning blade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Control panel overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Right upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Left upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Top right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Top left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Fuser door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Left back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Left lower cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Right back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Major assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Process cartridge (image drum) door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Laser/scanner assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Reading a laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Delivery unit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Vertical feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Density and registration sensor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Right back fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

ENWW 5
Right front fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Pickup unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Temperature and humidity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
High-voltage power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Low-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Delivery fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Fuser fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
P-crg (image drum) drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
T-crg (print cartridge) drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Fuser motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
DC controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Formatter PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Formatter cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
High-voltage contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Post charger power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Tray 1 pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Left door switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Right door switch (front and right side doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
ITB sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Upper left door sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Fuser front paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Fuser sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

7 Troubleshooting
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Troubleshooting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Power checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Control panel checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Troubleshooting tools and procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Hardware and electrical troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Image formation and print-quality troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Sample defects and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Media and paper-path troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Tests for troubleshooting paper-path problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Noise troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Control panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Control panel and event log message format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Event log page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Error message interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Data and communication troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Tray 4 troubleshooting tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

8 Parts and diagrams

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Ordering parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Kits, supplies, accessories, exchange parts, and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Hardware identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Illustrations and parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
External covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Left cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Right door assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Internal components (1 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Internal components (2 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

6 ENWW
Internal components (3 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Internal components (4 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Internal components (5 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Internal components (6 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Internal components (7 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Internal components (8 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Internal components (9 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Registration drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Cassette assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Delivery feed assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Face down delivery assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Delivery cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
PCB assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Tray 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tray 4 main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tray 4 drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Tray 4 PCA location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Master parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

ENWW 7
8 ENWW
List of tables

Table 1. Features of the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Table 2. Out-of-box specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 3. Packaged specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 4. Power requirements and circuit capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 5. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 6. Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 7. Noise level specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 8. Supported standard media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 9. Maximum custom sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 10. Minimum custom sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 11. Supported media weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 12. Input tray capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 13. Output bin capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 14. Recommended media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Table 15. Media weight, finish, and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Table 16. Determining basis weight of paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 17. Paper weight equivalence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 18. Tools and suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 19. Related documentation and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Table 20. Control panel features, and key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 21. Retrieve job menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Table 22. Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Table 23. Paper handling menu default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Table 24. Configure device menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Table 25. PCL submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 26. Print Quality menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 27. Description of print modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 28. System Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Table 29. Output Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 30. I/O submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 31. Parallel Input submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 32. EIO submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 33. Resets submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 34. Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 35. Component test values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 36. Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 37. Maximum custom sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 38. Minimum custom sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 39. Update messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 40. Troubleshooting a firmware update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 41. Troubleshooting a firmware update failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 42. Printer components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 43. Power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 44. Normal sequence of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 45. Failure sequence of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 47. Motors, fans, clutches, solenoids, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table 48. Motors and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 49. Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

ENWW List of tables 9

Table 50. Hardware table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Table 51. Common torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Table 52. Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Table 53. Power checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Table 54. Repeating print-quality defect dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Table 55. Repeating marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Table 56. Lines and bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Table 57. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Table 58. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Table 59. Diagonal bands or lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Table 60. Light or faint image and dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Table 61. Wavy brush marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Table 62. Color plane misregistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Table 63. Possible causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Table 64. Primary color covers entire page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Table 65. Ghosted image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Table 66. Distorted or misplaced image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Table 67. Poorly fused image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Table 68. Missing color plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Table 69. Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Table 70. Hand or fingerprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Table 71. Fine, yellow dot background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Table 72. Toner halos or explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Table 73. Paper path jam sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Table 74. Media jams by location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Table 75. General jam troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Table 76. Alphabetical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Table 77. Numerical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Table 78. DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Table 79. Tray 4 light pattern interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Table 80. Term decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Table 81. Kits and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Table 82. Accessories, exchange parts, and documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Table 83. Common hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Table 84. Common torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Table 85. External covers and panels (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Table 86. External covers and panels (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Table 87. Left cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Table 88. Right door assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Table 89. Internal components (1 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Table 90. Internal components (2 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Table 91. Internal components (3 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Table 92. Internal components (4 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Table 93. Internal components (5 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Table 94. Internal components (6 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Table 95. Internal components (7 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Table 96. Internal components (8 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Table 97. Internal components (9 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Table 98. Registration drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Table 99. Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Table 100. Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Table 101. Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Table 102. Cassette assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Table 103. Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Table 104. Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Table 105. Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Table 106. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Table 107. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Table 108. Registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

10 List of tables ENWW

Table 109. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Table 110. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Table 111. Delivery feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Table 112. Face down delivery feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Table 113. Delivery cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Table 114. Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Table 115. PCB assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Table 116. Tray 4 main body (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Table 117. Tray 4 main body (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Table 118. Tray 4 drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Table 119. Tray 4 PCA location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Table 120. Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Table 121. Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

ENWW List of tables 11

12 List of tables ENWW
List of figures

Figure 1. Sample identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Figure 2. Front and right side assembly locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 3. Back and left side assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 4. Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 5. HP color LaserJet 9500n printer dimensions (top and front views) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Figure 6. HP color LaserJet 9500hdn printer dimensions (top and front views) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 7. Sample seams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 8. Adhesive labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 9. Long, short, and diagonal grain curl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 10. Measuring curl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 11. Control panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 12. Printable area from edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 13. Maximum printable area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 14. Cleaning the fuser input (step 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 15. Printer systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 16. Printer components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 17. Power-on block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 18. Timing chart (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 19. Timing chart (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 20. Wiring diagram (1 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 21. Wiring diagram (2 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 22. Wiring diagram (3 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 23. Wiring diagram (4 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 24. Connector location (1 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 25. Connector location (2 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figure 26. Connector location (3 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 27. Connector location (4 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 28. Engine-control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 29. DC controller circuit (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 30. DC controller circuit (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 31. T driver circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 32. Fuser control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 33. Low-voltage power supply circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 34. High-voltage power supply circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 35. Motors and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Figure 36. Switches, solenoids, and clutches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 37. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Figure 38. Formatter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 39. Laser/scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 40. Dual-beam method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 41. Laser control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 42. Image mask control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 43. Scanner motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Figure 44. Color plane registration (CPR) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 45. Laser beam skew calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 46. EP process main components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 47. Primary charging (step 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 48. Laser writing latent image (step 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 49. Developing (step 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

ENWW List of figures 13

Figure 50. Primary transfer (step 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Figure 51. Post charging (step 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Figure 52. Secondary transfer (step 6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Figure 53. Separation (step 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Figure 54. Fusing (step 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Figure 55. ITB cleaning (step 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Figure 56. OPC cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Figure 57. OPC cleaning toner collection (step 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Figure 58. OPC cleaning toner not charged by brushes (step 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Figure 59. Image density detection control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Figure 60. Paper-path system motors, clutches, and solenoids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Figure 61. Paper-path system switches, sensors, and PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Figure 62. Cassette pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Figure 63. Lifting-up operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Figure 64. Tray 1 paper pickup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Figure 65. Tray 1 paper-width detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Figure 66. Tray 1 last-paper detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Figure 67. Tray 1 paper feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Figure 68. Remove the FFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Figure 69. DC controller and cable/connector damage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Figure 70. Gain access to the toner cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Figure 71. Rotate the toner cartridge lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Figure 72. Remove the toner cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Figure 73. Gain access to the process cartridge door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Figure 74. Rotate the process cartridge door dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Figure 75. Open the process cartridge door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Figure 76. Remove the process cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Figure 77. Remove the waste toner bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Figure 78. Unlock the transfer cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Figure 79. Remove the transfer cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Figure 80. Disengage the ITB to release the transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Figure 81. Remove the transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Figure 82. Remove the control panel overlay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Figure 83. Release the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Figure 84. Remove the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Figure 85. Gain access to the right upper cover mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Figure 86. Remove the right upper cover mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Figure 87. Remove the right upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Figure 88. Gain access the left upper cover mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Figure 89. Remove the left upper cover mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Figure 90. Remove the top right cover mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Figure 91. Remove the top right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Figure 92. Reinstalling the top right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Figure 93. Remove the top left cover mounting screws (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Figure 94. Remove the top left cover mounting screws (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Figure 95. Remove the top left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Figure 96. Reinstall the top left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Figure 97. Remove the front doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Figure 98. Gain access to the fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Figure 99. Release the fuser door pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Figure 100. Remove the fuser door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Figure 101. Release the right lower door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Figure 102. Remove the right lower door assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Figure 103. Open the ITB door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Figure 104. Remove the wire harness shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Figure 105. Disconnect the ITB door wire harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Figure 106. Gain access to the ITB door mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Figure 107. Remove the ITB door mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Figure 108. Remove the left back cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

14 List of figures ENWW

Figure 109. Remove the left lower cover mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 110. Remove the front left cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Figure 111. Release the left lower cover tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Figure 112. Remove the right back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Figure 113. Remove the back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 114. Unclip the process cartridge door hinge pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 115. Unlock the process cartridge door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Figure 116. Remove the process cartridge door hinge pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 117. Remove the process cartridge door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Figure 118. Disconnect a laser/scanner assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 119. Do not loosen the laser/scanner adjustment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Figure 120. Reinstall the laser/scanner assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 121. Cover the laser/scanners to prevent a light leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 122. Prepare to print a laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Figure 123. Reading the laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 124. Interpreting the laser/scanner adjustment page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 125. Laser/scanner adjustment page step 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Figure 126. Placing the initial laser/scanner S-shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 127. Install the laser/scanner adjustment plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Figure 128. Position the laser/scanner adjustment plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 129. Add or remove laser/scanner adjustment S-shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Figure 130. Position the laser/scanner assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 131. Tighten the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Figure 132. Reading the laser/scanner adjustment step 2 images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Figure 133. Laser/scanner adjustment page step 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Figure 134. Remove the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 135. Remove the laser/scanner assembly shim retainers and shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Figure 136. Add or remove the laser/scanner adjustment shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Figure 137. Replace the laser/scanner adjustment shim retainers and shims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Figure 138. Tighten the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Figure 139. Print another laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Figure 140. Gain access to the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 141. Remove the left side front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Figure 142. Remove the delivery unit shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 143. Disconnect the delivery unit connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Figure 144. Remove the delivery unit mounting screws (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 145. Remove the delivery unit mounting screws (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Figure 146. Remove the delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Figure 147. Remove the delivery unit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Figure 148. Gain access to the vertical feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 149. Remove the paper path access door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Figure 150. Gain access to the left side middle cover mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 151. Remove the left side middle cover mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Figure 152. Remove the left side middle cover mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 153. Remove the vertical feed unit mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Figure 154. Remove the vertical feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Figure 155. Gain access to the duplexer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 156. Remove the duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Figure 157. Unlock the fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 158. Remove the fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Figure 159. Release the ITB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 160. Open the ITB door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Figure 161. Slide the ITB out of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 162. Remove the ITB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Figure 163. Remove the right front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 164. Remove the density and registration sensor mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Figure 165. Disconnect the density and registration sensor connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 166. Unclip the density and registration sensor wire retainers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Figure 167. Release the density and registration sensor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

ENWW List of figures 15

Figure 168. Remove the density and registration sensor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Figure 169. Remove the right back fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Figure 170. Remove the right front fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Figure 171. Remove the T2 cam access door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Figure 172. Remove the T2 bearing surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Figure 173. Remove the T2 link cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Figure 174. Remove the T2 cam spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Figure 175. Remove the T2 wire harness cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Figure 176. Remove the T2 link (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Figure 177. Remove the T2 link (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Figure 178. Remove the T2 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Figure 179. Release the right lower door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Figure 180. Remove the right lower door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Figure 181. Remove the right front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Figure 182. Open the ITB door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Figure 183. Remove the wire harness shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Figure 184. Disconnect the ITB door wire harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Figure 185. Gain access to the ITB door mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Figure 186. Remove the ITB door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Figure 187. Remove the front lower right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Figure 188. Remove the vertical transfer unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Figure 189. Remove the right lower cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Figure 190. Remove the paper path door stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Figure 191. Remove the tray guide mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Figure 192. Remove the tray guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Figure 193. Disconnect the pickup unit connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Figure 194. Remove the pickup unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Figure 195. Remove the temperature and humidity sensor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Figure 196. Remove the temperature and humidity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Figure 197. Remove the high-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Figure 198. Disconnect the low-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Figure 199. Remove the low-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Figure 200. Disconnect the registration assembly motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Figure 201. Remove the registration assembly motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Figure 202. Remove two wire harness covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Figure 203. Gain access to the green ITB release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Figure 204. Lower the ITB release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Figure 205. Release the right back ITB lifting link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Figure 206. Remove the right back ITB lifting link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Figure 207. Disconnect the registration assembly connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Figure 208. Remove the registration assembly plate mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Figure 209. Remove the registration assembly plate (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Figure 210. Remove the registration assembly plate (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Figure 211. Remove the registration assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Figure 212. Disconnect the registration assembly connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Figure 213. Remove the registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Figure 214. Remove the delivery fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Figure 215. Remove the fuser fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Figure 216. Disconnect the P-crg drive assembly connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Figure 217. Remove the right back ITB lift link (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Figure 218. Remove the right back ITB lift link (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Figure 219. Disconnect the P-crg drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Figure 220. Remove the P-crg drive assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Figure 221. Disconnect the T-crg drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Figure 222. Remove the T-crg drive assembly mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Figure 223. Remove the fuser motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Figure 224. Remove the fuser drive assembly mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Figure 225. Disconnect the DC controller connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Figure 226. Remove the DC controller FFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286

16 List of figures ENWW

Figure 227. Remove the DC controller mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 228. Verify that the DC controller connectors and FFCs are connected properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 229. Remove the formatter PCB mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 230. Remove the formatter PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Figure 231. Remove the formatter cage mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 232. Unclip the formatter cage wire retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 233. Unplug the formatter PCB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 234. Remove the formatter cage mounting screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Figure 235. Remove the high-voltage contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 236. Disconnect the post charger connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 237. Remove the cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 238. Remove the post charger mounting screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 239. Remove the tray 1 pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Figure 240. Unhook the tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 241. Remove the tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Figure 242. Remove the left door switch cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 243. Remove the left door switch mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 244. Remove the right door switch mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Figure 245. Unhook the ITB sensor cable cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 246. Disconnect the ITB sensor connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Figure 247. Disconnect the upper left door sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Figure 248. Remove the fuser front paper sensor mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 249. Disconnect the fuser front paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Figure 250. Remove the fuser sensor PCA mounting screws. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 251. Disconnect the fuser sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 252. Engine test button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 253. Engine test print page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Figure 254. Sample configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Figure 255. Sample supplies status page (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Figure 256. Sample supplies status page (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Figure 257. Sample usage page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Figure 258. Sample file directory page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Figure 259. Print-quality assessment page (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Figure 260. Print-quality assessment page (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Figure 261. Print-quality assessment page attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Figure 262. Color band test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Figure 263. Engine test print page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Figure 264. Repeating marks (98 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Figure 265. Repeating marks (45 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Figure 266. Lines and bands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Figure 267. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Figure 268. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Figure 269. Diagonal bands or lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Figure 270. Light or faint image and dropouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Figure 271. Wavy brush marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Figure 272. Color plane misregistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Figure 273. Primary color covers entire page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Figure 274. Ghosted image (98 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Figure 275. Ghosted image (140 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Figure 276. Distorted or misplaced image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Figure 277. Poorly fused image (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Figure 278. Poorly fused image (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Figure 279. Missing color plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Figure 280. Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Figure 281. Hand or fingerprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Figure 282. Fine, yellow dot background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Figure 283. Toner halos or explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Figure 284. Paper path jam sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Figure 285. Example of events on the event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

ENWW List of figures 17

Figure 286. Sample event log page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Figure 287. Sample Jetdirect page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Figure 288. External covers and panels (1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Figure 289. External covers and panels (2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Figure 290. Left cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Figure 291. Right door assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Figure 292. Internal components (1 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Figure 293. Internal components (2 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Figure 294. Internal components (3 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Figure 295. Internal components (4 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Figure 296. Internal components (5 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Figure 297. Internal components (6 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Figure 298. Internal components (7 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Figure 299. Internal components (8 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Figure 300. Internal components (9 of 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Figure 301. Registration drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Figure 302. Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Figure 303. Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
Figure 304. Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Figure 305. Cassette assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Figure 306. Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Figure 307. Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Figure 308. Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Figure 309. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Figure 310. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Figure 311. Registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Figure 312. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Figure 313. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Figure 314. Delivery feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Figure 315. Face down delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Figure 316. Delivery cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Figure 317. Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Figure 318. PCB assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Figure 319. Tray 4 main body (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Figure 320. Tray 4 main body (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Figure 321. Tray 4 drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Figure 322. Tray 4 PCA location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505

18 List of figures ENWW

1 Product information

Chapter contents
Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Product specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
External assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printer with packaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Printer physical dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Guidelines for selecting media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Supported media and capacity for input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Recommended media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Special media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Storing print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Testing media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Media assessment tools and suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 19

Product features

HP color LaserJet 9500n printer (C8546A)

The HP color LaserJet 9500n printer comes standard with a 128-MB RAM DIMM,
wide-format printing capability, tray 1 (a 100-sheet multipurpose tray), tray 2 and
tray 3 (500-sheet trays), and an HP Jetdirect print server.

HP color LaserJet 9500hdn printer (C8547A)

The HP color LaserJet 9500hdn printer comes standard with a 256-MB RAM
DIMM, a 20-GB EIO hard disk, wide-format printing capability, tray 1 (a 100-sheet
multipurpose tray), tray 2 and tray 3 (500-sheet trays), tray 4 (a 2,000-sheet
feeder), an HP Jetdirect print server, and a duplexer (for printing on both sides of
media).

Table 1. Features of the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer

Speed z Up to 24 pages per minute (ppm) for letter- or A4-size media
z Half-speed for glossy or heavy media
z First page out in less than 17 seconds
z Duplexes up to 24 sides per minute for letter- or A4-size media
Resolution z 600-by-600 dots per inch (dpi) with Resolution Enhancement technology
(REt)
z HP ImageRet 4800
z Up to 256 levels of gray
Consumables z Four no-pull-tab print cartridges
z Four image drums
Language z PostScript® (PS) Level 3 emulation with 35 built-in PS language fonts
and fonts z HP printer command language (PCL) 6 driver
z HP PCL 5c driver for compatibility with previous products
z Printer job language (PJL)
z Printer management language
z 80 scalable TrueTypeTM typefaces
z Direct .pdf printing
Enhanced memory z Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data
and memory expansion to use RAM more efficiently
z 128 MB of RAM, expandable to 384 MB by using industry-standard 168-
pin DIMM
Functions z Tray 1 supports up to 100 sheets or 10 envelopes for automatic and
manual feeding of paper envelopes, labels, transparencies, custom-
sized media (98 by 191 mm [3.8 by 7.5 in] to 312 by 470 mm [12.3 by
18.5 in]), and heavy paper
z Tray 2 and tray 3 support up to 500 sheets of media
z Tray 4 supports letter, legal, B4, A4, 11-by-17 inch, A3, executive, B5,
and custom (182 by 210 mm [7.2 by 8.3 in] to 297 by 431.8 mm [11.7 by
17 in]) print media
z Two-sided printing (duplex printing)
z Wide-format printing
z Glossy printing
z Document finishing options (hdn model only)

20 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Table 1. Features of the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer (continued)
Expandability z HP color LaserJet 9500 duplexer (standard in the 9500hdn model)
z 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker (for the 9500hdn model only)
z 3,000-sheet stacker (for the 9500hdn model only)
z Multifunction finisher (for the 9500hdn model only)
z Enhanced input/output (EIO) cards
z DIMM slots for adding memory and fonts
z Accepts a 10-GB hard disk for RIP Once capability, job retention
features, and font storage (the hard disk is standard on the 9500hdn
model)
Wireless printing z Supports wireless printing with the installation of a Fast InfraRed
Connect pod (IrDA compliant)
z Wireless EIO card
Interface connection z Bidirectional ECP type-C parallel port (IEEE-1284 compliant)
z Three EIO slots for installation of a hard-disk accessory or print server
z Foreign interface connector
z HP Jet-Link connector
Networking z HP 615N Jetdirect print server
Maximum monthly duty cycle z 200,000 images per month

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 21

Product specifications

Identification
A user-accessible label is located inside the right door of the print engine. The model number is
alphanumeric, such as C8547A.
The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin and the revision level,
production code, and production number of the printer. An example of a serial number is
USBB123456.
The identification label also contains electrical information and regulatory information (see figure 1).

Note The electrical information and regulatory information vary by country/region.

Electrical information Regulatory information

Model and serial number Manufacture date

Figure 1. Sample identification label

Specifications

Table 2. Out-of-box specifications

Specification HP color LaserJet 9500n HP color LaserJet 9500hdn
Height 887 mm (34.9 inches) 1,212 mm (47.8 inches)
Width 682 mm (26.9 inches) 682 mm (26.9 inches)
Depth 767 mm (30.2 inches) 767 mm (30.2 inches)
Weight without print cartridges 100 kg (221 lb) 130 kg (287 lb)
and image drums

Weight with print cartridges and 174 kg (383 lb) 198 kg (436 lb)
image drums in packaging

Table 3. Packaged specifications

Specification HP color LaserJet 9500n HP color LaserJet 9500hdn
Height 1,313 mm (51.7 inches) 1,488 mm (58.6 inches)
Width 1,200 mm (47.2 inches) 1,200 mm (47.2 inches)

22 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Table 3. Packaged specifications
Specification HP color LaserJet 9500n HP color LaserJet 9500hdn
Depth 1,022 mm (40.2 inches) 1,022 mm (40.2 inches)

Table 4. Power requirements and circuit capacity

110-volt models 220-volt models
Power requirements 100 to 127 V (+/- 10%) 220 to 240 V (+/- 10%)
50 to 60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz) 50 to 60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz)
Minimum recommended 15.0 Amps (dedicated circuit) 10.0 Amps (dedicated circuit)
circuit capacity

WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert operating
voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.

Table 5. Power consumption

Printer state HP color LaserJet 9500n HP color LaserJet 9500hdn
Printing (24 ppm) 722 W 741 W
Standby (Ready) 171 W 173 W
Low PowerSave (ENERGY STAR®) 69 W 69 W
High PowerSave (Blue Angel) 32 W 32 W
Off <2 W <2 W

Environmental specifications
The environmental specifications must be maintained to ensure the proper operation of the printer.
Consider the following points before installing the printer:
z Install the printer in a well-ventilated, dust-free area.
z Install the printer on a level, flat surface that can support its size and weight. Do not install on
carpet or on other soft surfaces. Make sure that all four printer feet are level.
z Install the printer where temperature and humidity are stable, with no abrupt changes (away from
water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances).
z Install the printer away from direct sunlight, areas that experience vibration, open flames,
ammonia fumes, ultrasonic heaters, and devices that emit a magnetic field. If the printer is
placed near a window, make sure that the window has a curtain or blind to block direct sunlight.
z Maintain enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 23

Table 6. Environmental specifications
Allowable condition Recommended condition
Operating temperature 10° to 30° Celsius (C) 20° to 26° C (68° to 79° F)
(50° to 86° Fahrenheit [F])
Relative humidity 10 to 80 percent 20 to 50 percent
Storage temperature 15° to 30° C (59° to 86° F) 20° to 26° C (68° to 79° F)
Storage humidity 5 percent to 95 percent 5 percent to 95 percent

Table 7. Noise level specifications

Acoustics Printing (24 ppm) PowerSave
Sound power level LWAd = 67 dB(A) essentially inaudible
Sound pressure level, LpAm LpAm = 50 dB(A) essentially inaudible
(Bystander position)

Note Testing per International Standards Organization (ISO) 9296.

24 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Product overview

External assembly locations

Control panel Top bin

Ozone filter
Fan cover
Left bin

Front doors
Tray 1

Power switch

Right side
access door
Tray 2
Tray 4
Tray 3 feeder access

Tray 4

Figure 2. Front and right side assembly locations

Left side
access door

Fan cover
Three EIO slots
Air filter

Engine-test
button

Power-cord HP Jet-Link
connector connector
HP Fast InfraRed
(FIR) connector
Accessory
Foreign interface
power
harness (FIH)
connector
Parallel cable
HP Jetdirect print connector
server RJ-45 connector

Figure 3. Back and left side assembly locations

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 25

Accessories

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker (C8085A)

or 3,000-sheet stacker (C8084A)

Multifunction finisher (C8088A)

Duplexer (C9674A) HP Fast InfraRed

receiver (FIR) (C4103A)

Figure 4. Accessories

26 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Space requirements

Printer with packaging

The shipping box that contains the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer is 1,200 mm (47.2 inches)
wide and 1,022 mm (40.2 inches) deep. The shipping box that contains the HP color LaserJet 9500n
is 1,313 mm (51.7 inches) high, and the shipping box that contains the HP color LaserJet 9500hdn is
1,488 mm (58.6 inches) high. The in-box weight of the HP color LaserJet 9500n is 174 kg (383 lb),
and the in-box weight of the HP color LaserJet 9500hdn is 198 kg (436 lb).The customer must locate
a door or receiving area that is large enough to accept delivery of the shipping box.

Note Before removing the printer from the box, make sure that adequate space is available to unpack the
printer and to roll the product off of the shipping pallet. At least 10 feet of clearance around the box is
required to remove all of the shipping materials.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 27

Printer physical dimensions

358 mm 465 mm
(14.1 inches) 682 mm (26.9 inches) (18.3 inches)

767 mm (30.2 inches)

(17.9 inches)
455 mm
887 mm (34.9 inches)

Figure 5. HP color LaserJet 9500n printer dimensions (top and front views)

28 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

358 mm 465 mm
(14.1 inches) 682 mm (26.9 inches) (18.3 inches)

767 mm (30.2 inches)

(17.9 inches)
455 mm
1,212 mm (47.8 inches)

Figure 6. HP color LaserJet 9500hdn printer dimensions (top and front views)

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 29

Setup

The initial printer setup includes the following steps:

z Remove the printer from the box.
z Set up and install the printer. See the HP color LaserJet 9500 User Reference Guide at
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500.
z Set up and install the finishing device (for the 9500hdn only). See the install guide that came with
the finishing device.
The shipping box contains the following items:
z HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer
z One power cord
z Control panel overlay
z Consumables box
• Four print cartridges
• Four image drums
• One image cleaning blade
• One toner collection bottle
z Printer software on CD-ROM (includes the HP color LaserJet 9500 User Reference Guide)
z Start guide

Note The finishing device is delivered in a separate box (optional for the 9500hdn model only).

The HP color LaserJet 9500hdn is delivered with the duplexer, hard disk, network card, and tray 4
installed.

30 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Media specifications

Before purchasing large quantities of print media, make sure that it meets the requirements specified
in this service manual and in the HP color LaserJet 9500 User Reference Guide. Always test the
print media before buying large quantities.
Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular brand of paper or print
media other than HP media. Media properties are subject to manufacturing changes, and HP has no
control over such changes. Although testing the media helps to characterize the performance and
the manufacturer’s process quality, the customer assumes all responsibility for the quality and
performance of media.

CAUTION Using print media that does not meet HP specifications might cause problems for the printer, requiring
repair. Such repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
The HP color LaserJet 9500 series printers accept a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper
(including up to 100 percent recycled fiber-content paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and
custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content are
important factors affecting printer performance and output quality. Media that does not meet the
guidelines outlined in this manual and in the print media guide can cause the following problems:
z poor print quality
z increased jams
z premature wear on the printer, requiring repair

Guidelines for selecting media

This printer accepts a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper (including recycled paper),
envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and
moisture content are important factors that affect printer performance and print quality.
Selecting media by type and size at the control panel and in the printer driver results in significantly
better print quality for heavy paper and glossy paper. Using the wrong setting can result in
unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by type for special print media such as labels or
transparencies. Always print by size for envelopes.
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this
manual. Paper that does not meet these guidelines can cause the following problems:
z poor print quality
z media jams and multiple-sheet feeds
z premature wear on the printer, requiring repair

Note Some print media might meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still not produce satisfactory
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which HP has no control.

If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label on
the package of paper.
z See “Basis weight field test” on page 40 for information about measuring basis weight.
z See “Caliper field test” on page 42 for information about measuring caliper.
z See “Paper finish field test” on page 42 for information about smoothness.

Hint Do not purchase more media than can be easily used in a short time (about 3 months). Media that is
stored for long periods experiences heat and moisture extremes that can be damaging. Planning is
important to prevent damage to a large supply of media.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 31

Supported media and capacity for input and output

Note The leading edge is listed first in the dimension measurements.

Table 8. Supported standard media sizes

Printing task Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex, and manual and z letter, legal, executive, z letter, legal, z letter, legal,
auto duplex ISO A3, ISO A4, ISO executive, ISO A3, executive, ISO A3,
A5, 11 by 17, JIS B5, ISO A4, ISO A5, JIS ISO A4, 11 by 17,
JIS B4, JPostD, 8K, 16K B4, JIS B5, 11 by 17 JIS B4, JIS B5

Table 9. Maximum custom sizes

Printing task Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex, and manual and z 306 by 470 mm (12.05 z 297 by 432 mm z 297 by 432 mm
auto duplex by 18.5 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches)

Table 10. Minimum custom sizes

Printing task Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex and manual duplex z 98 by 170 mm (3.9 by z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 z 182 by 210 mm (7.2
6.7 inches) by 8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches)
Auto duplex z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 by z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 z 182 by 210 mm (7.2
8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches)

Table 11. Supported media weights

Printing task Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex and manual duplex z 64 to 220 g/m2 z 64 to 200 g/m2 z 64 to 200 g/m2
(17- to 58-lb bond) (17- to 53-lb bond) (17- to 53-lb bond)
Auto duplex z 64 to 200 g/m2 z 64 to 200 g/m2 z 64 to 200 g/m2
(17- to 53-lb bond) (17- to 53-lb bond) (17- to 53-lb bond)

Table 12. Input tray capacities

Type of media Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Cut sheets z up to 100 sheets Up to 500 sheets Up to 2,000 sheets
(10 mm total height,
5 mm total height for
media that is 200 g/m2
[53-lb bond] or heavier)
Envelopes z up to 10 envelopes Not supported Not supported
(10 mm total height)

Table 13. Output bin capacities

Bin 75 g/m2 (20-lb bond) Transparencies
Top bin (face down) z up to 500 sheets Up to 50 sheets
Left bin (face up) z up to 100 sheets Up to 10 sheets

CAUTION Do not use paper that is heavier than 200 g/m2 (53-lb bond) for duplex printing. Damage to the printer
and jams might result.

32 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Recommended media
The media types that are listed in the following table meet these criteria:
z They have been tested in this printer.
z They have proven to be of good quality.
z They work well with the printer’s settings.

Ordering recommended media

The product numbers for media are listed in parentheses after the media sizes. Use these product
numbers when ordering media.
All of the HP-brand media is available at http://www.hpshopping.com or from your local office
supplies retailer.
The printer supports the StoraEnso paper that is listed in the table. It is available through your local
office products supplier.

Note Set the type at the control panel when you load the trays, and in the printer driver when you print
your print job.

Table 14. Recommended media

Recommended media Type Characteristics
HP High Gloss Laser Paper HP HEAVY 120 g/m2 (32-lb bond), 200 sheets,
GLOSSY high-gloss finish coating on both
letter (Q2419A) sides, 95 bright
11 by 17 (tabloid) (Q2420A)
A4 (Q2421A) Use for: brochures, catalogs, business
A3 (Q2422A) plans, photographs, and images

HP Premium Cover Paper CARDSTOCK 200 g/m2 (75-lb cover), 100 sheets,
>164 g/m2 super-smooth matte finish on both
letter (Q2413A) sides, 96 bright
A4 (Q2414A)
Use for: postcards and document
covers

HP Color Laser Paper PLAIN 90 g/m2 (24-lb bond), 500 sheets,

smooth matte finish on both sides, 96
letter (HPL245R) bright
11 by 17 (tabloid) (HPL2417)
Use for: newsletters and color
documents

HP Color Laser Paper PLAIN 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond), 500 sheets,
105 g/m2 (28-lb bond) smooth matte finish on both sides, 96
bright
letter (HPL285R)
11 by 17 (tabloid) (HPL2817) Use for: newsletters and color
documents

HP Soft Gloss Laser Paper HP HEAVY 120 g/m2 (32-lb bond), 200 sheets,
GLOSSY satin finish coating on both sides, 96
letter (C4179A) bright
A4 (C4179B)
Use for: flyers, handouts, sales briefs,
Note proposals, and color images
HP Soft Gloss Laser Paper is designed
specifically for use with the HP color
LaserJet 9500 series printers.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 33

Table 14. Recommended media (continued)
Recommended media Type Characteristics
HP Soft Gloss LaserPaper GLOSSY 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond), 500 sheets,
105 g/m2 (28-lb bond) 75-105 g/m2 satin finish coating on both sides, 96
bright
letter (Q2415A)
11 by 17 (tabloid) (Q2416A) Use for: flyers, handouts, sales briefs,
A4 (Q2417A) proposals, and color images
A3 (Q2418A)

HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper HEAVY 120 g/m2 (32-lb bond), 500 sheets
106-163 g/m2 (250 sheets for 11 by 17), matte finish
letter (HPU1132) on both sides, 98 bright
11 by 17 (tabloid) (HPU1732)
A4 (CHP410) Use for: proposals and charts
A4 (Asia) (Q2397A)
A3 (Asia) (Q2396A)

HP Premium Choice LaserJet Paper HEAVY 160 g/m2 (42-lb bond), 250 sheets,
160 g/m2 (42-lb bond) 106-163 g/m2 matte finish on both sides 98 bright

A4 (Europe) (CHP413) Use for: proposals and charts

A3 (Europe) (CHP421)

HP LaserJet Paper PLAIN 90 g/m2 (24-lb bond), 500 sheets,

matte finish on both sides, 96 bright
letter (HPJ1124)
3-hole prepunched (HPJ113H) Use for: reports, user manuals,
legal (HPJ1424) letterhead, and correspondence
11 by 17 (tabloid) (HPJ1724)
A4 (Europe) (CHP310)

HP Office Recycled Paper PLAIN 75 g/m2 (20-lb bond), 500 sheets,

matte finish on both sides, contains 30
letter (HPE1120) percent post-consumer content
3-hole prepunched (HPE113H) (satisfies U.S. Executive Order
legal (HPE1420) 13101), 87 bright

Use for: training manuals and general

office printing

HP Tough Paper TOUGH PAPER 5 mil thick (approximately 44-lb bond

equivalent), 50 sheets, satin finish
letter (Q1298A) coating on both sides, waterproof,
A4 (Q1298B) tearproof

Use for: signs, maps, restaurant

menus, waterproof documents, and
tearproof documents

HP Color LaserJet Transparencies TRANSPARENCY 5 il thick, 50 sheets, premium coated

both sides
letter (C2934A)
A4 (C2936A) Use for: transparencies

StoraEnso Futura Laser Cover NON HP HEAVY 163 g/m2 (60-lb cover), 250 sheets,
GLOSSY coated, premium white
11 by 17 (01109)
Use for: document cover

34 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Table 15. Media weight, finish, and type
Weight Finish Type
Less than 75 g/m² (20-lb bond) any LIGHT<75 g/m
75 g/m ² (20-lb bond) to 105 g/m² (28-lb bond) matte PLAIN
75 g/m ² (20-lb bond) to 105 g/m² (28-lb bond) glossy GLOSSY 75-105 g/m
106 g/m² (29-lb bond) to 163 g/m² (43-lb bond) matte HEAVY 106-163 g/m
106 g/m² (29-lb bond) to 163 g/m² (43-lb bond) glossy HP HEAVY GLOSSY (if using
HP-brand media)
NON HP HEAVY GLOSSY (if
using non-HP-brand
media)
164 g/m² (44-lb bond) and heavier any CARDSTOCK>164 g/m

Special media specifications

Envelope specifications
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. Envelope fold lines can
vary considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same
manufacturer. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components:
z Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl,
and have well-constructed seams.
z Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
z Temperature: Envelopes should be compatible with the heat and pressure produced by the
printer.

Figure 7. Sample seams

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 35

Note Print on envelopes from tray 1 only. Send envelopes straight through the printer, entering at tray 1 and
exiting from the face-up bin.

For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edges of the
envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet.

Envelopes with adhesive strips or multiple flaps

Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip, or with more than one flap that folds over to seal, must use
adhesives that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the printer. The extra flaps might cause
wrinkling, creasing, or jams.

Label specifications

CAUTION To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels that are recommended for laser printers. Never print
on the same sheet of labels more than once and never print on a partial sheet of labels.

When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:

z Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200° C (392° F), which is the printer
fusing temperature.
z Arrangement: Do not use labels that have exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off
sheets with spaces between the labels, causing jams.
z Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any
direction.
z Condition: Do not use labels that have wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.

Note Use only tray 1 to print on labels. Send labels straight through the printer, entering at tray 1 and exiting
from the face-up bin.

Figure 8. Adhesive labels

36 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Card stock construction
When selecting card stock, consider the quality of each component:
z Smoothness: 135- to 220-g/m2 (36- to 58-lb bond) card stock should have a smoothness rating
of 100 to 180 Sheffield.
z Curl: Card stock should lie flat with less than 5 mm (0.2 inch) of curl.
z Condition: Make sure that the card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
z Size: See “Supported media and capacity for input and output” on page 32.
z Weight: Card stock of 200 g/m2 (53 lb) or less can be loaded in any tray. Card stock heavier than
200 g/m2 (53 lb) must be printed from tray 1.

Note When printing on card stock, make sure to set the CARDSTOCK type at the control panel when you load
the tray, and in the printer driver when you print your print job.

Transparency specifications
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies that are recommended for use in color laser
printers.
z Construction: Prior to printing, transparencies should lie flat with less than 10 mm (0.39 inch)
curl.
z Condition: Transparencies should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
z Temperature: Transparencies should be stable at 190° C (374° F), which is the printer fusing
temperature.
z Size: 5 mm thick (0.005 inch)

Note If problems occur while printing on transparencies, use tray 1. Send transparencies straight through
the printer, entering at tray 1 and exiting from the face-up bin.

CAUTION Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 190° C (374° F), the printer fusing
temperature.

Preprinted forms and special letterhead

Many preprinted forms and special letterhead papers perform well in HP LaserJet printers. However,
these papers undergo processes that alter their original characteristics, and care must be taken to
ensure they conform to HP specifications. All special papers should be wrapped in moisture-proof
wrapping when purchased from the paper converter or printing house.
Forms and letterhead must be printed with inks that conform to the following specifications:
z Only use ink that is heat-resistant, and that will not melt, scorch, or release hazardous emissions
when subjected to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second.
z Inks must have resistance to silicon oils, and must not be affected by resin components in toner.
z Inks must not be flammable.
z Inks must not “offset” (transfer from the printed paper onto the printer, contaminating internal
printer components). The principle cause of offset is ink that is not fully dried or that cannot
withstand the printer fusing temperature.

Note Do not use forms or letterhead that was produced by using low-temperature inks (the kind used with
thermography).

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 37

Embossed media
Embossed media is not recommended for use in HP LaserJet printers. Media is embossed by
stamping an image into the media by compressing the media fibers together at approximately 200° C
(392° F), and sometimes by applying a thin metal foil to the surface. The printer fusing process can
loosen the foil; loose foil can interfere with the mechanical and electronic operation of the printer.
Embossed paper, with or without foil, can also cause multifeed jams. Multiple embossed print media
sheets tend to stick to one another.

Glossy media
Keep these considerations in mind when selecting or printing on glossy media:
z Print quality can vary with the media used. For best results, use HP-brand glossy media.
z When using media that has only one glossy side, make sure to orient the media so that the
printer prints on the glossy side.

Note When printing on glossy media that is between 75 g/m2 (20-lb bond) and 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond) in
weight, make sure to set the GLOSSY type at the control panel when you load the tray, and in the printer
driver when you print your print job.

When printing on HP-brand glossy media that is between 106 g/m2 (29-lb bond) and 163 g/m2 (43-lb
bond) in weight, make sure to set the HP HEAVY GLOSSY type at the control panel when you load the
tray, and in the printer driver when you print your print job.

When printing on non HP-brand glossy media that is between 106 g/m2 (29-lb bond) and 163 g/m2
(43-lb bond) in weight, make sure to set the NON HP HEAVY GLOSSY type at the control panel when you
load the tray, and in the printer driver when you print your print job.

Media with cutouts or perforations

Avoid media with cutouts or perforations for these reasons:
z Cut fibers absorb more moisture and can increase waviness and media curl. This decreases the
print quality near the cutout or perforated area.
z Cutting knives leave a sharp edge on the cutout or perforation. If the sharp edge is facing the
print cartridge drum during printing, it can scratch the drum surface.
z If printing occurs over a cutout hole, the transfer roller is contaminated with unused toner,
creating light streaks on the paper.

Chemically treated media

Coatings such as lacquers, polymers, laminations, or other chemicals protect the paper, but can
cause problems in the fuser and transfer areas of HP LaserJet printers. The surface resistivity and
moisture content can be greatly altered, resulting in print-quality problems. Hard surface coatings
increase wear on the rollers and media guides. All chemically treated media must meet Hewlett-
Packard specifications for fusing compatibility.

Synthetic media
Synthetic media (those manufactured from man-made fibers) do not perform as well as bond media
in any printer, especially HP LaserJet printers. All synthetic media must meet Hewlett-Packard
specifications, especially for caliper and fusing compatibility.

38 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Other special media
z Non-standard sizes. Check minimum and maximum supported sizes on page 32.
z Carbonless media. Carbonless media (NCR) is not supported by HP LaserJet printers.
z Recycled media. Choose recycled media that meets Hewlett-Packard specifications. Note that
recycled media might not be as bright as indicated in the specifications. Hewlett-Packard
recommends that recycled media contain no more than 5 percent groundwood. See “Testing
media specifications” on page 39.

Storing print media

Ideally, the printing and media storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and
should not be too dry or too humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses
moisture rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate, while
cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the
humidity from a room. As a paper package is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing streaks
and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity in a room to increase. As a
package of paper is opened and used, it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and
dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture, it can distort. This can cause jams.
Therefore, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself. Paper
storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Users should not purchase more paper than can easily be used in a short time (about three months).
Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can cause
damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed packages can remain stable for several months before use. Opened
packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not wrapped
with a moisture-proof barrier.
The paper storage environment should be correctly maintained to ensure optimum printer
performance. The required condition is 20° to 24° C (68° to 75° F), with a relative humidity of 45
percent to 55 percent. The following guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper’s
storage environment:
z Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
z The air should not be too dry or too humid (because of the hygroscopic properties of paper).
z The best way to store an opened package of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof
wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper to
be used during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.

Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes contributes to good print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air
is trapped in an envelope, and creates an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during printing.

Testing media specifications

The following tests describe ways to evaluate media with respect to the specifications listed in this
manual, and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. See “Media assessment tools and
suppliers” on page 44 for help obtaining the tools that are needed to perform these tests.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 39

Basis weight field test
The basis weight should be indicated on the package label. If the label is not available, a simple field
test can determine the basis weight of paper. The basis weight of paper is equal to the weight of
2,000 sheets of paper, or about four full packages. Weigh a full package on a postal scale and then
multiply that weight by four. Or weigh 10 sheets of paper, divide that weight by 10, multiply by 2,000,
and then divide by 16.

Example 10 sheets weigh 1.6 ounces ÷ 10

0.16 ounce x 2,000 = 320 ounces
320 ounces ÷ 16 ounce/lb = 20 lb paper (letter only)

Table 16. Determining basis weight of paper

Amount Formula
Four packages weight = basis weight
One package weight x 4 = basis weight
10 sheets (weight divided by 10) x 2,000 and then divided by 16 = basis weight

Metric sizes
For metric-size paper (A4), use the following method to determine basis weight.
Take 16 sheets of A4 paper and weigh them. One square meter of paper contains approximately 16
A4 size sheets. Compare this weight to the appropriate weight in the paper weight equivalence table.

Paper weight equivalence table

Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than U.S.
bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond-weight paper in U.S.
cover-weight paper, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the row to the
cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28 lb. Shaded areas indicate a standard weight
for that grade.
Table 17. Paper weight equivalence
U.S. post- U.S. bond U.S. text/ U.S. cover U.S. bristol U.S. index U.S. tag Europe Japan
card weight (lb) book weight (lb) weight (lb) weight (lb) weight (lb) metric metric
thickness weight (lb) weight weight
(mm) (g/m2) (g/m2)

17 43 24 29 35 39 64 64
20 50 28 34 42 46 75 75
21 54 30 36 44 49 80 80
22 56 31 38 46 51 81 81
24 60 33 41 50 55 90 90
27 68 37 45 55 61 100 100
28 70 39 49 58 65 105 105
32 80 44 55 67 74 120 120
34 86 47 58 71 79 128 128
36 90 50 62 75 83 135 135
0.18 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 148
0.19 42 107 58 72 87 97 157 157
0.20 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 163

40 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Table 17. Paper weight equivalence (continued)
U.S. post- U.S. bond U.S. text/ U.S. cover U.S. bristol U.S. index U.S. tag Europe Japan
card weight (lb) book weight (lb) weight (lb) weight (lb) weight (lb) metric metric
thickness weight (lb) weight weight
(mm) (g/m2) (g/m2)

0.23 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 176

53 134 74 90 110 122 199 199
54 137 75 93 113 125 203 203
58 146 80 98 120 133 216 216
65 165 90 111 135 150 244 244
66 169 92 114 138 154 250 250
67 171 94 115 140 155 253 253
70 178 98 120 146 162 264 264
72 183 100 123 150 166 271 271

Note The U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 41

Caliper field test
The specified caliper differs according to the type of media used. Caliper can be measured in the
field by using a micrometer.

CAUTION Never use the coarse adjustment end of the micrometer when measuring for caliper. The coarse
adjustment will compress the paper fibers, resulting in an inaccurate reading. For example, if the fibers
are compressed, 6 mm (0.24 inch) paper could measure as little as 3 mm (0.12 inch). Always use the
fine adjustment to measure caliper.

Using the fine adjustment, slide the micrometer along the edge of the paper and measure at one
end. To double-check the accuracy of the reading, always measure again at the opposite end of the
paper.

Paper finish field test

Paper finish, or smoothness, can be accurately measured with a Sheffield meter. If this tool is not
available, a new U.S. dollar bill can be used as a benchmark for comparing paper texture. A dollar bill
has a finish of 350 Sheffields. If paper feels rougher than a dollar bill, it is recommended that users
do not continually use this paper in the printer.

Moisture content field test

Specification: Use paper with 4 percent to 6 percent moisture content.
A package or a sheet of paper can be measured with a moisture meter. In general, only evaluate
customer storage environment when trying to determine if excess moisture or dryness is the cause
of a problem with paper.

Grain field test

Grain direction is usually specified on the package label (written out “long” or “short”). The paper
dimensions listed on the label also indicate grain direction. For example, short-grain letter-size paper
labels are marked “11 by 8.5,” and long-grain paper labels are marked “8.5 by 11."
If grain direction is not included on the package label, it can be determined by a simple wet test. Cut
a small square from the corner of a sheet of paper, wet it, and observe the manner in which it curls.
Envelopes should have a diagonal grain, which gives them the best stability. To determine this, cut a
square section from one corner of an envelope. Wet this section and observe the manner in which it
curls. On diagonal grain envelopes, the two opposite corners will curl toward each other.

Figure 9. Long, short, and diagonal grain curl

42 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

Curl field test
To check for paper curl, place a single sheet of paper on a flat surface and measure curl at the
greatest deflection, holding a ruler perpendicular to the flat surface.

Figure 10. Measuring curl

Cut edge condition field test

The condition of the cut edge can be easily observed with an eye loop. Under magnification, a good
edge will appear even. A poorly cut edge will show fraying, jagged edges, compressed fibers, and
other damage.

Furnish (fiber composition) field test

Use paper made from 100 percent chemical wood pulp and/or cotton fiber. Recycled paper made
with no more than 5 percent groundwood is also acceptable.
Read the package label to determine the fiber composition of the paper. Paper is usually specified as
xerographic bond (suitable for copiers or laser printers) or cotton bond. Cotton bond paper of
25 percent, 50 percent, or 100 percent will be indicated on a watermark. If paper is less than
25 percent cotton bond, the watermark will not indicate a percentage. A wood pulp test kit can also
be used to test fiber composition.

Fusing compatibility field test

Inspect the rollers for colored ink buildup from preprinted logos or letterhead, and for toner buildup or
spots. Inspect printed output for repetitive defects and smearing. If necessary, have users contact
the forms vendor to ensure paper fusing compatibility with HP LaserJet printers.

ENWW Chapter 1 Product information 43

Media assessment tools and suppliers

Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends a particular manufacturer, supplier, or tool.

Products are subject to change, and HP has no control over such changes. However, the following
table of tools and their suppliers is provided for convenience.
Table 18. Tools and suppliers
Tool Part Number Supplier Address
Paper moisture meter 2RRDMP Mitchell Instrument
1570DDD Cheroke St.
San Marcos, CA 92069-2433
Single-sheet clamp probe 2R43E Mitchell Instrument
1570DDD Cheroke St.
San Marcos, CA 92069-2433
Temperature/humidity meter #3T331 Industrial Motor Service
2000 Albright
Montgomery, IL 60538
Sheffield tester: precisionaire column TM 58-25-01 TMI Testing Machines Inc.
400 Bayview Avenue
Amityville, NY 11701
(516) 842-5400
Sheffield tester: smooth check gauge TM 58-25-02 TMI Testing Machines Inc.
400 Bayview Avenue
Amityville, NY 11701
(516) 842-5400
Wood pulp test kit 4280-2 Shape Products
1127 57th Avenue
Oakland, CA 94621
(800) 444-0015
pH test kit 4360-2 Shape Products
1127 57th Avenue
Oakland, CA 94621
(800) 444-0015
Resistivity test tool: 278 Monroe Electronics
precision current/resistance meter 100 Housel Avenue
PO Box 100
Lyndonville, NY 14098
(800) 821-6001
Resistivity test tool: 96117-1 Monroe Electronics
surface resistivity probe 100 Housel Avenue
PO Box 100
Lyndonville, NY 14098
(800) 821-6001

44 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW

2 Service approach

Chapter contents
Service approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Parts and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ordering parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Ordering supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Exchange program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HP service parts information compact disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Customer care reseller sales and service support center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Ordering related documentation and software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Limited warranty for print cartridge and image drum life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Transfer unit and fuser warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
HP maintenance agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Onsite service agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

ENWW Chapter 2 Service approach 45

Service approach

The HP color LaserJet 9500 is designed to be diagnosed over the phone, and repaired in the field.
Repair of the printer normally begins with a three-step process:
1 Isolate the problem to the major system (the host computer, the network or server, or the
printer).
2 Isolate the problem to the print engine, the input device, or the finishing device.
3 Troubleshoot the problem by using the troubleshooting procedures described in chapter 7.
After a faulty part is located, repair is usually accomplished by assembly-level replacement of field
replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies can be repaired at the subassembly level.
Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies.
Some parts can be installed by the customer.

46 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW

Parts and supplies

Ordering parts
Ordering Parts in chapter 8 of this manual contains FRU and replacement part numbers. Order
replacement parts from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard
Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E).
All standard part numbers listed are stocked and can be ordered from HP’s Customer Services and
Support Organization. Use the following website to search for HP product parts by using the HP
product name, model number, or part number, or by choosing an HP product from a list.
http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo
To order parts, go to the following website:
http://www.partsdirect.hp.com
Consumables and accessories can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard.
Supplies, accessories, and consumables can be ordered from the following websites
z North America: http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies
z Canada: http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
z Europe: http://www.hp.com/go/supplies
z Asia Pacific: http://www.hp.com/paper

Ordering supplies
Order supplies directly from Hewlett-Packard. The following are phone numbers for ordering
supplies:
z U.S. (1) (800) 538-8787
z Canada (1) (800) 387-3154; Toronto (1) (416) 671-8383
z United Kingdom 0734-441212

Exchange program
Hewlett-Packard might offer remanufactured assemblies for parts. These can be ordered through
Parts Direct Ordering.

Supplies
Media and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See chapter 8 for ordering
information.

World Wide Web

Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information can be obtained
from one of the following websites:
In the U.S.: http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500
Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites:
z http://www.hp.com then select the appropriate country/region
z http://www.hp.com/go/lj9500_software

ENWW Chapter 2 Service approach 47

HP service parts information compact disc
This powerful, CD-ROM-based parts information tool is designed to give users fast, easy access to
parts information such as pricing and recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products.
To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call (800) 336-5987. In Asia Pacific, call
(65) 740-4484. Parts identification and pricing information can also be checked via the World Wide
Web at http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo.

Customer care reseller sales and service support center

The Customer Care Reseller Sales and Support Center is available to assist resellers and service
technicians. To reach this support center, call (1) (800) 544-9976.

HP authorized resellers and support

To locate authorized HP resellers and support, call (1) (800) 243-9816 in the U.S. or (1) (800) 387-
3867 in Canada.

HP service agreements
Call (1) (800) 743-8305 in the U.S. or (1) (800) 268-1221 in Canada.

Other areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact the local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining
technical support for resellers and service technicians.

48 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW

Ordering related documentation and software
Table 19 shows where to order related documentation and software. Telephone numbers for the
various sources are:
z HPCS-A:
(1)(800) 227-8164 (U.S. only)
z HPCS-E:
(49 7031) 14 2253
z HP Distribution Center (HPD) (661) 257-5565.
Fax: (805) 257-6995

Table 19. Related documentation and software

Description Part number
HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 5963-7863
HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide 5971-3257
PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package 5021-0377

Note End user documentation is available electronically at http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500

ENWW Chapter 2 Service approach 49

Warranty

For warranty information and requirements, see the HP color LaserJet 9500 Use Guide.

Limited warranty for print cartridge and image drum life

This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship during its useful
life (end of life is indicated by a printer control panel low-life message).
This warranty does not cover products that have been modified, refurbished, remanufactured,
misused, or tampered with in any way.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state
to state, province to province, and country/region to country/region.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST
PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
In the event that your product proves to be defective, please return to place of purchase with a
written description of the problem.

Transfer unit and fuser warranty

This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for one year or
until the printer control panel indicates a low-life message, whichever occurs first.
This warranty does not cover products that have been modified, refurbished, remanufactured,
misused, or tampered with in any way.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights which vary from state
to state, province to province, and country/region to country/region.
THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST
PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE.
In the event that your product proves to be defective, please return to place of purchase with a
written description of the problem.

HP maintenance agreements

Hewlett-Packard has several types of maintenance agreements that meet a wide range of support
needs. Maintenance agreements are not part of the standard warranty. Support services may vary
by area. Check with your local HP dealer to determine the services available to you.

50 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW

Onsite service agreements
To provide you with the level of support best suited to your needs, HP offers the following onsite
service agreements, with three response times.
z next business day onsite, HW support, four years
z next business day onsite, HW support, five years
z four-hour, 13 x 5 onsite, HW support, four years
z four-hour, 13 x 5 onsite, HW support, five years
For more information about HP service agreements, call (1) (800) 271-3113 (U.S.) or (1) (800) 268-
1221 (Canada).

Priority onsite service

This agreement provides four-hour service response to your site for calls made during normal HP
business hours.

Next-day onsite service

This agreement provides support by the next working day following a service request. Extended
coverage hours and extended travel beyond HP’s designated service zones are available on most
onsite agreements (for additional charges).

Weekly (volume) onsite service

This agreement provides scheduled weekly onsite visits for organizations that own or lease many HP
products. This agreement is designated for sites that use 25 or more workstation products, including
printers, plotters, computers, and disk drives.

ENWW Chapter 2 Service approach 51

52 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW
3 Product configuration

Chapter contents
Control panel layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Control panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using a menu map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Retrieve job menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Paper handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Selecting media for a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configure device menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Print Quality submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
System Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Output Setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
I/O submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Resets submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Service ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Restoring the Service ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Converting the Service ID to an actual date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Settings and defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configure the control panel display language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configure the input trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Boot key sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hard disk reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
NVRAM initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cold reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

ENWW 3 Product configuration 53

Control panel layout

The control panel includes three indicator lights; four navigation buttons; a help button; a PAUSE/
RESUME button; a CANCEL JOB button; a numeric keypad; and a graphical display that shows up to
four lines of text, supplies-status indicators, and printer animations.

PAUSE/RESUME Graphical BACK UP SELECT button

button display button button
Numeric
keypad

CANCEL
JOB
button CLEAR
button

Ready Data Attention Supplies- HELP DOWN

light light light status button button
(green) (green) (red) indicators

Figure 11. Control panel layout

Table 20. Control panel features, and key functions

Feature or key Function
z Opens the main menu.
(Select) z Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk ( * ) appears next to the
selection, indicating that it is the new default. The default settings remain when
the printer is switched off or is reset (unless you restore the factory defaults from
the RESETS menu).
z Performs the action associated with the item that is highlighted on the graphical
display.
z Backs up one level in the menu tree or clears a numeric value.
(Back)
z Navigates to the previous item in the list.
(Up)
z Navigates to the next item in the list.
(Down)
z Returns a numeric entry to its previous value.
(CLEAR)
z Provides information about the current message on the graphical display.
(HELP)
CANCEL JOB z Cancels the current print job in process. The time it takes to cancel the job
depends on the size of the print job.

54 3 Product configuration ENWW

Table 20. Control panel features, and key functions (continued)
Feature or key Function
PAUSE/RESUME z Returns the printer to the ready state (or to printing) from the menus or the online
help.
z Toggles between PAUSE and RESUME.
Numeric keypad z Can be used to type numeric values or menu shortcuts.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 55

Control panel menus

Press or to cycle through the control panel menus. Each menu is described in a separate
table in this section. Menu items appear only if their associated option is installed, or if their functions
are activated.
All menus and their associated items are available when the printer is online. In menu mode, if no
keys are touched for approximately 30 seconds, the system automatically returns to the top level and
displays either an existing error or one of the following items:
z READY, if the printer is online.
z OFFLINE, if the printer is offline.

Menu map
From the control panel, you can print a menu map that shows the current printer menus and settings.
Additional menu items can appear in the control panel, depending on the options that are currently
installed in the printer. The following is a list of menus available from the control panel, and where to
find information about each.
z Retrieve job menu (page 57)
z Information menu (page 58)
z Paper handling menu (page 59)
z Configure device menu (page 61)
z Diagnostics menu (page 75)

Using a menu map

To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available in the control panel, print a
control panel menu map. Values that appear with an asterisk ( * ) next to them are the currently
selected values for a setting. Many of these values can be overridden from the print driver or a user
software program.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the optional accessories that are currently
installed in the printer. For a complete list of accessories or to change a control panel item and
possible values, see “Configure device menu” on page 61.

Select an item from the menu map

1 Press .
2 Press or to scroll to the required menu, and then press .
3 Press or to scroll to the appropriate page, and then press .

56 3 Product configuration ENWW

Retrieve job menu

Note If no private, stored, quick copy, or proof and hold jobs are on the printer hard disk or in RAM memory,
the message NO STORED JOBS appears when the Retrieve Job menu is selected.

Table 21. Retrieve job menu

Item Explanation
USER 1 (X1) Use this item to see the job names for the username you select. The (X) notation tells
USER 2 (X2) you the number of stored print jobs for that user.
USER 3 (X3)
USER 4 (X4)
USER 5 (X5)
USER 6 (X6)
<USER NAME> Use this item to select which print jobs to work with. Select the ALL PRIVATE JOBS
ALL PRIVATE JOBS option to see a list of all the print jobs for that user that require a PIN.
JOB 1
JOB 2
JOB 3
JOB 4
<JOB NAME> Use this item to print or delete the selected job.
PRINT
DELETE If the job requires a PIN to be printed, appears next to the PRINT command, and a
PIN must be provided. If a job requires a PIN to be deleted, appears next to the
DELETE command, and a PIN must be provided.

If you select PRINT, the printer prompts you to specify the number of copies to print
(1 to 32,000)

ENWW 3 Product configuration 57

Information menu

To select an information item, scroll to the page that you want and then press .

Table 22. Information menu

Item Explanation
PRINT Generates a menu map that shows layout and current settings of the control
MENU MAP menu items.
The printer backs up one screen to SET FRONT TO BACK when the page is
completed.
PRINT Generates a page that provides details about the current configuration of the printer.
CONFIGURATION The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.

PRINT SUPPLIES Generates a page that shows the number of pages remaining for each supply in the
STATUS printer.
The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.
SUPPLIES STATUS Shows a scrollable list of supplies and the status of each supply on the control panel.
The printer returns to READY when you exit the menu.
PRINT Generates a directory page that contains information for all installed mass-storage
FILE DIRECTORY devices. The directory page does not include information for the printer’s ROM.
The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.
PRINT Generates a page that contains information that could be used for cost accounting.
USAGE PAGE This item is available only if a hard disk is installed.
The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.
PRINT Generates a demonstration test page that describes printer features.
DEMO The printer returns to READY when you exit the menu.

PRINT FILE Generates a page that lists the contents of the hard disk drive (if installed).
DIRECTORY
PRINT PCL Generates a typeface list of all PCL fonts available on the printer.
FONT LIST The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.

PRINT PS Generates a typeface list of all PS fonts available on the printer.

FONT LIST The printer returns to the online READY state when the page is completed.

58 3 Product configuration ENWW

Paper handling menu

When paper-handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by
selecting the type and size of media in the printer driver or software program.

Table 23. Paper handling menu default settings

Item Values Explanation
TRAY <N> *ANY SIZE Use this item to set the paper size for
SIZE=*ANY SIZE LETTER tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, and tray 4 (if
LETTER ROTATED installed). TRAY <N) indicates the
LEGAL appropriate tray number.
EXECUTIVE
Note
8.5X13
ENVELOPE #10, ENVELOPE MONARCH,
11X17 ENVELOPE C5, ENVELOPE DL,
A3 DPOSTCARD (JIS), and ENVELOPE B5
A4 appear for tray 1 only.
A4 ROTATED
A5 Note
B5(ISO) ANY SIZE prints on any supported
B5(JIS) size of media, CUSTOM is used to
B4(JIS) configure a custom size specific to X
EXECUTIVE(JIS) and Y, and using ANY CUSTOM
assumes that the maximum paper
DPOSTCARD(JIS)
size is being used and prints on any
8K
size of media.
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
TRAY <N> *ANY TYPE Use this item to specify the type of
TYPE=*ANY TYPE PLAIN media in each tray. TRAY <N)
PREPRINTED indicates the appropriate tray number.
LETTERHEAD
Note
TRANSPARENCY
For the ANY TYPE value, the printer
PREPUNCHED
prints on the media that is loaded
LABELS regardless of the media type that the
BOND driver requests.
RECYCLED
COLOR Note
LIGHT < 75 g/m2 The media types might be mapped to
HEAVY 106-163 g/m2 different print modes in the CONFIGURE
CARD STOCK > 164 g/m2 DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY, and PRINT
GLOSSY 75-105 g/m2 MODE menu.
HP HEAVY GLOSSY
Note
NON HP HEAVY GLOSSY
Selecting a media type from this
TOUGH PAPER
menu causes the printer to use the
ENVELOPE print mode that is assigned to
requested paper type in the
CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY,
PRINT MODES menu. See page 64.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 59

Table 23. Paper handling menu default settings (continued)
Item Values Explanation
TRAY <N> CUSTOM UNIT OF MEASURE This message appears when the
X DIMENSION custom switch is in the CUSTOM
Y DIMENSION position and you select CUSTOM from
the list of media sizes.

The values listed are available in a

pop-up menu from which you choose
either millimeters or inches as the unit
measure and also set the X and Y
dimensions of the custom paper size.

Selecting media for a document

See “Media specifications” on page 31 for more information.

60 3 Product configuration ENWW

Configure device menu

The configure device menu contains all of the administrative functions.

Printing submenu
Some items in this menu are available in a software program or the printer driver (if the appropriate
printer driver is installed). Printer driver and software program settings override control panel
settings.

Table 24. Configure device menu

Item and default Values Explanation
setting
COPIES=1 1 TO 32,000 Set the default number of copies by specifying any number
from 1 to 32,000. Use the numeric keypad to specify the
number of copies.

Note
It is best to set the number of copies in the printer driver or
software program. (Printer driver and software settings
override control panel settings.)
DEFAULT PAPER LETTER This value is used only if no paper size was sent with the job.
SIZE= LEGAL
LETTER EXECUTIVE Set the default size for which media and envelopes to print on
8.5X13 if no size is selected for the print job. (The item name changes
from media to envelope as you scroll through the available
11X17
sizes.)
A3
A4
A5
B5(1S0)
B5(JIS)
B4(JIS)
EXECUTIVE(JIS)
DPOSTCARD(JIS)
8K
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
DEFAULT CUSTOM UNIT OF MEASURE Use this item to set a custom paper size for any of the installed
PAPER SIZE X DIMENSION trays. This menu only appears when the selected tray custom
Y DIMENSION switch is in the “custom” position. Select the X and Y
dimensions of the custom paper size by using the ruler labels
in the trays.
PAPER STANDARD OUTPUT Use this item to configure the output media bin destination.
DESTINATION= FACE UP OPTIONAL Only the installed bins appear on the menu.
STANDARD OUTPUT BIN
BIN

ENWW 3 Product configuration 61

Table 24. Configure device menu (continued)
Item and default Values Explanation
setting
DUPLEX=OFF OFF This item appears only when a duplexer is installed. Set the
ON value to ON to print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on
one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.

Note
It is best to set the duplex option in the printer driver or
software program. (Printer driver and software settings
override control panel settings.)
BINDING=LONG EDGE LONG EDGE Use this item to change the binding edge for duplex printing.
SHORT EDGE
Note Note
The menu item It is best to set the binding layout in the printer driver or
appears only if software program. (Printer driver and software settings
DUPLEX=ON. override control panel settings.)
OVERRIDE A4/ YES Use this item to print on letter-size media when an A4 job is
LETTER=NO NO sent but no A4-size media is loaded in the printer (or to print
on A4-size media when a letter job is sent but no letter-size
media is loaded in the printer).
MANUAL FEED=OFF OFF Use this item to feed the media manually from tray 1 rather
ON than automatically from another tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON
and tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a
print job. The message MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE] then
appears on the control panel.
COURIER REGULAR Use this item to select the version of Courier font to use:
FONT=REGULAR DARK z
REGULAR is the internal Courier font that is available on the
HP LaserJet 4 Series and later printers.
z DARK is the internal Courier font that is available on the HP
LaserJet III Series printers.
Both fonts are not available at the same time.
WIDE A4=NO YES The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters that
NO can be printed on a single line of A4 media.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line.
PRINT PS ON Select ON to print the PS error page when PS errors occur.
ERRORS=OFF OFF
PCL Use this item to open PCL submenu items (see page 63).

62 3 Product configuration ENWW

PCL submenu
Gain access to this submenu through the Printing submenu. Some items in this menu can be opened
in a software program, or in the printer driver (if the appropriate printer driver is installed). Printer
driver and software settings override control panel settings.

Note If no private, stored, quick copy, or proof and hold jobs are on the printer hard disk or in RAM memory,
the message NO STORED JOBS appears when the menu is selected.

Table 25. PCL submenu

Item and default Values Explanation
setting
FORM LENGTH 60 Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for the default media
size. Type the value by using the numeric keypad.
ORIENTATION PORTRAIT Use this item to select default page orientation.
LANDSCAPE
Note
It is best to set the page orientation in the printer driver or
software program. (Printer driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
FONT NUMBER INTERNAL INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
SOFT SOFT: Permanent soft fonts.
SLOT 1 SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three DIMM slots.
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
FONT SOURCES 0-999 The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them on the
PCL Font List. The font number appears in the Font # column of
the printout.
FONT POINT SIZE= 4.00 to 999.75 Use the numeric keypad or or to specify a value. This
12.00 item might not appear, depending on the font selected.

SYMBOL SET=PC-8 PC-8 Select any one of several available symbol sets at the printer
control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the
characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line-
drawn characters.
APPEND CR TO LF=NO YES Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed
NO encountered in some text print jobs. Some environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a new line by using only the line feed control
code. Use this option to append the required carriage return to
each line feed.
SUPRESS BLANK YES Use this item for customers creating their own PCL that might
PAGES NO include extra form feeds which print blank pages. Select YES to
ignore form feeds if the page is blank.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 63

Print Quality submenu

Table 26. Print Quality menu

Item Values Explanation
ADJUST COLOR -5 TO +5 Use this item to control the midtones (solid and very light color
fills are not affected) for each color plane. The default for each
z CYAN DENSITY
color is zero. A larger negative number can result in lighter or
z MAGENTA less dense midtones for a particular color plane, and a larger
DENSITY positive number can result in darker or more dense midtones for
z YELLOW a color plane. Settings can be adjusted, for each color plane
DENSITY (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black), individually as primary
z RESTORE transfer biases are charged.
COLOR VALUES
Note
The changes are universal, and apply to all printed pages
regardless of the media type selected.

Note
The RESTORE COLOR VALUES menu returns the values to the
default.
SET PRINT TEST PAGE Use this item to set the printed image at the center of a single-
REGISTRATION SOURCE page or duplexed print job. The PRINT TEST option prints a test
ADJUST TRAY 1 page. Use the SOURCE option to print a test page from all trays or
ADJUST TRAY 2 from specified trays. Use the ADJUST TRAY X options to adjust the
image alignment using values between -20 and +20.
ADJUST TRAY 3
ADJUST TRAY 4
(IF INSTALLED)
PRINT MODES PLAIN Use this item to associate print modes with individual media
PREPRINTED types in order to optimize print quality. For this menu option, the
LETTERHEAD print mode can only be changed at the control panel.
TRANSPARENCY
See the “Description” column in table 27, “Description of print
PREPUNCHED
modes” on page 67.
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
LIGHT<75 g/m2
HEAVY 106-163 g/m2
CARDSTOCK>164 g/m2
GLOSSY 75-105 g/m2
HP HEAVY GLOSSY
NON HP HVY GLOSSY
TOUGHPAPER
ENVELOPE
RESTORE MODES

64 3 Product configuration ENWW

Table 26. Print Quality menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
OPTIMIZE TRANSFER DOWN 1 Use this item to optimize a number of engine parameters for all
TRANSFER DOWN 2 jobs rather than by media type. Each item can be set to OFF or
TRANSFER UP 1 ON. The default value of each item is OFF. Use the RESTORE
TRANSFER UP 2 OPTIMIZE option to reset all options to the factory default position
(OFF).
LEADING EDGE DOWN
LEADING EDGE UP
z TRANSFER DOWN 1, TRANSFER DOWN 2, TRANSFER UP 1, and
HIGH COVERAGE 1 TRANSFER UP 2: These settings control T2 current to correct
HIGH COVERAGE 2 for media types that show poor secondary transfer when a
HIGH COVERAGE 3 predefined media type setting is used. Try the DOWN 1 and
RESTORE OPTIMIZE DOWN 2 settings first. This might result in a darker image. If it
does not, some medias require that the value is set to UP 1
or UP 2. It is possible to set these ON at the same time. If
multiple bits are set, the default (all OFF) is used. Using
smoother media results in better transfer; exceptionally
rough media can show problems that will not be addressed
by these settings.
z LEADING EDGE DOWN and LEADING EDGE UP: Use these
settings to compensate for poor transfer, missing toner,
discharge marks, and mottled appearance on the leading
edge of printed pages. To resolve these issues, try setting
LEADING EDGE DOWN first; however depending on the media
type, you might get better results using LEADING EDGE UP.
LEADING EDGE UP set to ON increases the leading edge
secondary transfer bias. LEADING EDGE DOWN set to ON
decreases the leading edge secondary transfer bias. If the UP
and DOWN settings are both set to ON, they are set to OFF.

Note
Try the other media type settings first, because this is a universal
setting and applies to all pages that are printed, regardless of the
selected media type.

z HIGH COVERAGE 1, HIGH COVERAGE 2, and HIGH COVERAGE 3:

HIGH COVERAGE 1 and HIGH COVERAGE 2 control the setting of
the yellow dot pattern that is designed to eliminate certain
types of banding (47 mm) in high coverage.
• HIGH COVERAGE 1: Yellow dots appear in a 10-by-10 mm
pattern for half-speed printing, and an 8-by-8 mm pattern
for full-speed printing. The default is OFF; when set to ON,
the yellow dots are off. If the yellow dots are
objectionable and the 47 mm band is acceptable (a line
or band is visible once at 47 mm from the start and the
stop of a strip of color), turn this item ON. Otherwise, leave
this item OFF.
• HIGH COVERAGE 2: Yellow dots appear in an 8-by-8 mm
pattern for full-speed printing, and 10-by-10 mm for half-
speed printing. The default is OFF; when set to ON, the
yellow dots are in an 8-by-8 mm pattern for half- and full-
speed printing. If a line recurs every 47 mm from the start
of a strip in half-speed printing modes, turn this item ON.
Otherwise, leave this item OFF.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 65

Table 26. Print Quality menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
OPTIMIZE z High coverage 3 helps with 50 mm to 100 mm bands or
(continued) cardstock band (37 mm from the trailing edge of 11-by-17
[A3] or 115 mm from the trailing edge of letter [A4] on media
that is heavier than 120 g/m²)
• HIGH COVERAGE 3: This changes the OPC ITB speed
mismatch (101.5 percent [OFF] to 102 percent [ON]). The
default is OFF. If a line or band recurs at 50 or 100 mm
intervals (37 mm from the trailing edge of 11-by-17 (A3)
and 115 mm from the trailing edge of letter (A4) on media
heavier than 120 g/m2), turn this item ON for half-speed
media types. Do not change this setting to ON unless the
bands are very objectionable. If you do this 47 mm
banding might increase.
CALIBRATE NOW Select CALIBRATE NOW to start a printer calibration (D-max, D-
half, and CPR calibrations are performed).
PROCESS Use this item to print a single blank page that might help clean
CLEANING PAGE the fuser rollers after a fuser-related jam.

66 3 Product configuration ENWW

Table 27. Description of print modes
Print mode Media type(s) that Speed Description When to use
use this mode by
default
AUTO SENSE plain trans: half Optimized for the media that is If transparencies are not
MODE opaque: full detected. If a transparency is detected, frequently used in the printer.
printing does not stop, and the correct
printing attributes are used for the
transparency.
AUTO SENSE preprinted, letterhead, full Prints on whatever media is in the tray If transparencies are frequently
OFF prepunched, bond, (if a transparency is detected, printing used in the printer. This mode
recycled, and color stops and the message UNEXPECTED minimizes the occurrence of
TYPE IN TRAY X appears). unintentional printing on
transparencies.
LIGHT MODE light < 75 g/m² full Optimized for light media 60 to 74 g/m². Use for light media.

HEAVY MODE heavy (106 to 163 g/m²) half z Optimized for heavy media 106 to Use for heavy media.
163 g/m².
z The printer engine operates at half-
speed to provide enough heat to
correctly fuse the image because
heavy media has more mass to
heat.
CARDSTOCK cardstock > 164 g/m² half z Optimized for card stock heavier Use for cardstock.
MODE than 164 g/m².
z The printer engine operates at half-
speed to provide enough heat to
correctly fuse the image because
heavy media has more mass to
heat.
TRANSPARENCY transparencies half z Optimized for transparencies. Use for transparencies.
MODE z The printer engine operates at half-
speed to produce a smoother,
flatter image that transmits light
better.
ENVELOPE envelopes full Optimized for envelopes. Use for envelopes.
MODE
LABEL MODE labels half z Optimized for labels. Use for labels.
z The printer engine operates at half-
speed to provide enough heat to
correctly fuse the image.
GLOSSY MODE glossy full Optimized for glossy media (75 to Use for normal glossy media.
75 to 105 g/m² 105 g/m2 [20- to 28-lb bond])
HP HEAVY HP heavy glossy half Optimized for heavy, glossy HP media Use for HP heavy glossy
GLOSSY MODE (105 to 163 g/m2 [28- to 43-lb bond]). media.

NON HP HEAVY non-HP heavy glossy half with Optimized for heavy, glossy non-HP Use for non-HP heavy glossy
GLOSSY MODE pauses media (105 to 163 g/m2 [28- to 43-lb media.
bond]).
TOUGH PAPER tough paper half with Optimized for glossy film media. Under normal conditions.
MODE pauses

BEST GLOSS not associated with a full with Pauses printing if the fuser temperature If you notice changes in print
MODE media type by default pauses decreases in order to maintain a higher quality when using glossy
fuser temperature and consistent gloss media, associate the GLOSSY
level. type with this print mode.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 67

Table 27. Description of print modes (continued)
Print mode Media type(s) that Speed Description When to use
use this mode by
default
BEST HP not associated with a half with Pauses printing if the fuser temperature If you notice changes in print
GLOSS MODE media type by default pauses decreases in order to maintain a higher quality when using HP heavy,
fuser temperature and consistent gloss glossy media, associate the HP
level. HEAVY GLOSSY type with this
print mode.
BEST NON HP not associated with a half with Pauses printing if the fuser temperature If you notice changes in print
GLOSS MODE media type by default pauses decreases in order to maintain a higher quality when using HP heavy
fuser temperature and consistent gloss glossy, media, associate the
level. NON HP HEAVY GLOSSY type with
this print mode.
BEST TOUGH not associated with a half with Pauses printing if the fuser temperature If you notice changes in print
PAPER MODE media type by default pauses decreases in order to maintain a higher quality when using HP heavy,
fuser temperature and consistent gloss glossy media, associate the
level. TOUGH PAPER type with this print
mode.
TONER MODE not associated with a full z Uses less toner in order to reduce If you are using rough or poor-
media type by default toner scatter. quality media, and you have
z TONER MODE uses a lower density noticed toner scatter on your
color table for high-resistivity media print jobs, associate the media
to avoid toner explosions by type with this mode.
applying less toner on a page.
BLISTERS not associated with a full with Operates at full-speed but pauses, Use with plain media only. If
MODE media type by default pauses usually during the first few pages of a you notice changes in print
print job, to keep the fuser hot. If the quality when using HP heavy
fuser is not hot enough gloss can drop glossy media, associate the
and cause the toner to blister with light PLAIN type with this print
media. mode.
RESTORE Resets all of the print modes to the Use this setting to reset all of
MODES factory defaults. the print modes to the factory
defaults.

68 3 Product configuration ENWW

System Setup submenu
Items in the System Setup submenu affect the printer function. Configure the printer according to
your printing needs.

Table 28. System Setup submenu

Item and Values Explanation
default setting
JOB STORAGE 1 TO 100 Use this item to specify the number of jobs that can be stored on
LIMIT=32 the printer hard-disk accessory.

JOB HELD OFF Use this item to set the amount of time that quick copy, proof and
TIMEOUT=OFF 1 HOUR hold, private, and stored jobs are kept before being automatically
4 HOURS deleted from the queue.
1 DAY
1 WEEK
SHOW ADDRESS AUTO Define whether or not the printer’s IP address appears on the
OFF control panel with the READY message. If AUTO is selected, the IP
address of the device is shown if the device is connected to a
network.
OPTIMUM AUTO Controls how the engine switches from color mode to
SPEED/COST SPEED monochrome mode. AUTO maps to the default option (SPEED for
COST PER PAGE the HP color LaserJet 9500), SPEED maps to LOOK AHEAD (the
printer only switches to mono mode if the next three pages are
also only black), and COST PER PAGE maps to ALWAYS SWITCH (the
printer switches modes for every page that is different).
TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY Use this item to specify the behavior of the trays. Each of the
MANUALLY FEED PROMPT options opens its own submenu:

USE REQUESTED TRAY

z EXCLUSIVELY. The printer does not automatically select
another tray when you indicate that a specific tray should be
used.
z FIRST. The printer pulls media from another tray if the
specified tray is empty.

MANUALLY FEED PROMPT

z ALWAYS. You are prompted to insert media and press
before printing begins.
z UNLESS LOADED. You are prompted only if tray 1 is empty.

POWERSAVE 1 MINUTE Use this item to set how long the printer remains idle before it
TIME=1 HOUR 15 MINUTES enters PowerSave mode. PowerSave mode offers the following
30 MINUTES advantages:
60 MINUTES z minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer
when it is idle
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS z reduces wear on the printer electronic components (turns off
the display backlight)
4 HOURS
The printer automatically exits PowerSave mode when you send
a print job, press a control panel button, open a tray, or open any
door.

Note
PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display, but the display
is still readable.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 69

Table 28. System Setup submenu (continued)
Item and Values Explanation
default setting
PERSONALITY= AUTO Use this item to select the default printer language (personality).
AUTO PCL Possible values are determined by which valid languages are
POSTSCRIPT installed in the printer. Normally, you should not change the
PDF printer language (the default is AUTO). If you change it to a
specific printer language, the printer does not automatically
switch from one language to another.
CLEARABLE ON Use this item to set the amount of time that a clearable warning
WARNINGS=JOB JOB appears on the printer control panel.
ON: Warning messages appear on the control panel until is
pressed.
JOB: Warning messages appear on the control panel until the end
of the job from which they were generated.
AUTO CONTINUE= ON Use this item to determine how the printer reacts to errors.
ON OFF ON: If an error prevents printing, the message appears and the
printer goes offline for 10 seconds before returning online.
OFF: If an error prevents printing, the message remains on the
display, and the printer does not print until is pressed.

Note
To stop printing when an installed finishing device is out of
staples, set AUTO CONTINUE=OFF.
SUPPLIES LOW= CONTINUE Use this item to determine how the printer functions when
CONTINUE STOP sensors report a low-supply situation.
CONTINUE: The printer continues to print while the SUPPLIES LOW
message appears.
STOP: The printer goes offline and waits for further action.
JAM RECOVERY= AUTO Use this item to determine how the printer functions when a jam
AUTO ON occurs.
OFF AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for the
printer jam recovery (usually ON). This is the default setting.
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a jam is
cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a jam. Printing
performance might be increased with this setting.
RAM DISK=AUTO AUTO Use this item to determine how the RAM disk is configured. This
OFF item appears only if no optional hard disk is installed and the
Note printer has at least 8 MB of memory.
Appears only if the OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.
hard disk drive is
installed. Note
If the setting is changed from OFF to AUTO, the printer
automatically reinitializes when it becomes idle.
LANGUAGE= Includes all languages in the list. When scrolling through the
ENGLISH languages values, LANGUAGE= should be updated so it is
presented in the highlighted language.

70 3 Product configuration ENWW

Output Setup submenu
Table 29. Output Setup submenu
Item Values Explanation
OUTPUT SETUP The Output Setup submenu appears when the printer has a
(VARIES 3,000-sheet stapler, 3,000-sheet stapler/stacker, or multifunction
ACCORDING TO finisher attached. The menu items and values vary according to
FINISHING which finishing device is installed.
DEVICE)

I/O submenu
Items in the I/O (input/output) submenu affect the communication between the printer and the
computer.

Table 30. I/O submenu

Item and Values Explanation
default setting
I/O TIMEOUT=15 5 TO 300 Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (The I/O timeout refers
to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before
ending a print job.)
Use this setting to adjust the timeout for the best performance. If
data from other ports appears in the middle of your print job,
increase the timeout value.

Parallel Input submenu

Table 31. Parallel Input submenu
Item and Values Explanation
default setting
HIGH SPEED=YES YES The printer accepts faster parallel communications that are used
NO for connections with newer computers.

ADVANCED ON Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The

FUNCTIONS=ON OFF default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This
setting allows the printer to send status readback messages to
the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced functions on might
slow the language switching.)

ENWW 3 Product configuration 71

EIO submenu
The EIO (enhanced input/output) submenu appears only when an EIO device, such as an
HP Jetdirect print server, is installed in an EIO slot on the printer. The items in the menu depend on
the particular finishing device that is installed. If the printer contains an HP Jetdirect print server EIO
card, you can configure basic networking parameters by using the EIO menu. These and other
parameters can also be configured through HP Web Jetadmin or other network configuration tools
(such as Telnet or the embedded Web server).

Table 32. EIO submenu

Item Values Explanation
TCP/IP ENABLE Use ENABLE to select whether the TCP/IP protocol is enabled (ON)
HOST NAME or disabled (OFF).
CONFIG METHOD
HOST NAME is an alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters in
length that identifies the device. This name is listed on the
Jetdirect page. The default host name is NPLxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.

Use CONFIG METHOD submenu to select whether the TCP/IP

configuration parameters are set automatically from a network
server by using any of these methods:
z BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)
z DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). If selected, and
if a DHCP exists, the DHCP RELEASE and DHCP RENEW menus
are available to set lease options.
z MANUAL. Provides access to parameters that can be manually
configured at the printer control panel. If selected, the MANUAL
z SETTINGS menu is available to configure the parameters.

IPX/SPX ENABLE Use the ENABLE submenu to select whether the IPX/SPX protocol
FRAME TYPE is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
SOURCE ROUTING
Use FRAME TYPE to select the frame type setting for your network.
The frame submenu includes these values:
z AUTO (default) automatically sets and limits the frame type to
the first one detected.
z EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP are the frame type
selections for Ethernet networks.
z TR_8022, TR_SNAP are the frame type selections for Token
Ring networks.

The SOURCE ROUTING submenu is for a Token Ring network

only. Use it to specify the NetWare Token Ring Source
Routing parameter from the following options.

AUTO (default): The type of source routing that is required on

the network is automatically sensed.
OFF: All packets are sent without source routing, and only
packets from the same ring are received.
ALL ROUTES and SINGLE ROUTES: All packets are sent with
source routing (broadcasts and when the route is unknown).
APPLETALK ENABLE (Ethernet and Fast Ethernet only) Use this item to select whether
the AppleTalk protocol is enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).
DLC/LLC ENABLE Use this item to select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is
enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF).

72 3 Product configuration ENWW

Table 32. EIO submenu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
LINK SPEED AUTO (For 10/100Base-TX print servers only) Use this item to select
10T HALF the network link speed and communication mode for the 10/
10T FULL 100Base-TX print server. For proper communications, the
100THALF Jetdirect settings must match the network.
100TFULL AUTO (default): The print server will automatically configure itself
to match the network’s link speed and communication mode. If it
fails, 100TX HALF is set.
10T HALF: 10Mbps, half-duplex operation
10T FULL: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
100T HALF: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
100T FULL: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED For configuration management, specify whether the embedded
HTTPS OPTIONAL Web server will accept communications using HTTPS (Secure
HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS.
HTTPS REQUIRED (default): For secure, encrypted
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print
server will appear as a secure site.
HTTPS OPTIONAL: Access using either HTTP or HTTPS is
permitted.
RESET SECURITY NO Specify whether the current security settings on the print server
YES will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
NO (default): The current security settings are maintained.
YES: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 73

Resets submenu
The items in the Resets submenu clear all memory in the printer, while CANCEL JOB clears only the
current job.
Reset the printer only under the following circumstances:
z you want to restore the printer default settings
z communications between the printer and computer has been interrupted
z you are having problems with a port

Note Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when
you select these items.

Table 33. Resets submenu

Item Explanation
RESTORE FACTORY This item restores most of the factory (default) settings. This item also clears the input
SETTINGS buffer for the active I/O.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
This items does not affect network settings that are stored on the HP Jetdirect print
server (if installed).
CHARGER CLEANED This item notifies the printer that the post charger is cleaned.
POWERSAVE Use this item to turn POWERSAVE ON and OFF. If POWERSAVE is OFF, the printer never
enters PowerSave mode, and no asterisk appears next to any item when you use the
POWERSAVE TIME menu item. The default value for POWERSAVE is ON.
RESET SUPPLIES This item notifies the printer that a new supply kit is installed. Only supplies that the
printer cannot detect as changed appear (new cleaning kit, new transfer kit, and new
fuser kit).

74 3 Product configuration ENWW

Diagnostics menu

You can use this submenu to isolate parts, and to troubleshoot jam and print-quality issues. See
“Engine diagnostic tools” on page 309 in chapter 7 for more information about using these diagnostic
tools.

Table 34. Diagnostics menu

Item Values Explanation
PRINT EVENT Prints a page that indicates Use this item to generate a localized FIFO (first in, first out)
LOG the most recent printer errors. list of the 50 most recent entries in the error log. The printed
event log shows the error number, page count, error code,
and description or personality.
SHOW EVENT LOG Displays on the control panel Use this item to scroll through the contents of the event log
a list of the most recent at the control panel, and to show the 50 most recent events.
printer errors. Use and to scroll through the event log contents.
PQ Prints a series of pages that Use this item to print eight pages to help you identify print-
TROUBLESHOOTING are useful to identify print quality problems. The eight pages consist of two pages of
quality problems (follow the instructions, one page for each color (cyan, magenta,
printed instructions). yellow, and black), one demo page, and one configuration
page.
DISABLE Prints with one or more Use this item to isolate defective cartridges by first removing
CARTRIDGE CHECK image drums removed. specific image drums, and then printing internal pages or a
print job using the remaining image drums.
PAPER PATH TEST PRINT TEST PAGE Use this item to generate a test page that is useful for
SOURCE troubleshooting the printer’s paper-handling features.
DESTINATION
DUPLEX Define the test based on the media source, the output
COPIES destination, duplex ON or OFF, the number of copies, or if
SENSORS the paper-path sensor status appears on the control panel
during the test by selecting any of the options, and then
select PRINT TEST PAGE to perform the test.

If the SENSORS value is selected, the status of the following

sensors appears on the control panel:
z A: Tray 2 feed A
z B: Tray 2 feed B
z C: Tray 3 feed A
z D: Tray 3 feed B
z E: Pre-registration
z F: Pre-T2
z G: Pre-fuser
z H: Fuser outlet
z I: Duplex reverse
z J: Duplex feed
z K: Face-down output

ENWW 3 Product configuration 75

Table 34. Diagnostics menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
SENSOR TEST Note Use this item to manually test paper-path sensors and
(Interactive) A through K appear on the switches for correct operation. When the sensors are
control panel. manually toggled, the control panel displays the sensor
switching from ON to OFF, and from OFF to ON.
z A: Pre-registration
z B: T2
z C: Paper path
z D: Fuser outlet
z E: Face-down outlet
z F: Face-down capacity
full
z G: Tray 1 media presence
z H: Tray 2 media presence
z I: Tray 2 feed sensor A
and B
z J: Tray 2 X dimension
(cross feed direction)
z K: Tray 2 Y dimension
(cross feed direction)
z L: Tray 3 media presence
z M: Tray 3 feed sensor A
and B
z N: Tray 3 X dimension
(cross feed direction)
z O: Tray 3 Y dimension
(feed direction)
z P: Lower right door
z Q: Right front/upper right
door interlock
z R: Left front/lower left
door interlock
z S: Upper left door
COMPONENT TEST TRANSFER MOTORS Component tests exercise individual parts independently to
BELT ONLY help you isolate failures, noises, print quality problems, and
IMAGE DRUM MOTORS other issues. The results of the test depend on your
CARTRIDGE MOTORS observation of the printer during the test to determine the
DEVELOPER MOTORS source of the problem.
YELLOW LASER SCANNER
MAGENTA LASER SCANNER When you select one of the components for testing, the
CYAN LASER SCANNER printer goes offline and runs the test based on the REPEAT
BLACK LASER SCANNER value. Depending on the component that you select, you
FUSER MOTOR might be prompted to remove parts from the printer. If you
MP PAPER FEED DRIVE do not remove the correct parts or if you press the CANCEL
UPPER CASSETTE FEED DRIVE JOB button, the display returns to the Diagnostics menu.
LOWER CASSETTE FEED DRIVE When the test is complete, the control panel also returns to
PREREGISTRATION the Diagnostics menu. The REPEAT value allows the test to
REGISTRATION operate once continuously.
FACE UP SOLENOID
REPEAT Note
See table 35 for more information about the COMPONENT TEST
values.

Note
Several of the engine diagnostics require certain pre-
conditions to operate. See “Engine diagnostics
preconditions” on page 310 in chapter 7.

76 3 Product configuration ENWW

Table 34. Diagnostics menu (continued)
Item Values Explanation
PRINT/STOP TEST Note Use this item to isolate print quality problems and media
The operator is prompted to handling faults by stopping the printer in the middle of a print
enter a stop time value. cycle to observe the point in the process where the image
degrades, or where media jams or is damaged. The range is
Suggested delay times (using 0 to 60,000 milliseconds, in increments of 10.
letter media):

z 0 to 3,000 ms: Earliest

page-stop point (60 mm
from the top left side of
the lower access door)
z 1,000 ms: T1 - Y on belt
z 1,500 ms: T1 - M on belt
z 2,000 ms: T1 - C on belt
z 3,000 ms: T1 - K on belt
z 4,000 ms: ITB image at
post charger
z 4,100 ms: Page at pre-
registration
z 4,500 ms: ITB image is
complete for all colors
(CMYK)
z 5,000 ms: Page at
registration (buckled)
z 7,000 ms: ITB image and
page at mid-secondary
transfer
z 7,500 ms: Page just prior
to duplex diverter
z 8,000 ms: Page at mid-
fuser
z 8,500 ms: Two-third of
ITB image cleaned
z 12,500 ms: Page partially
delivered to face-down
tray
COLOR BAND TEST PRINT TEST PAGE COPIES Use this item to identify arcing in the high-voltage paths and
to isolate print-quality problems to the primary or the
secondary transfer areas. The test prints a bar pattern that
contains primary and secondary colors. The Color Band
Test page should be printed on 11-by-17 or A3 media, if
available. If not, letter or A4 media should be used (the
larger media is used if it is set as the default media size).

Evidence of arcing might not appear until a series of pages

has been printed. Use the COPIES option to control how
many copies of the internal page to print. The range is 1
to 30.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 77

Table 35. Component test values
Value Explanation
TRANSFER MOTORS Use this item to check the four OPC drive motors and the ITB motor without any other
printer process operating.
BELT ONLY Use this item to check the ITB motor, the ITB motor drive train, and the ITB rotation.
IMAGE DRUM MOTORS Use this item to make sure that the drum motor(s) are turning. This item is also helpful to
check the drum motors and drive assemblies when the back of the printer is removed,
and to isolate problems in the image drums or the image drum drive assemblies.
CARTRIDGE MOTORS Use this item to make sure that the cartridge motor(s) are turning. This item is also
helpful to check the cartridge motors and drive assemblies when the back of the printer is
removed, and to isolate problems in the print cartridges or the print cartridge drive
assemblies.
DEVELOPER MOTORS Use this item to make sure that the developer motor(s) are turning. This item is also
helpful to check the developer motors and drive assemblies when the back of the printer
is removed, and to isolate problems in the image drums or the image drum developer
drive assemblies.
YMCK LASERS Use this item to make sure that the four laser scanner assemblies are functioning
correctly.
FUSER MOTOR Use this item to test the fuser motor, or any mechanisms that are driven by the fuser
motor.
MP PAPER FEED Use this item to test the tray 1 feed motor.
DRIVE
UPPER CASSETTE Use this item to check the pick rollers for tray 2.
FEED DRIVE Note
M23 rotates clockwise to drive the tray 2 mechanism.
LOWER CASSETTE Use this item to check the pick rollers for tray 3.
FEED DRIVE Note
M23 rotates counter clockwise to drive the tray 3 mechanism.
PREREGISTRATION Use this item to test the registration motor (M11) and the associated clutch (CL1)
Note
This clutch can also be tested with the MP PAPER FEED MOTOR test.
REGISTRATION Use this item to test the registration motor (M11) and the associated clutch (CL2 is ON
for this test, but OFF in the MP PAPER FEED MOTOR test).
FACE UP SOLENOID Use this item to test the face-up solenoid (SL2) for correct functionality.
REPEAT Use this item to repeat a test continuously.

78 3 Product configuration ENWW

Service menu

The service menu printer commands should be used only by authorized service personnel. The
service menu can only be opened by using the PIN code 04950003. While in the service menu,
service technicians can perform the following actions:
z clear the event log
z verify and set the page counts and serial number (these are displayed on the configuration page)
z change the maintenance intervals
z set the cold reset media size
If a stapler/stacker is installed:
z calibrate the staple position
z review and edit the serial number of the output device
z review and edit the page count of the output device

Table 36. Service menu

Item Explanation
CLEAR EVENT LOG Clear the event log after maintenance or repairs are accomplished.

TOTAL MONO PAGES Set the total monochrome page count if the formatter is replaced.

TOTAL COLOR PAGES Set the total color page count if the formatter is replaced.

REFURBISH PAGE Set to retain the page count of a refurbished printer. This allows the regular page
COUNT count to be set to zero after the printer is refurbished. The refurbished page count
number is zero for new printers.
CLEANING KIT COUNT Set the total cleaning kit page count if the formatter is replaced.
TRANSFER KIT COUNT Set the total transfer kit page count if the formatter is replaced.
FUSER KIT COUNT Set the total fuser kit page count if the formatter is replaced.

SERIAL NUMBER Reset the printer serial number if the formatter is replaced.

SERVICE ID Establishes the first power-on date for warranty determination.

COLD RESET PAPER Sets the printer default media size to A4 or letter.

STAPLER/STACKER Perform a staple position calibration (if the stapler/stacker is attached).

Service ID
This item allows the date that the printer was first used to be shown through the control panel,
eliminating the need for customers to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Because the printer
does not have an internal clock, the service ID date’s availability is dependent on the printer being
connected to a source that can provide the date, such as the installer, the driver, or the embedded
Web server. In cases where the printer is not connected to a date source, the service ID will not be
available, and the control panel will display 000000.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 79

Restoring the Service ID
If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date
the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Calculate the date as follows:
1 To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the printer was first used
in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 – 1990 = 12. YY = 12.
2 To calculate DDD, use the following formula:
30(calendar month – 1) + calendar day = DDD. If the calendar day is 31, use 30 instead. For
instance, if the printer was first used on October 17, calculate DDD as follows:
a Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 – 1 = 9.
b Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270.
c Add 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

Converting the Service ID to an actual date

You can use the printer’s Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty.
Convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:
1 Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed.
2 Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.
3 The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.
Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:
1 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.
2 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10,
which represents October.
3 The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.
4 The complete date is 17-October-2002.

80 3 Product configuration ENWW

Settings and defaults

Note Most of the settings that you send from software programs override printer defaults.

Temporary settings are the values that are set through your software program for the current print
job. Temporary settings remain in effect until the current print job is complete.
Control panel defaults are the values that are set by selecting a control panel item and pressing
. An asterisk ( * ) next to the item name indicates that it is now the default. The printer retains
default settings even when power is turned off.
Factory defaults are preset at the factory and are the default values for each menu item.

Configure the control panel display language

You can set the printer to show messages and print configuration pages in another supported
language. The following are supported languages:

z Czech z Korean
z Danish z Norwegian
z Dutch z Portuguese (Brazilian)
z English z Polish
z Finnish z Russian
z French z Simplified Chinese
z German z Spanish Catillian
z Greek z Swedish
z Hungarian z Traditional Chinese
z Italian z Turkish
z Japanese

Note You have the option to change the control panel language when the printer is turned on for the first
time. If you did not change the control panel language when the printer was turned on for the first time,
you can use either of the following procedures to select a new control panel language.

To configure the control panel language (using menus)

1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to SYSTEM SETUP, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to LANGUAGE, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to the appropriate language, and then press .
6 Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menus.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 81

To configure the control panel language (power-on sequence)
1 Press and hold down while turning on the printer power.
2 Use or to scroll to LANGUAGE, and then press .

Note For Japanese, Turkish, Czech, Russian, Hungarian, and Polish, the language selection changes the
default symbol set for the specific language. For all other languages, the default symbol set is PC-8.

Configure the input trays

You can configure the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer input trays by type and size. You can
load different media in each of the input trays and then request media by type or size.

Note If you have used previous HP LaserJet printers, you might be accustomed to configuring tray 1 to first
mode or cassette mode. To duplicate the settings for first mode, configure tray 1 for Size = ANY and
Type = ANY. To duplicate the settings for cassette mode, set either the size or type for tray 1 to a setting
other than ANY.

The following instructions are used to configure the trays at the printer control panel.

Configuring trays for standard size media

Setting a standard media size and type for tray 1
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to PAPER HANDLING, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to TRAY 1 SIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to the media size that you want, and then press .
5 The media type is set to Plain by default. If you want to change this setting, use or to
scroll to TRAY 1 TYPE, and then press . Use or to scroll to the media type that you
want, and then press .
6 Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menus.

Setting a standard media size and type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4
When you open and close tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4, the printer detects the media size for that tray, and
the printer control panel prompts you to select the media type for that tray. If the printer cannot detect
the media size, the printer control panel will prompt you to select a custom size and type. Follow
these instructions to set the media size and type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4.
1 Open the tray.
2 Make sure that the media guides rest against the stack of media in the tray.
3 Set the custom/standard switch to Standard if both guides are set to the same Standard marking.
Otherwise, set the switch to Custom and use the instructions in the following section.

Note If the media size is marked on the tray guide, it is a standard media size. If the media size is not marked
on the tray guide, see “Configuring trays for custom size media” on page 83.

4 Close the tray.

5 The printer detects the size of the media in the tray and message TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE]
appears. This message alternates with the message TO CHANGE TYPE PRESS . The printer sets
the media type to Plain by default. If you want to change this setting, use or to scroll to the
media type that you want, and then press .
6 Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menus.

82 3 Product configuration ENWW

Configuring trays for custom size media

Note When a custom size is set for a tray, it is retained until the custom/standard switch in the tray is returned
to Standard.

Setting a custom media size and type for tray 1

1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to PAPER HANDLING, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to TRAY 1 SIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to CUSTOM, and then press .
5 The message UNIT OF MEASURE = appears, with the Inches setting selected by default. If you
want to change this setting, use or to scroll to the Millimeters setting, and then press .
6 The message X DIMENSION = appears, with 12 inches (or 306 millimeters) selected by default.
Use the numeric keypad to type the X dimension measurement of your media, and then press
.

Note The X dimension is the width of the page as it feeds into the printer. See table 36 and table 37 for
maximum and minimum dimension measurements.

7 The message Y DIMENSION = appears, with 18.50 inches (or 470 millimeters) selected by
default. Use the numeric keypad to type the Y dimension measurement of your media, and then
press .

Note The Y dimension is the length of the page as it feeds into the printer. See table 36 and table 37 for
maximum and minimum dimension measurements.

8 The message TRAY 1 SIZE = [X DIMENSION] X [Y DIMENSION] [INCHES OR MILLIMETERS]

SETTING SAVED appears.
9 The media type is set to Plain by default. If you want to change this setting, use or to
scroll to TRAY 1 TYPE, and then press . Use or to scroll to the media type that you
want, and then press .
10 Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menus.

Setting a custom media size and type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4
1 Open the tray.
2 Make sure that the media guides rest against the stack of media in the tray.
3 Set the custom/standard switch to Custom.

Note If the media size is not marked on the tray guide, it is a custom media size. If the media is marked on
the tray guide, see “Setting a standard media size and type for tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4” on page 82.

4 Close the tray.

5 The message TRAY X SIZE = appears, with the Any Custom size selected by default. Use or
to scroll to the Custom setting, and then press .
6 The message UNIT OF MEASURE = appears, with the Inches setting selected by default. If you
want to change this setting, use or to scroll to the Millimeters setting, and then press .
7 The message X DIMENSION = appears, with 12 inches (or 306 millimeters) selected by default.
Use the numeric keypad to type X dimension measurement of your media, and then press .

ENWW 3 Product configuration 83

Note The X dimension is the width of the page as it feeds into the printer. See table 36 and table 37 for
maximum and minimum dimension measurements.

8 The message Y DIMENSION = appears, with 18.5 inches (or 470 millimeters) selected by default.
Use the numeric keypad to type the Y dimension measurement of your media, and then press
.

Note The Y dimension is the length of the page as it feeds into the printer. See table 36 and table 37 for
maximum and minimum dimension measurements.

9 The message TRAY X [X DIMENSION] X [Y DIMENSION] [INCHES OR MILLIMETERS] SIZE

SPECIFIED BY USER appears. This message alternates with the message PRESS TO CHANGE
TYPE. The media type is set to Plain by default. If you want to change this setting, use or
to scroll to the media type that you want, and then press .
10 Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menus.

Table 37. Maximum custom sizes

Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex and manual duplex z 306 by 470 mm (12.05 z 297 by 432 mm z 297 by 432 mm
by 18.5 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches)
Auto duplex z 306 by 470 mm (12.05 z 297 by 432 mm z 297 by 432 mm
by 18.5 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches) (11.7 by 17 inches)

Table 38. Minimum custom sizes

Tray 1 Tray 2 and tray 3 Tray 4
Simplex and manual duplex z 98 by 170 mm (3.9 by z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 z 182 by 210 mm (7.2
6.7 inches) by 8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches)
Auto duplex z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 by z 148 by 210 mm (5.8 z 182 by 210 mm (7.2
8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches) by 8.3 inches)

Note The leading edge is listed first in the dimensions (scan direction by feed direction) for maximum custom
sizes and minimum custom sizes.

84 3 Product configuration ENWW

Printable area
The HP color LaserJet 9500 limits the printable area to 4.23 mm (0.17 inch) +/- 2 mm (0.01 inch)
from the edges of the media, and also limits the maximum image size to 297 mm by 460 mm (11.7 by
18.1 inches).

Note Margins can be manipulated within a software program to print up to 2 mm (0.01 inch) from the edge
of the media. However, print quality might be negatively affected within 5 mm (0.2 inch) from the edge
of the media.

Leading 4.23 mm
edge (0.17 inch)

Figure 12. Printable area from edges

306 mm
(12.05 inches)
(18.5 inches)

(18.1 inches)
460 mm

Leading
407 mm

edge

297 mm
(11.7 inches)

Figure 13. Maximum printable area

ENWW 3 Product configuration 85

Boot key sequences

Hard disk reinitialization

When a hard disk is installed, it must be initialized.

Reinitialize a hard disk using the control panel

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Turn the printer on.
3 Press and hold PAUSE/RESUME on the control panel during the memory count.
4 Hold PAUSE/RESUME down until all three error lights illuminate steadily.
5 Press until INITIALIZE DISKS appears on the display panel.
6 Press .
7 The printer begins initializing the disk (this might take a moment). The control panel displays the
HP event logo and eventually displays READY.

Reinitialize a hard disk using PJL commands

Create the following PJL command in MS-DOS EDIT:
Esc E Esc%-12345X@PJL FSINIT VOLUME = “1:”
Copy this to the printer using the DOS command:
copy/b.

Note For this command to take effect, the printer must be turned off and on after sending the command.

Note Both of the above methods set the hard disk to the required state of “VOLUME 0."

86 3 Product configuration ENWW

NVRAM initialization

Note Initializing NVRAM will reset the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings,
and the EIO card. Use the Service menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You will also
need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer. Initialize NVRAM
only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a Cold reset to reset printer variables but still
retain the needed values in the service menu.

Before initializing NVRAM, print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the
following information:
z total page count and color page count
z transfer kit count
z fuser kit count
z serial number

To initialize NVRAM
1 Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display.
2 When the display begins showing the memory count, press and hold until all three lights on
the control panel are lit.
3 Press .
4 Press PAUSE/RESUME. The display should show SKIP DISK LOAD.
5 Press until NVRAM INIT is highlighted.
6 Press . The printer will initialize NVRAM and then continue its power-on sequence.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 87

Note NVRAM reset can save certain key variables and restore them when the initialization is complete. A
hard disk drive must be installed to perform a NVRAM reset. Items that are saved include:
z event/error log
z model number
z model name
z printer name
z printer serial number
z formatter serial number
z service ID (born-on date)
z control panel language
z default paper size
z cold reset paper size
z auto cleaning page size
z total duplex counts
z non-toner consumable counts
z engine page count
z color engine page count
z tray 1 size
z envelope feeder size
z default unit of measure for default custom paper size
z default unit of measure for each tray
z print offset registration settings
z left margin offset (for each media size)
z leading edge margin offset (default)
z usage meter date (count and charges, detail and totals)
z usage page data not related to page counts
z list of last five cartridges installed in the printer
z NVRAM values for pixel count and EPR
z consumables reorder url

Use the following steps to perform a NVRAM reset:

1 Turn the printer off and replace the formatter.
2 Enter the NVRAM reset key sequence when the printer is turned on for the first time.
3 Critical values are copied from the disk to NVRAM.
The reset only works if the key sequence is entered the first time the printer is turned on after the
new board is installed. If the printer is turned on without entering the key sequence, all of the values
are set to what is in the NVRAM on the new board and the backup data on the disk is lost.

The hard disk is guaranteed to have the most current data backed up, so the updated data is always
accurate. Also, you do not have to wait for an automatic periodic disk sync before turning the printer
off to change the formatter.

Note The NVRAM reset sequence resets all NVRAM values when a hard disk drive is not used.

88 3 Product configuration ENWW

Cold reset
The cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and returns all of the defaults to the factory
settings.

CAUTION Performing a cold reset resets the Jetdirect print server configuration. To avoid making changes to
your network configuration, remove the HP Jetdirect print server before performing a cold reset.

Note If possible, print a configuration page and menu map before performing a cold reset. This documents
the current settings for later reference.

To perform a cold reset

1 Turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again.
2 Press and hold during the memory count.
3 Continue to hold until all three control panel lights illuminate steadily, and then release .
4 When SELECT LANGUAGE appears on the control panel, press .
5 COLD RESET appears.
6 Press while COLD RESET appears on the control panel. The cold reset is complete.

To skip disk
Use the skip disk function to turn on the printer without recognizing the hard disk. This is useful for
troubleshooting hard disk problems without having to remove the hard disk.
1 Turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again.
2 Press and hold during the memory count.
3 Continue to hold until all three control panel lights illuminate steadily, and then release .
4 Press , and then press PAUSE/RESUME.
5 When SKIP DISK LOAD appears on the control panel, press .
6 The printer starts without recognizing the hard disk.

To skip calibration
1 Turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again.
2 Press and hold during the memory count.
3 Press , and then press PAUSE/RESUME.
4 Scroll to SKIP CALIBRATION, and then press .
5 The printer starts without calibrating.

ENWW 3 Product configuration 89

90 3 Product configuration ENWW
4 Product maintenance

Chapter contents
Preventative maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Image transfer kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Image cleaning kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Image fuser kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Cleaning the printer and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
General cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Cleaning procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cleaning the post charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cleaning the separation guide, feed guide, and front fuser guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cleaning the fuser input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Cleaning the registration roller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cleaning the other rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cleaning the tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Non-HP print cartridges and image drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Authenticating print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Storing print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Image drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Storing image drums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Firmware upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Downloading the new firmware to the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 91

Preventative maintenance

The image transfer, image cleaning, and image fuser kits are used in a preventative maintenance
routine for the printer.

Image transfer kit

The image transfer kit (part number C8555-67901) contains the following parts: the transfer roller,
the transfer belt, one charcoal filter, one toner wipe, two small tray rollers, and seven large tray
rollers.
The image transfer kit should be replaced after every 200,000 pages of printing. When the counter
reaches 200,000 pages, the printer stops printing until the kit is replaced and the count is reset at the
control panel.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an order for a replacement image transfer kit when the
ORDER TRANSFER KIT message first appears on the control panel display.
The product number for the image transfer kit for the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer is
C8555A.

Storing the image transfer kit

z Do not remove the image transfer kit from its package until you are ready to use it. Touching the
belt can degrade print quality.
z Store the kit in a cool, dry location. Sudden changes in temperature and humidity can cause
condensation to form on the belt, which degrades print quality.
z Store the kit in a horizontal position.

Image cleaning kit

The image cleaning kit (part number C8554-67901) contains one transfer cleaner, one air filter, one
toner wipe, and one toner collection bottle.
The entire image cleaning kit should be replaced at or before 50,000 pages of printing. The cleaning
kit will need to be replaced earlier than 50,000 pages if you are printing less than 2.5 percent or more
than 5 percent toner coverage per color per page. Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an
order for a replacement cleaning kit when ORDER CLEANING KIT first appears on the control panel
display.
The product number for the cleaning kit for the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer is C8554A.

Image fuser kit

The image fuser kit (part number C8546-69007) contains a fuser. It should be replaced after every
100,000 pages of printing. When the counter reaches 100,000 pages, the printer stops printing until
the kit is replaced and the count is reset at the control panel.
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an order for a replacement image fuser kit when the
ORDER FUSER KIT message first appears on the control panel display.
The product number for the image fuser kit for the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer is C8556A.

92 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

Cleaning the printer and accessories

To maintain superior print quality and performance, use the following procedures to thoroughly clean
the printer and the finishing device.

General cleaning

WARNING! In order to avoid shock hazard, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords before you begin these
steps.

CAUTION Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on the printer or finishing device. While cleaning the printer, be
careful not to touch the transfer or delivery rollers. Skin oils on the roller can cause print-quality
problems.
z clean the outside of the printer with a water-dampened cloth
z clean the inside of the printer with a dry, lint-free cloth

Cleaning spilled toner

Defective print cartridges can develop leaks. After a jam has occurred, some toner might remain on
the rollers and guides inside of the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up
this toner. A blank cleaning page is printed after a jam occurs in the fuser area.

Note To clean skin and clothing of toner spills, remove as much toner as possible with dry tissue, and then
wash the clothing in cold water. Hot water causes toner to permanently set into clothing.

Vacuum specifications
Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner with a conventional vacuum. Toner particles used in
this printer might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to the conventional
vacuum cleaner.
A vacuum cleaner specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine
particles (5 microns in diameter).
Dispose of waste toner in accordance with local requirements. Do not discharge toner particles in
drains.

First aid measures

z Ingestion—If toner is ingested, rinse your mouth thoroughly with water and drink several
glasses of water. If irritation occurs, consult a physician.
z Inhalation—If toner particles are inhaled, move to fresh air immediately. If irritation occurs,
consult a physician.
z Eye contact—If toner comes in contact with the eyes, immediately flush them with plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes. If irritation occurs, consult a physician.
z Skin contact—If toner spills on skin, remove as much toner as possible using dry tissue (more
than one might be needed), and then wash the affected area of the skin with cold water. If
irritation occurs, consult a physician.

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 93

Cleaning procedures

Some print-quality problems can be resolved by cleaning certain printer components rather than
replacing a printer part.

Cleaning the post charger

1 Open the right side door.
2 Locate the blue handle of the post charger cleaner on the front left of the image transfer belt.
3 Gently slide the post charger cleaner to the right until it stops. The spring should be compressed.
4 Slide the cleaner to the left back into place.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to clean the post charger a second time.
6 Close the upper right door. If the door does not close, make sure that the blue handle of the post
charger cleaner is positioned at the far left of the image transfer belt.

Cleaning the separation guide, feed guide, and front fuser guide
Clean these guides with lint-free cloth. If any dirt or dust cannot be removed, use alcohol on the lint-
free cloth.

Cleaning the fuser input

1 Open the front doors of the printer, and then swing the large green lever down.
2 On the front of the printer, locate the blue transfer-roller handle beneath the large green lever.
Grasp the handle and pull the roller out of the printer. Set the roller on a clean, flat surface.

CAUTION Do not touch the black foam roller, and be careful not to scratch the underside of the image transfer
belt as you remove the roller from the printer.

3 Remove the green tongs and blue brush mounted on the inside of the right front door.
4 Slide the open end of the brush onto the tongs until it snaps into place.
5 Hold the tongs so that the brush is at a 45-degree angle and align the brush with the transfer
roller slot. Insert the brush into the slot.

Figure 14. Cleaning the fuser input (step 5)

6 Slide the brush into the transfer roller slot until it stops, and then slide the brush toward you until
the brush is almost out of the transfer roller slot.

CAUTION Do not pull up or sideways on the brush. Push and pull the brush straight in and out of the printer.

7 Repeat step 6 three times, and then remove the brush from the printer.

94 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

8 Remove the brush from the tongs by raising the snap on the back of the brush and pulling the
brush away from the tongs.
9 Replace the tongs and brush on the inside of the right door.
10 Using one hand to support the underside of the transfer roller, turn the roller to a 45-degree
angle and align the roller with the slot. Slide the roller into the slot until it stops.

CAUTION Do not touch the black foam roller, and be careful not to scratch the underside of the image transfer
belt as you insert the roller into the printer.

11 Swing the green lever up, and then close the front doors.

Cleaning the registration roller unit

z Registration roller: Clean the registration roller by using a lint-free cloth. If any dirt or dust
cannot be removed, use alcohol on the lint-free cloth.
z Pre-registration roller: Clean the registration roller by using a lint-free cloth. If any dirt or dust
cannot be removed, use alcohol on the lint-free cloth.

Cleaning the other rollers

Clean these rollers by using a lint-free cloth. If any dirt or dust cannot be removed, use alcohol on the
lint-free cloth.

Cleaning the tray 1 separation pad

Clean the tray 1 separation pad by using a lint-free cloth.

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 95

Print cartridges

When you use an authentic HP print cartridge, you can obtain the following types of supplies
information throughout the cartridge life:
z the amount of cartridge life remaining
z the estimated number of pages remaining
z the number of pages printed
z other supplies information
Authentic HP print cartridges for the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer have the following part
numbers:

Print cartridge Product Part number

number
Black C8550A C8550-67901

Cyan C8551A C8551-67901

Yellow C8552A C8552-67901

Magenta C8553A C8553-67901

Print cartridge life is directly proportional to the coverage of toner on the page. Each color print
cartridge prints approximately 25,000 pages of letter-size or A4-size media at 5 percent toner
coverage (a full page of text).
Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an order for a replacement print cartridge when the
ORDER <COLOR> CARTRIDGE message first appears on the control panel display.

Non-HP print cartridges and image drums

Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges and image drums,
either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design
or control their quality. Service or repairs that are required as a result of using a non-Hewlett-Packard
print cartridge are not covered under the printer warranty.
When a non-HP cartridge is installed, the NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED message appears on the
printer control panel display. You must press the CANCEL JOB button to continue printing. The
message remains on the control panel display until all of the non-HP cartridges are replaced with
authentic HP cartridges. The non-HP cartridge cannot report on the status of the print cartridge, such
as the amount of cartridge life remaining, the estimated number of pages remaining, the number of
pages printed, and other supplies information.
Non-HP cartridges do not report the ORDER <COLOR> CARTRIDGE and REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE
messages.

Authenticating print cartridges

When you insert a print cartridge in the printer, the printer informs you if the cartridge is not a HP print
cartridge. If you insert a used HP cartridge from another HP printer, the printer might print as many
as 40 pages before it identifies the cartridge as a genuine HP cartridge and then reactivates the
supply-status features. You can override the NON HP CARTRIDGE DETECTED message by pressing the
CANCEL JOB button.
If the printer control panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge, and you
believe you purchased an HP cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline at (1) (887) 219-3183 (toll-free in
North America).

96 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

Storing print cartridges
Follow these guidelines for storing print cartridges:
z Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
z Store the cartridge in a horizontal position.
z Store the cartridge in a location within a temperature range of 0° to 35° C (32° to 95° F) and a
relative humidity range of 35 percent to 85 percent.
If the print cartridge must be removed from the printer, always store the cartridge under the following
condition:
z inside the protective bag in which it was originally packaged
z in a dark cabinet, away from direct sunlight
z with the correct side up, and in a horizontal position (not standing on end)
z in a temperature that is listed above
z away from ammonia or other organic-solvent fumes

CAUTION Never ship the printer with print cartridges or image drums installed. Excessive vibration during
shipping can cause toner to leak, contaminating the printer.

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 97

Image drums

Each color image drum prints approximately 40,000 pages of letter-size or A4-size media. When you
use a new HP image drum, you can obtain the following types of supply information throughout its
life:
z the amount of image-drum life remaining
z the estimated number of pages remaining
z the number of pages printed
z the other supply information
Authentic HP image drums for the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer have the following part
numbers:

Image drum Product Part number

number
Black C8560A C8560-67901

Cyan C8561A C8561-67901

Yellow C8562A C8562-67901

Magenta C8563A C8563-67901

Hewlett-Packard recommends that you place an order for a replacement image drum when the
ORDER <COLOR> DRUM message first appears on the control panel display.

Storing image drums

Follow these guidelines for storing image drums:
z Do not remove the drum from its package until you are ready to use it.

CAUTION Never expose the image drum to direct sunlight, or to room light. Bright light and direct sunlight can
permanently damage a print cartridge or image drum.
z Store the drum in a horizontal position.
z Store the drum in a dark, dry location with a temperature range of 0° to 35° C (32° to 95° F) and
a relative humidity range of 35 percent to 85 percent.
z Avoid exposing the drum to magnetic sources.

Handling instructions
z Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum.
z Do not set the drum on carpet. Set the drum on a flat, clean, dust-free surface.
z Do not expose the drum to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
z Do not expose the photosensitive drum to strong light. Blurred areas on the page might indicate
that the drum has been exposed to light for too long. This causes permanent damage to the
photosensitive drum. If this occurs, replace the drum.
z Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; it can cause internal damage
and toner spills.

98 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

Firmware upgrades

Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site

For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware

Downloading the new firmware to the printer

The printer can receive an .rfu update to a printer as long as it is in a READY state. The printer waits
for all of the I/O channels to become idle before performing the update.

Note The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM).
Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings return to default settings and must be
changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are
affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web access alerts.
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for
the printer to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of
the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (Fast InfraRed Connect [FIR],
parallel, or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the
printer, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paper-handling
devices, and the amount of memory installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (when
RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is
lost during the flash DIMM update (when UPGRADING PRINTER appears on the control panel), the
update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control
panel. The update must be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the printer.
Finally, any print jobs ahead of the .rfu job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.

Note The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the update.

Remote firmware update through a local Windows port

If the printer is connected through a local port (USB or parallel), then you can send the .rfu file
directly to the printer by using a Copy command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS (R)
window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.

Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me

1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p

Note If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the proper LPT port number
in the mode command.

2 Press ENTER.
3 The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
z LPT1 Not Rerouted
z Resident portion of MODE loaded
z Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
4 At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 99

where <FILENAME> is the name of the .rfu file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the
name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.rfu lpt1

Note If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks.
For example, type C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" lpt1

5 Press ENTER. A message appears on the control panel. See "Printer messages during firmware
update" on page 105. At the end of the upgrade process, READY appears on the control panel.
6 Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of
the current upgrade.
7 Type the word “exit” at the command prompt to close the command window.

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003

The .rfu file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in
an MS-DOS window.
1 At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>

where <FILENAME> is the name of the .rfu file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the
name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, C:\>copy/b c:\9500fw.rfu lpt1

Note If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks.
For example, type: C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" lpt1

2 Press ENTER. A message appears on the control panel. See "Printer messages during firmware
update" on page 105. At the end of the upgrade process, READY appears on the control panel.
3 At the command prompt, type the word “exit” to close the command window.

Remote firmware update through a Windows network

If the printer is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1 From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
copy /B <FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>

where <FILENAME> is the name of the .rfu file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the
name of the computer from which the printer is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the printer
share name. For example, C:\>copy /B c:\9500fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer

Note If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks.
For example, type C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\9500fw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer

2 Press ENTER. A message appears on the control panel. See "Printer messages during firmware
update" on page 105. At the end of the upgrade process, READY appears on the control panel.
The message “1 file(s) copied” appears on the computer screen.

Remote firmware update for UNIX systems

For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .rfu file to the printer is acceptable,
including the following:
1 At the command prompt, type:
$cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/dev/parallel>

where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> contains the .rfu file.

100 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer
protocol (FTP) to update your HP LaserJet firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating
system.

Windows operating systems

1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout.

Note Before connecting to the printer, make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Also, make
sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel.

2 Open a command window on your computer.

3 Type:
ftp <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>

For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp 192.168.0.90

4 Press ENTER.
5 When prompted for the user name, press ENTER.
6 When prompted for the password, press ENTER.
7 Type the word “bin” at the command prompt.
8 Press ENTER. The message “200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files” appears in
the command window.
9 Type:
put <FILENAME>

where <FILENAME> is the name of the .rfu file that was downloaded from the Web, including the
path. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\9500FW.RFU

and then press ENTER.

Note If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks.
For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\9500fw.rfu"

10 The following series of messages appears in the command window:

z 200 PORT command successful
z 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
z 226 Ready
z 226 Processing Job
z 226 Transfer complete
A message containing transfer speed information appears.
11 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.

Note The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.

12 At the command prompt, type the word “bye” to exit the ftp command.
13 At the command prompt, type the word “exit” to return to the Windows interface.

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 101

Mac operating systems
1 Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second
page of the configuration page printout.
2 Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the
computer hard drive under the Applications/Utilities folder.
3 Type:
FTP <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>

For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90.

4 Press ENTER.
5 When prompted for a user name and password, press ENTER.
6 Type put:
<path>

where <path> is the location where the .rfu file was downloaded from the Web, including the
path. For example type put C:\LJ\9500FW.RFU, and then press ENTER.

Note If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks.
For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJFW.RFU"

Note To ensure that the entire proper path to the .rfu file is placed in the Put command, type the word “put”,
then type a space, and then click and drag the .rfu file on to the terminal window. The complete path
to the file will be automatically placed after the Put command.

7 The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.

Note The printer automatically turns off and then turns on again to activate the update.

Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser

Follow the instructions below to use FTP through a browser to update the printer firmware remotely.

Note The following instructions can be used on Windows or Mac operating systems.

1 Open a browser window.

2 In the address line of the browser, type:
ftp://<IPADDRESS>

where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/IP address of your printer. For example, if the TCP/IP address
is 192.168.0.90, type FTP 192.168.0.90
3 Locate the .rfu file for the printer.
4 Drag and drop the .rfu file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.

Remote firmware update using Fetch (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x only)

For Mac OS 8.6 through 9.x OSs, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a Put
command. Download and install the program from:
http://download.cnet.com/downloads/0-10207-100-5250613.html
Follow these instructions to use Fetch.
1 Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2 Type the IP address of the printer in the Host: box

102 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

3 Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .rfu file.
4 Double-click the file to select it and download it to the printer. A confirmation message appears in
the main window.
5 Click OK.

Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet utility (Mac OS 8.6 and OS 9. x
only)
Follow these instructions to update the firmware using the HP LaserJet utility.
1 The first step is to make sure you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will
need the HP LaserJet utility and the 9500fw.rfu file, which is the firmware file for the printer.

The HP LaserJet utility can be found on the HP color LaserJet 9500 printing-system software
CD-ROM that came with the printer. If you do not have the software CD-ROM, you can obtain
the HP LaserJet utility by downloading the latest printer installer from http://www.hp.com

The firmware file (9500fw.rfu) can be downloaded from

http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware

When you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet utility, you are ready to begin the upgrade
process.
2 Launch the HP LaserJet utility.
3 Click Select Printer and locate the printer you would like to upgrade on the network.
4 Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for
the HP color LaserJet 9500 printer appears.
5 On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears that allows you to
choose a file to be downloaded to the printer.
6 Click Select File.
7 Locate the 9500fw.rfu file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click
Select. The Files dialog box updates showing the 9500fw.rfu file under File to download.
8 Click Download.

The HP LaserJet utility starts downloading the file to the printer. A progress bar keeps you
updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. When the file is downloading, RECEIVING
UPGRADE appears on the control panel. After the file downloads to the printer, PERFORMING
UPGRADE appears on the control panel.

Note The printer automatically turns off and then turns back on again after processing the upgrade.

9 After the printer turns on again and finishes initializing, print a configuration page to make sure
that the new firmware is installed. Press 22 on the control panel to print a configuration page.

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 103

Remote firmware update using the LPR command

Note This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003.

Follow the instructions below to update the printer software remotely by using the LPR command.
1 From a command window, type:
lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME>
or
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>

where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the printer, and
where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .rfu file.

Note The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1.
This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2 Press ENTER. A message appears on the control panel. See "Printer messages during firmware
update" on page 105. At the end of the upgrade process, READY appears on the control panel.
3 Type the word “exit” at the command prompt to close the command window.

Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer

This procedure requires that you install HP Web JetAdmin version 7.0 or later on your computer.
Complete the following steps to update a single printer through HP Web JetAdmin after downloading
the .rfu file from the HP Web site.
1 Start HP Web JetAdmin.
2 Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the printer in the Quick Device Find field, and then
click Go. The printer Status window appears.
3 Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to
the Device Lists folder.
4 Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the printer you wish to update in
the list of printer and click to select it.
5 Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper right corner of the window. Select
Update Printer Firmware from the Choose Action list.
6 If the name of the .rfu file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .rfu file you
downloaded from the web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
7 Click Upload to move the .rfu file from your hard drive to the HP Web JetAdmin server.
8 Refresh the browser.
9 Select the .rfu file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10 Click Update Firmware. HP Web JetAdmin sends the selected .rfu file to the printer. A message
appears on the control panel. See "Printer messages during firmware update" on page 105. At
the end of the upgrade process, READY appears on the control panel.

Note HP Web Jetadmin 6.5 can be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.

1 Start HP Web Jetadmin.

2 Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps:
a Click Device Management, and then click All Devices.

104 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

b Shift-click to select printers that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
c When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click OK.
3 To modify several printers in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4 The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears in the right side of the window. Scroll if
necessary to view it.
5 In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, choose an action. Type in the appropriate
information, and then click Return to Device Group when you are finished.

Printer messages during firmware update

The printer shows three messages that appear during a normal update process.

Table 39. Update messages

Printer message Explanation
RECEVING UPGRADE Appears when the printer recognizes the start of an .rfu
update until the printer verifies the validity and integrity of
the .rfu update.
UPRGRADING PRINTER Appears when the printer is reprogramming the firmware.
WAIT FOR PRINTER TO Appears from when the printer finishes reprogramming
REINITIALIZE the DIMM until the printer reinitializes.

Note To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the control panel
and make sure that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.

Troubleshooting a firmware update

The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.

Table 40. Troubleshooting a firmware update

Cause Result
Control panel cancelled a job. No update occurred.
A break in the I/O stream occurred during a send. No update occurred.
A power cycle occurred during RECEVING UPGRADE. No update occurred.
A power cycle occurred during UPGRADING PRITNER. No update occurred (resend the update
through a parallel port).
A power cycle occurred during WAIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE. The update is complete.

Note Print jobs sent to the printer while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the
corrective action required for each situation.

Table 41. Troubleshooting a firmware update failure

Cause Action
The .rfu file is corrupted. The printer recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the
update. Download the file again and send the new file to the
printer. Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware
The .rfu file contains the wrong printer model. The printer recognizes the model mismatch and rejects the
update. Download the correct file and send it to the printer.
Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj9500_firmware

ENWW Chapter 4 Product maintenance 105

Table 41. Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Cause Action
The upgrade is interrupted. See table 40.
A flash hardware failure occurred. The device might have a hardware failure.

106 Chapter 4 Product maintenance ENWW

5 Theory of operation

Chapter contents
Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Major printer systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Printer block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Sequence of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Timing charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Flat flexible cable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Engine-control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
DC controller circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
DC controller operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
T driver circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fuser control circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Low-voltage power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
High-voltage power supply circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Post charger power supply unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motors and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Formatter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
DIMM slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Formatter heartbeat LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Laser/scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Dual-beam method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Laser control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Scanner-motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Image formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Electrophotographic process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Image stabilization control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Paper-path system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Pickup/feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 107

Basic operation

Major printer systems

This chapter provides information about the following systems:
z engine control (page 130)
z formatter (page 146)
z laser/scanner (page 148)
z image formation (page 158)
z paper pickup (page 169)
Relationships among the four systems are represented in figure 15:

Laser/scanner system

Engine-control
system Image-formation system

Paper-pickup system

To external devices
through the formatter

Figure 15. Printer systems

108 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Printer block diagram

3 4
2

26 5

25
24
6
23 7

10

11
12

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13

Figure 16. Printer components

Table 42. Printer components

Key Description Key Description
1 Face-down tray delivery sensor flag 14 Registration paper sensor flag
2 Face-down tray paper-full sensor flag 15 Registration roller
3 T cartridges (T-CRG; print cartridges) 16 Secondary transfer roller (T2)
4 Laser/scanner assemblies 17 Fusing front paper sensor flag
5 P cartridges (P-CRG; image drums) 18 Fusing roller
6 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB assembly) 19 Pressure roller
7 Secondary transfer assembly 20 Fusing delivery roller
8 Tray 1 pickup roller 21 Duplex deflector
9 Separation pad 22 Face-up deflector
10 Pre-registration roller 23 Primary transfer roller (T1)
11 Feed roller 24 Photosensitive drum
12 Separation roller 25 Developing cylinder
13 Pickup roller 26 Primary charging roller

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 109

Sequence of operation
The engine-control system controls the operational sequences. Table 44 describes the sequences.
The sequence of operation from the time power is turned on until the printer enters the standby state
is described in table 43.

Figure 17. Power-on block diagram

Table 43. Power-on sequence

Order Description Order Description
1 Power is turned on 7 Memory tag initializes
2 Main CPU initializes 8 Cartridge memory check occurs
3 Sub-CPU initializes 9 Standby temperature adjustment starts
4 ASIC initializes 10 Residual-paper-jam check occurs
5 All fans turn on 11 High-voltage control check occurs
6 Formatter communication starts 12 Standby mode begins

110 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 44. Normal sequence of operation
State Period Operation
WAIT From the time the power is z power on
turned on or a door is closed z main CPU, sub CPU, and ASIC initialize
until the secondary transfer z power-supply-fan rotates
roller cleaning is complete
z memory tags are checked
z formatter interface communication starts
z high-voltage control sequence (values are set and the
secondary transfer roller is cleaned)
z adjustment is made to reach the standby temperature
z calibrations are performed (D-max, D-half, CPR)
z jam/door-open/failure/emergency-stop check is performed
STBY From the end of the WAIT or z print-start check is performed (search for print command)
(standby) LSTR period until either the z automatic delivery-request check is performed (the formatter
print command is sent from the commands the feed rollers to eject residual pages in the paper
formatter, or the power is turned path, and the ITB, fuser, registration, and pickup rollers turn
off on)
z calibrations are performed
z door open/failure check is performed
INTR From the input of a print z motor rotates
(initial reservation command from the z fan motors rotate at full speed
rotation) formatter until start-up of the z laser scanner motor rotates
primary transfer bias
z automatic power control (APC) is adjusted
z initial-rotation final check is performed (OPC pre-ghost
sequence occurs)
z jam/door-open/failure/sleep check is performed
PRINT From the end of the INTR z fuser temperature control occurs
period until the secondary z TOP signal turns on (engine to formatter output signal)
transfer bias is turned off z image control occurs
z high-voltage control occurs
z paper pickup control occurs
z next-page-pickup timing is coordinated
z toner is supplied to the drum cartridge
z jam/door-open/failure/emergency-stop check
LSTR From the end of the print z paper pickup control occurs
(last operation until the drum motor z scanner motor stops
rotation) and the ITB motor stop z high-voltage control stops
z fuser control reverts to standby
z fan-motor control occurs

Table 45. Failure sequence of operation

State Period Operation
JAM From the time the power is z TOP signal turns off
turned on until the end of the z emergency stops occur:
DOOR LSTR period
• scanner motor
OPEN
• high-voltage control
FAILURE • fuser control
• all motors
z door-open check occurs

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 111

Figure 18.
Power Switch ON
(Unit: Seconds)
Sequence INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

112 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

1 Drum Motor About 2.0
Timing charts

Timing chart (1 of 2)
2 ITB Motor About 2.0

3 Registration Motor About 2.0

About 2.0
4 Fuser Motor

About 0.1 About 4.4 About 9.8

5 Scanner Motor

About 3.5 Yellow About 7.0 About 1.3 About 4.7

6 Positive Charging Brush (AC)

About 2.1 About 1.0 About 7.5 About 1.0 About 3.2 About 1.0
7 Positive Charging Brush (DC)

About 2.2 About 1.0 About 7.5 About 1.0 About 3.2 About 1.0
8 Negative Charging Brush (DC)

About 2.6 About 0.2 About 7.9 About 2.2 About 5.1 About 0.2
9 Primary Charging Bias (AC)

About 2.5 About 0.9 About 0.3 About 5.8 About 0.4
10 Primary Charging Bias (DC)
About 4.7 -100v About 2.2 About 0.3
11 Developing Motor About 2.2

About 3.7 About 0.2 About 5.8 About 0.3

12 Developing Bias (DC)
About 4.8 About 0.1 About 2.0 About 0.1
13 Developing Bias (AC) About 2.0

About 2.5 About 0.4 About 16.3

14 Primary Transfer Bias

About 4.9 About 2.5

15 /TOP
About 5.0 About 1.8 About 0.7
16 /VDO About 1.8

About 1.5 Magenta

17 Magenta

About 2.4 Cyan

18 Cyan

About 3.2 Black

19 Black

20

21

22

23

Cassette feed; A4 media

ENWW
ENWW
Figure 19.
Power Switch ON
(Unit:Seconds)
Sequence INTR PRINT LSTR STBY

Timing chart (2 of 2)
About 4.9 About 2.5
1 /T OP

About 8.4 About 2.0 About 0.5 About 2.0

2 POST

3 /T OPR About 5.3 About 2.5

About 2.5 About 13.4

4 Secondary Transfer Clutch
About 0.2 About 0.2 About 2.3
About 2.8 About 0.9 About 1.9 About 0.1 About 4.7 About 0.3
5 Secondary Transfer Bias (+) About 0.2 About 0.2

About 0.5 About 0.9 ***** About 1.6

6 Secondary Transfer Bias (-)

About 10.9 About 0.6 About 0.2

-200v ***** About 0.4
7 Static Charge Eliminating Bias
About 0.5 About 1.3 About 0.8 About 0.4 About 1.4 About 0.6 About 2.0
8 Pickup Motor About 0.5

About 2.0 About 3.1 About 0.5 About 2.3 About 1.9
9 Pre-registration Feed Clutch

About 1.9 About 1.9

10 Registration Clutch

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Cassette feed; A4 media

Chapter 5 Theory of operation 113

Figure 20.
Secondary
Registration Secondary transfer Registration
front transfer front Registration paper Transparency Multiple feed
Lower cassette feed clutch clutch paper sensor clutch sensor
sensor sensor
paper width CL2
CL1 CL3 SR42 SR3 SR4 SR5
Pickup roller detection switch
Pickup up/down Lifter CL J3030 CL CL S P S P
1 2
motor motor J3071 1 2
motor Upper cassette

3
2
1
3
2
1

3
2
1

4
3
2
1

2
1
J3101

3
2
1
Pickup PCA

2
1
paper width Tray 1 paper Last paper J3028 J3081 J3031 J3032
M23 M24 M25

4
3
2
1
1
2
3

J54

1
2
SR11 SR12 SR13 SR14 SR15 detection switch Tray 1 pickup sensor sensor J3100L
M M M J3029L

N.C
N.C
solenoid SR1 J3100DH
J11L J12L SR43 J3029DH
J13L

1
2
3
4
J 3100D

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 J3029D

114 Chapter 5 Theory of operation

3
2
1

SL1

2
1
J12LH J13LH J3084D
SR16 SR17 SR18 SR19 SR20 J11LH SL

4
3
2
1
J52 SR1 J3005
J12D J13D

1
2
3
2
1
J11D

4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1
1
2
MP tray

1 3
2 2
3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J3004L J3025L J3027L

1
2
paper width

Wiring diagram (1 of 4)
Wiring diagrams

SR21 SR22 SR23 SR24 J3003L J3004DH J3027LH J803

sensor J3025DH

1
2
3
4
5
J3003DH J3004D J3027D

3
2
1
2
1
J3025D J3026L T driver PCA
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J3006

2
1
J3003D
11
10

J3026LH

3
2
1
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J3026D

5
4
3
2
1
J1401F
1
2
3
4
5

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

11

16
15
14
13
12
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
J3000L J3001L J3002L
J3000DH J3001DH J3002DH

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3001D J3002D

11
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

16
15
14
13
12
10
11
J3000D

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
10

GND(SG)
UPAPERS
UPTS
UPVS2
+3LED
UPVS1
LPAPERS
PRS
LPTS
LPVS2
LPVS1
RLDOORS
LFEEDSA
LFEEDSB
UFEEDSA
UFEEDSB
FRMOUTA
FRMOUTAN
FRMOUTB
FRMOUTBN
PUMOUTA
PUMOUTAN
PUMOUTB
PUMOUTBN
LUMOUTA
LUMOUTAN
LUMOUTB
LUMOUTBN
UWSIZE3
UWSIZE2
UWSIZEC
UWSIZE1
LWSIZE3
LWSIZE2
LWSIZEC
LWSIZE1
+24VA(FUSE)
MPTSL
+3LED
GND(SG)
MPTPSS
+3LED
GND(SG)
MPTLPSS
GND(SG)
MPTWSA
+5V
+24VA(FUSE)
PREGCL
+24VA(FUSE)
TR2CL
+3LED
GND(SG)
PTR2SS
+24FUSE
REGCL
+3LED
GND(SG)
REGSS
+3LED
GND(SG)
OHTSS
+3LED
GND(SG)
XMFEDSNS
5 +5LD
4 +5LD
3 +5LD
2 GND(SG)
1 LDILCKP

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J120 J119 J121 J112
J118
DC controller PCA
J110 J111
J124 J131 J117 J116 J122 J123 J115
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
11

11

11
10
10
12
13
14
10
12

10
12
FPI

N.C
+5V
FPO
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
+5LD
+5LD

FPCK
/FPCS

+24VA
+24VA
+24VA
FSPIN

+24VB
+24VB
+3LED
+3LED

+24VB
+24VB
VDO31
VDO32
VDO41
VDO42

FSPRS

FPGND
FP3_3V
/VDO31
/VDO32
/VDO41
/VDO42

FSMFG

RGMFG
LLSIZE1
LLSIZE2
LLSIZE3

ULSIZE1
ULSIZE2
ULSIZE3
LLSIZEC

FSMCW

RGMCW

DUPCLK
/DUPIDS
ITBFANX
PDOUT3
PDOUT4

FSPOUT

ULSIZEC
GND(SG)

GND(PG)
GND(SG)

GND(SG)
DUPSTSI
GND(PG)
GND(PG)
GND(PG)
GND(PG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)

GND(SG)
GND(SG)

DUPCMD
GND(PG)
GND(PG)

ITBFLCKX
FSMPWM

RGMPWM

ITBTHSNS

DUPFANEN
RGFSMCLK
RGFSMCLK

+3.3V(FUSE)
RGFSMDATA
RGFSMDATA
12
11
10
9 LDCTRL30
8 LDCTRL31
7 LDCTRL32
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9 LDCTRL40
8 LDCTRL41
7 LDCTRL42
6
5
4
3
2
1

6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3022D J3011 J3012
J3022LH
J3022L
Laser/scanner unit (C) Laser/scanner unit (Bk)
J3036 J3035

1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J109
13
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

6
5
4
3
2
1
J3102D J3008 12 +5LD 1 J3010
J3102DH 11 GND(SG) 2
M M Operation panel 10 PDOUT2 3
M11 M10 9 /VDO22 4

1
2
3
4
5
6
8 GND(SG) 5
J3102LH 7 6
Registration motor fuser motor VDO22 Laser/scanner
J3102L 6 LDCTRL22 7
5 LDCTRL21 8
unit (M)
4 LDCTRL20 9

3
2
1
3
2
1
J3103D J3033D 3 /VDO21 10
J3103LH J3033DH 2 GND(SG) 11
4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

J3103L J3033L J3076D J3077D 1 VDO21 12

1
2
3
1
2
3
J3076LH J3077LH J108
12 +5LD 1 J3009
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

N.C

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3076L J3077L 11
123 J1501 GND(SG) 2
4
3
2
1

4
3
2
1

2
10 PDOUT1 3
9 /VDO12O 4
3
2
1

J3037DA
TH4 8 GND(SG) 5
J3037DB J3023 J3024 J3034

1
PS1502 7 VDO12O 6 Laser/scanner
FM8 6 LDCTRL12 7
A7 B6 1 2 1 2 unit (Y)
J3037D ITB fan ITB 5 LDCTRL11 8
SW3 SW4 SR6 4 LDCTRL1O 9
temperature PS1501 3 /VDO110 10
Duplexing unit Fuser front
sensor Upper cassette paper Lower cassette paper 2 GND(SG) 11
(optional) paper sensor 1 VDO110 12
length detection switch length detection switch Fuser sensor
ITB PCA

ENWW
ENWW
Figure 21.
MT7
2K deck
(optional) High-voltage power supply
Upper fuser Lower fuser Upper thermoswitch Lower thermoswitch PCA 2F
heater heater J3007D
Upper Lower M3 TP1 M3 M3 TP2 M3 J9001
A4 B3 FT3

2
2
thermistor thermistor 1 2 1 2 7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J3007DA J3007DB

2
2
H1 H2 MT10 MT12 MT13 MT11
TH3 TH2

1
1
4
3
2
1
3
2
1

1
1
Upper center
FT14 Post charging unit
DEVCLKB
DEVCLKC
DEVCLKA
CHCLK
HVSEL
GND(SG)
+5V

FT15 thermistor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

FT11 FT10 TH1

J608 J501
FT17 FT16

1
2
1
2
6
5
4
3
2
1

1 GND(PG) UL1007 AWG18(BL) 1 J211

J3082L J3083L

1
2
3
FT13 FT12 2 GND(PG) UL1007 AWG18(BL) 2
J3082DH J3083DH 3 +24VB UL1007 AWG18(R) 3

2
1
2
1
J3082D J3083D

Wiring diagram (2 of 4)
4 +24VA UL1007 AWG18(R) 4

1
2
3
1
2
J202
M3 J3021L J3099L
J3021DH J3099DH J616 J105
FBTCLK
PSTACCNT
PSTDCCNT
P24VB
GND(PG)
RGV5

MT14 J107 J204

J3021D J3099D
1
2
3
4
5
6

3
2
1
2
1
P driver J210
PCA FFC FFC

1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
J3019LA J601 J104

UL3534 AWG16(W)
UL3534 AWG16(W)
UL3534 AWG16(BK)
UL3534 AWG16(BK)
UL3398 AWG16(Y/GN)
J3019LWH J203
1 +3.3V 13
J3019L
2 +24VB 12
6 5 4 3 2 1 3 +24VB 11
A6 B6 J3019LB
FFC 4 GND(PG)10
5 GND(PG)9 High-voltage power supply PCA A
6 +24VA 8
7 GND(PG)7

JLCANH
JLCANL
JLPWRON
GND(SG)
J3019D
8 +24VA 6

1
2
3
4
J3019DWH 6 9 GND(PG)5
6 5 4 3 2 1 A6 B6 J114 J125 10 +5V 4
5 FSTHSWI 1
11 GND(SG)3
J3019DB 4 GND(SG) 2
12GND(SG)2
J3019DA 3 FSUTH1AI 3
13 LDILCKP1
2 FSUTH1BI 4
1 FSTHSWO 5 J101 J201 J205 J207 J206

1
2
3
4
5
6
GND(SG) 6
FSUTH2I 7
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
4
6
7
8

GND(SG) 8

N.C.
N.C.
FSLTH1I 9 DC controller PCA
+5V
RGV5

FFC
P24VB
P24VB

GND(PG)
GND(PG)
GND(PG)

J9503 J129
PR1HVOUT 1
SUBPOUT1 3
TR1HVOUT 5
SBNYOUT
DEVHVOUT 9

4 N.C. 1
3 N.C. 2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

2 GND(PG) 3
1 R24V 4 J106 J103

UL3398 AWG16(W)
UL3398 AWG16(W)
J130 J102 J113

UL3398 AWG16(BK)
UL3398 AWG16(BK)
J301 J304

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

UL3398 AWG16(Y/GN)
11

10
14
13
12
10

FFC FFC
High-voltage
M4 Regulator
J9002
power supply
MT5 PCA B
Video controller PCA
J801
J303 J302
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)

J9502 J824
4 GND(PG) 1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

3 GND(PG) 2
2 R24V 3
T driver PCA
1 R24V 4 J411
J9501 J810
High-voltage

6
5
4
3
2
1

3
2
1
power supply
UL1015 AWG14(BL)
UL1015 AWG14(R)

PCA C
UL1015 AWG12(OR)
UL1015 AWG12(BL)

Power supply fan FFC

FM5
3
2
1
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)
UL3239 AWG22(TV-10)

+3.3V
GND(SG)
GND(PG)
+24VA

FSUHN
FSUHL
FSLHN
FSLHL
GND(PG)
RGV24
LASERV
LASERV
LASERV
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
+5V
+5V
+5V
+3.3V
+3.3V
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
/POFF
PSSSOPN
PSFNSPD
P24VEN
PSFNLCK
FSTHSWI
GND(PG)
GND(SG)
+5V
FSRLL
FSHDE
/FSUHD
/FSLHD
/FSSULONG
FSRLD
/FSRLDSNS
FSHCT
FSLTH10
FSUTH20
1
2

3 3
2 2
1 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2

2
1
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J60 J61 J11F J70 J5 J4 J3 J9 J2 J1

J2302 J2301

Power supply unit INL1 High-voltage

power supply PCA B2

Chapter 5 Theory of operation 115

ENWW 116 Chapter 5 Theory of operation
Wiring diagram (3 of 4) Figure 22.
6 1 6
J1701L
4
2

5 2 5
J3014

1
4 3 4
2
3 4 3
3
2 5 2
1
3

1 6 1
Left door switch

Density sensor
J3018LH
J3018D
J3018L

1 7
J3072L
J3072D
J3080L

2 6
J3080DH
J808

J3080D

J3072DH
J1403

J1402

1 20 DNSREF 1 3 5
J1302R

2 2 19 GND(SG) 2 4 4 1 3 GND(SG) 1
P
P

1 3 18 5 3 2
+5V 3 2 TNRFW 2
Color

4 17 6 2 3
DNSS 4 1 +5V 3
LED (R)

7 1
S
S

5 16 DNSP 5 4
J821
notice sensor

6 15
misregistration

+5V 6
warning sensor
Waste toner full
Waste toner full

16 RDILCKP
1 7 7 14 CPRONR 7
J1401

15 GND(SG)
2 6 8 13 +5V 8 1 3 1
14 LDILCKP
6 3 5 9 12 +5V 9 2 2 2
13 PI5V
5 4 4 10 11 CPRSR 10 3 1 3
SR2

12 TNRFULLX
4 5 3 11 10 GND(SG) 11
J1301R

11 GND(SG)
3 6 2 12 9 CPRSRST 12
10 TNRFWX
Upper left

2 7 1 13 8 CPRSAR 13
J3017

Color
door sensor

9 LUDSNSX
J3016D

1 N.C. 14 7 CPRONL 14
8 GND(SG)
J3016L

sensor (R)
J3016LH

15 6 +5V 15
7 PI5V
misregistration

16 5 +5V 16
6 FDJAMX 1
17 4 CPRSL 17
J3073L
J3073D

5 GND(SG) 2
18 3 GND(SG) 18
J3073DH

4 PI5V 3
19 2 CPRSRST 19
3 FDFULLX 4
20 1 CPRSAL 20
2 1 7 2 FDSLDX
J1302L
Face-down
delivery PCA

1 2 6 1 FUSEVA
J901

T driver PCA

3 5
Color

LED (L)
4 4
5 3

misregistration
6 2 1 2 2
1 2 1 1
SL

7
6
Face-up

5
4
flapper solenoid

J1301L
J3069D

J3074L
J3074D
J3069L

3
J3069DH

J3074DH

Color
1 N.C.

sensor (L)
J3086DH

1 GND(PG) 1
J3086L
J3086D
J811

2 FXFLCKX 2
1 1 3 1 6 GND(PG) 1
3 FXFANX 3
FM4

2 2 2 2 5 PFXRFLCKX 2
3 3 1 3 4 PFXFANX 3
Fuser fan

FM1
4 3 GND(PG) 4
J819

Rear FU
5 2 PFXFFLCKX 5

misregistration delivery fan

6 1 PFXFANX 6 1 GND(PG) 3 1 1
2 03FLCKX 2 2 2

J3079L
J3079D
3 03FANX 1 3 3
FM7

J3079DH
J806
Ozone fan

1 1 3
J823

2 2 2
J3089L

J3089D

3 3 1

FM6
J3089DH

Front FU
delivery fan
J3087L
1 +24VA 1
2 GND(PG) 2
3 +24VB 3

J3087D
J3087DH
P

J612

1 ENC41 4
J610
6
S

2 ENC5V 3
1 5 UL1061 AWG26 DRM4OUTAN 1
3 ENC42 2
2 4 UL1061 AWG26 DRM4OUTA 2
(Bk)

GND(SG) 1
J701K

4
P

M
3 3 UL1061 AWG26 DRM4OUTBN 3

M7

(Bk)
4 2 UL1061 AWG26 DRM4OUTB 4
Drum encoder

1
S

J613

Drum motor
J3097
J609
1 4 DVM4OUTAN 1
2 3 DVM4OUTA 2
P

M
3 2 DVM4OUTBN 3

M8
4 1 DVM4OUTB 4 1 ENC31 4
S

2 ENC5V 3

motor (Bk)
Developing
3 ENC32 2
(C)

GND(SG) 1
J701C

J3096
P
Drum encoder

J607
J614
6
1 5 UL1061 AWG26 DRM3OUTAN 1
2 4 UL1061 AWG26 DRM3OUTA 2

M
3 3 UL1061 AWG26 DRM3OUTBN 3

M5

(C)
4 2 UL1061 AWG26 DRM3OUTB 4
1
P

Drum motor
1 ENC21 4
S

2 ENC5V 3

J3095
J606
3 ENC22 2
(M)

1 4 DVM3OUTAN 1 1
J701M

4 GND(SG)
P

2 3 DVM3OUTA 2

M
3 2 DVM3OUTBN 3

M6
Drum encoder

1 DVM3OUTB 4
S

J615

motor (C)
Developing
J3094
J605
P

6
1 5 UL1061 AWG26 DRM2OUTAN 1
1 ENC11 4
2 4 UL1061 AWG26 DRM2OUTA 2
S
2 ENC5V 3

M
3 3 UL1061 AWG26 DRM2OUTBN 3

M3
3 ENC12 2

(M)
(Y)

4 2 UL1061 AWG26 DRM2OUTB 4

P driver PCA
GND(SG) 1

J701Y
4
P
1

Drum motor
Drum encoder

J617

J3093
J604
1 4 DVM2OUTAN 1
2 3 DVM2OUTA 2

M
3 2 DVM2OUTBN 3

M4
4 1 DVM2OUTB 4

motor (M)
Developing
1 ITBMERR 3
2 GND(SG) 2

J3092
3 ENC5V 1

SR45
sensor

J603
6

ITB rotation
1 5 UL1061 AWG26 DRM1OUTAN 1

J618
J3075
2 4 UL1061 AWG26 DRM1OUTA 2

M
3 3 UL1061 AWG26 DRM1OUTBN 3

(Y)
M1
4 2 UL1061 AWG26 DRM1OUTB 4
1

Drum motor
J3098

J3091
1

J602
4 4 DVM1OUTAN 1 4 UL1061 AWG26 ITBMOUTB 2
3 3 DVM1OUTA 2 3 UL1061 AWG26 ITBMOUTBN 3 4

M
2 UL1061 AWG26 ITBMOUTA 4 3

M
M9
2 2 DVM1OUTBN 3

M2
1 1 DVM1OUTB 4 1 UL1061 AWG26 ITBMOUTAN 5 2
1

ITB motor
6

motor (Y)
Developing
J611

J3090
ENWW
Figure 23.
P Memory P Memory P Memory P Memory
tag (Bk) tag (C) tag (M) tag (Y) ATR ATR ATR ATR
J16 J1006 Delivery fan
1 3 sensor (M) sensor (Y) sensor (Bk) sensor (C)
2 2 P Antenna P Antenna P Antenna P Antenna J3039 J3041 J3043 J3045 FM2
BD PCA BD PCA BD PCA BD PCA

(Y)
3 1 unit (Bk) unit (C) unit (M) unit (Y)

4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
Upper right

unit (Y)
(Bk) (C) (M) (Y)

T Antenna
fan

T Memory tag
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3

3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1

J15 J14 J13 J12 J3061 J3062 J3063 J3064

J17 J3038LB J3038LA J3040LB J3040LA J3042LB J3042LA J3044LB J3044LA FM3
J1007

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1 3

1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
2 2

(M)
3 1 J1005 J1004 J1003 J1002
1
2
3

J3040L

unit (M)
J3038L J3042L J3044L

T Antenna
Memory controller J3038D J3040D

T Memory tag
J3042D J3044D

Wiring diagram (4 of 4)
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
1
3
2
1
J18 J1008 J3044DA
1 3 13 J3044DB
J3038DB J3038DA J3040DB J3040DA J3042DB J3042DA
2 2 J1001
1
2
3

(C)
3 1 J3078L

unit (C)
T Antenna
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
J3078DH

T Memory tag
11

13
12
10
J3078D
3
2
1

J19
J1009
1 3
2 2

(Bk)
3 1

unit (Bk)
TM_FFC

T Antenna

T Memory tag
FUSEVA
+5V
/MEMCAE
MEMSEL3
MEMTDATA
MEMSEL2
MEMRDATA
MEMSEL1
/MEMSTOP
/MEMSTART
GND(SG)
MEMCLK
GND(SG)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
J802
GND(PG)
FDFLCKX
FDFANX
GND(PG)
FMFLCKX
FMFANX

ATRREF4
FUSEVB
ATR4
GND(SG)
ATRREF3
FUSEVB
ATR3
GND(SG)
+5V
/BDI4
GND(SG)
+5V
/BDI3
GND(SG)
+5V
/BDI2
GND(SG)
+5V
/BDI1
GND(SG)

ATRREF2
FUSEVB
ATR2
GND(SG)
ATRREF1
FUSEVB
ATR1
GND(SG)
13
1
2
3
1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

J802 J804 J805 J812

J818 J820
T driver PCA
J817 J816 J815 J813 J814 J807 J822 J809

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4

11
11

10
10
12
13
10
12

N.C.
+5V
N.C.

PI5V

PI5V
PI5V
PI5V

PI5V

/ACC1
/DEC1
/ACC4
/DEC4
/ACC3
/DEC3

/ACC2
/DEC2

ARM1B
ARM1A
FUSEVA

TCMA4
TCMB4
TCMA3
TCMB3
TCMA2
TCMB2
TCMA1
TCMB1

ARM4B
ARM4A

ARM2B
ARM2A
RDILCKP

GND(SG)

GND(SG)

ARM1BN
ARM1AN

GND(PG)
ARM4BN
ARM4AN

ARM2BN
ARM2AN
GND(PG)
GND(PG)

GND(PG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
GND(SG)
ITBSERRX

TCSNS4X
TCSNS3X
TCSNS2X
TCSNS1X
TTMPSNSX

ARM1COM

SCAN24VA
THUMSNSX

ARM4COM

ARM2COM
SCAN24VA
SCAN24VA

SCAN24VA
2
1
2
1

J3046D J3048D
J3046DH J3048DH
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

3
2
1
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

J3046L J3048L J3085D

1
2
1
2

J3050D J3053D J3056D J3059D J3066

2
1

J3085DH
J3050LH J3053LH J3056LH J3059LH
J3068 J3047D J3085L
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

J3050L J3053L J3056L J3059L

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

J3047DH
SR9 SR7 J3047L
RED(+)
RED(+)

1
2
2
1

T-LC motor T-LC motor

J3049D
rotation sensor rotation sensor J3049DH
(C) (Y)
RED(+)

M
1
2

M J3049L

M15 M13
3
2
1

5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1

T-LC T-LC J3015D

J3051 J3054 J3058 J3070 J3015LH
RED(+)

motor (Bk) M motor (M)

5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1

J3015L
1
2
3

M14

4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
3
2
1

J1701R
3
2
1
3
2
1

M M M M
4
3
2
1

J3013
J3052 J3055 J3057 J3060 T-LC
J3065

4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1

M16 M18 M20 M30 J3067 M

3
2
1

motor (C) Temperature 4 3

M Automatic M Automatic M Automatic M Automatic M12 J3020
/humidity 2 1
M17 registration M19 registration M21 registration M22 registration SR10 SR8 T-LC
motor (M) motor (Bk) motor (C) sensor
motor (Y) T-LC motor T-LC motor motor (Y) Right door
Scanner motor Scanner motor Scanner motor Scanner motor SR44
(Y) (M) (Bk) (C) rotation sensor rotation sensor switch
ITB sensor
(Bk) (M)

Chapter 5 Theory of operation 117

Flat flexible cable signals
This table provides information about DC controller connectors, pinouts, and signals. It is also useful
for understanding flat flexible cable (FFC) signals that are not detailed on the wiring diagrams.

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller

Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J101 1 +3.3 V
2 +24 VB
3 +24 VB
4 GND(PG)
5 GND(PG)
6 +24 VA
7 GND(PG)
8 +24 VA
9 GND(PG)
10 +5 V
11 GND(SG)
12 GND(SG)
13 LDILCKP O INTERLOCK RELAY DRIVE signal
J102 1 PSFNLCK I High POWER SUPPLY FAN LOCK DETECTION signal
2 P24VEN O +24 V OUTPUT ENABLE signal
3 PSFNSPD O POWER SUPPLY FAN SPEED SWITCHING signal
4 PSSSOPN I High SOFT SWITCH OPEN DETECTION signal
5 /POFF O Low POWER OFF signal
6 GND(SG)

118 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J103 1 FP3_3V
2 FPO O High OPERATIONAL PANEL SERIAL DATA OUTPUT signal
3 FPI I High OPERATIONAL PANEL SERIAL DATA INPUT signal
4 FPCK I OPERATIONAL PANEL SERIAL CLOCK signal
5 /FPCS I Low OPERATIONAL CONTROLLER CHIP SELECT signal
6 FPGND
7 +5V
8 +5V
9 GND(SG)
10 VDO41 I High VIDEO signal
11 /VDO41 I High VIDEO signal
12 VDO42 I High VIDEO signal
13 /VDO42 I Low VIDEO signal
14 VDO31 I High VIDEO signal
15 /VDO31 I Low VIDEO signal
16 VDO32 I High VIDEO signal
17 /VDO32 I Low VIDEO signal
18 VDO21 I High VIDEO signal
19 /VDO21 I Low VIDEO signal
20 VDO22 I High VIDEO signal
21 /VDO22 I Low VIDEO signal
22 VDO11 I High VIDEO signal
23 /VDO11 I Low VIDEO signal
24 VDO12 I High VIDEO signal
25 /VDO12 I Low VIDEO signal
26 /VDOEN O Low VDO OUTPUT ENABLE signal
27 GND(SG)
28 /TOP O Low VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS signal
29 GND(SG)
30 /BDO1 O Low BD OUTPUT signal
31 /BDO2 O Low BD OUTPUT signal
32 /BDO3 O Low BD OUTPUT signal
33 /BDO3 O Low BD OUTPUT signal
34 GND(SG)
35 /CCRT O Low STATUS CHANGE NOTIFY signal
36 SC I/O HIgh STATUS COMMAND signal
37 SCLK I SERIAL CLOCK
38 /PFED O Low PAPER FEED signal
39 /TOPR O Low TOP OF PAPER signal
40 /PDVL O Low PAPER DELIVERY signal
41 JLPWRON O High PAPER DECK POWER ON signal
42 JLCANH I/O High PAPER DECK COMMUNICATION signal
43 JLCANL I/O Low PAPER DECK COMMUNICATION signal
44 GND(SG)
45 /VCRST O Low VIDEO CONTROLLER RESET signal

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 119

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J104 1 GND(SG)
2 +5V
3 +5V
4 DVM1PHB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
5 DVM1VRB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
6 DVM1VRA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
7 DVM1PHA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
8 DRM1PHB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
9 DRM1VRB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
10 DRM1VRA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
11 DRMPHA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
12 DVM2PHB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
13 DVM2VRB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
14 DVM2VRA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
15 DVM2PHA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
16 DRM2PHB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
17 DRM2VRB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
18 DRM2VRA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
19 DRM2PHA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
20 DVM3PHB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
21 DVM3VRB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
22 DVM3VRA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
23 DVM3PHA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
24 DRM3PHB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
25 DRM3VRB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
26 DRM3VRA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
27 DRM3PHA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
28 DVM4PHB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
29 DVM4VRB O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
30 DVM4VRA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
31 DVM4PHA O High DEVELOPING MOTOR DRIVE signal
32 DRM4PHB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
33 DRM4VRB O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
34 DRM4VRA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
35 DRM4PHA O High DRUM MOTOR DRIVE signal
36 ITBMPHB O High ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal
37 ITBMVRB O High ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal
38 ITBMVRA O High ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal
39 ITBMPHA O High ITB MOTOR DRIVE signal
J105 1 ENC21 I DRUM ENCODER signal
2 ENC22 I DRUM ENCODER signal
3 ENC31 I DRUM ENCODER signal
4 ENC32 I DRUM ENCODER signal
5 ENC41 I DRUM ENCODER signal
6 ENC42 I DRUM ENCODER signal
7 GND(SG)
8 GND(SG)
9 ENCLON O DRUM ENCODER ON signal
10 ENC11 I High DRUM ENCODER signal
11 ENC12 I High DRUM ENCODER signal
J106 1 /DEC1 O Low SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal
2 /ACC1 O Low SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal
3 /DEC2 O Low SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal
4 /ACC2 O Low SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal
5 /DEC3 O Low SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal
6 /ACC3 O Low SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal
7 /DEC4 O Low SCANNER MOTOR DECELERATION signal
8 /ACC4 O Low SCANNER MOTOR ACCELERATION signal
9 /BDI1 I Low HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signal

120 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J106 10 /BDI2 I Low HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signal
continued 11 /BDI3 I Low HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signal
12 /BDI4 I Low HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signal
13 CPRSL I LEFT CPR signal
14 CPRSR I RIGHT CPR signal
15 +5V
16 +5V
17 +5V
18 GND(SG)
19 GND(SG)
20 TCCLK O T DRIVER SERIAL CLOCK signal
21 GND(SG)
22 TCSTS 1 High T DRIVER SERIAL DATA signal
23 /TCTMG O Low T DRIVER TIMING signal
24 TCCMD O High T DRIVER SERIAL DATA signal
25 MEMCLK I MEMORY CONTROLLER SERIAL CLOCK signal
26 /MEMSTART O Low MEMORY CONTROLLER OUTPUT START signal
27 /MEMSTOP O Low MEMORY CONTROLLER OUTPUT STOP signal
28 MEMSEL1 O MEMORY CONTROLLER CHANNEL SELECT signal
29 MEMRDATA O High MEMORY CONTROLLER DATA signal
30 MEMSEL2 O MEMORY CONTROLLER CHANNEL SELECT signal
31 MEMTDATA O High MEMORY CONTROLLER DATA signal
32 MEMSEL3 O MEMORY CONTROLLER CHANNEL SELECT signal
33 /MEMCAE O Low MEMORY CONTROLLER OUTPUT CONTROL signal
34 DNSS I TONER DENSITY SENSOR OUTPUT signal
35 DNSP I TONER DENSITY SENSOR OUTPUT signal
36 CPRSAR I RIGHT CPR SENSOR ANALOG signal
37 CPRSAL I LEFT CPR SENSOR ANALOG signal
J107 1 DCCLK O INVETER TRANSFORMER CLOCK signal
2 GND(SG)
3 FBTCLK O FLASHBACK TRANSFORMER CLOCK signal
4 GND(SG)
5 CHCLK O PRIMARY CHARGING AC BIAS CLOCK signal
6 GND(SG)
7 DEVCLKA O DEVELOPING AC BIAS CLOCK signal
8 DEVCLKB O DEVELOPING AC BIAS CLOCK signal
9 DEVCLKC O DEVELOPING AC BIAS CLOCK signal
10 GND(SG)
11 DADATA O High SERIAL D / A CONVERTER DATA signal
12 DALD O Low SERIAL D / A CONVERTER LOAD signal
13 DACLK O SERIAL D / A CONVERTER CLOCK signal
14 GND(SG)
15 /HVENBL O Low HIGH-VOLTAGE OUTPUT ENABLE signal
16 CHISNS1 I PRIMARY CHARGING CURRENT MONITOR signal
17 CHISNS2 I PRIMARY CHARGING CURRENT MONITOR signal
18 CHISNS3 I PRIMARY CHARGING CURRENT MONITOR signal
19 CHISNS4 I PRIMARY CHARGING CURRENT MONITOR signal
20 TR1ISNS1 I PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT MONITOR signal
21 TR1ISNS2 I PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT MONITOR signal
22 TR1ISNS3 I PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT MONITOR signal
23 TR1ISNS4 I PRIMARY TRANSFER CURRENT MONITOR signal
24 GND(SG)
25 TR2ISNS I SECONDARY TRANSFER CURRENT MONITOR signal

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 121

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J108 1 VDO11O O High VIDEO signal
2 GND(SG)
3 /VDO11O O Low VIDEO signal
4 LDCTRL10 O LASER CONTROL signal
5 LDCTRL11 O LASER CONTROL signal
6 LDCTRL12 O LASER CONTROL signal
7 VDO12O O High VIDEO signal
8 GND(SG)
9 /VDO12O O Low VIDEO signal
10 PDOOUT1 I LASER INTENSITY MONITOR signal
11 GND(SG)
12 +5LD
J109 1 VDO21 O High VIDEO signal
2 GND(SG)
3 /VDO21 O Low VIDEO signal
4 LDCTRL20 O LASER CONTROL signal
5 LDCTRL21 O LASER CONTROL signal
6 LDCTRL22 O LASER CONTROL signal
7 VDO22 O High VIDEO signal
8 GND(SG)
9 /VDO22 O Low VIDEO signal
10 PDOUT2 I LASER INTENSITY MONITOR signal
11 GND(SG)
12 +5LD
J110 1 VDO31 O High VIDEO signal
2 GND(SG)
3 /VDO31 O Low VIDEO signal
4 LDCTRL30 O LASER CONTROL signal
5 LDCTRL31 O LASER CONTROL signal
6 LDCTRL32 O LASER CONTROL signal
7 VDO32 O High VIDEO signal
8 GND(SG)
9 /VDO32 O Low VIDEO signal
10 PDOUT3 I LASER INTENSITY MONITOR signal
11 GND(SG)
12 +5LD
J111 1 VDO41 O High VIDEO signal
2 GND(SG)
3 /VDO41 O Low VIDEO signal
4 LDCTRL40 O LASER CONTROL signal
5 LDCTRL41 O LASER CONTROL signal
6 LDCTRL42 O LASER CONTROL signal
7 VDO42 O High VIDEO signal
8 GND(SG)
9 /VDO42 O Low VIDEO signal
10 PDOUT4 I LASER INTENSITY MONITOR signal
11 GND(SG)
12 +5LD
J112 1 LDILCKP I LEFT DOOR SWITCH signal
2 GND(SG)
3 +5LD
4 +5LD
5 +5LD
J113 1 FSUTH20 I FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
2 FSLTH10 I FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
3 FSHCT I HEATER CURRENT signal
4 /FSRLDSNS I Low RELAY DRIVE signal
5 FSRLD O High RELAY DRIVE signal

122 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J113 6 /FSSULONG O Low SLOW-UP CIRCUIT DRIVE signal
continued 7 /FSLHD O Low PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE CONTROL signal
8 /FSUHD O Low FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE CONTROL signal
9 FSHDE O INVERTER OUTPUT ENABLE signal
10 FSRLL I RELAY TEST signal
11 +5V
12 GND(SG)
13 GND(PG)
14 FSTHSWI I High THERMOSWITCH INPUT signal
J114 1 FSTHSWI I THERMOSWITCH INPUT signal
2 GND(SG)
3 FSUTH1AI I FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
4 FSUTH1BI I FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
5 FSTHSWO O THERMOSWITCH OUTPUT signal
6 GND(SG)
7 FSUTH21 I FIXING ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
8 GND(SG)
9 FSLTH1I I PRESSURE ROLLER TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal
J115 1 +3LED
2 GND(SG)
3 FSPIN I High FRONT FIXING PAPER DETECTION signal
4 +3LED
5 FSPRS I High FIXING PRESSURE DETECTION signal
6 GND(SG)
7 FSPOUT I High FIXING DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal
J116 1 GND(PG)
2 GND(PG)
3 +24VB
4 +24VB
5 FSMFG I FIXING MOTOR SPEED signal
6 RGFSMCLK O MOTOR COMMAND CLOCK signal
7 FSMCW O Low FIXING MOTOR SELECT signal
8 RGFSMDATA O High MOTOR COMMAND DATA signal
9 FSMPWM O FIXING MOTOR PWM signal
J117 1 GND(PG)
2 GND(PG)
3 +24VB
4 +24VB
5 RGMFG I REGISTRATION MOTOR SPEED signal
6 RGFSMCLK O MOTOR COMMAND CLOCK signal
7 RGMCW O REGISTRATION MOTOR SELECT signal
8 RGFSMDATA O High MOTOR COMMAND DATA signal
9 RGMPWM O REGISTRATION MOTOR PWM signal

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 123

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J118 1 GND(SG)
2 UPAPERS I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER OUT DETECTION signal
3 UPTS I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER SURFACE LEVEL signal
4 UPVS2 I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
5 +3LED
6 UPVS1 I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
7 LPAPERS I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER OUT DETECTION signal
8 PRS I High PICKUP SHAFT HOME POSITION DETECTION signal
9 LPTS I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER SURFACE LEVEL signal
10 LPVS2 I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
11 LPVS1 I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LEVEL DETECTION signal
12 RLDOORS I High RIGHT DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal
13 LFEEDSA I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER FEED DETECTION signal
14 LFEEDSB I High LOWER CASSETTE PAPER FEED DETECTION signaL
15 UFEEDSA I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER FEED DETECTION signal
16 UFEEDSB I High UPPER CASSETTE PAPER FEED DETECTION signal
J119 1 +24VA(FUSE)
2 MPTSL O MULTIPURPOSE TRAY PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal
3 +3LED
4 GND(SG)
5 MPTPSS
6 +3LED
7 GND(SG)
8 MPTLPSS I High LAST PAPER DETECTION signal
9 GND(SG)
10 MPTWSA I High MULTIPURPOSE TRAY PAPER WIDTH signal
11 +5V
J120 1 FRMOUTA O PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE signal
2 FRMOUTAN O PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE signal
3 FRMOUTB O PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE signal
4 FRMOUTBN O PICKUP MOTOR DRIVE signal
5 PUMOUTA O PICKUP ROLLER UP / DOWN MOTOR DRIVE signal
6 PUMOUTAN O PICKUP ROLLER UP / DOWN MOTOR DRIVE signal
7 PUMOUTB O PICKUP ROLLER UP / DOWN MOTOR DRIVE signal
8 PUMOUTBN O PICKUP ROLLER UP / DOWN MOTOR DRIVE signal
9 LUMOUTA O LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal
10 LUMOUTAN O LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal
11 LUMOUTB O LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal
12 LUMOUTBN O LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE signal
13 UWSIZE3 O UPPER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
14 UWSIZE2 O UPPER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
15 UWSIZEC I UPPER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
16 UWSIZE1 O UPPER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
17 LWSIZE3 O UPPER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
18 LWSIZE2 O LOWER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
19 LWSIZEC I LOWER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
20 LWSIZE1 O LOWER CASSETTE PAPER WIDTH DETECTION signal
J121 1 +24VA(FUSE)
2 PREGCL O PRE-REGISTRATION FEED CLUTCH DRIVE signal
3 +24VA(FUSE)
4 TR2CL O SECONDARY TRANSFER CLUTCH DRIVE signal
5 +3LED
6 GND(SG)
7 PTRSS I High SECONDARY TRANSFER FRONT PAPER DETECT signal
8 +24FUSE
9 REGCL O REGISTRATION CLUTCH DRIVE signal
10 +3LED
11 GND(SG)
12 REGSS I REGISTRATION PAPER DETECTION signal

124 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 46. FFC input/output signals on the DC controller (continued)
Connector Pin Signal name I/O Logic Signal description
J121 13 +3LED
continued 14 GND(SG)
15 OHTSS I TRANSPARENCY DETECTION signal
16 +3LED
17 GND(SG)
18 XMFEDSNS I MULTIPLE FEED DETECTION signal
J122 1 ULSIZE1 I UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
2 ULSIZE2 I UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
3 ULSIZEC I UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
4 ULSIZE3 I UPPER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
5 LLSIZE1 I LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
6 LLSIZE2 I LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
7 LLSIZEC I LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION
8 LLSIZE3 I LOWER CASSETTE PAPER LENGTH DETECTION signal
J123 1 +5V
2 GND(SG)
3 /FPCS O Low OPERATION PANEL CONTROLLER CHIP SELECT signal
4 FPCK O OPERATION PANEL SERIAL CLOCK signal
5 FPI O High OPERATION PANEL SEIAL DATA signal
6 FPO I High OPERATION PANEL SERIAL DATA signal
7 FP3_3V
8 FPGND
9 N.C.
10 N.C.
11 N.C.
J124 1 GND(SG)
2 +3.3V(FUSE)
3 DUPCLK O DUPLEXING UNIT STATUS CLOCK signal
4 DUPCMD O High DUPLEXING UNIT SERIAL DATA signal
5 DUPSTSI I High DUPLEXING UNIT SERIAL DATA signal
6 /DUPIDS I Low DUPLEXING UNIT DETECTION signal
7 +24VA
8 +24VA
9 +24VA
10 DUPFANEN O High DUPLEXING UNIT FAN ENABLE signal
11 GND(PG)
12 GND(PG)
J125 1 JLCANH I/O High PAPER DECK SERIAL DATA signal
2 JLCANL I/O Low PAPER DECK SERIAL DATA signal
3 JLPWRON O High PAPER DECK POWER ON signal
4 GND(SG)
J130 1 GND(SG)
2 GND(SG)
3 GND(SG)
4 GND(SG)
5 GND(SG)
6 +3.3V
7 +3.3V
8 +5V
9 +5V
10 +5V
J131 1 GND(PG)
2 ITBFLCKX I High ITB FAN LOCK DETECTION signal
3 ITBFANX O ITB FAN DRIVE signal
4 GND(SG)
5 N.C.
6 ITBTHSNS I High ITB TEMPERATURE DETECTION signal

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 125

Connector location

J3035

J123
J3008
J116
J117 J3036
J3033
(TH4)
J3022

J121 J3026
J3030 J3025

J3081 J3027
J3071J3029
J3028
J3032
J3101 J3031
J3100
J3009
J3010
J3011

J3012

J108
J109 J118
J110 J120 J125
J111 J13
J115

J1501 J122 J11

J3023

J3034
J3024

J12 J54
J52

J3007
J3001
J3000

Figure 24. Connector location (1 of 4)

126 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

J3051
J3053 J3055
J3054
J3052
J3060
J3050
J3070
J3056
J3058
J3057

J3064 J3078
J3089
J3063

J3062
J3059
J3061

J3002

J3004

J3005 J3003 J3006 J3084

J819
J818
J817
J816
J815

J823

J812

J802
J1001 J820
J810 J3078
J130 J3089
J103
J113
J102
J9002

J3019
J201
J300
J119 J11 J3002
J60
J61
J9
J3

J1
J4
J5
J2

Figure 25. Connector location (2 of 4)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 127

J3048 J3047
J3049 J809
J3046
J814

J808

J3068
J822
J3067
J3066 J807
J3065 J813

J3085

J3080
J3013

J1701
J3015 J1302
J1301
J3073
J3014
J3072
J3074
J3020 J1301
J1302

J1007
J1002
J811
J1006 J3086
J3079 J804
J3087 J805

J1003
J1008
J16
J17 J1009
J18 J1004
J19
J12 J3040
J3038 J1005
J13
J3044
J14 J3042

J15

Figure 26. Connector location (3 of 4)

128 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

J615
J617 J604
J605
J602 J614

J603 J606 J613

J607 J612
J618
J701Y J701M
J609
J3090
J3091 J610
J3092
J3093 J611
J3094 J3075
J701C J3095
J3096 J3097
J701K J3098

J821
J801 J803
J616
J601
J901
J3016
J3017

J3069
J608 J112
J106 J411
J3018
J1701
J114
J1401 J104
J206
J1403 J107
J1402
J204
J124 J203
J3019 J105 J202
J3082
J210
J3021 J3037 J101
J3083
J3099
J501

Figure 27. Connector location (4 of 4)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 129

Engine-control system

The engine-control system coordinates the laser/scanner, image-formation, and paper-pickup

systems according to the instructions it receives from the formatter. The engine-control system
consists of the DC controller printed circuit assembly (PCA), the T driver PCA, the high-voltage
power-supply PCA, the fuser power supply PCA, and the low-voltage power-supply unit.

Engine-control system

DC controller PCA
Laser/scanner system

T driver PCA

Image formation system High-voltage power Formatter PCA

supply PCA

Fuser control PCA

Paper pickup system
Low-voltage power
supply unit
Power supply unit

Figure 28. Engine-control system

130 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

DC controller circuit
The DC controller circuit controls the printer operational sequences. Motors, fans, clutches,
solenoids, and sensors are listed in table 47.

DC controller PCA
Power supply unit
IC3
Fuser DSP
Fuser
control P driver
unit
circuit

M M2
+24 V
Low- M M4
AC voltage +5 V M M6
input power +3.3 V
supply M M8

IC1 IC2
To Sub FM5
CPU
Main ASIC
CPU Drum encoder

CL3 CL M M1
M M3
FM8 M M5
M M7
Density sensor
SR45

Color M M9
registration
sensor M M10
SR5
M M11
SR6

SR24
SR42
Scanner motor
PS1501
Beam detect
PS1502
Laser driver
T driver

Duplexer
Laser/scanner unit
Memory controller

High-voltage power
Formatter PCA supply circuit

IC6
EEPROM
Tray 4
(hdn model only)

Bus line Serial

communication

Figure 29. DC controller circuit (1 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 131

DC controller PCA

M23 M SR1
SR3
M24 M IC4
SR11
M25 M Sub SR12
CPU
SR13
SL1 SL
SR14
CL1 CL
SR15
CL2 CL SR16
SR17
MPPCA
SR18
SR4 SR19

SR20
SW3
SR21
SW4 SR22

SW5 SR23

SR43
SW6
TH4

IC1
Main CPU

Figure 30. DC controller circuit (2 of 2)

Table 47. Motors, fans, clutches, solenoids, and sensors

Number Description
M1 Drum motor (yellow)
M3 Drum motor (magenta)
M5 Drum motor (cyan)
M7 Drum motor (black)
M2 Developing motor (yellow)
M4 Developing motor (magenta)
M6 Developing motor (cyan)
M8 Developing motor (black)
M9 ITB motor
M10 Registration motor
M11 Fusing motor
M23 Pickup roller up/down motor

132 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 47. Motors, fans, clutches, solenoids, and sensors (continued)
Number Description
M24 Pickup motor
M25 Lifter motor
FM5 Power supply fan
FM8 ITB fan
CL1 Pre-registration feed clutch
CL2 Registration clutch
CL3 Secondary transfer clutch
SL1 Tray 1 pickup solenoid
SR1 Tray 1 paper sensor
SR3 Registration paper sensor
SR4 Transparency sensor
SR5 Multifeed sensor
SR6 Front fusing paper sensor
SR11 Tray 2 feed sensor A
SR12 Tray 2 feed sensor B
SR13 Tray 3 feed sensor A
SR14 Tray 3 feed sensor B
SR15 Tray 2 paper level sensor 1
SR16 Tray 2 paper level sensor 2
SR17 Tray 3 paper level sensor 1
SR18 Tray 3 paper level sensor 2
SR19 Tray 2 paper surface sensor
SR20 Tray 2 paper sensor
SR21 Tray 3 paper surface sensor
SR22 Tray 3 paper sensor
SR23 Pickup roller shaft home-position sensor
SR24 Lower right door sensor
SR42 Front secondary transfer paper sensor
SR43 Last paper sensor
SR45 ITB rotation sensor
PS1501 Fuser delivery paper sensor
PS1502 Engaging/disengaging sensor
SW3 Tray 2 paper length detection switch
SW5 Tray 2 paper width detection switch
SW4 Tray 3 paper length detection switch
SW6 Tray 3 paper width detection switch
MPPCA Multipurpose tray (tray 1) paper width sensor
TH4 ITB temperature sensor

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 133

DC controller operations
z The main CPU (IC1) on the DC controller PCA controls the following printer operations:
• sequence of the printer
• communication with the formatter
• high-voltage power-supply circuit operation
• fuser control circuit operation
• loading and sensor operation
• communication with the duplexer (if installed)
• communication with the memory tag
• communication with the ASIC, sub CPU, and t-CPU
z The ASIC (IC2) on the DC controller PCA controls the following printer operations, according to
instructions from the main CPU:
• laser/scanner operation
• communication with the formatter
• high-voltage power-supply circuit operation
• rotation of the fuser/delivery motor and drum motor
• operation of the motors and sensors
• communication with the memory tag
• communication with the DSP
z The DSP (IC3) controls the following printer operations, through the ASIC:
• operation of the developing motors (Y, M, C, K)
• operation of the drum motor (Y, M, C, K)
• operation of the ITB motor
• operation of the registration motor
• operation of the fuser motor
• operation of the drum encoder
z The sub CPU (IC4) controls the following printer operations, according to instructions from the
main CPU:
• loading
• operation of the sensors and switches
z The EEPROM (IC6) stores backup data.

134 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

T driver circuit
The T driver circuit controls motors and fans according to the main CPU in the DC controller.

DC controller PCA

IC1
Main CPU

FM1
M M12
FM2 M M13
IC2 M M14
FM3
M M15
FM4 T-CPU SR7
SR8
FM6 SR9
SR10
FM7
M M16
SL2 SL M M18
PS901 M M20

PS902
SR2
PS1401
ATR sensor
PS1402

Right door switch Temperature/humidity sensor

Left door switch SR44

T driver PCA
Figure 31. T driver circuit

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 135

Fuser control circuit
The fuser control circuit consists of the following components:
z two heaters (H1 and H2)
z three thermistors (TH1, TH2, and TH3)
z two thermoswitches (TP1 and TP2)

Note The fuser temperature control circuit and safety circuit control the temperature of the fuser control
circuit.
Heater H1 heats the fuser roller and H2 heats the pressure roller. The upper-center thermistor (TH1)
monitors the fuser roller surface temperature, the lower-edge thermistor (TH2) monitors the pressure
roller surface temperature, and the upper-edge thermistor (TH3) detects temperature increases at
one end of the fuser roller.
Two thermal switches guard against the two heaters overheating by turning off power to the heaters
when the temperature increases abnormally. The upper thermoswitch (TP1) is in the center of the
fuser roller, and the lower thermoswitch (TP2) is in the center of the pressure roller.

Note After turning off the printer, wait a few seconds before unplugging the power cord to allow fuser-roller
alienation. If the printer is running hot, wait at least five minutes before unplugging the power cord.
This allows the fans to cool the fuser control circuit.

Fuser roller Power supply unit

Upper thermoswitch
Fuser temperature Fuser
Upper-center
detection signal temperature
thermistor
control circuit
Upper-edge
thermistor
Upper fuser
heater Safety circuit
Fuser temperature
control signal

Pressure roller
Lower thermoswitch

IC1
Lower-edge thermistor Main
CPU

Lower fuser heater DC controller PCA

Figure 32. Fuser control circuit

136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Low-voltage power supply
The low-voltage power supply converts AC voltage from the power source to DC voltage when the
printer is turned on. The AC power is converted as follows:
z +24 VDC for motors, solenoids, clutches, and the high-voltage power-supply circuit
z +5 VDC for the laser/scanner PCA, the Beam detect PCA, and the formatter
z +3.3 VDC for the formatter, sensors, and the ICs on the DC controller PCA
The +24 VDC consists of the following voltages:
z +24 VA (is constantly supplied from the low-voltage power-supply circuit)
z +24 VB (stops the power supply when the interlock switch is turned off)

+90 V
Noise Power supply unit PWM DC
Fuser
filter unit
Fuser control
circuit
Noise
filter
+5 V
Rectifier +5 V
circuit Active +3.3 V/+5 V regulator
Active filter filter converter +3.3 V
drive circuit
+24 V +24 V
Power +3.3 V/+5 V
switch converter High-voltage
Soft +24 V
drive circuit PCA interlock
Power switch +24 V converter
converter switch
supply +24 VB
drive circuit
fan
DC
Power supply controller
fan speed
control circuit PCA

Formatter +5 V
PCA

Beam detect
Sensors Switches Laser PCA
Drum
driver encoder
+24 VA

Solenoid Clutches Developing motor/pickup motor/

lifter motor/pickup roller/down motor
+24 VB

Drum/ITB/registration/fuser motor

+5 V

Switches Sensors Memory

PCA

+24 VA
+24 VB T driver
Solenoids PCA
Fan/T-CRG motor/
automatic registration/
scanner motor

ATR
sensor

Figure 33. Low-voltage power supply circuit

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 137

High-voltage power supply circuits
The high-voltage power supply applies a high-voltage bias to the four positive cleaning brushes, the
four negative cleaning brushes, the four primary charging rollers, the post charging unit, the four
developing cylinders, the four primary transfer rollers, the secondary transfer roller, and the static
charge eliminator. The main CPU (IC1) in the DC controller generates the high-voltage bias by
controlling the high-voltage power supply PCA through the ASIC (IC2).

IC1 IC2
DC Controller PCA
Main CPU ASIC

Secondary transfer Static charge Developing Primary charging Negative cleaning

high-voltage eliminating high-voltage high-voltage high-voltage brush high-voltage
generation circuit generation circuit generation circuit generation circuit generation circuit

SBNKOUT
DEVHVOUT

PR2HVOUT

PR3HVOUT
DV3HVOUT

PR1HVOUT

SBNMOUT
SPROUT

DV2HVOUT

PR4HVOUT

SBNCOUT
TR2NCNT

SBNYOUT
DV4HVOUT
Developing
cylinder
High-voltage power supply PCA

Primary charging roller

Negative cleaning brush
Positive
cleaning
Primary brush Post charging
transfer unit
roller (T1) Post charging
power supply
unit
Static Secondary Post charging
charge transfer high-voltage
eliminator roller (T2) generation
circuit
SBP2HVOUT
SBP1HVOUT
SUBPHVOUT

SBP3HVOUT

TR14HVOUT
TR11HVOUT
TR12HVOUT
TR13HVOUT

Positive charging Primary transfer

brush high-voltage high-voltage
generation circuit generation circuit

Figure 34. High-voltage power supply circuit

Post charger power supply unit

The corona power supply provides high-voltage power to the post charger power supply unit.

138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Motors and fans
Rear face-up
delivery fan Delivery fan
Fuser motor
Front face-up
delivery fan Fuser fan
Upper right fan

Ozone fan
Lifter motor Registration motor
Pickup motor
Print cartridge
motors

Pickup roller
up/down motor
ITB motor
Drum motor

Developing
motor

Figure 35. Motors and fans

Table 48. Motors and fans

Number Description Function Type Direction/ Controlled by Failure Service
speed detection part
number
M1 Y drum motor Drive the Stepping z Clockwise DC controller By RG5-
photosensitive motor z Half- and encoder 6188-
M3 M drum motor drum, primary full-speed 000CN
charging roller,
M5 C drum motor charging
brushes, and
M7 K drum motor primary
charging roller
cleaner.
M2 Y developing Drive the Stepping z Clockwise DC controller By ATR RG5-
motor developing motor z Half- and sensor 6188-
cylinder and full-speed 000CN
M4 M developing screw.
motor

M6 C developing
motor

M8 K developing
motor
M9 ITB motor Drives the ITB. Stepping z Clockwise DC controller By RG5-
motor Half- and encoder 6188-
full-speed 000CN

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 139

Table 48. Motors and fans (continued)
Number Description Function Type Direction/ Controlled by Failure Service
speed detection part
number
M10 Fuser motor Drives the DC z Clockwise DC controller Yes RH7-
fuser rollers motor and 1519-
and the counter- 000CN
delivery roller. clockwise
Also releases z Half- and
the fuser roller full-speed
pressure by
reversing,
which makes a
cracking noise.
M11 Registration Drives the DC z Clockwise DC controller Yes RH7-
motor secondary motor z Half- and 1518-
transfer roller full-speed 000CN
and the
registration
roller.
M12 Y print Drive the print DC z Clockwise T driver By rotation RG5-
cartridge cartridges. motor z One speed sensor 6022-
motor 000CN

M13 M print
cartridge
motor

M14 C print
cartridge
motor

M15 K print
cartridge
motor
M16 Y automatic Drive cam for Stepping z Clockwise T driver No RG5-
registration the automatic motor and 6181-
laser motor registration counter- 000CN
adjustment of clockwise
M18 M automatic the four laser z One speed
registration assemblies.
laser motor

M20 K automatic
registration
laser motor

M30 C automatic
registration
laser motor
(not used
because it is
the reference
color)
M23 Pickup roller Drives the Stepping z Clockwise DC controller No RG5-
up/down motor pickup and motor and 6097-
feed rollers. counter- 000CN
clockwise
z One speed

140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 48. Motors and fans (continued)
Number Description Function Type Direction/ Controlled by Failure Service
speed detection part
number
M24 Pickup motor Drives the Stepping z Clockwise DC controller No RG5-
pickup roller motor and 6097-
up-and-down counter- 000CN
arm. clockwise
z One speed
M25 Lifter motor Drives the tray Stepping z Clockwise DC controller No RG5-
lifter. motor and 6097-
counter- 000CN
clockwise
z One speed
FM1 Back face-up Cools the face- DC T driver Yes RG5-
delivery fan up delivery motor 6151-
unit. 000CN
FM2 Delivery fan Cools the DC T driver Yes RH7-
delivery unit motor 1521-
and the 000CN
scanner area.
FM3 Upper right fan Cools the ITB DC T driver Yes RH7-
unit. motor 1544-
000CN
FM4 Fusing fan Cools the fuser DC T driver Yes RH7-
and print motor 1522-
cartridge area. 000CN
FM5 Power supply Cools the low- DC z Half- and DC controller Yes RH3-
fan voltage power motor full-speed 2236-
supply. 000CN
(110 V)

RH3-
2237-
000CN
(220 V)
FM6 Front face-up Cools the face- DC T driver Yes RH7-
delivery fan up delivery. motor 1546-
000CN
FM7 Ozone fan Ventilation for DC T driver Yes RH7-
the post motor 1564-
charger unit. 000CN
FM8 ITB fan Cools the ITB. DC z One speed No RG5-
motor 6180-
000CN

Note The HP color LaserJet 9500 duplex unit does not have a fan even though it has a fan housing.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 141

Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors

Face-up
deflector solenoid
Secondary
transfer clutch
Tray 2 paper length
detection switch Registration clutch
Pre-registration
Left door switch
feed clutch
Tray 3 paper length Right door switch
detection switch
Tray 2 paper width
detection switch
Tray 3 paper width
detection switch
Tray 1 pickup
solenoid

Figure 36. Switches, solenoids, and clutches

Face-down tray Print cartridge motor

delivery sensor rotation sensors

Face-down tray
paper-full sensor ITB rotation sensor

Front secondary Transparency sensor

transfer paper sensor
Registration Last paper sensor
paper sensor

Multifeed sensor Tray 1 paper sensor

Upper left door sensor Temperature/

humidity sensor
Fusing delivery
paper sensor Density
sensor
Pressure
disengaging sensor
Waste toner-full Color
warning sensor registration
sensors
Waste toner-full
notice sensor

ITB temperature Front fusing

sensor paper sensor

ITB sensor

Figure 37. Sensors

142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 49. Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors
Number Description Controlled by Service part
number
SW3 Tray 2 paper length detection switch DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SW4 Tray 3 paper length detection switch DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SW5 Tray 2 paper width detection switch DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SW6 Tray 3 paper width detection switch DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SL1 Tray 1 pickup solenoid DC controller RG5-6090-00CN
Manual feed paper
pickup assy.
SL2 Face-up deflector solenoid T driver RG5-6150-000CN
Delivery feed assy.
CL1 Pre-registration feed clutch DC controller RG5-6016-000CN
Registration assy.
CL2 Registration clutch DC controller RG5-6016-000CN
Registration assy.
CL3 Secondary transfer clutch DC controller RG5-6179-000CN
Secondary transfer
assy.
MPPCA Multipurpose tray (tray 1) paper width sensor DC controller RG5-6090-00CN
Manual feed paper
pickup assy.
PS901 Face-down bin paper delivery sensor T driver RG5-6017-000CN
Face-down delivery
assy.
PS902 Face-down bin paper-full sensor T driver RG5-6017-000CN
Face-down delivery
assy.
PS1401 Waste toner-full notice sensor DC controller RG5-6038-000CN
Waste sensor assy.
PS1402 Waste toner-full warning sensor DC controller RG5-6038-000CN
Waste sensor assy.
PS1501 Fuser delivery paper sensor DC controller RG5-6038-000CN
Waste sensor assy.
PS1502 Engaging/disengaging sensor DC controller RG5-6038-000CN
Waste sensor assy.
SR1 Tray 1 paper sensor DC controller RG5-6090-000CN
M-feed paper pickup
assy.
SR2 Upper left door sensor DC controller RG5-6152-000CN
Paper delivery
sensor assy
SR3 Registration paper sensor DC controller RG5-6016-000CN
Registration assy
SR4 Transparency sensor DC controller RG5-6016-000CN
Registration assy

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 143

Table 49. Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors (continued)
Number Description Controlled by Service part
number
SR5 Multifeed sensor DC controller RG5-6016-000CN
Registration assy
SR6 Front fusing paper sensor DC controller WG8-5362-00CN
Photo interrupter
SR7 Print cartridge motor rotation sensor DC controller RG5-6022-000CN
SR8 Toner cartridge
SR9 drive assy.
SR10 OR
WG8-5362-000CN
Photo interrupter
SR11 Tray 2 feed sensor A DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR12 Tray 2 feed sensor B DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR13 Tray 3 feed sensor A DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR14 Tray 3 feed sensor B DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR15 Tray 2 paper level sensor 1 DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR16 Tray 2 paper level sensor 2 DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR17 Tray 3 paper level sensor 1 DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR18 Tray 3 paper level sensor 2 DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR19 Tray 2 paper surface sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR20 Tray 2 paper sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR21 Tray 3 paper surface sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR22 Tray 3 paper sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR23 Pickup roller shaft home-position sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR24 Lower right door sensor DC controller RG5-6097-000CN
Paper pickup assy.
SR42 Front secondary transfer paper sensor DC controller RG5-6179-000CN
Secondary transfer
assy.
SR43 Last paper sensor DC controller RG5-6090-000CN
Manual feed paper
pickup assy.
SR44 ITB sensor DC controller WG8-5362-000CN
Photo interrupter
SR45 ITB rotation sensor DC controller RG5-6188-000CN
Process cartridge
drive assy.

144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Table 49. Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors (continued)
Number Description Controlled by Service part
number
TH4 ITB temperature sensor DC controller RG5-6180-000CN
ITB assy.
N/A Temperature/humidity sensor DC controller RG5-6153-000CN
Humidity sensor
assy.
N/A Density sensor DC controller RG5-6123-000CN
Registration assy.
N/A Color registration sensor DC controller RG5-6123-000CN
Registration assy.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 145

Formatter

The formatter is responsible for the following functions:

z receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces
z monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status and error information (through the
control panel and the bidirectional I/O)
z developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine
z storing font information
z communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface
z controlling the PowerSave mode
The formatter continuously monitors the printer through the video interface. When the printer is ready
to print, the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller, which turns the laser on or off based on the
signal.

DIMM slots
The formatter has five dual inline memory module (DIMM) slots: J1 (firmware DIMM); J2, J3, and J4
(available for memory upgrades); and J5 (available only for forms and fonts, not memory upgrade).
Four of these are 168-pin slots, and one is a 100-pin slot. Only four DIMMs can be loaded at a time,
and the fifth DIMM slot (100-pin) is equivalent to the fourth slot (168-pin). If all five slots are filled, a
53.10.05 error appears on the control panel.

Formatter DC Controller PCA

Video signal K laser/scanner

Video signal C laser/scanner

External
device Video interface signal

Video signal M laser/scanner

Video signal Y laser/scanner

Figure 38. Formatter system

146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Formatter heartbeat LED
The formatter heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter hardware passed its own initial tests and is
operating correctly. See “Formatter heartbeat LED” on page 322 for more information.

Note The formatter heartbeat LED does not indicate that the firmware is operating correctly.

If the formatter heartbeat LED is visible, check other printer systems for problems and consider
performing a firmware upgrade. See “Firmware upgrades” on page 99.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 147

Laser/scanner system

The laser/scanner system is the laser/scanner unit that forms a latent image on the photosensitive
drum based on the VDO and /VDO signals sent from the formatter. This printer contains four laser/
scanner units (one for each color), and each laser/scanner unit is structured the same.

VDO1 VDO2 Formatter PCA /BDO

/VDO1 /VDO2

DC controller PCA
PDOUT CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 /ACC /DEC /BDI

T driver PCD

Four-sided mirror
Cylindrical lens Scanner motor
Focus lens Scanner driver

Laser driver Beam detect

PCA
Collimator
lens Beam detect
mirror
Automatic
registration
motor

Reflecting
mirror

LDE

Photosensitive drum

Figure 39. Laser/scanner system

148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Dual-beam method
The laser/scanner unit of this printer contains two laser diodes in the laser unit. The printer employs
the “dual-beam method,” which scans two lines simultaneously.
Based on signals it receives from the DC controller and the formatter, the laser/scanner PCA in turn
signals the two laser diodes to emit laser beams. The beams strike a four-sided mirror that rotates at
a constant speed through the collimator lens and cylindrical lens. The beams reflect off of the mirror,
pass through a focusing lens and a reflective mirror, and focus on the photosensitive drum.
The scanning mirror, rotating at a constant speed, reflects the laser beams, which scan across the
drum at a constant speed. Then, a latent image is formed on the drum surface by constant-speed
rotation of the photosensitive drum and constant-speed scanning of the laser beams.

First scan

Second scan LD1 scan line

Third scan
LD2 scan line
Fourth scan

Feed direction

Image area

Figure 40. Dual-beam method

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 149

Laser control
The laser control turns the two laser diodes (LD1 and LD2) on and controls the specific amount of
light. The amount of light is based on the video (VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, and /VDO2) signals that the
formatter sends through the DC controller to the laser drive circuit in the laser driver IC.
The laser control (CNT0, CNT1, and CNT2) sends the ASIC (IC2) signals to the logic circuit in the
laser driver IC. The laser driver IC then performs the automatic emission control of the laser diodes
(APC), the image mask control, and a forced light emission of each laser diode.
The logic circuit performs the following functions:
z starts the print mode when all of the laser control signals are “high”
z turns on or turns off the laser diodes according to the video signals

DC controller PCA Laser driver PCA

LD1 PD LD2

+5V
J108 J3009
-12 -1
VCC
VDO1 -1 VDO1 -12 LD1 LD2
-3 /VDO1 -10 drive drive
/VDO1 circuit circuit
VDO2 -7 VDO2 -6
/VDO2 -9 /VDO2 -4

Current/voltage Current/voltage
switching circuit switching circuit
Main
CPU Standard
(IC1) voltage

-10 PDOUT -10

C12 Laser current Laser current C22
set circuit set circuit

ASIC
(IC2) -4 CNT0 -9
Logic circuit
-5 CNT1 -8
-6 CNT2 -7

-2/8/11 -2/5/11 GND

Laser driver IC

J106-9 /BDI J801-29 T driver PCA J812-11 J3064-2 Beam detect PCA

Figure 41. Laser control

150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Laser diode automatic light emission control
The laser diode automatic light emission control (APC) emits a specified amount of light from the
laser diodes. This is performed in the laser driver IC, and is based on the laser control signals that
the DC controller sends.
Two types of APCs are involved:
z initial APC
• is performed during primary rotation
• adjusts the amount of laser light
• detects laser failures
z between-lines APC
• is performed during printing
• performs the laser light amount adjustment for one line before the line begins printing
When the CNT0 signal is low, the CNT1 signal is high, and the CNT2 signal is low, the laser driver IC
goes into sample mode for laser diode 1 (LD1) which forces LD1 to emit light. When the CNT0 signal
is high, the CNT1 signal is low, and the CNT2 signal is L, the laser driver IC goes into the sample
mode for laser diode 2 (LD2), which forces LD2 to emit light. The photo diode (PD) detects the
amount of emitted light from each laser diode, and the amount is compared to the standard voltage
through the current/voltage convert circuit.
If the amount of light that the laser diodes emit is larger than the standard voltage, the condensers
(C12 and C22) discharge to decrease the laser current. If the amount of light that the laser diodes
emit is smaller than the standard voltage, C12 or C22 charges to increase the laser current. When
the laser light voltage amount equals the standard voltage amount, the emitted laser diode-light
amount equals the target laser-light amount.

Note When the CNT0 signal is high, the CNT1 signal is high, and the CNT2 signal is low, LD1 and LD2 are
automatically turned off and the sample hold circuit enters the hold state (image mask state). Also, the
laser driver IC converts the controlled laser light amount to the C12 and C22 voltages and stores the
amounts.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 151

Image mask control
The image mask control is used to avoid the laser beam emission on a non-image area during
periods other than the unblanking period.
When the CNT0 and the CNT1 signals are high, and the CNT2 signal is low, all of the signals from
the CPT to the laser driver IC, LD1, and LD2 are turned off automatically. The sample-hold circuit
then enters the image mask state. During the image mask state, LD1 and LD2 do not emit light even
if the VDO1, /VDO1, VDO2, and /VDO2 signals are sent.

/BD

margin masking
Top and bottom

/TOP
Right and left
margin masking

signal
T2
signal

T1

89 ms
2 mm

T3
2 mm

2 mm 2 mm

Figure 42. Image mask control

Horizontal synchronous control

The horizontal synchronous control aligns the writing position in the image horizontal direction. The
ASIC generates the unblanking signal in the main CPU based on the BD input (/BDI) signal that the
Beam detect PCA sends. Then, the ASIC controls the laser control signals and forcefully emits light
from LD1 and LD2 during the unblanking period.
A small, fixed mirror (Beam detect mirror) is located at the scanning ending position in the optical
path of the laser beam. The Beam detect mirror reflects each laser beam and the beams are sent to
the Beam detect PCA in the laser/scanner unit. By detecting the laser beam, the Beam detect circuit
PCA generates a /BDI signal. Based on the /BDI signal, the ASIC in the DC controller generates a
horizontal sync (/BDO) signal. After inputting the /BDO signal, the formatter outputs the video signals
to the DC controller to align the starting position in the image horizontal direction.

152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Laser failure detection
This printer performs a correct laser control by detecting the laser control status from the DC
controller. The laser failure detection determines a laser failure, Beam detect failure, and Beam
detect error from the ASIC in the DC controller, which monitors the laser current monitor (PDOUT)
signal and the /BDI signal.
The CPU determines a laser/scanner failure if the following occur:
z the PDOUT signal is not detected during the APC period
z the /BDI signal is not detected during print operation
The CPU determines a Beam detect error if the following occurs:
z a determined period of the /BDI signal is out of a specified range during a print operation

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 153

Scanner-motor control
The scanner-motor control rotates the scanner motor so the laser can strike the laser beam at a
correct position on the photosensitive drum.

DC controller PCA

IC1 J106 J801 J812 J3064

main /BDI -9 -29 -11 -2
CPU Beam detect PCA

IC2 +24VA Scanner motor

+24VA
ASIC
J817 J3050
-1 -9 Scanner motor
J106 J801 driver IC
/ACC -2 -36 -2 -2 -8
Frequency Integrator Drive
comparator /DEC -3 -7 circuit circuit
-1 -37

-4 -6
Reference
clock

X1
T driver PCA
Frequency
divider
M
Scanner motor driver PCA

Figure 43. Scanner motor control

Scanner-motor-speed control
The scanner-motor-speed control rotates the scanner motor at a constant speed. This control is a
function of the DC controller controlling the scanner-motor-driver IC. The scanner motor, which is
integrated with the scanner motor drive circuit, is a three-phase, 12-pole, DC, brushless motor with a
built-in hall device.
The scanner motor speed control process includes the following functions:
1 When the printer is turned on, the ASIC on the DC controller generates the standard clock based
on oscillation frequency of the oscillator through the main CPU.
2 When the main CPU receives a print command, the ASIC sets the scanner motor acceleration
(/ACC) signal to low, and then the scanner driver IC rotates the scanner motor. The scanner
motor revolutions increase while the /ACC signal is low.
3 When the scanner motor rotates, the DC controller forcefully emits a laser and the /BDI signal is
sent from the Beam detect PCA.
4 By using the frequency comparator, the ASIC compares the frequency of the /BDI signal to the
frequency of the reference clock.
5 To control the /ACC signal and /DEC signal, the ASIC controls the scanner revolution so that the
scanner motor revolution reaches the set rotation counts.
6 The /DEC signal is set to low to decrease the motor revolutions in order for the scanner to stop.

154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Scanner motor failure detection
The main CPU monitors the /BDI signal that is sent from the Beam detect PCA to determine the
scanner rotation speed. If the /BDI signal is not detected during print operation, the main CPU has
identified a Beam detect error and stops the print engine. Then, the main CPU transfers the error
information to the formatter.

Color plane registration calibration control

The color plane registration (CPR) sensors detect CPR. For each color, the DC controller adjusts the
vertical scanning writing position and the vertical scanning skew, and the formatter adjusts the
horizontal scanning writing position and horizontal scanning magnification.
The CPR calibration control performs the following functions:
z image CPR range adjustment
z laser-beam-skew calibration

Image CPR adjustment

Image CPR adjustment information is adjusted for each color. This adjustment includes the following
functions:
z determination of the horizontal scanning writing position
z determination of the horizontal scanning magnification
z determination of the vertical scanning writing position
z determination of the vertical scanning skew
The DC controller and formatter measure the CPR range in the horizontal and vertical scanning
directions. They use the CPR sensors to adjust the CPR based on information from the
measurement results. The DC controller writes CPR detection patterns in four colors on the ITB in
response to the commands from the formatter when the following occur:
z the printer is turned on
z the P-crg or the ITB is inserted or removed
z temperature change inside the printer is out of the specified range.
The DC controller uses the detection pattern positions that the CPR sensors measure to calculate
the CPR range. The DC controller obtains the CPR information, and sends the information for each
color to the formatter.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 155

CPR Detection patterns
sensors
ITB

CPR
detection pattern

Measured color (Y)

Measured color (M)

Standard color (C)
Measured color (K)

Figure 44. Color plane registration (CPR) adjustment

156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Laser-beam-skew calibration
To calibrate the laser-beam-skew, the laser beam scanning line (vertical scanning skew) on the
photosensitive drum is calibrated. The vertical scanning skew is adjusted by shifting the long
diffractive element (LDE) in the laser/scanner unit.
The cam rotates when the automatic registration motor rotates. One end of the LDE is fixed and the
other end is pressed against the cam so that the LDE changes its horizontal angle as the cam
rotates. The horizontal scanning skew is adjusted by changing an angle of the LDE by rotating the
automatic registration motor clockwise or counterclockwise.

Cam
M
Automatic registration motor

Laser beam

LDE
LDE

Cam
Photosensitive
drum
Photosensitive
drum

Figure 45. Laser beam skew calibration

Laser adjustment
The following two types of alignment that are adjusted manually:
z inter-dot runout (lengthens the scan line)
z parallelism

Note See Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies (page 223) for more information about these adjustments.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 157

Image formation system

Electrophotographic process

Note The following are the main components of the electrophotographic (EP) process:
z four lasers
z four print cartridges
z four image drum cartridges
z the ITB
z the post charger
z the secondary transfer roller
z the fuser
z the cleaning blade assembly

Lasers

Print cartridges

Print cartridges

Primary charging
roller

Negative
charging
brush

Positive
charging
brush

Cleaning Developing Photosensitve

blade Image cylinder drum
assembly drums
Fuser Primary transfer Post charger
roller

ITB

Secondary
transfer
roller

Figure 46. EP process main components

158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Step 1
1 The primary charge roller is given a negative charge.
2 On the image drum, ac bias is applied to replace uneven and previously charged areas with an
even, negative charge.
3 The dc bias is applied to control density.

Note This procedure occurs in the same way for all four image drums.

Primary charging roller

ac bias
Photosensitve
drum

dc bias

Figure 47. Primary charging (step 1)

Step 2
1 A laser beam strikes the charged surface of the OPC to write a latent image.
2 Areas that are exposed to the laser strikes are neutralized and attract toner.

Note This procedure occurs in the same way for all four image drums.

Laser beam

OPC

Unexposed areas Exposed areas

Figure 48. Laser writing latent image (step 2)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 159

Step 3
1 The appropriate amount of toner is fed from the print cartridge into the image drum.
2 When in the image drum, the non-magnetic toner is mixed with the magnetic carrier.
3 The mixing process of the two augers applies a negative charge to the toner particles.
4 The magnet inside the developing cylinder and the applied biases attract the magnetic carrier,
creating brush-like fibers of magnetic carrier.
5 The developing cylinder rotates the carrier brushes past a doctor blade, which trims the brushes
to an even and specified height.
6 Toner is picked up, and then brushed onto the OPC as the developing cylinder rotates.
7 Toner transfers from the brushes to the laser-discharged OPC surfaces.
8 As the toner is used, the automatic toner replenishment (ATR) sensor in the P cartridge detects
the toner-to-carrier ratio. The T-cartridge augers turn to feed the amount of toner into the P
cartridge.

Developing cylinder

Magnet

Toner

Carrier (magnetic)

Developing unit
ac bias

Photosensitve drum

dc bias
Blade

Screw

Figure 49. Developing (step 3)

160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Step 4
1 The ITB starts without bias, and then positive bias is applied to the primary transfer roller (T1).
2 Negatively-charged toner on the image drum is attracted to the positive charge on the primary
transfer roller and to the ITB surface.
3 After T1 transfer, a static charge eliminator drops the positive charge on the ITB to keep from
transferring toner too early at the next T1 station.

Note This procedure is repeated for each primary color in the order of YMCK, and creates piles of four toner
colors on the belt.

Photosensitve drum

ITB

Primary transfer roller Static charge eliminator

dc bias

Figure 50. Primary transfer (step 4)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 161

Step 5
1 The post charger applies an increased negative charge and a more even charge to the toner
piles.

Note This procedure is similar to what happens in the HP color LaserJet 8550.

The post charger is not used for all printed pages.

ac bias

Post charging unit

dc bias
ITB

Figure 51. Post charging (step 5)

Step 6
1 Media is fed between a nip that is formed by the ITB, secondary transfer backing roller (T2
backing roller), and the image transfer roller (T2 roller).
2 Positive bias is applied to the T2 roller. This attracts the negatively charged toner piles from the
ITB to the media.

Secondary transfer
feed roller

ITB

Media

Secondary transfer roller (T2)

Figure 52. Secondary transfer (step 6)

162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Step 7
1 The media is separated from the ITB.
2 The static charge eliminator stabilizes the toner on the media before the fusing phase.

Secondary transfer
feed roller

Media

Static charge
eliminator

Secondary transfer roller

Figure 53. Separation (step 7)

Step 8
1 Heat and pressure are applied to melt toner to the media.

Note The two fuser rollers are rubber-coated to handle thick media and for improved gloss levels.

Halogen heaters
Fuser roller

Toner
Media

Pressure roller

Figure 54. Fusing (step 8)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 163

Step 9
1 The cleaning blade rides on the ITB and scrapes off any residual toner remaining from the
secondary transfer roller.
2 Falling toner is directed to an auger by the waste toner collection sheet.
3 The auger moves the toner into the toner collection bottle.

ITB

Waste toner
Cleaning collection sheet
blade
Waste toner
transport screw

Figure 55. ITB cleaning (step 9)

Step 10
1 To clean residual toner from the OPC, two brushes apply charge to the residual toner. The first
charge is positive, and the second charge is negative.

Developing Primary charging roller

cylinder
Negative charging brush

Photosensitive
Developing drum
unit
Residual
toner
Positive charging brush

ITB

Primary transfer roller

Figure 56. OPC cleaning

164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Step 11
1 Negatively charged toner passes the charging roller where the carrier brushes pick it off of the
OPC, and then it is returned to be used again.

Developing
cylinder

ac bias

dc bias
Photosensitive
drum

Figure 57. OPC cleaning toner collection (step 11)

Step 12
1 During the OPC cleaning, some positively charged toner that was not charged negatively in step
10 adheres to the primary charging roller (these particles adhere to the primary charging roller).
2 When the particles go around the primary charging roller, the particles are rubbed by the primary
charging cleaner and receive a negative charge.
3 The toner particles transfer back to the OPC surface, and are lifted off of the OPC by the carrier
brushes (such as step 11).

Primary charging
cleaner
Primary charging roller

ac bias

dc bias
Photosensitive
drum

Figure 58. OPC cleaning toner not charged by brushes (step 12)

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 165

Image stabilization control
The image stabilization control reduces image density variations (for example, those that result from
deteriorations of the photosensitive drum or carrier). Three types of image stabilization control are
available:
z environment calibration control
z image-density calibration control (D-max)
z image halftone calibration control (D-half)

Environment calibration control

The DC controller determines the printer environment based on an interior temperature and humidity
signal. The DC controller performs the following actions to obtain an optimal image:
z various high-voltage DC bias controls
z ATR sensor control voltage calibration
The environment calibration control is performed at the following times:
z when the printer is turned on
z after replacing the P-crg
z during extreme environmental changes

166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Image density detection control
The image density detection control occurs when the density sensor strikes light at the four-color
image density patterns on the ITB, and measures pattern density from the reflected light intensity.
The DC controller controls the density sensor. The sensor is located above the ITB and consists of a
LED and a PD.
When the image density is measured, the DC controller emits light from the density sensor. The light
strikes the detection patterns. The light receiver PD reads light that is reflected off of the detection
patterns and returns it to the DC controller as the image-density detection signal. The two types of
image-density control include:
z image density calibration control (D-max)
z image halftone calibration control (D-half)

Density sensor Detection pattern

ITB

Figure 59. Image density detection control

The image density calibration control (D-max) stabilizes output-image density. The DC controller
performs a D-max as follows when specified conditions are met:
z forms density patterns for colors on the ITB while varying the primary charging bias and the
developing bias
z measures the density of the patterns by using the density sensor
z controls the primary charging bias and the developing bias to adjust the four measured density
patterns to a correct density
Image density control is performed at the following times:
z the printer is turned on
z the printer is returning from sleep mode
z the printer experienced extreme environmental changes
z the printer is on for a long time
z a specified number of pages have been printed

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 167

Image halftone calibration control
The image halftone calibration control (D-half) occurs when the formatter performs a halftone
calibration that is based on the results of the DC controller halftone density measurement. After the
D-max is completed, the DC controller and the formatter perform the D-half as follows:
1 The DC controller forms density detection patterns on the photosensitive drum for each color.
Optimum primary charging bias and developing bias are determined in the D-max, based on the
image data sent from the formatter.
2 The DC controller measures density detection patterns by using the density sensor, and sends
the data to the formatter.
3 The formatter performs the halftone calibration, based on the density data, to obtain an ideal
halftone image.

168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Paper-path system

The paper-path system feeds print media by using different feed rollers. This printer includes three
standard paper pickup sources (tray 1, tray 2, and tray 3), and two standard delivery sources (face-
up and face-down bins). A tray 4 (2,000-sheet feeder) and optional finishing devices are also
available.
The DC controller drives the feed rollers and ITB by controlling four motors, three clutches, and two
solenoids. The 10 paper sensors on the paper path detect the reach or the passage of the sheet of
media. If the sheet does not reach or pass each sensor within a specified amount of time, the main
CPU on the DC controller determines a jam and notifies the formatter.
The paper sensors also detect media in the cassettes and tray 1. The paper-width-detection switch
detects the media size in the cassettes, and the paper-width-detection PCA detects the media size in
tray 1.

M11
Faceup
deflector

M9

M10

ITB

Fuser CL3 CL2 CL1

roller SL1

Front registration Tray 1

Registration roller
roller pickup roller
Secondary transfer
Pressure roller Up/down
SL2 roller arm
Feed
roller #3
Upper cassette

M24
M23
Pickup roller Feed
roller #2
Pickup roller
shaft
Lower cassette Feed
Separation roller #1
roller

Cassette Lifter
lifting plate M25

Figure 60. Paper-path system motors, clutches, and solenoids

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 169

PS902
PS901

PS1501 SR42 SR43

SR6 SR5 SR1
SR3 SR4

MPPCA

SR11
SR12
SR20 SR19

SW3 SW5 SR15

SR16 SR13
SR23
SR14
SR22 SR21

SW4 SW6
SR17
SR18

Figure 61. Paper-path system switches, sensors, and PCA

Note For more information about the paper-path system, see "Switches, solenoids, clutches, and sensors"
on page 142.

170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Pickup/feed unit
The pickup/feed unit feeds the sheets of media individually from the tray into the printer, and
transports each sheet to the fuser. The main mechanisms used in tray pickup and paper feeding are
cassette pickup, tray 1 paper pickup, and paper feeding.

Cassette paper size detection/cassette paper detection

This printer utilizes the two universal cassettes: upper cassette and lower cassette. Each cassette
determines media size by detecting the length and width of media.
Cassette paper size detection
The DC controller determines media size as standard size when the custom-size lever on the side of
the cassette is up. When the lever is down, it is determined as custom size.
z Standard-sized media: Media size in the cassette is detected by the paper-width-detection
switch and paper-length-detection switch located in the cassette. The DC controller detects
statuses of these switches and determines media size. If standard-sized media is not present,
the DC controller notifies an incorrect paper size to the formatter.
z Custom-sized paper: The DC controller detects the width and length of custom-sized media by
utilizing the paper-width-detection switches and registration paper sensor based on the media
size specified by the formatter. The length is detected by monitoring the registration paper
sensor during a print operation. If the media size differs from the one specified by the formatter,
the DC controller notifies an incorrect media size to the formatter after completing a print
operation.
Cassette detection
The cassette detection is performed with the paper-width-detection switch. If the cassette is not
installed in the printer, all of these switches become “H” and the DC controller determines a cassette
absence.

Media size Paper-length-detection switches Paper-width-detection switches

(SW3 and SW4) (SW5 and SW6)
SIZE 1 SIZE2 SIZE3 WSIZE 1 WSIZE2 WSIZE3

A4 (landscape) H H H L H H

LTR (landscape) H H H L L H

A5 (landscape) H H H H L L

B5 (portrait) L L H H L L

Executive (portrait) H L H H L L

LTR (portrait) H L L H L L

A4 (portrait) H H L H L L

A3 L H L L L L

Ledger L H L L L H

B4 L H L H L H

Legal L H L H L L

Custom size L L L - - -

No cassette - - - H H H

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 171

Cassette pickup
When printing from tray 2 or tray 3, sheets of media are fed into the printer individually. The cassette
pickup sequence includes the following:
1 When the printer is turned on, the cassette lifting plate shifts up to the pickup position.
2 The DC controller rotates the pickup roller up/down motor (M23) when the formatter inputs a
print command.
3 The M23 rotates clockwise to lower the up/down arm. This allows the pickup roller shaft to
descend until it reaches the surface of the media stack.
4 The pickup motor (M24) drives the pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller so that each
rotates.

Note When the rollers rotate clockwise, the M24 drives the pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller
for tray 2 and performs a pickup operation from tray 2. When the rollers rotate counterclockwise, the
M24 drives the pickup roller, feed roller, and separation roller for tray 3 and performs a pickup operation
from tray 3.

5 The sheets in tray 2 or tray 3 are fed into the printer individually as the pickup roller, feed roller,
and separation roller rotate.
6 After a pickup operation is completed, the M24 stops as the M23 begins rotating
counterclockwise. The M23 lifts the pickup roller to the pickup position and stops rotating.

Cassette lifting plate

Media

Feed roller Pickup roller

Pickup roller shaft

Separation roller M23

Pickup roller
up/down motor

Up/down arm

M24
Pickup motor

Figure 62. Cassette pickup

172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Lifting-up operation
The lifting-up operation keeps the surface of the print media stack at a specified position. This
stabilizes the pickup operation for any print-media size that the tray holds.

Pickup roller Lifter

Feed roller
Media

Lifter Cassette
gear lifting plate

M25

Drive from
Separation roller lifter motor
M23

Pickup roller
up/down motor drive
Pickup roller Up/down arm gear
shaft
Up/down arm

Figure 63. Lifting-up operation

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 173

Tray 1 paper pickup
When printing from tray 1, pages in the tray are fed individually. The tray 1 pickup operation includes
the following steps:
1 The tray 1 paper sensor (PS1301) detects media in tray 1.
2 After a print command is input from the formatter, the DC controller rotates the registration motor
(M11).
3 When the DC controller signals the tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL1) to move, the lifting plate (which
is now loaded with media) moves up and the media contacts the tray 1 pickup roller.
4 The rotating pickup roller picks up a single page.
5 The single page feeds into the printer after the separation pad clears any multifeed pages.

M11

Tray 1
pickup roller

SR43

SL1

SR1 MPPCA

Figure 64. Tray 1 paper pickup

174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Tray 1 paper-width detection
The DC controller detects the paper width by using the tray 1 paper width-detection PCA (MPPCA) in
tray 1. The MPPCA has a variable resistor, and the document width is detected by variations in the
variable resistor that is interlocked to the document size guide.
If the detected width differs from the width that is specified by the formatter, the DC controller
determines a paper-size discrepancy, indicates this to the formatter, and stops the printer.

Document size guide

Media

MPPCA

Variable resistor
Feed
direction
DC controller

Formatter

Figure 65. Tray 1 paper-width detection

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 175

Tray 1 last-paper detection
This printer can detect if the last sheet of paper in the tray is the next to be fed.
The feed distance between the tray 1 paper sensor and the registration roller is short. If the last page
is fed during continuous printing, the DC controller begins to write the next image before it detects
that tray 1 is out of paper. Because of this, the tray 1 last-paper detection detects that the tray is out
of paper before image writing to avoid soiling the photosensitive drum and the ITB. This detection is
performed with the last paper sensor (SR43) monitoring rotations of the last-paper-detection roller
located on tray 1.

Normal paper pickup Last paper pickup

Last page
Last-paper-detection roller

Tray 1 pickup roller

Tray 1

Last-paper sensor
(SR43)

Figure 66. Tray 1 last-paper detection

176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

Paper pickup and feed
The diagram indicates the paper path from the internal trays to the registration, secondary transfer,
and fuser. It also indicates the drive relationships between the clutches and the paper path motors.

Note The preregistration motor does not provide any registration function.

M11

M9

ITB

CL3 CL2 CL1

Secondary Pre-registration
transfer roller roller
Registration
roller

M23 Feed
roller #3

Feed
roller #2

Figure 67. Tray 1 paper feed

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 177

Jam detection

The following paper sensors detect the presence of media and whether it is fed correctly:
z Tray 2 feed sensor A/B (SR11; SR12)
z Tray 3 feed sensor A/B (SR13;SR14)
z Registration paper sensor (SR3)
z T2 input sensor (SR42)
z Fuser input sensor (SR6)
z Fuser output sensor (PS1501)
z Face-down bin output sensor (PS901)
z Duplexer media reverse sensor (SR33)
z Duplex media path sensor (SR31)
z Duplexer media refeed sensor (SR30)
z Multifeed sensor (SR5)
The main CPU in the DC controller determines if a paper jam has occurred by using the timing stored
in the main CPU to check for the presence of media at the sensor. If the main CPU identifies a paper
jam, the main CPU stops the print operation and communicates a jam to the formatter.
The printer detects jams according to the following conditions:
z Pickup delay jam 1. Media does not reach the SR11 or the SR13 within a specified period after
paper pickup begins.
z Pickup delay jam 2. Media does not reach the SR3 within a specified period after paper pickup
begins.
z ITB wrapping jam. Media does not reach the SR6 within a specified period after paper pickup
begins.
z Fuser delivery delay jam. Media does not reach the PS1501 within a specified period after
paper pickup begins.
z Fuser delivery stationary jam. Media does not clear the PS1501 within a specified period after
it reaches the PS1501.
z Face-down delivery delay jam. The leading edge of the media does not reach the face-down
bin paper delivery sensor (PS901) within a specified period after paper pickup begins.
z Face-down delivery stationary jam. The leading edge of the media does not clear the PS901
within a specified time after it has reached the PS901.
z Door open jam. Any of the following sensors detect media upon opening or closing the door:
• Tray 2 feed sensor A (SR11)
• Tray 2 feed sensor B (SR12)
• Tray 3 feed sensor A (SR13)
• Tray 3 feed sensor B (SR14)
• Registration paper sensor (SR3)
• Fuser delivery paper sensor (PS1501)
• Face-down bin paper delivery sensor (PS901)

178 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW

z Residual-paper jam. Any of the following conditions determine a residual-paper jam if the listed
sensors detect the media:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer is returning from SLEEP mode.
• A door is closed after a jam occurs.
• Tray 2 feed sensor A (SR11)
• Tray 3 feed sensor A (SR13)
• Front fusing paper sensor (SR6)
• Front secondary transfer paper sensor (SR42)
• Fuser delivery paper sensor (PS1501)
z Paper undeliverable jam. The SR3 detects that the media that is longer than what the formatter
specified.
z Fuser unit wrapping jam. Media reaches the PS1501 within a specified period after the paper
pickup, and the PS1501 detects paper-out within the minimum specified period after detecting
the media.

ENWW Chapter 5 Theory of operation 179

180 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW
6 Removal and replacement

Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Removal and replacement strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
General cautions during removal and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Required tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Flat flexible cable caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
DC controller and cable/connector damage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Potential damage areas while servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Toner cartridges (print cartridges). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Process cartridges (image drums) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Waste toner bottle (toner collection bottle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Transfer cleaner (cleaning blade) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Control panel overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Right upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Left upper cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Top right cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Top left cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Front doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Left back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Left lower cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Right back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Back cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Major assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Process cartridge (image drum) door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Laser/scanner assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Reading a laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Delivery unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Delivery unit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Vertical feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Density and registration sensor assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Right back fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Right front fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 181

Pickup unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Temperature and humidity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
High-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Low-voltage power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Registration assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Delivery fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Fuser fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
P-crg (image drum) drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
T-crg (print cartridge) drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fuser motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
DC controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Formatter PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Formatter cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
High-voltage contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Post charger power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Tray 1 pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Tray 1 separation pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Left door switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Right door switch (front and right side doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
ITB sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Upper left door sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fuser front paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fuser sensor PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

182 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Introduction

Removal and replacement strategy

This chapter documents removal and replacement of field replaceable units (FRUs).
Replace parts in the reverse order of their removal. Directions for difficult or critical replacement
procedures are included.

General cautions during removal and replacement

Before removing or replacing assemblies and parts:
z make sure the printer is turned off
z disconnect all cables and cords
If the printer has been running continuously prior to servicing, turn the power off but allow the printer
to remain plugged in with the cooling fans running for at least 10 minutes before unplugging the
power cord.

WARNING! Exercise caution when working on the printer. The printer can have sharp sheet-metal edges.

Note Always remove the image drums before removing or replacing assemblies and parts that are near the
drums.

IMPORTANT: Put the image drums in the original protective plastic sleeves, or, if the sleeves are not
available, place the image drums right-side up on a hard, flat, clean surface. Do not place the image
drums on carpet or a dusty surface because contaminants (such as dust and fibers) can stick to the
OPC and diminish print quality. Light can damage the image drums.

CAUTION Exercise caution when removing and replacing the ITB. Place it on a flat, clean surface because the
belt is exposed on the bottom of the assembly.

Make sure you do not disturb the toner in the toner collection bottle. Toner and static charges might
dust and block the sensor widows.

Note Note the lengths, diameters, and locations of screws. Be sure to return each screw to its original
location during reassembly.

Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and can
become damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to locate. When replacing
wire harnesses, always use the provided wire loops, lance points, or wire-harness guides.

Electrostatic discharge

CAUTION The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always service the printer
at an ESD-protected workstation, or use an ESD mat.

Watch for the ESD symbol (shown at left) to identify the parts that are sensitive to ESD. Protect these
parts by using an ESD wrist strap and protective ESD pouches.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 183

Required tools
The following tools are needed to service the printer and the finishing device:
z #2 Phillips screwdriver with magnetic tip (one short-reach and one long-reach)
z Small flatblade screwdriver; Small needle-nose pliers
z ESD mat and wrist strap; Penlight

CAUTION A PoziDriv screwdriver will damage screw heads on the printer. Be sure to use a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
If you have an electric or multi-speed screwdriver, use a torque limiter or set the clutch to apply low
torque.

Table 50. Hardware table

Example Type and uses

z Long aluminum finish (M 3 x 8)

• Plastic to sheet metal
• Long reach sheet metal (P-cartridge motor assembly)
z Short brass finish (M 3 x 6)
• Sheet metal to sheet metal

z Short black finish (M 3 x 8)

• Laser/scanner assemblies

z Self-threading brass finish (M4)

• Sheet metal to plastic

Table 51. Common torque values

Material HP recommended torque value
Plastic to metal 5.5 lb-inch

Metal to metal 10 lb-inch

PCBA 5.5 lb-inch

Plastic to plastic 5.5 lb-inch

184 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Flat flexible cable caution
Flat flexible cables (FFCs) can break easily because you must unlatch them. FFCs are easy to
crease, cut, bend, or rip.
The following are steps for removing the FFCs:
1 Locate the FFC connection.
2 Use your finger to open the cover.
3 Gently pull the cable.
4 Remove the cable.

1
13 3
13

4
13
2
13

Figure 68. Remove the FFC

To reinstall
Make sure that you align the FFC correctly and that the cable remains completely inserted and
correctly registered when you are fastening the cover or the lock. A partially seated FFC can cause
irreparable damage to the cartridge e-labels and can cause motor stall errors.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 185

DC controller and cable/connector damage areas

Note When replacing the DC controller, connect and check each of the 25 connectors by pressing each one
of them.

CAUTION Do not open the FFC covers until you know exactly how to unlatch the connector. The DC controller
can be permanently damaged if the brown retainer is broken while lifting the white retainer.
A. This type of connector can break easily because you must unlatch them.
B. Lift-and-pull removal makes this connector easy to break. Also, it is easy to damage the cable
when you lift the white retainer.
C. This type of connector is easier to remove than the other two types. Simply pull the cable out or
push it in.

A
13 B
13 C
13

Figure 69. DC controller and cable/connector damage areas

CAUTION Stabilize the DC controller board to counter resistance while pulling on the copper wire connectors.
Grasp the entire harness and pull on the wires perpendicular and evenly to avoid tearing out a single
wire.

Potential damage areas while servicing

The following are potential areas for damage while the printer is being serviced:
z the print cartridge bottoms (remove the print cartridges when servicing areas near them)
z the white plastic tab on the P-cartridge drive assembly (drives the ITB)
z the ITB
z the toner collection bottle
z the tower on the T-drive assembly
z the P-cartridge drive assembly

186 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Consumables

Toner cartridges (print cartridges)

1 Open the front doors.

Figure 70. Gain access to the toner cartridges

2 Rotate the blue lever clockwise.

Figure 71. Rotate the toner cartridge lever

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 187

3 Pull the toner cartridge out.

Figure 72. Remove the toner cartridge

Note If necessary, repeat these steps for the other three toner cartridges.

188 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Process cartridges (image drums)

Note Image drums must be placed face-down on a flat, clean surface.

1 Rotate the green lever clockwise.

Figure 73. Gain access to the process cartridge door

2 Rotate the blue dial counterclockwise.

Figure 74. Rotate the process cartridge door dial

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 189

3 Open the process cartridge door.

Figure 75. Open the process cartridge door

4 Pull the process cartridge out.

Figure 76. Remove the process cartridges

Note If necessary, repeat these steps for the other three process cartridges.

190 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Waste toner bottle (toner collection bottle)
1 Hold the top of the waste toner bottle and pull it out.

Figure 77. Remove the waste toner bottle

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 191

Transfer cleaner (cleaning blade)
1 Rotate the blue lever down.

Figure 78. Unlock the transfer cleaner

2 Pull out the transfer cleaner.

Figure 79. Remove the transfer cleaner

192 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Transfer roller

Note Do not touch the surface of the transfer roller.

1 Rotate the green lever clockwise.

Figure 80. Disengage the ITB to release the transfer roller

2 Grasp the blue tab and pull the transfer roller out.

Figure 81. Remove the transfer roller

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 193

External covers

Control panel overlay

1 Insert a small screwdriver and remove the control panel overlay.

Figure 82. Remove the control panel overlay

194 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Control panel
1 Open the front doors.
2 Release two tabs on the underside of the control panel by pulling them toward the front of the
printer.

Figure 83. Release the control panel

3 Lift the control panel straight up.

4 Unplug the cable connector (callout 1) on the underside of the control panel.

Figure 84. Remove the control panel

5 Remove the control panel from the printer.

To reinstall
Make sure that you do not bend the grounding strip (callout 2) on the control panel.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 195

Right upper cover
1 Remove the ozone filter (callout 1).
2 Open the right intermediate transfer belt (ITB) door.

Figure 85. Gain access to the right upper cover mounting screws

3 Remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 86. Remove the right upper cover mounting screws

196 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Pull out the bottom of the right upper cover and remove it.

Figure 87. Remove the right upper cover

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 197

Left upper cover
1 Open the left upper door.

Figure 88. Gain access the left upper cover mounting screws

2 Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 89. Remove the left upper cover mounting screws

3 Remove the left upper cover.

198 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Top right cover
1 Remove the following assemblies:
z Control panel. See page 194.
z Right upper cover. See page 196.
2 Open the front doors.
3 Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 90. Remove the top right cover mounting screws

4 Remove the top right cover.

Figure 91. Remove the top right cover

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 199

To reinstall
Make sure that the tabs and locator pins are lined up correctly (callout 2).

Hint Loosen the front middle screw (callout 3) so the tabs are easier to insert.

Figure 92. Reinstalling the top right cover

200 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Top left cover
1 Remove the following covers:
z Left upper cover. See page 198.
z Top right cover. See page 199.
2 Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 93. Remove the top left cover mounting screws (1 of 2)

3 Remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 94. Remove the top left cover mounting screws (2 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 201

4 Lift up the top left cover and remove it to your right.

CAUTION Be careful not to damage the face-down output tray-full sensor and the control panel cable.

Figure 95. Remove the top left cover

To reinstall
Make sure that the spring is correctly positioned in the pedestal clips, and that the top of the spring is
correctly positioned on the plastic cross hairs.

CAUTION Make sure that the output tray-full sensor (callout 3) is above the output bin, and be careful not to
damage the control panel cable.

Figure 96. Reinstall the top left cover

202 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Front doors
1 Remove the following covers:
z Right top cover. See page 199.
z Left top cover. See page 201.
2 Lift up and remove the front door.

Figure 97. Remove the front doors

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 203

Fuser door
1 Open the fuser access door.

Figure 98. Gain access to the fuser

2 Push the spring-loaded door rod down and to the back to remove it from the bracket (callout 1).

Hint Hold the door with one hand while holding the rod with your other hand.

CAUTION The rods are under tension and the pins in the rods are not secure.

Figure 99. Release the fuser door pistons

204 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Align the flat side of the pivot hole on the left side of the door with the flat sides of the pivot pin.

Figure 100. Remove the fuser door

4 Rotate the door away from the printer.

5 Remove the fuser door.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 205

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) door
1 Remove the right back cover. See page 213.
2 Open the right lower door assembly, and remove one screw (callout 1) on the retaining strap of
the door assembly.

Figure 101. Release the right lower door

3 Remove the right lower door assembly.

Figure 102. Remove the right lower door assembly

206 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Open the right upper door (ITB access door).

Figure 103. Open the ITB door

5 Remove seven screws (callout 2).

6 Remove the shield (callout 3).

3
Figure 104. Remove the wire harness shield

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 207

7 Disconnect one cable connector (callout 4), and unclip one wire harness (callout 5).
8 Push the spring-loaded door rod down and to the back to remove it from the bracket (callout 6).

Hint Hold the door with your left hand while holding the rod with your right hand.

CAUTION The rod is under tension and the pins in the rod are not secure.

Note Do not remove the pin from the rod.

5 4

Figure 105. Disconnect the ITB door wire harness

9 Close the right upper door.

Figure 106. Gain access to the ITB door mounting screws

208 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

10 Remove three screws (callout 7).
11 Open the right upper door slightly and remove the bracket (callout 8).

Figure 107. Remove the ITB door mounting screws

12 Shift the ITB door toward the back of the printer and remove it.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 209

Left back cover
1 Remove 8 screws (callout 1).

Figure 108. Remove the left back cover

2 Remove the left back cover.

210 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Left lower cover
1 Remove the following assemblies:
z Fuser door. See page 204.
z Left back cover. See page 210.
2 Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 109. Remove the left lower cover mounting screws

3 Remove tray 2 and tray 3.

4 Remove one screw (callout 2), and remove the front left cover (callout 3).

Figure 110. Remove the front left cover

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 211

5 Depress two tabs (callout 4).

Figure 111. Release the left lower cover tabs

6 Remove the left lower cover.

212 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right back cover
1 Remove seven screws (callout 1), and depress the tab (callout 2) near the ITB access door.

2 1

Figure 112. Remove the right back cover

2 Remove the right back cover.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 213

Back cover
1 Remove following covers:
z Left back cover. See page 210.
z Right back cover. See page 213.
2 Remove one filter (callout 1), and remove eight screws (callout 2).

Figure 113. Remove the back cover

3 Remove the back cover.

214 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Major assemblies

Process cartridge (image drum) door

1 Remove the four process cartridges. See page 189.
2 Rotate the green lever down.
3 Unclip the drum door hinge pins (callout 1) with a screwdriver.

Figure 114. Unclip the process cartridge door hinge pins

4 Unlock the process cartridge door.

Figure 115. Unlock the process cartridge door

5 Open the process cartridge door halfway.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 215

6 Remove the hinge pins.

Figure 116. Remove the process cartridge door hinge pins

7 Remove the process cartridge door.

Figure 117. Remove the process cartridge door

Note After replacing the process cartridge door, print a laser alignment test page and, if necessary, perform
a laser alignment procedure. See page 219.

216 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Laser/scanner assembly
1 Remove the following covers:
z Top right cover. See page 199.
z Top left cover. See page 201.
2 Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and remove four black screws (callout 2).

Note Depending on which laser/scanner assembly needs to be removed, disconnect the appropriate
connectors from the other laser/scanner assemblies.

1
2

Figure 118. Disconnect a laser/scanner assembly

CAUTION Do not remove the four black screws called out in figure 119.

Figure 119. Do not loosen the laser/scanner adjustment screws

3 Remove the laser/scanner assembly.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 217

To reinstall
Make sure that the two metal shim stacks (callout 3) are not covering the laser/scanner mounting
screw-holes.

Figure 120. Reinstall the laser/scanner assembly

Note Print a laser/scanner adjustment test page before reinstalling the top right cover and the top left cover.
See page 219.

218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page

Note A laser/scanner adjustment can be printed without reconnecting the control panel. However, when the
control panel is connected you can read printer error messages (if any errors occur) and know when
the printer reaches the READY state.

This procedure can only be performed using A4- or letter-size media. Using A3 or 11-by-17 media
gives invalid results.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Completely cover the laser/scanner assemblies with two layers of paper to prevent light from
leaking into the printer. A light leak might affect the adjustment values on the test page.

Figure 121. Cover the laser/scanners to prevent a light leak

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 219

3 Using a small, non-metallic, flatblade screwdriver (or similar tool), depress the engine test
button, making sure to press straight in to avoid damaging the DC controller board. Turn the
printer on. Continue to depress the test button for about three to five seconds while the printer
initializes. Release the engine test button and wait for the printer to come to the READY state.

Figure 122. Prepare to print a laser/scanner adjustment page

4 When the printer reaches the READY state, depress and release the engine test button. The
printer performs an internal calibration, and then a laser/scanner adjustment page prints.

220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Reading a laser/scanner adjustment page

CAUTION Do not attempt to adjust the laser/scanner assemblies unless the laser/scanner adjustment page
indicates that a laser/scanner needs adjustment. See “Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page” on
page 219.

Overview
Two possible adjustments can be made to a laser/scanner assembly. These adjustments must be
made in the correct sequence. The first adjustment is identified as Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 1
on the laser/scanner adjustment page. The second adjustment is identified as Laser Scanner
Adjustment Step 2 on the laser/scanner adjustment page.
1 Look at the laser/scanner adjustment page. If the numbers under the Laser/Scanner Adjustment
Step 1 are all zeros (callout 1; figure 123) and the center of the three gray bands under the Laser
Scanner Adjustment Step 2 are inside of the zero range for all three colors (callout 2; figure 123),
then no adjustment is required and this procedure is complete.

Note The laser/scanner adjustment page has examples to help interpret the position of the gray bands
(callout 3; figure 123). An example of “Adjustment required” is located on the left side of the page. An
example of “No adjustment required” is located on the right side of the page.

Figure 123. Reading the laser/scanner adjustment page

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 221

2 If any of the numbers under the Laser/Scanner Adjustment Step 1 is not a zero (callout 4;
figure 124) or if the center of any of the three gray bands under the Laser/Scanner Adjustment
Step 2 is outside of the zero range for any of the three colors (callout 5; figure 124), a laser/
scanner adjustment is required.

Note The position of the center of the gray bands under the Laser/Scanner Adjustment Step 2 are interpreted
as shown in figure 124. Callout 6 shows that the center of the gray band for the magenta laser/scanner
falls outside of the zero range, meaning that a laser/scanner adjustment is required. Callout 7 shows
that the center of the gray band falls inside of the zero range, meaning that a laser/scanner adjustment
is not required.

Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 1 Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2

4 5

Interpreting Step 2 gray band positioning

6 7

Adjustment required No adjustment required

Figure 124. Interpreting the laser/scanner adjustment page

3 If an adjustment is required, see Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies (page 223).

222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies

CAUTION Do not attempt to adjust the laser/scanner assemblies unless the laser/scanner adjustment page
indicates that a laser/scanner requires adjustments. See “Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page”
on page 219.

Overview
Laser/scanners might need to be adjusted if a laser/scanner assembly (RG5-6181-000CN), the
process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive assembly) (RG5-6188-000CN), or the image
drum door (RG5-6182-000CN) is replaced.
Adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies requires that you print a laser/scanner adjustment page (see
"Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page") and use several special tools that are included with the
replacement laser/scanner assemblies, process cartridge drum drive assembly (image drum drive
assembly), and image drum door.
Two possible adjustments that can be made to a laser/scanner assembly. These adjustments must
be made in the correct sequence. The first adjustment is identified as Laser Scanner Adjustment
Step 1 on the laser/scanner adjustment page. The second adjustment is identified as Laser Scanner
Adjustment Step 2 on the laser/scanner adjustment page.

Hint When adjusting the laser/scanner assemblies you might have to print multiple laser/scanner
adjustment pages. Information on the page will change as you make fine adjustments to the laser/
scanner assemblies.

Avoid using previously printed pages, which might not reflect the current adjustment of a laser/scanner,
by numbering each page after it prints or throwing away previously printed pages. Always make sure
that you are using the most recent adjustment page that you printed.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 223

Laser scanner adjustment step 1

CAUTION Make sure that you do not lose any shims inside the printer. Shims that remain inside the printer can
damage the printer.

Hint If you are unsure of how to interpret the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 1 part of the adjustment page,
see figure 124.
1 Print a laser/scanner page (See "Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page" on page 219).
2 Locate the box on the laser/scanner adjustment page under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step
1 heading (callout 1). If all of the listed laser scanners indicate that zero shims are needed, the
step 1 adjustment is not required. Proceed to Laser/scanner adjustment step 2 (page 228).
If any of the results under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 1 heading indicate a number other
than zero, proceed to the next step.

Note If a laser/scanner assembly is replaced, it will usually be the one that requires adjustment. If the cyan
laser/scanner is replaced, read the top of the step 1 box and ignore the magenta, the yellow, and the
black laser/scanner numbers that are indicated in the bottom half of the box. Make sure that the cyan
laser/scanner is adjusted correctly before attempting to adjust the other assemblies. Adjust laser/
scanner assemblies one at a time (after the cyan laser/scanner is properly adjusted), printing a new
laser/scanner adjustment page after every addition or removal of shims.

Figure 125. Laser/scanner adjustment page step 1

224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Place two S-shims on the edge of the black plastic shim guide (callout 2).

Note Make sure you do not drop the shims into the sheet-metal opening.

Figure 126. Placing the initial laser/scanner S-shims

4 Place the metal adjustment plate (callout 3) in the printer. Loosely secure the plate with a screw.

Note A screw is not provided with the tool kit. Use one of the screws that you removed when the top covers
were removed.

Figure 127. Install the laser/scanner adjustment plate

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 225

5 Use the spring tool (callout 4) to force the adjustment plate against the shims (callout 5), and
then tighten the screw that secures the metal adjustment plate. Remove the spring tool.

Figure 128. Position the laser/scanner adjustment plate

6 Loosen the four black laser/scanner mounting screws (callout 6) and the black laser/scanner
adjustment screw (callout 7). Slide the laser/scanner assembly to the left, away from the S-
shims.

If you replaced the cyan laser/scanner assembly, look at the top half of the step 1 box on the
adjustment page (callout 1 on figure 125). If you replaced any of the other laser/scanner
assemblies, look at the bottom half of the step 1 box on the adjustment page (callout 1 on
figure 125).

Add or remove the number of S-shims that is indicated on the laser/scanner adjustment page to
or from the S-shims on the black plastic shim guide.

Figure 129. Add or remove laser/scanner adjustment S-shims

226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

7 Slide the laser/scanner tightly against the plate and the S-shims (if any remain), and use the
spring tool (callout 8) to keep the laser/scanner snug against the plate or the S-shims.

Figure 130. Position the laser/scanner assembly

8 Tighten the four black laser/scanner mounting screws (callout 9) and tighten the black
adjustment screw (callout 10).

10

Figure 131. Tighten the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws

9 Cover the top of the printer to prevent light leaks, and then print another laser/scanner
adjustment page (see page 219). If the numbers under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 1
heading indicate that the laser/scanners do not require further adjustments (all are zeros), the
first adjustment is complete.

Note Make sure that you remove the adjustment plate and screw from the laser/scanner bed.
10 If further adjustment is required for the remaining laser/scanner assemblies, repeat Laser
Scanner Adjustment Step 1.

CAUTION If the step 1 adjustment must be repeated, make sure you install the first two S-shims.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 227

Laser/scanner adjustment step 2

CAUTION Make sure that you do not lose any shims inside the printer.

Note The laser/scanner adjustment page has examples to help interpret the position of the gray bands. An
example of "Adjustment required" is located on the left side of the page. An example of "No adjustment
required" is located on the right side of the page.

Note The position of the center of the gray bands under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2 is interpreted
as shown in figure 124. Callout 1 shows that the center of the gray band falls outside of the zero range,
meaning that a laser/scanner adjustment is required. Callout 2 shows that the center of the gray band
falls inside of the zero range, meaning that a laser/scanner adjustment is not required.

Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2

1 2

Adjustment required No adjustment required

Figure 132. Reading the laser/scanner adjustment step 2 images

228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

1 Print the laser/scanner adjustment page (see page 219).
2 Locate the box that appears on the adjustment page under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2
heading (callout 3). If centers of the gray bands are at zero for all three colors, no adjustment is
required and the second adjustment is complete.

If the center of the gray bands falls outside of the zero range, adjustment is required. If one of the
colors (Y, M, or C) is out of the zero range, adjust the laser for that color as described. If all three
colors (Y, M, and C) are out of the zero range in the same direction, you might only have to
adjust the black laser. In this case, the number of shims that you add or subtract is the reverse of
the indication. That is, you add shims if the indication is negative or remove shims if the
indication is positive. Proceed to the next step.

Figure 133. Laser/scanner adjustment page step 2

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 229

3 Remove the four black laser/scanner mounting screws (callout 4) for the selected laser/scanner.

CAUTION Do not loosen the one black laser/scanner adjustment screw (callout 5).

Figure 134. Remove the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws

4 Lift up the laser/scanner assembly slightly. Pinch one of the two plastic shim retainers and pull
the retainer and shim pile (callout 6) out of the printer. Repeat for the second retainer and shim
pile (callout 7).

Figure 135. Remove the laser/scanner assembly shim retainers and shims

230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

5 Add or remove the required number of shims from the two shim piles.

Note If all three colors (Y, M, and C) are outside of the zero range by the same amount, you can simply
adjust the black laser, rather than the other three, to align all four laser scanners. In this instance, the
number of shims added or subtracted is reversed, and black is the reference color for this adjustment.

CAUTION Always add or subtract shims from the top of the shim pile. The bottom shim might include a half-width,
factory-installed shim that must stay in place.

Make sure that you add or remove the same number of shims from the top of each shim pile. If the
number of shims is not equal, the laser/scanner will not be parallel to the printer frame when it is
installed.

Figure 136. Add or remove the laser/scanner adjustment shims

6 Lift up the laser/scanner assembly slightly. Carefully slide the two retainers and shim piles back
into position under the left and right side of the laser/scanner assembly. Snap the two plastic
shim retainers into place.

CAUTION Make sure that the shims do not cover the laser/scanner mounting screw-holes. If they cover the holes,
the shims might be bent or damaged when the laser/scanner assembly is installed. Dispose of any
bent or damaged shims and replace them with smooth, flat, undamaged shims.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 231

Figure 137. Replace the laser/scanner adjustment shim retainers and shims

232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

7 Tighten the four black laser/scanner mounting screws (callout 8).

Figure 138. Tighten the laser/scanner assembly mounting screws

8 Print another laser/scanner adjustment page (see page 219). Make sure that you cover the top of
the printer to prevent light leaks.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not use previously printed laser/scanner adjustment pages to check for the
correct laser/scanner adjustment.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 233

9 If all of the centers of the three gray bands under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2 heading
are inside of the zero range for all of the three colors (callout 9), the step 2 adjustment is
complete. Replace the printer covers.
10 If any of the centers of the three gray bands under the Laser Scanner Adjustment Step 2 heading
are outside of the zero range for any of the three colors (callout 9), repeat the step 2 adjustment
procedure.

Figure 139. Print another laser/scanner adjustment page

234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Delivery unit
1 Remove the following covers:
z Top left cover. See page 201.
z Left back cover. See page 210.
2 Open the fuser access door.

Figure 140. Gain access to the delivery unit

3 Push down the top of the left side front cover, and remove it by pulling out from the middle of the
cover.

Hint Removing the left front door might make it easier to remove the left side front cover.

Note Make sure to depress the tab at the top of the left side front cover so that the plastic pin can be removed.

Figure 141. Remove the left side front cover

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 235

4 Remove four screws (callout 1) and two shields (callout 2).

Figure 142. Remove the delivery unit shields

5 Disconnect two connectors (callout 3).

Figure 143. Disconnect the delivery unit connectors

236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

6 Remove five screws (callout 4)

Figure 144. Remove the delivery unit mounting screws (1 of 2)

7 Remove two screws (callout 5).

Figure 145. Remove the delivery unit mounting screws (2 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 237

8 Remove the delivery unit.

Figure 146. Remove the delivery unit

238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Delivery unit sensor
1 Perform steps 1 through 8 for the delivery unit. See page 235.
2 Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 147. Remove the delivery unit sensor

3 Remove the delivery unit sensor.

To reinstall
Install the delivery unit sensor on the replacement delivery unit.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 239

Vertical feed unit
1 Remove the following covers and assemblies:
z Top left cover. See page 201.
z Delivery unit. See page 235.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and one retaining strap (callout 2), and remove one screw
on the holding clamp (callout 3).

Figure 148. Gain access to the vertical feed unit

3 Lower the paper-path access door to a horizontal position.

4 To remove the door, pull the right side of the paper-path access door to the right.

Figure 149. Remove the paper path access door

240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

5 Open the fuser access door.

Figure 150. Gain access to the left side middle cover mounting screws

6 Remove two screws (callout 4).

Figure 151. Remove the left side middle cover mounting screws

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 241

7 Remove the left side middle cover mounting bracket.

Figure 152. Remove the left side middle cover mounting bracket

8 Remove three screws (callout 5), and disconnect one connector (callout 6).

Figure 153. Remove the vertical feed unit mounting screws

242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

9 Remove the vertical feed unit.

Figure 154. Remove the vertical feed unit

Note When replacing the vertical feed unit, make sure to reconnect the connector.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 243

Duplexer
1 Open the fuser access door.

Figure 155. Gain access to the duplexer

2 Depress the green lever (callout 1), and pull the duplexer out until it stops.

Figure 156. Remove the duplexer

3 Tilt the duplexer up and remove it.

244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser
1 Remove the duplexer. See page 244.
2 Rotate the two blue tabs inward.

Figure 157. Unlock the fuser

3 Slightly lift up the fuser and pull it out.

Figure 158. Remove the fuser

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 245

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
1 Open the front doors.

Note Make sure that the green handle is down.

Figure 159. Release the ITB

2 Open the ITB door.

Figure 160. Open the ITB door

246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Grasp the blue handle, and slide the ITB out until it stops.

Figure 161. Slide the ITB out of the printer

CAUTION Do not let anything touch the surface of the ITB.

4 Depress the two blue levers (callout 1), and remove the ITB.

Figure 162. Remove the ITB

CAUTION Make sure that you set the ITB on a flat, clean surface.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 247

Density and registration sensor assembly
1 Remove the following covers and FRUs:
z Upper right cover. See page 196.
z Right back cover. See page 213.
z Back cover. See page 214.
z Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See page 246.
2 Remove one screw (callout 1), and remove the right front cover (callout 2).

Figure 163. Remove the right front cover

3 Remove four screws (callout 4).

Figure 164. Remove the density and registration sensor mounting screws

248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Disconnect one connector (callout 5) and two clips (callout 6) from the post charger power
supply.

Figure 165. Disconnect the density and registration sensor connector

5 Unclip two wire retainers (callout 7) and feed the wire through the hole in the chassis (callout 8;
in this picture, the wire has already been passed through the hole in the chassis).

Figure 166. Unclip the density and registration sensor wire retainers

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 249

6 Open the right front door to release the density and registration shutter. Remove the density and
registration sensor assembly from the printer.

CAUTION When removing the density and registration sensor assembly, do not damage the sensor shutter where
it contacts the front right door shutter lever (make sure you re-link this assembly when reinstalling).

Figure 167. Release the density and registration sensor assembly

7 Disconnect three connectors (callout 9), unclip four cable clamps (callout 10), and thread the
harness out.

10

Figure 168. Remove the density and registration sensor assembly

8 Remove the density and registration sensor.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not bend the copper grounding strip. Make sure not to pinch any wires when
reinstalling the density and registration sensor.

Make sure that the sensor shutter assembly is linked correctly to the front right door lever so the shutter
moves to the open position when the door is closed. If the printer continuously tries to self-calibrate
after this assembly is replaced, verify that the shutter is correctly linked to the door, is not damaged,
and can freely move to the open position.

250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right back fan
1 Remove the following covers:
z Right upper cover. See page 196.
z Right back cover. See page 213.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and unclip one wire clip (callout 2).
3 Remove one screw (callout 3) and one metal harness retainer (callout 4).
4 Remove two screws (callout 5).

2 4 1

Figure 169. Remove the right back fan

5 Remove the right back fan.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 251

Right front fan
1 Remove the following covers:
z Right upper cover. See page 196.
z Right back cover. See page 213.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and Unclip one wire clip (callout 2).
3 Remove one screw (callout 3) and one metal harness retainer (callout 4).
4 Remove two screws (callout 5).

5
4 1

3
2

Figure 170. Remove the right front fan

5 Remove the right front fan.

252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Secondary transfer assembly (T2)
1 Remove the following FRUs:
z Four process cartridges. See page 189.
z Transfer roller. See page 193.
z Duplexer. See page 244.
z Fuser. See page 245.
z Intermediate transfer belt. See page 246.

Hint Removing the front right door might make it easier to remove the secondary transfer assembly.
2 Remove one screw (callout 1), and remove the T2 access cover (callout 2).

1
2

Figure 171. Remove the T2 cam access door

3 Remove two screws (callout 3), and remove the plastic bearing surface (callout 4).

4
3

Figure 172. Remove the T2 bearing surface

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 253

4 Remove the link cover (callout 5).

Note The green lever must be up.

Figure 173. Remove the T2 link cover

5 Slide the spring (callout 6) off the shaft to the left and out of the chassis.

Figure 174. Remove the T2 cam spring

6 Lower the green handle.

254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

7 Remove the cable cover by pinching its sides (callout 7).

CAUTION Make sure to remove the cable cover carefully, because the cables are retained in the channel on the
right side of the cover.

Figure 175. Remove the T2 wire harness cover

8 Disconnect one connector (callout 8), and remove two links (callout 9 and 10).

Note Remove the link (callout 9) by lifting it up and pulling it away from the shaft. Remove the link (callout
10) from the shaft by sliding it directly off the shaft.

9
10

Figure 176. Remove the T2 link (1 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 255

9 Remove the closest link (callout 11) first. Remove the link by unsnapping the plastic collar and
sliding the link out. This link (callout 11) is not captive

CAUTION This link is not included when ordering a replacement or exchange secondary transfer assembly. Do
not lose this link.

10 Remove the other link (callout 12) by pushing the link up and pulling it out.

11

12

Figure 177. Remove the T2 link (2 of 2)

256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

11 To remove the secondary transfer assembly:
a Position yourself on the right (ITB access) side of the printer.
b Grasp the secondary transfer assembly with both hands.
c Rotate the secondary transfer assembly up and toward you.
d Slide the secondary transfer assembly to the left.
e Swing the right side of the secondary transfer assembly up and toward you.
f Remove the secondary transfer assembly.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not bend the links.

Figure 178. Remove the T2 assembly

To reinstall
z Make sure that the four links are positioned upward.
z Make sure that the green lever is down.
z Locate the secondary transfer assembly shaft hole before replacing the assembly.
z The reinstall motion is the opposite of the removal motion.
z Make sure that the connector is not entangled when reinstalling the links.
z Make sure that the four links are reinstalled correctly and functioning properly. Test this by gently
rotating the green lever to verify that motion is not impeded.

CAUTION Do not force the green lever if it does not rotate easily.
z Make sure that both connectors are firmly seated and that the cover does not pinch the wires.
The cover must be installed, because it retains a link.
z To reinstall the finger guard, pull back on the spring and push the finger guard onto the large
shaft.

Note The finger guard must be seated correctly on two shafts.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 257

Pickup unit
1 Remove the following covers:
z Right upper cover. See page 196.
z Back cover. See page 214.
2 Open the right lower door assembly, and remove one screw (callout 1) on the retaining strap of
the right lower door assembly.

Figure 179. Release the right lower door

3 Remove the right lower door assembly.

Figure 180. Remove the right lower door

258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Remove one screw (callout 2). Lift the right front cover (callout 3) up and then away from the
printer.

Figure 181. Remove the right front cover

5 Open the ITB door.

Figure 182. Open the ITB door

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 259

6 Remove seven screws (callout 4).
7 Remove the shield (callout 5).

5
Figure 183. Remove the wire harness shield

8 Disconnect one cable connector (callout 6), and unclip one wire harness (callout 7).
9 Push the spring-loaded door rod down and to the back to remove it from the bracket (callout 8).

Hint Hold the door with your left hand while holding the rod with your right hand.

CAUTION The rod is under tension and the pins in the rod are not secure.

Note Do not remove the pin from the rod.

7 6

Figure 184. Disconnect the ITB door wire harness

260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

10 Close the right upper door.

Figure 185. Gain access to the ITB door mounting screws

11 Remove three screws (callout 9).

12 Open the right upper door slightly and remove the bracket (callout 10).

10

Figure 186. Remove the ITB door

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 261

13 Shift the ITB door toward the back of the printer and remove it.
14 Remove tray 2 and tray 3.
15 Remove two screws (callout 11) on the front of the printer.
16 Unhook the tab (callout 12) and disconnect the hook (callout 13).
17 Remove the lower right corner cover.

11

12
13

Figure 187. Remove the front lower right cover

18 Remove the paper path connection unit.

Figure 188. Remove the vertical transfer unit

262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

19 Remove three screws (callout 14) and remove the right lower cover (callout 15).

14

15

Figure 189. Remove the right lower cover

20 Remove one screw (callout 16) and remove the door stop (callout 17).

Hint Make sure that you orient the door stop correctly when you reinstall it.

17

16

Figure 190. Remove the paper path door stop

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 263

21 Remove four screws (callout 18) on the front of the printer.

18

Figure 191. Remove the tray guide mounting screws

22 Remove the tray 2 and tray 3 cassette guides.

Figure 192. Remove the tray guides

264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

23 Remove five screws (callout 19), disconnect two connectors (callout 20), and disconnect two
wire clips (callout 21).

21
19
20

Figure 193. Disconnect the pickup unit connectors

24 Remove the pickup unit.

Note You might need to use a slight amount of force when pulling out the pickup unit.

Figure 194. Remove the pickup unit

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 265

Temperature and humidity sensor
1 Remove the right upper cover. See page 196.
2 Remove the white, plastic cover labeled “Up” (callout 1).

Figure 195. Remove the temperature and humidity sensor cover

3 Remove one screw (callout 2), and disconnect one connector (callout 3).

Figure 196. Remove the temperature and humidity sensor

4 Remove the temperature and humidity sensor.

To reinstall
Make sure to reinstall the sensor before reinstalling the white, plastic cover.

266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

High-voltage power supply
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect four connectors (callout 1), remove one ribbon cable (callout 2), and remove five
black screws (callout 3).

CAUTION Do not remove any of the copper screws around the high-voltage power supply. All of the high-voltage
power supply mounting screws are black.

1 1

Figure 197. Remove the high-voltage power supply

3 Rotate the top of the high-voltage power supply outward.

4 Shift the high-voltage power supply to one side until the pivot pin releases.
5 Remove the high-voltage power supply.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 267

Low-voltage power supply
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect 12 connectors, disconnect two wire clips (callout 1), and remove one screw
(callout 2).

Figure 198. Disconnect the low-voltage power supply

3 Remove four screws (callout 3).

Figure 199. Remove the low-voltage power supply

4 Remove the low-voltage power supply.

268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Registration assembly
1 Remove the following FRUs:
z Pickup unit. See page 258.
z High-voltage power supply. See page 267.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove three screws (callout 2).

Hint Mark the screw holes on the chassis before removing the screws.

2
1

Figure 200. Disconnect the registration assembly motor

3 Remove the registration motor.

4 Remove three screws (callout 3) from the registration drive assembly.

Note The registration drive assembly is removed in step 10.

Figure 201. Remove the registration assembly motor

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 269

5 Remove two covers (callout 4).

Figure 202. Remove two wire harness covers

6 Open the front doors.

Figure 203. Gain access to the green ITB release lever

270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

7 Push the green handle down.

Figure 204. Lower the ITB release lever

8 Use the following steps to remove the right back ITB lift link:

CAUTION Do not remove the e-ring (callout 5) from the claw assembly.

a Remove the retainer clip and washer by using needlenose pliers (callout 6).
b Use a small flatblade screwdriver to lift and unclip the retaining claw (callout 7) on the white,
plastic cam assembly.

7
6

Figure 205. Release the right back ITB lifting link

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 271

c Slide the right back ITB lift link to the left and off.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not bend the right back ITB lift claw by pulling out too far.

Figure 206. Remove the right back ITB lifting link

9 Disconnect one wire connector (callout 8).

10 Remove the registration drive assembly (callout 9).

Figure 207. Disconnect the registration assembly connector

272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

11 Remove two screws (callout 10).

10

Figure 208. Remove the registration assembly plate mounting screws

12 Slide the plate toward the back of the printer.

Figure 209. Remove the registration assembly plate (1 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 273

13 Lift up the left side of the plate, slide it toward the front of the printer, and remove it.

Figure 210. Remove the registration assembly plate (2 of 2)

14 Remove three screws (callout 11).

CAUTION Make sure that the black process cartridge (image drum) is removed. The handle of a long-blade screw
driver can damage the process cartridge if it contacts the cartridge when you are removing these
screws.

11

Figure 211. Remove the registration assembly mounting screws

274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

15 Disconnect two connectors (callout 12).

12

Figure 212. Disconnect the registration assembly connectors

16 Lift the front of the registration assembly and unhook two white claws (callout 13).
17 Remove the registration assembly.

13

Figure 213. Remove the registration assembly

To reinstall
z Make sure that you replace the back of the registration assembly first.
z Make sure that the two white claws are hooked correctly.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 275

Delivery fan
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3 Pry the two hooks (callout 2) away from the delivery fan.

Note If you need to remove the duct, remove one screw (callout 3) and unhook the duct from the chassis.
A long-shaft screwdriver might be needed.

1
3

Figure 214. Remove the delivery fan

4 Remove the delivery fan.

276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser fan
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1).
3 Pry the two hooks (callout 2) away from the fuser fan.

1
3

Figure 215. Remove the fuser fan

4 Remove the fuser fan.

Note If you need to remove the duct, remove one screw (callout 3) and unhook the duct from the chassis.
A long-shaft screwdriver might be needed.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 277

P-crg (image drum) drive assembly

CAUTION The P-crg drive assembly is heavy. Do not drop the assembly when you remove it. You must remove
the four process cartridges (image drums) before removing the P-crg drive assembly. See page 189.

1 Remove the following covers and FRUs:

z Back cover. See page 214.
z Intermediate transfer belt. See page 246.
z Delivery fan. See page 276.
z Fuser fan and duct. See page 277.
z High voltage power supply. See page 267.
z High voltage contact. See page 291.
2 Remove three screws (callout 1). Disconnect two flat cables from the cable channel to the P-crg
assembly (callout 2). Move the cable channel to the right, away from the P-crg assembly.

Figure 216. Disconnect the P-crg drive assembly connectors

278 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Use the following steps to remove the right back ITB lift link:

CAUTION Do not remove the e-ring (callout 5) from the cam assembly.

a Remove the retainer clip and washer by using needlenose pliers (callout 3).
b Use a small flatblade screwdriver to lift and unclip the retaining claw (callout 4) on the white,
plastic cam assembly.

7
4
6
3

Figure 217. Remove the right back ITB lift link (1 of 2)

c Slide the right back ITB lift cam to the left and off.

CAUTION Make sure that you do not bend the right back ITB lift linkage by pulling out too far.

Figure 218. Remove the right back ITB lift link (2 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 279

4 Disconnect the P-crg drive assembly connectors (callout 6; ribbon cables are not shown).
Unhook the wire clips as required.

CAUTION Make sure that you remove the P-crg drive assembly connectors carefully. The connectors and ribbon
cables can break easily, particularly the three lead connectors from the p-crg drive assembly. Pull each
wire with equal force and make sure to pull the connectors straight out and perpendicular to the board.
Failing to properly remove the connectors might result in broken connectors, broken solder pads, or
board leads.

Figure 219. Disconnect the P-crg drive assembly

5 Remove twelve screws (callout 7).

Figure 220. Remove the P-crg drive assembly mounting screws

280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

CAUTION The P-crg drive assembly is heavy.

Place the assembly upside-down on a table to avoid damage to the assembly.

Do not bend the high-voltage leaf spring on the backside of the assembly.

6 Lift the P-crg drive assembly off of the retaining hooks and remove it.
7 Print a laser/scanner adjustment test page. Make sure that all of the laser/scanners are
adjusted correctly. See page 219.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 281

T-crg (print cartridge) drive assembly

Note You must remove the four toner cartridges (print cartridges) prior to removing the T-crg drive assembly.
See page 187.

1 Remove the following covers and FRUs:

z Back cover. See page 214.
z Delivery fan and fan duct. See page 276.
z Fuser fan and duct. See page 277.
2 Remove three screws (callout 1). Disconnect two flat cables from the cable channel to the P-crg
assembly (callout 2). Move the cable channel to the right, away from the T-crg assembly.

Figure 221. Disconnect the T-crg drive assembly

282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Disconnect all cable connectors except J813, J814, and J802. Remove 10 screws (callout 3).

CAUTION Make sure that the T-crg drive assembly cable connectors are removed carefully. The connectors can
break easily. Make sure that you remove the T-crg drive assembly connectors carefully. The
connectors and ribbon cables can break easily, particularly the three lead connectors from the T-crg
drive assembly. Pull each wire with equal force and make sure to pull the connectors straight out and
perpendicular to the board. Failing to properly remove the connectors might result in broken
connectors, broken solder pads, or board leads.

Figure 222. Remove the T-crg drive assembly mounting screws

4 Lift the T-crg drive assembly off of the retaining hooks and remove it.

CAUTION Place the assembly upside-down on a table to avoid damage to the assembly.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 283

Fuser motor
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Remove three screws (callout 1), and disconnect one connector (callout 2).

2
Figure 223. Remove the fuser motor

3 Remove the fuser motor.

284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser drive assembly
1 Remove the following covers and FRUs:
z Back cover. See page 214.
z Fuser motor. See page 284.
z Formatter cage. See page 289.
z High voltage contact. See page 291.
2 Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 224. Remove the fuser drive assembly mounting screws

3 Remove the fuser drive assembly.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 285

DC controller
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect all of the connectors on the board.

CAUTION Make sure that you remove the DC controller connectors carefully. The connectors and ribbon cables
can break easily. Pull each wire with equal force and make sure to pull the connectors straight out and
perpendicular to the board. Failing to properly remove the connectors might result in broken
connectors, broken solder pads, or board leads.

Figure 225. Disconnect the DC controller connectors

3 Remove five flat flexible cables (FFCs) (callout 1).

Note The FFCs have three different types of connectors.

Figure 226. Remove the DC controller FFCs

286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Remove five screws (callout 2).

Figure 227. Remove the DC controller mounting screws

5 Remove the DC controller.

To reinstall
Make sure that the cables and the FFCs are reinstalled in the correct location, and that they are
centered correctly into the connector. Not centering the cables and the FFCs correctly can cause
motor, consumables, and other error messages.
Make sure that the FFC does not back out of the connector when the retaining clip is fastened.

CAUTION One of the FFC connectors must be flipped up before removing or reinstalling the FFC.

Figure 228. Verify that the DC controller connectors and FFCs are connected properly

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 287

Formatter PCB
1 Remove eight screws (callout 1).

Figure 229. Remove the formatter PCB mounting screws

2 Remove the formatter PCB.

Figure 230. Remove the formatter PCB

288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Formatter cage
1 Remove the following covers and FRUs:
z Back cover. See page 214.
z DC controller. See page 286.
z Formatter PCB. See page 288.
2 Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 231. Remove the formatter cage mounting screws

3 Unclip six wire harnesses (callout 2).

Figure 232. Unclip the formatter cage wire retainers

Hint Disconnect the small, flat cable from the formatter connector.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 289

4 Reach inside the formatter cage and squeeze the formatter connector locking tabs. Push the
connector out of the cage.

Note Do not pull the cable connector too hard.

Figure 233. Unplug the formatter PCB connector

5 Remove six screws (callout 4).

Figure 234. Remove the formatter cage mounting screws

6 Remove the formatter cage.

290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

High-voltage contact
1 Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and remove three screws (callout 2).

Note In this picture, the formatter cage is removed so that you can see the screws more easily. Removing
the formatter cage is not required to remove the high-voltage contact. It is, however, much easier to
remove the contact when the formatter cage is removed.

Figure 235. Remove the high-voltage contact

2 Remove the high-voltage contact.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 291

Post charger power supply
1 Remove the back cover. See page 214.
2 Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 236. Disconnect the post charger connectors

3 Remove the shield (callout 2).

Figure 237. Remove the cable shield

292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

4 Remove one screw (callout 3).

Figure 238. Remove the post charger mounting screw

5 Lift up the post charger slightly and remove it.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 293

Tray 1 pickup roller
1 Open the ITB door.
2 Unhook one claw (callout 1), slide the roller holder (callout 2), and remove the tray 1 pickup roller
(callout 3).

Figure 239. Remove the tray 1 pickup roller

294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Tray 1 separation pad
1 Remove the ITB door.
2 Remove the tray 1 pickup roller. See page 294.
3 Unhook two claws (callout 1), and remove the pad cover (callout 2).

Figure 240. Unhook the tray 1 separation pad

4 Unhook two claws (callout 3), and remove the separation pad (callout 4).

Figure 241. Remove the tray 1 separation pad

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 295

Left door switch
1 Remove the left front door. See page 203.
2 Remove the ITB cleaner
3 Open the drum door.
4 Remove three screws (callout 1), and remove the inner cover (callout 2).

Figure 242. Remove the left door switch cover

5 Remove two screws (callout 3), disconnect one connector (callout 4), and remove the left door
switch (callout 5).

Figure 243. Remove the left door switch mounting screws

296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right door switch (front and right side doors)
1 Remove the right upper cover. See page 196.
2 Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and remove the right door
switch (callout 3).

2
1

Figure 244. Remove the right door switch mounting screws

Hint It is easiest to reconnect the connector before fastening the right door switch to the printer chassis.

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 297

ITB sensor
1 Remove the density and registration sensor assembly. See page 248.
2 Unhook five claws (callout 1), and remove one cable cover (callout 2).

Figure 245. Unhook the ITB sensor cable cover

3 Disconnect one connector (callout 3), and remove the ITB sensor (callout 4).

Figure 246. Disconnect the ITB sensor connector

298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Upper left door sensor
1 Remove the delivery unit. See page 235.
2 Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and remove the upper left door sensor (callout 2).

Figure 247. Disconnect the upper left door sensor

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 299

Fuser front paper sensor
1 Remove the fuser. See page 245.
2 Remove two screws (callout 1), unhook two claws (callout 2), and remove the fuser front guide
(callout 3).

Figure 248. Remove the fuser front paper sensor mounting screws

3 Disconnect one connector (callout 4), and remove the fuser front paper sensor (callout 5).

4
5

Figure 249. Disconnect the fuser front paper sensor

300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser sensor PCA
1 Open the fuser door.
2 Remove the duplexer (if installed). See page 244.
3 Remove two screws (callout 1), and remove the fuser sensor bracket (callout 2).

Figure 250. Remove the fuser sensor PCA mounting screws

4 Disconnect one connector (callout 3), remove two screws (callout 4), and remove the fuser
sensor PCA (callout 5).

3 5

Figure 251. Disconnect the fuser sensor PCA

ENWW Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 301

302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW
7 Troubleshooting

Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Troubleshooting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Pre-troubleshooting checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Power checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Control panel checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Troubleshooting tools and procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Hardware and electrical troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Engine diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Defeating interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Engine diagnostics preconditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Disable cartridge test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Print stop test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Engine test button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Sensor test (interactive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Engine test button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Component test: Belt only test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Component test: Image drum motors test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Component test: Print cartridge motors test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Component test: Developer motors test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Component test: YMCK laser test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Component test: Fuser motor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Component test: Tray 1 feed motor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Component test: Tray 2 feed drive test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Component test: Tray 3 feed drive test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Component test: Pre-registration test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Component test: Registration test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Component test: Face-up solenoid test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Engine test button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Engine test print page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Formatter heartbeat LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Information pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Supplies status pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Usage page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
File directory page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Electrical connection and contact failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Image formation and print-quality troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Print-quality problems associated with the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Reseating consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cleaning the post charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cleaning the post charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Cleaning the fuser input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Print-quality troubleshooting pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 303

Color band test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Engine test print page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Laser/scanner adjustment page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Door ruler and repeating defect frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Sample defects and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Repeating marks (98 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Repeating marks (45 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Lines and bands appear perpendicular to feed direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Lines, streaks or scratches appear parallel to feed direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Diagonal bands or lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Light or faint image and dropouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Wavy brush marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Color plane misregistration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Primary color covers entire page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Ghosted image (98 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Ghosted image (140 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Distorted or misplaced image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Poorly fused image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Missing color plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Hand or fingerprints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Fine, yellow dot background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Toner halos or explosions occur around solid secondary colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Control panel print-quality adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Media and paper-path troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Paper path jam sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Determine the problem source: print media or printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Using the straightest paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Determine if problem is caused by the duplexing process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Isolate the source of the jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Determine where media jams occur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Determine whether the printer is experiencing misfeeds or multifeed jams . . . . . . . . . 379
Print-quality problems associated with media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Isolate a media brand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Isolate a media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Wrinkling envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Poor fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Overhead transparency defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Media jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Customer print job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Clearing jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Clearing repeated jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Tests for troubleshooting paper-path problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Print stop test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Paper-path test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Sensor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Tray alignment adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Noise troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Event log page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Print an event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Show an event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Interpret an event log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Sample event log page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Control panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Control panel and event log message format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Error message interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Alphabetical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Numerical error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Data and communication troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

304 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Test message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
EIO troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Software/network troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Jetdirect configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Verify network and server operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Jetdirect page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Tray 4 troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Tray 4 diagnostics label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Tray 4 motor test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Tray 4 standalone running test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Tray 4 sensor test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Tray 4 light pattern interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Tray 4 does not print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 305

Introduction

This chapter contains information, tools, and procedures to use in isolating, identifying, and
correcting problems with the HP color LaserJet 9500 series printer. This printer is designed for
effective technician-supported, over-the-phone diagnosis. Always check online data bases for
updates on known issues and troubleshooting methods.

Troubleshooting process

The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem(s).

Pre-troubleshooting checklist
Check the following items before diagnosing a malfunction. If a failure is found, the service
technician clears the problem and gives the instruction to the customer.

Table 52. Pre-troubleshooting checklist

Environment z Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface?
z Is the power supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified
power source?
z Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and the outlet?
z Is the operating environment within the specified parameters,
as listed in chapter 1 of this manual?
z Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight?
z Is the room temperature kept between 15° C and 30° C, and is
the relative humidity between 10 percent and 80 percent?
z Is the printer near sites generating ammonia gas, high
temperature or high humidity (near a water faucet, kettle, or
humidifier, for example), cold places, open flames, and dusty
areas?
Media z Is the correct media type selected on the control panel?
z Is the media ream broken (slightly bend the stack before
loading media)?
z Does the customer use only supported media (see table 8 in
chapter 1)?
z Is the media in good condition (no curls, folds, etc.)?
z Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?
z Is the media type set correctly on the control panel?
z Is the media not damp or dirty?
z Was the media not opened until it was ready to use?
z Is the amount of media in the input source within
specifications?
z Are the media guides aligned with the media?
Input trays z Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?
z Is the media set into the tray correctly?
z Are the media guides aligned with the media?
z Is the tray properly installed in the printer?
Consumables loaded z Is each print cartridge and image drum properly installed?
z Are the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit, the fuser unit, the
ITB cleaner, the waste toner bottle, and the secondary transfer
roller unit installed correctly?

306 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 52. Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)
Cover and doors z Are the covers and doors closed?
z Are the front doors, the image drum door, right upper (ITB)
door, left upper door, left lower (fuser access) door, paper-path
access door, and right lower door closed correctly at power
on?
z Are the right front cover, left front cover, left upper cover, left
cover unit, right cover unit, and right lower cover all closed
correctly?
Condensation z Was an image drum or print cartridge opened soon after being
moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the printer to
sit at room temperature for one to two hours.
z Does condensation occur following a temperature change
(particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe
affected parts dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes.

Note
Condensation might result in light images or incorrect contrast.
Miscellaneous z Check for and remove any non-HP components (print
cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer.
z If hardware or software configuration has not changed, or the
problem is not associated with any specific software, contact
the Customer Care Center (see Chapter 1).
z Remove the printer from the network, and make sure that the
failure is associated with the printer before beginning
troubleshooting.
z For any print-quality issues, calibrate the printer.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 307

Power checks
Table 53. Power checks
Check What to do
Is the printer plugged in? 1 Make sure that the printer and the finishing device(s) are plugged into a
known good source of ac power.
Is the printer on/off switch set to 1 Push the switch to the “on” position.
the on position?
2 Make sure that the switch is set to low-voltage power supply linkage if a
switch problem is suspected.
Is ac power available at the print 1 Make sure that power is available. See “Specifications” in Chapter 1.
engine power receptacle?
2 Test outlet with a known good appliance or in a known good power
outlet.
Are the printer fans on? Note
The fan operation is important because all of the fans are controlled by the
Do the printer fans turn on? DC controller PCA. Fans 1 through 6 operate at full speed for 30 seconds
during the WAIT period. Fans 1 through 5 slow to half-speed, and fan 6 stops
during the STBY period, and when the printer is in PowerSave mode. Make
sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode.

Operational fans indicate the following:

z the ac power is present in the printer
z the DC power supply is probably functional (both +24 VDC and +5 VDC
are being generated)
z the DC controller PCA is probably functional.

Control panel checks

It is important to have the control panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process
so that the printer diagnostics can be used to assist in locating printing errors.
The control panel should show READY, PAUSED, or POWERSAVE ON. For information about error
messages that appear on the control panel or in the event log, see the event log. If the control panel
is blank, see “Event log page” on page 386.
Use the following steps to troubleshoot the control panel if the power checks are successful, but the
control panel is still blank:
1 Check connector J3008 on the back of the control panel and connector J123 on the DC
controller.
2 Check connector J2103 on the DC controller and J9002 on the formatter.
3 Check the wire harness between J3008 and J123 for damage. Replace the wire harness if
necessary.
4 Replace the control panel or the DC controller.

308 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Troubleshooting tools and procedures
Use these troubleshooting tools and procedures to help diagnose and correct problems with the
printer.
The following list identifies the troubleshooting tools used to solve printer problems:
z Hardware and electrical. See page 309.
z Image formation and print quality. See page 330.
z Media and paper-path. See page 373.
z Noise. See page 384.
z Alphabetical error message interpretation. See page 389.
z Numerical error message interpretation. See page 400.
z Data and communication. See page 435.
z Tray 4. See page 438.

Hardware and electrical troubleshooting tools

Diagnosing and troubleshooting the HP color LaserJet 9500 is similar to the procedures for other
laser jet printers. For the HP color LaserJet 9500, there are some complications because there are
four print cartridges and four image drums.

Engine diagnostic tools

The engine diagnostic tools include:
z event log (print or show): indicates high-voltage errors and calibration errors
z print-quality troubleshooting: selected in diagnostics, prints print quality pages
z disable cartridge check: prints normally without one or more color plane(s)
z paper-path test: source, destination, duplex, copies, and sensors.
z sensor test
z component test
z print/stop test

Defeating interlocks
Defeating the interlocks might be difficult because the same switch controls the front and side doors
on the right side of the printer. To defeat the interlocks, use rolled up paper.
z Front left door switch:
1 Defeat the front left door switch from the inside left (fuser) door and use rolled up paper. The
paper should not too long so that it interferes with the diverter assembly.
z Front right door and right top door (ITB access)
1 Open the right top door.
2 Remove the filter.
3 Remove two screws and remove the right upper cover.
4 Insert the rolled up paper into the switch.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 309

Engine diagnostics preconditions
z Interlocks must be defeated if the activity is to be seen.
z Tests that turn the ITB (transfer motors and belt only) require:
• removal of the ITB
• installation of the toner collection bottle
z Pull out both trays to exercise either of the two cassette drives.
z At power on, the ITB cleaner must be present. If it is not, the engine reports an erroneous
cartridge state that might eventually damage the ITB (by turning the image drum while contacting
the ITB).
z The p-carg (image drum) drive test only turns the image drums that are removed to avoid ITB
damage.

Disable cartridge test

The disable cartridge test can be used for eliminating drum mechanics, diagnosis of color plane-
dependent problems and all repeating defects, and noise problems. This test checks the printer and
performs all of the standard initializations (similar to the functions associated with opening and
closing a door).
1 Defeat the appropriate interlocks.
2 Press to open the menus.
3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK, and then press .
5 Remove one or more of the image drums.
6 Print a job from the control panel or from a connected PC.
The printer ignores the missing image drums which allows the printer to print normally without one or
more color planes. To exit the test:
1 Press the CANCEL JOB button.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Paper-path test (and automatic sensors test)

The paper-path test can be used to make sure that various paper paths are working correctly or to
troubleshoot problems with tray configuration. It also allows you to print a page or pages with
complete control over source, duplex, and destination.
If the sensors option is ON, you can see the paper-path sensor status when the page is printing. The
media jam sensor status is reported if SENSORS is selected. If it is not selected, the normal error
message appears and all errors are entered into the event log.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PAPER PATH TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to select the input tray you want to test, the output bin, the duplexer (if available),
and the number of copies. Press after you set the value for each location.

Note If SENSORS is selected, the printer enters a special diagnostic mode. If you are in the diagnostic mode,
the sensor status appears and the SENSORS message will not appear as an option.
5 If the SENSORS option is selected, the letters A through K appear on the control panel. The values
include:

310 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

• A = Tray 2 feed A
• B = Tray 2 feed B
• C = Tray 3 feed A
• D = Tray 3 feed B
• E = Preregistration
• F = Pre-T2
• G = Pre-fuser
• H = Fuser outlet
• I = Duplex reverse
• J = Fuser feed
• K = Face-down output.
6 After selecting the last option, use or to scroll to PRINT TEST PAGE, and then press .
Perform the following steps to exit the test if SENSORS is selected:
1 Press the CANCEL JOB button.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Sensor test (interactive)

The sensor test can be used to determine if a bad sensor is causing a problem.

Note If a tray is out and causes a warning message, the message covers the sensor test message. When
the warning message is cleared, the sensor test appears.

The duplex re-feed sensor cannot be accessed for manual testing. Testing this sensor can be done
by covering the sensor with paper or tape, inserting the duplexer, and running a manual sensor test.
Also, this sensor is not monitored during the paper-path test with sensors.

1 Defeat the appropriate interlocks.

2 Press to open the menus.
3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to SENSOR TEST, and then press .

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 311

5 Touch the sensors and compare the reading on the control panel to the reading on the decoder
table. The decoder values include:
z A = Preregister
z B = T2
z C = Paper path
z D = Fuser outlet
z E = Face-down output
z F = Face-down capacity full
z G = Tray 1 media detection
z H = Tray 2 media detection
z I = Tray 2 feed sensor A and B
z J = Tray 2 X dimension (cross feed direction)
z K =Tray 2 Y dimension (feed direction)
z L = Tray 3 media detection
z M = Tray 3 feed sensor A and B
z N = Tray 3 X dimension (cross feed direction)
z O = Tray 3 Y dimension (feed direction)
z P = Lower right door
z Q = Right front/upper right door interlock
z R = Left front/lower left door interlock
z S = Upper left door
When the sensors are manually toggled, the control panel shows the sensors going from ON to OFF,
and then from OFF to ON.

Note If it is difficult to see the control panel message when toggling the sensors, remove the control panel
so it hangs in front of the printer. Also, using a mirror might be helpful.

All of the preconditions might not have been met if the diagnostic fails to operate and you are sent
back to the menu.

Perform the following steps to exit the test:

1 Press the CANCEL JOB button.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Components test
To repeat any of the following component tests, perform the following steps:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to REPEAT, and then press .

312 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Component test: Transfer motors test
The transfer motor test can be used to audibly check the four OPC drive motors and the ITB motor
when other printer processes are not operating.

Note The ITB lever must be in the “up” position, and the cleaning blade must be removed for this test and
other tests that involve the ITB. If the cleaning blade is not removed during the test, the test fails and
the printer returns to the previous menu. When the printer is turned on, the ITB cleaner must be
installed.

1 Make sure that all of the printer components are installed.

2 Remove the toner collection bottle and the cleaning blade.
3 Replace the toner collection bottle without the cleaning blade.
4 Defeat the appropriate interlocks.
5 Press to open the menus.
6 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
7 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
8 Use or to scroll to TRANSFER MOTORS, and then press .
9 ROTATING MOTORS appears on the control panel.
10 Check the movement of the OPC drive motor and the ITB from the front or the right side of the
printer.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Press the CANCEL JOB button.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Component test: Belt only test

The belt only test can be used to audibly and visually check the ITB motor, the ITB drive train, and
the rotation of the ITB.

Note The ITB lever must be in the “up” position, and the cleaning blade must be removed for this test and
other tests that involve the ITB. If the cleaning blade is not removed during the test, the test fails and
the printer returns to the previous menu. When the printer is turned on, the ITB cleaner must be
installed.

1 Make sure that all of the printer components are installed.

2 Remove the toner collection bottle and the cleaning blade.
3 Replace the toner collection bottle without the cleaning blade.
4 Remove the four image drums.
5 Defeat the appropriate interlocks.
6 Press to open the menus.
7 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
8 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
9 Use or to scroll to TRANSFER MOTOR, and then press .
10 ROTATING MOTORS appears on the control panel.
11 Check the movement of the ITB from the front or the right side of the printer.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 313

Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Press the CANCEL JOB button.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Component test: Image drum motors test

The image drum motor test can be used to check that the drum motor(s) are rotating, that the motors
and drive assemblies are working correctly, and to isolate image drum and image drum drive
assembly problems.
Interface problems can be easily detected, and the image drum motors test is helpful when the back
of the printer is removed to check the motors and drive assemblies. This test can also help isolate
image drum and image drum drive assembly problems.
The test turns each image drum motor that has the image drum cartridge removed for approximately
10 seconds. If multiple drums are removed, the printer turns the next motor for approximately 10
seconds. This continues until all of the image drum motors have turned.
If you begin the test with the image drums removed and then try to enter the diagnostics menu to
select DRUM MOTORS test, you must do this when the CHECKING PRINTER appears on the control panel.
If too much time elapses, the printer displays the supplies status information and will not allow the
customer to enter the menu structure to select the diagnostic test. If the supplies status information is
displayed, open the door and press SELECT to enter the menu, and then close the door.

Note For the print cartridge motors test and the image drum motors test, the printer will not check if the
cartridge is installed until a door is opened or closed. If the printer does not recognize that a cartridge
is removed, it is probably because the front door interlocks are defeated. Open and close the door that
does not have the interlocks defeated so the change is recognized.

The image drum motors test works with one or more image drums removed.

1 Defeat the front door interlocks.

2 Open the front doors.
3 Press to open the menus.
4 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
6 Use or to scroll to DRUM MOTORS, and then press .
7 Remove the image drum(s) that need to be tested.
8 Open and then close one of the doors.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Replace the image drums.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Print cartridge motors test

The print cartridge motor test can be used to visually and audibly check that the print cartridge
motor(s) are rotating, that the motors and drive assemblies are working correctly, and to isolate print
cartridge and print cartridge drive assembly problems. If multiple print cartridges are removed, the
printer turns each motor individually for approximately 10 seconds.

314 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Note For the print cartridge motors test and the image drum motors test, the printer will not check if the
cartridge is installed until a door is opened or closed. If the printer does not recognize that a cartridge
is removed, it is probably because the front door interlocks are defeated. Open and close the door that
does not have the interlocks defeated so the change is recognized.

If you begin the test with the print cartridges removed and then try to enter the diagnostics menu to
select CARTRIDGE MOTORS test, you must do this when the CHECKING PRINTER appears on the control
panel. If too much time elapses, the printer displays the supplies status information and will not allow
the customer to enter the menu structure to select the diagnostic test. If the supplies status
information is displayed, open the door and press SELECT to enter the menu, and then close the door.

Note The print cartridge motors test works with one or more print cartridges removed.

1 Defeat the front door interlocks.

2 Open the front doors.
3 Press to open the menus.
4 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
6 Use or to scroll to CARTRIDGE MOTORS, and then press .
7 Remove one or more of the print cartridges.
8 Open and then close one of the doors that is not interlock defeated.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Replace the image drums.
2 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Developer motors test

The developer motor test can be used to visually and audibly check that the developer motor(s) are
rotating, that the motors and drive assemblies are working correctly, and to isolate image drum and
image drum developer drive assembly problems. Interface problems can be easily detected, and the
developer motors test is helpful when the back of the printer is removed to check the motors and
drive assemblies. This test can also help isolate image drum and image drum drive assembly
problems.
Each motor is turned in sequence for approximately 10 seconds.

Note For the print cartridge motors test and the image drum motors test, the printer will not check if the
cartridge is installed until a door is opened or closed. If the printer does not recognize that a cartridge
is removed, it is probably because the front door interlocks are defeated. Open and close the door that
does not have the interlocks defeated so the change is recognized.

Note This test can be performed with the image drums installed or removed.

1 Press to open the menus.

2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to DEVELOPER MOTORS, and then press .

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 315

Perform the following steps to exit the test:.
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: YMCK laser test

The YMCK laser test can be used to check the each of the four laser scanner assemblies individually
for correct functionality.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Select YELLOW LASER SCANNER, MAGENTA LASER SCANNER, CYAN LASER SCANNER, or BLACK LASER
SCANNER, and then press .
5 The mirror motor of each laser scanner assembly starts up and runs so an audible check can be
performed. Check if any of the assemblies sound different.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Fuser motor test

The fuser motor test can be used to test the fuser motor and all of the mechanisms that it drives. You
might remove the fuser during the test in order to isolate the fuser-generated noise.
1 Defeat the appropriate interlocks.
2 Press to open the menus.
3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to FUSER MOTOR, and then press .
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Tray 1 feed motor test

The tray 1 feed motor test can be used to test the tray 1 paper feed motor, the secondary transfer
roller, registration roller, and the pre-registration roller motor (which all use the registration motor
M11). The clutch starts and stops the drive motor.

Note The tray 1 feed motor test will not operate unless the ITB is engaged and the green lever is “up”.
1 Defeat the right side door (ITB access) interlocks.

316 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

2 Press to open the menus.
3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to MP PAPER FEED DRIVE, and then press .
6 MOVING SOLENOID AND MOTOR appears on the control panel.
The motor turns and the tray 1 solenoid will “fire”. The clutch (CL1 on the pre-registration roller)
disengages partially into the test. CL2 to the registration roller disengages during the entire test.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Tray 2 feed drive test

The tray 2 feed drive test can be used to check the tray 2 pick rollers. M23 rotates clockwise to drive
the tray 2 mechanism.
1 Remove tray 2 and tray 3.

Note If tray 2 and tray 3 are not removed the test fails and MOVING SOLENOID AND MOTOR appears on the
control panel.

There is not a solenoid, and M24 is not tested.

2 Press to open the menus.

3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to UPPER CASSETTE FEED DRIVE, and then press .
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 317

Component test: Tray 3 feed drive test
The tray 3 feed drive test can be used to check the tray 3 pick rollers. M23 rotates counter clockwise
to drive the tray 3 mechanism.
1 Remove tray 2 and tray 3.

Note If tray 2 and tray 3 are not removed the test fails and MOVING SOLENOID AND MOTOR appears on the
control panel.

There is not a solenoid, and M24 is not tested.

2 Press to open the menus.

3 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
5 Use or to scroll to LOWER CASSETTE FEED DRIVE, and then press .
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Pre-registration test

The pre-registration test can be used to test M11 with the associated clutch (CL1) engaged. CL1 is
also tested during the tray 1 feed motor test.
1 Disable the appropriate interlocks on the right side (ITB access) door.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to PRE-REGISTRATION, and then press .
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Registration test

The registration test can be used to test M11 with the associated clutch (CL2) engaged. CL2 is OFF
during the tray 1 feed motor test.
1 Disable the appropriate interlocks on the right side (ITB access) door.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to REGISTRATION, and then press .

318 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

Component test: Face-up solenoid test

The face-up solenoid test can be used to test the face-up solenoid (SL2) for correct functionality.
1 Disable the interlocks on the left side (fuser access) door.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COMPONENT TEST, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to FACE UP SOLENOID, and then press .
5 Check the mechanisms that SL2 drives in the right side (fuser access) door.
The solenoid “fires”, and several seconds later it releases. Defeating the right side interlocks and
checking performing a visual test is suggested.
Perform the following steps to exit the test:
1 Use or to scroll to EXIT DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
2 The printer will re-boot.

Note Pressing the CANCEL JOB button cancels the test.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 319

Print stop test
The print stop test can be used to check the image on a belt before a secondary transfer occurs,
stopping media at any point in the paper path to check the post-secondary transfer image condition,
and to check the media condition at any point on the paper path.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PRINT/STOP TEST, and then press .
4 Select the desired millisecond delay (0 to 60,000). The printer displays READY DIAGNOSTIC MODE.
5 Send a print job from the control panel or from a PC.
The suggested delay times include:
z 0 to 3,000 milliseconds: Earliest page-stop point (60 mm from the top of the left side of the
lower access door.
z 1,000 milliseconds: T1 (Y on belt)
z 1,500 milliseconds: T1 (M on belt0
z 2,000 milliseconds: T1 (C on belt)
z 3,000 milliseconds: T1 (K on belt)
z 4,000 milliseconds: ITB image at post charger
z 4,100 milliseconds: Page at pre-registration
z 4,500 milliseconds: ITB image is complete for all colors (YMCK)
z 5,000 milliseconds: Page at registration (buckled)
z 7,000 milliseconds: ITB image and page at mid-secondary transfer
z 7,500 milliseconds: Page just prior to duplex diverter
z 8,000 milliseconds: Page at mid-fuser
z 8,500 milliseconds: Two-thirds of ITB image cleaned
z 12,500 milliseconds: Page partially delivered to face-down output tray

Note To adjust the delay times, one millisecond equals about 0.14 to 0.15 mm (66 milliseconds for 10 mm)
of image or media travel.

6 When the printer stops, remove the ITB.

Note Removing the ITB reduces the chance of toner sticking to the ITB when it is hot. Sticking toner might
cause print-quality defects.

Be careful when stopping pages in the T2 area. Do not knock un-fused toner off the page into the printer.

The printer stops about three milliseconds after the specified amount of time expires. Entering 0
immediately stops the page when the top of the page is detected. Also, the suggested delay times
are approximate times on a letter-size configuration page, and varies with different media sizes and
job size.
After the pages and images are checked, clear the paper path of any remaining media.

Note To exit the test, a power-cycle might be required when the jam is cleared.

320 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Engine test button
The engine test button is located on the DC controller PCA. You can reach it through a hole
(callout 1) at the right rear of the printer by using a small, non-metallic screwdriver or long, thin
object.

1 2

Figure 252. Engine test button

Engine test print page

The engine test print page verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly. This test is very
useful for isolating printer problems because the formatter is completely bypassed during an engine
test. The engine test print prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire printable area.

Note Media can be picked up from tray 2 or tray 3 if the formatter is installed. If the formatter is removed,
the tray from which you do not want to print must be open. Also, make sure that the print cartridges
are installed in the printer.

Note Make sure that the tray switch is set to standard size.

Follow these steps to perform an engine test print page if a formatter is installed:
1 Turn the printer on.
2 Use a non-metallic object to press the engine test button.
Follow these steps to perform an engine test print page if a formatter is not installed:
1 Turn the printer on, and wait until the printer finishes pressurizing the fuser and initializing the EP
process.
2 Use a non-metallic object to press the engine test button.
3 When the printer is idle, press the engine test button again to print an engine test print page.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 321

If the duplexer is installed, the test pattern is printed on both sides of the page. The page is printed
from tray 3 if it is installed. If tray 3 is not installed, the page prints from tray 2.

Figure 253. Engine test print page

Formatter heartbeat LED

The formatter heartbeat (callout 2 in figure 252) is a blinking light that indicates that the formatter is
functioning correctly. The formatter heartbeat is located above the Jet-Link connector on the left side
of the printer.
If the LED is off, the formatter hardware is not seated correctly or is not functioning correctly. Re-seat
the formatter hardware. If the LED is flashing, the formatter is functioning correctly. Look in other
areas for the cause of the problem.

322 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Information pages
From the control panel, you can print pages that show detailed information about the printer and its
current configuration. The following information pages are available:
z Configuration page
z HP Jetdirect page
z Supplies status pages
z File directory page
z Usage page

Note For a complete list of the printer information pages, print a menu map. See “Menu map” in chapter 3.
To select and print items from the information menu:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to the information page that you want, and then press .

Configuration page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or
to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs) and printer languages.
The content of the configuration page varies, depending on the options that are currently installed in
the printer.
If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page, make sure that the Jet-Link
cabling is correctly connected and functional, and that dc power is available to the finishing device.
Check and reseat suspect cable connections. If any of the cables are replaced, you must turn the
printer off and on again to have the printer recognize the finishing device.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 323

Configuration page elements
Figure 254 shows a sample configuration page, which contains information about the following
attributes:
A. Printer information (the “Printer Number” is the DC controller firmware version, and the “Firm-
ware Datecode” is the formatter firmware version)
B. Event log
C. Installed personalities and options (indicates installed devices and recognized sizes)
D. Memory
E. Security
F. Media trays and options (indicates installed devices and recognized sizes)
G. Color plane registration marks
H. EP parameters

A D

B E

F
H

Figure 254. Sample configuration page

324 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Supplies status pages
Use the supplies status pages to view the current printer supply status, to help troubleshoot printer
problems, or to verify printer information.
Supplies page 1 elements
A. Ordering information
B. Print cartridge information
C. Image drum information
D. Recycling information

B C

Figure 255. Sample supplies status page (1 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 325

Supplies page 2 elements
A. Ordering information
B. Image transfer kit information
C. Image cleaning kit information
D. Image fuser kit information
E. Recycling information

Figure 256. Sample supplies status page (2 of 2)

326 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Usage page
Print a usage page from the control panel (or gain access to the information remotely from HP Web
Jetadmin) to determine how many simplex or duplex pages of each media size have been scanned
on the copy module and printed on the printer. Average toner coverage is approximated by counting
pixels. Jams are not counted. The data cannot be reset manually, and values such as total print and
scan impressions, toner coverage, serial number, default language, and default media size are
backed up between the printer NVRAM and the hard disk.
The total page count on the usage page does not match the page count on the configuration page.
The reasons for this include:
z the configuration page counts “clicks” and the usage pages counts letter/A4 equivalents
z the configuration page counts jammed pages and the usage page does not count jammed pages

Figure 257. Sample usage page

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 327

File directory page
Use the file directory page to view current directory structures, to help troubleshoot printer problems,
or to verify storage capabilities.
File directory page elements
A. Directory information

Figure 258. Sample file directory page

328 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Electrical connection and contact failures
The printer has 23 high-voltage paths, and each path has four or five connectors. Two signs that
indicate that there is a poor electrical connection include high-voltage arcing and a loss of high-
voltage bias. Some of the most common connector problems include the following:
z for connectors and flat flexible cables (FFCs):
• a service reconnection failure
• shipping/printing microvibrations and corrosion that cause intermittent connections
z image drum (p-crg) internal and external connections
z consumables memory failures and past-life consumables (also refills)
See the following for troubleshooting electrical connection problems:
z Timing charts (page 112) in chapter 5
z Wiring diagrams (page 114) in chapter 5
z DC controller circuit (page 131) in chapter 5
z DC controller operations (page 134) in chapter 5
To fix a connection failure
1 Open and close the doors (including the image drum door).
2 Reseat the consumables.
3 Check for poor contact or corrosion on the consumable and on the door connections.
4 Reseat the connectors, particularly the FFCs, after servicing the printer.
5 Turn the printer on again.
Signs that a bad connection might exist include:
z sensor failures
z motor stalls
z beam detect errors
z OPC velocity errors
z ITB velocity errors
z developer sleeve motor stalls
z cartridge (p and t) memory errors
z scanner velocity errors
z formatter hangs
z CPR failures
z complete color plane dropouts
z dead control panel
z auger marks that change direction
z reversing stepper motors

CAUTION If any of these signs occur or if any of the related PCAs or assemblies are replaced, be careful when
disconnecting and reconnecting connectors. The connectors can break easily.

Avoid touching any high-voltage contact. Skin oil can affect the connection.

Note If the problem persists after replacing the connector, remove and reseat all of the FFC cables. If the
problem still persists, replace the appropriate ribbon cables.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 329

Image formation and print-quality troubleshooting tools
The following tools are helpful in solving image formation and print quality problems.

Print-quality problems associated with the environment

The printer is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions. Make sure that the printing
environment is within specifications. See “Specifications” on page 22 in chapter 1.

Print-quality problems associated with media

Many print-quality problems and media-damage problems such as excessive curl are caused by
using unsupported media, by using supported media with the incorrect media-type settings, or by
using unsupported media without a media-type setting. Using supported media and selecting the
appropriate type setting from the control panel alleviates many of the print-quality problems that
customers encounter.

Note Before troubleshooting print-quality problems, make sure that the customer is using supported media
and that they are selecting the appropriate control panel type setting for the media they are using.
Also, make sure to select the matching media-type setting in the printer driver to avoid media-type
mismatch errors and prompts to load different media.

See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1 for more information about supported media and
media selection.

Reseating consumables
Correct functionality of all of the consumables for the HP color LaserJet 9500 is dependent on
correct seating to provide high-voltage continuity and correct registration. Turn off the printer and
reseat the consumables if you suspect high-voltage contact problems or part registration problems.

Cleaning the post charger

Cleaning the post charger might eliminate some print-quality problems, particularly poor secondary
transfer of black. See “Cleaning the post charger” on page 94 in chapter 4 for more information.

Cleaning the fuser input

Cleaning the fuser input might eliminate some print-quality problems, particularly discharge marks
and other secondary transfer defects. See “Cleaning the fuser input” on page 94 in chapter 4 for
more information.

Print-quality troubleshooting pages

Use the built-in print-quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
The pages identify repeating defects, and isolate the repeating defects to a color plane and a
consumable. Perform the following steps to print the print-quality troubleshooting pages:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PQ TROUBLESHOOTING, and then press .
4 The printer returns to the READY state after printing the print-quality troubleshooting pages.

330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

The print-quality troubleshooting pages include:
z two instruction pages
z five target pages
z one demonstration page
z one configuration page

Figure 259. Print-quality assessment page (1 of 2)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 331

Figure 260. Print-quality assessment page (2 of 2)

332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Rulers
CPR
gauges

Fuser
ghost
bar

Numbered
pages

OPC
ghost bar

Figure 261. Print-quality assessment page attributes

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 333

Color band test
The color band test has primary colors (CMYK), secondary colors (RGB), and white arranged in 25
percent fill-stripes that are parallel to the feed direction. The test is useful when troubleshooting high-
voltage arcing, as well as color plane separation, secondary color separation, and white (without
toner) on the same page. Toner that is visible in the unprintable areas near the edges of the media
might indicate that there is an arcing problem.

Note If you are troubleshooting high-voltage arcing, use a half-speed setting for media types (arcs appear
more often at half-speed).

Note A color band test is useful in conjunction with a print stop test. See “Print stop test” on page 320 for
more information.

High-
voltage
arcing

Figure 262. Color band test page

Printing a color band test

1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to COLOR BAND TEST, and then press .
The color band test prints on A3 or 11-by-17 media if one of those sizes is set as the default media
size on the control panel.

Note The media type must be set to PLAIN or ANY for this test to print.

Engine test print page

The engine test print page verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly, and is helpful in
troubleshooting print-quality problems. The engine test print prints a full page of horizontal lines
across the entire printable area.

Note Media can be picked up from tray 2 or tray 3 if the formatter is installed. If the formatter is removed,
the tray from which you do not want to print must be open. Also, make sure that the print cartridges
are installed in the printer.

Note Make sure that the tray switch is set to standard size.

Follow these steps to perform an engine test print page if a formatter is installed:
1 Turn the printer on.

334 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

2 Use a non-metallic object to press the engine test button.
Follow these steps to perform an engine test print page if a formatter is not installed:
1 Turn the printer on, and wait until the printer finishes pressurizing the fuser and initializing the EP
process.
2 Use a non-metallic object to press the engine test button.
3 When the printer is idle, press the engine test button again to print an engine test print page.
If the duplexer is installed, the test pattern is printed on both sides of the page. The page is printed
from tray 3 if it is installed. If tray 3 is not installed, the page prints from tray 2.

Figure 263. Engine test print page

Laser/scanner adjustment page

See “Printing a laser/scanner adjustment page” on page 219 in chapter 6 for information on printing,
reading, and interpreting the laser/scanner adjustment page. This page is helpful for assessing and
correcting color plane registration problems.

Note This procedure can only be performed using A4- or letter-size media. Using A3 or 11-by-17 media
gives invalid results.

Door ruler and repeating defect frequencies

A metric ruler, located on the front left door of the printer, can be used for measuring the frequency of
repetitive print-quality defects. The following table describes highlight frequencies and the
associated EP process part.

Table 54. Repeating print-quality defect dimensions

K developer (x1) 27 mm (1.06 inches)
CMY developer (x3) 30 mm (1.18 inches)
Charger roller (x4) 45 mm (1.77 inches)
T1 backing roller (x4 on ITB) 52 mm (2.04 inches)
T2 roller 71 mm (2.8 inches)
T2 backing roller (on ITB) 73 mm (2.87 inches)
OPC (x4) 98 mm (3.86 inches)
ITB driver roller 100 mm (3.93 inches)
Cleaning backing roller 100 mm (3.93 inches)
Space between T1s 100 mm (3.93 inches)
Fuser bottom 140 mm (5.51 inches)
Fuser top 148 mm (5.83 inches)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 335

Sample defects and solutions

See “Repeating See “Lines and See “Lines, streaks See “Diagonal bands See “Light or faint
marks (98 mm)” on bands appear or scratches appear or lines” on page image and dropouts”
page 337 and perpendicular to parallel to feed 348. on page 350.
“Repeating marks (45 feed direction” on direction” on page
mm)” on page 338. page 341. 344.

See “Wavy brush See “Color plane See “Primary color See “Ghosted image See “Distorted or
marks” on page 354 misregistration” on covers entire page” (98 mm)” on page misplaced image”
page 355. on page 357. 358. on page 361.

See “Poorly fused See “Missing color See “Blank” on page See “Hand or See “Fine, yellow
image” on page 362 plane” on page 364. 365. fingerprints” on page dot background” on
365. page 367.

See “Toner halos or

explosions occur
around solid
secondary colors” on
page 368.

336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Repeating marks (98 mm)

Figure 264. Repeating marks (98 mm)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 337

Repeating marks (45 mm)

Figure 265. Repeating marks (45 mm)

338 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 55. Repeating marks
Description Possible causes Solution
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
every 98 mm surface of the OPC or the the problem to a single color plane.
surface of the OPC is
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
damaged.
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
every 45 mm surface of the primary the problem to a single color plane.
charging roller, or the
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
surface of the primary
charging roller is damaged.
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to verify
every 52 mm surface of the primary that the problem is isolated to a single color plane.
transfer backing roller, or
2 Replace the ITB.
the primary transfer
backing roller is damaged.
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
every 30 mm in surface of the developer the problem to a single color plane.
cyan, magenta, sleeve, or the surface of the
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
or yellow, or developer sleeve is
every 27 mm in damaged.
black
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to make
every 3 to 4 surface of the ITB, or the sure that the defect appears in all colors, and that the
pages for letter surface of the ITB is repeat pattern is every 3 to 4, pages for letter and A4 and
and A4, and damaged. every 2 to 3 pages for 11-by-17 and A3.
every 2 to 3
Note
pages for
The marks appear in the same position each time that they
11-by-17 and A3
occur, perpendicular to the feed direction.
Marks appear in 2 Partially remove the ITB and check the surface for
the same contamination or damage by rotating the flywheel on the
position, right side of the belt.
perpendicular to 3 If toner is fused to the belt, remove it by gently scraping it
the feed off using the edge of a non-serrated coin or similar smooth,
direction rounded edge.
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Remove the secondary transfer roller and check the
every 71 mm surface of the secondary surface for contamination or damage.
transfer roller, or the
2 Clean or replace the secondary transfer roller if necessary.
surface of the secondary
transfer roller is damaged.
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Remove the fuser assembly and check the rollers for
every 149 mm surface of the upper fuser contamination or damage.
roller, or the surface of the
2 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning with a
upper fuser roller is
soft cloth, or by printing a few blank pages. Run a fuser
damaged.
cleaning page (CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY,
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE).
3 When surface damage exists or contamination cannot be
cleaned, replace the fuser assembly.
Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer for the
original cause of the contamination or roller damage before
installing a new fuser assembly.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 339

Table 55. Repeating marks (continued)
Marks repeat Contaminant is stuck to the 1 Remove the fuser assembly and check the rollers for
every 140 mm surface of the lower fuser contamination or damage.
roller, or the surface of the
2 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning with a
lower fuser roller is
soft cloth, or by printing a few blank pages. Run a fuser
damaged.
cleaning page (CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY,
PROCESS CLEANING PAGE).
3 When surface damage exists or contamination cannot be
cleaned, replace the fuser assembly.
Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer for the
original cause of the contamination or roller damage before
installing a new fuser assembly.
Marks repeat Contamination exists on 1 Lower the green lever, remove the secondary transfer roller,
parallel to the the post T2 static charge attach the blue brush to the green tongs (both are behind
feed direction eliminating comb (fuser the right front door), and use the brush to clean the post T2
several times on inlet). static charge eliminating comb (fuser inlet).
a page, but with
2 Check electrical connections to the secondary transfer unit,
no regular
and check for a good ground.
frequency
3 Replace the high-voltage power supply.

340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Lines and bands appear perpendicular to feed direction

Figure 266. Lines and bands

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 341

Table 56. Lines and bands
Table 57. Description Possible cause Solution
Light or dark lines repeat Contaminant is stuck to 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to
every 98 mm the surface of the OPC, isolate the problem to a single color plane.
or the surface of the OPC
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
is damaged or has been
exposed to light.
White lines repeat every 3 Contaminant is stuck to 1 Partially remove the ITB and check the surface for
to 4 pages for letter and the surface of the ITB, or contamination or damage by rotating the flywheel on
A4, and every 2 to 3 pages the surface of the ITB is the right side of the belt.
for 11-by-17 and A3 damaged.
2 If toner is fused to the belt, remove it by gently
scraping it off using the edge of a non-serrated coin
or similar smooth, rounded edge.
Light lines repeat every Contaminant is stuck to 1 Remove the fuser assembly, and check the rollers
149 mm the surface of the upper for contamination or damage.
fuser roller, or the surface
2 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning
of the upper fuser roller is
with a soft cloth, or by printing a few blank pages.
damaged.
Run a fuser cleaning page (CONFIGURE DEVICE,
PRINT QUALITY, and PROCESS CLEANING PAGE).
3 When surface damage exists or contamination
cannot be cleaned, replace the fuser assembly.
Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer
for the original cause of the contamination or roller
damage before installing a new fuser assembly.
Light lines repeat every Contaminant is stuck to 1 Remove the fuser assembly, and check the rollers
140 mm the surface of the lower for contamination or damage.
fuser roller, or the surface
2 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning
of the lower fuser roller is
with a soft cloth, or by printing a few blank pages.
damaged.
Run a fuser cleaning page (CONFIGURE DEVICE,
PRINT QUALITY, PROCESS CLEANING PAGE).
3 When surface damage exists or contamination
cannot be cleaned, replace the fuser assembly.
Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer
for the original cause of the contamination or roller
damage before installing a new fuser assembly.
Bands/dark lines (47 mm A T1 vibration exists. 1 Make sure that the media being used is within
band on heavy stock in specifications. See “Media specifications” on page
half-speed mode) 31 in chapter 1.
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control
panel is appropriate for the media being used.
3 Change the high coverage 2 setting (CONFIGURE
DEVICE, OPTIMIZE MENU) to ON, which prints yellow
dots in an 8-by-8 mm pattern for half- and full-speed
printing (opposed to 8-by-8 mm in full speed and 10-
by-10 mm in half speed).
Note
High coverage 1 and high coverage 2 are not mutually
exclusive. If both items are turned on, the yellow dots
turn off.

342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 56. Lines and bands (continued)
Bands/dark lines (50/ A T1 vibration exists. 1 Make sure that the media being used is within
100 mm bands) specifications. See “Media specifications” on page
31 in chapter 1.
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control
panel is appropriate for the media being used.
3 Change the high coverage 3 setting (CONFIGURE
DEVICE, OPTIMIZE MENU) to ON, which slightly
increases the OPC/ITB speed mismatch.
Bands/dark lines A T2 nip vibration causes 1 Make sure that the media being used is within
band at T1. specifications. See “Media specifications” on page
Cardstock band (37 mm 31 in chapter 1.
from trailing edge of
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control
ledger, and 115 mm from
panel is appropriate for the media used.
trailing edge of letter, on
media heavier than 3 Change the high coverage 3 setting (CONFIGURE
120 g/m² printed in full DEVICE, OPTIMIZE MENU) to ON, which slightly
speed modes) increases the OPC/ITB speed mismatch.
Bands of gloss or density A flat spot on the fuser 1 Correct the cause of the power interruption.
differences repeating at roller is caused by
2 Replace the fuser.
fuser frequency (149 mm unplugging the printer
or 140 mm) (rather than using the
power button to turn it
off).
Band (scan direction The ITB is defective. z Replace the ITB.
ripple)

Dark lines 3 to 5 mm apart

perpendicular to the feed
direction (lines are
heaviest in the middle of
the page)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 343

Lines, streaks or scratches appear parallel to feed direction

Figure 267. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (1 of 2)

344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Figure 268. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (2 of 2)

Table 58. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction

Description Possible causes Solution
White fine/clear A laser beam is blocked. 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
the problem to a single color plane.
2 Remove the laser assembly and the image drum for the
indicated color.
3 Use a flashlight to examine the area above the toner
cartridge area. Carefully clean the area and remove any
obstructions.
4 Check the laser beam path for obstructions.
5 Replace the laser scanner assembly.
The laser scanner 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
assembly mirror is the problem to a single color plane.
contaminated.
2 Replace the laser scanner assembly.
A circumference scratch 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
exists on the developing the problem to a single color plane.
cylinder or on the OPC.
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
A circumference scratch 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate
exists on the OPC. the problem to a single color plane.
2 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
Clear white A post T1 obstruction is 1 Check the areas near the surface of the ITB (post primary
(continuous) moving toner on the ITB. transfer to secondary transfer) for obstructions that might
move toner.
2 Correct if necessary.
A post T2 obstruction is 1 Check the areas above the media (post secondary transfer
moving pre-fused toner to fuser) for obstructions that might move toner.
on the page.
2 Correct if necessary.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 345

Table 58. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (continued)
A circumference scratch 1 Partially remove the ITB and check the surface for
exists, or there is contamination or damage by rotating the flywheel on the
contamination on the right side of the belt.
ITB.
2 If toner is fused to the belt, remove it by gently scraping it off
using the edge of a non-serrated coin or similar smooth,
rounded edge.
3 Replace the ITB if surface damage exists or contamination
cannot be cleaned.
A circumference scratch 1 Remove the fuser assembly and check the rollers for
exists on the upper fuser contamination or damage.
roller.
2 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning with a
soft cloth or by printing a few blank pages.
3 Run a fuser cleaning page (CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT
QUALITY, PROCESS CLEANING PAGE).
4 Replace the fuser assembly if surface damage exists or
contamination cannot be cleaned.

Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer for the
original cause of the contamination or roller damage before
installing a new fuser assembly.
The ITB drive roller is z Replace the ITB.
damaged or deformed.
White wide/ The post charger is 1 Clean the post charger assembly.
blurred contaminated or
2 Check the high-voltage path from the post charger power
damaged.
supply to the post charger assembly on the ITB assembly for
continuity and good connections. Check for good grounding
connections.
3 Check power connection to the post charger power supply.
4 Replace the ITB.
Brown wide A cleaning blade or seat- 1 Remove and reseat the toner collection bottle and the
streak latch failure exists. cleaning blade, making sure that both seat and latch
(sometimes correctly.
accompanied by
2 Replace the cleaning blade if necessary.
a 59.A0 error)
3 After the cleaning blade fail is corrected, select CALIBRATE
NOW on the control panel.
Roller marks z This is usually 1 Make sure that the media being used is within specifications.
(wide streaks caused by out-of- See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
parallel to feed specification media.
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control panel is
direction) on z Post-fuser roller appropriate for the media being used.
heavy, glossy, or pressure causes
plastic media different gloss-level 3 Use a straight-through paper path (tray 1 to the face-up bin)
streaks and and manual duplex to avoid as many post-fuser rollers as
sometimes produces possible.
waves in the media.
Note
Onsite visits and parts replacement (such as printer parts or
consumables) will not help to alleviate roller marks.

346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 58. Lines, streaks, or scratches appear parallel to feed direction (continued)
Line parallel to The ITB is defective. z Replace the ITB
the feed direction
(feed direction
ripple)

Dotted line
parallel to the
feed direction
(most common in
cyan)
Wide streaks of The ITB is defective (belt 1 Try a different type of media.
density variation wave).
2 Print a darker fill or a different pattern fill.
parallel to the
feed direction 3 Replace the ITB.
Fine, straight This usually occurs on 1 Make sure that the media being used is within specifications.
scratches in the very heavy media. Warm, See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
fused toner still toner is scratched by
2 Make sure that the media-type setting on the control panel is
media guide ribs.
appropriate for the media being used.
Note
Selecting the appropriate media-type setting turns on the paper
path cooling fans that cool the fused toner faster and lessen the
ribbed effect.
3 Media and/or toner dust can accumulate on the diverter and
delivery feed assemblies after more than 40,000 pages are
printed. Check for contamination and replace the assemblies
if necessary.
4 If duplexing, consider manual duplex.
5 Try printing to the face-up bin.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 347

Diagonal bands or lines

Figure 269. Diagonal bands or lines

348 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 59. Diagonal bands or lines
Description Possible causes Solution
Diagonal banding This might be a 1 Print several sets of print-quality troubleshooting pages to try
or an angled temporary problem that to fix the problem. If this does not work, it isolates the
plaid-appearing occurs in heavy or solid problem to a single color plane.
density variation color fill pages printed in
2 Reseat the image drum that matches the diagonal band
(50 degree angle large quantities. It is
pattern color.
and are about caused by a failure to
15 mm apart) charge toner evenly. 3 Check the high-voltage power supply and connections to the
image drum. Check for good grounding connections in the
image drum door.
4 Replace the image drum matching the diagonal band
pattern color.
Pages are z The cleaning blade 1 Reseat the cleaning blade assembly.
marked with or the ITB is past life
2 Replace the cleaning blade assembly.
diagonal or V- recommendations.
shaped lines of z The cleaning blade is 3 Replace the ITB if necessary (it is usually not damaged).
smudged dark bent into a backward
brown toner “J” shape as the ITB
deposits runs underneath it.
This creates enough
drag to possibly
cause a registration
roller motor or ITB
motor abnormal error
(see the description
of error 59.A0).
z Blade tucks appear
to be more common
when image drums,
the cleaning blade,
and the ITB are new.
The problem is more
common in high
temperature and
high humidity
environments. Some
blade tucks cause a
59.A0 error before a
page is printed. In
this case, check the
image on the ITB.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 349

Light or faint image and dropouts

Figure 270. Light or faint image and dropouts

350 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 60. Light or faint image and dropouts
Description Possible causes Solution
Poor primary z Bad density 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
transfer calibration exists. problem to a single color plane.
z Insufficient T1 bias 2 Reseat the ITB and the image drum that appears on the print-
exists for the quality troubleshooting pages.
particular primary
color. 3 Check the high-voltage paths from the high-voltage power
supply to the image drum that appears on the print-quality
z Poor contact exists
troubleshooting pages. Check and clean the contacts and the
between the high-
connectors. Check for good grounding connections in the
voltage power supply
image drum door.
and the primary
transfer roller. 4 Check the event log for calibration failures, and troubleshoot
z The primary transfer the calibration process if errors are found. Check the density
roller is damaged. calibration sensor window for blockage or contamination, and
z The high-voltage then select CALIBRATE NOW on the control panel.
power supply is Note
defective. Calibration errors are not reported as errors on the control panel.
5 If the problem is severe, replace the image drum that appears
on the print-quality troubleshooting pages.
6 For midtones that are too light, try changing the (color) density
setting in the CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY, ADJUST
COLOR menu. Settings can be adjusted for each color plane.
• Cyan density = 0 (default), -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
• Magenta density = 0 (default), -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
• Yellow density = 0 (default), -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
• Black density = 0 (default), -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Note
The default is zero for each color. A lower number might result in
lighter or less dense midtones for the particular color plane. A
positive number might result in darker or denser midtones for that
color plane.

Note
These changes are universal and apply to all printed pages
regardless of media type.

Note
These settings control midtones (solid color and very light color fills
will not be affected) for each color plane.
7 Replace the ITB.
8 Replace the high-voltage power supply.
The developer has 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
deteriorated. problem to a single color plane.
2 Print 20 pages of solid color in the indicated color.
3 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 351

Poor secondary z Secondary transfer 1 Make sure that the media being used is within specifications.
transfer bias is not sufficient See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
for complete transfer
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control panel is
on this type of media.
appropriate for the media being used.
z Poor contact exists
between the Note
secondary transfer Transfer occurs better on smooth media. Exceptionally rough
roller and the high- media will probably encounter secondary transfer problems that
voltage power supply. cannot be addressed.
z Poor ITB ground 3 Remove, check, and reseat the ITB and secondary transfer
contact exists. roller. Replace them if necessary.
z Bad density 4 Check the event log for calibration failures. Check the density
calibration exists. calibration sensor window for blockage or contamination, and
z Poor physical contact select CALIBRATE NOW on the control panel.
exists between the
5 Check the bias contacts between the secondary transfer roller
ITB and the
and the high-voltage power supply. Clean or repair them if
secondary transfer
necessary.
assembly.
z The secondary 6 Check the event log for calibration errors, and troubleshoot
transfer assembly or the calibration process if errors are found.
the secondary Note
transfer roller is Calibration errors are not reported as errors on the control panel.
damaged.
7 Clean the post charger assembly.
z The high-voltage
power supply is 8 Check the high-voltage path from the post charger power
defective. supply to the post charger assembly on the ITB assembly for
z The post charger is continuity and good connections. Check for good grounding
defective. connections.
9 Check the power connection to the post charger power
supply.
10 Change the transfer down/up setting in the CONFIGURE
DEVICE, OPTIMIZE menu. Try decreasing the transfer setting
(DOWN 1 or DOWN 2). This might result in darker images on
certain medias.
Note
Some media might show an opposite reaction to settings. DOWN
settings might result in a lighter image, and UP settings might
result in a darker image.

Note
Try other media type settings before using this option. Optimize
settings are global and apply to all media types. If this is a
temporary solution, remember to reset it when the job is complete.

Note
It is possible to set TRANSFER UP 1, 2 and TRANSFER DOWN 1, 2
to ON at the same time. If multiple bits are set, the default is used
(all OFF).
11 Replace the secondary transfer assembly.
12 Replace the high-voltage power supply.

352 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Poor leading edge Leading edge secondary 1 Make sure that the media being used is within
transfer (also transfer bias is not specifications. See “Media specifications” on page 31 in
missing toner, and sufficient for complete chapter 1.
discharge marks transfer for this particular
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control
exist on the leading media.
panel is appropriate for the media being used.
edge)
3 Change the LEADING EDGE setting under the
CONFIGURE DEVICE, OPTIMIZE, LEADING EDGE DOWN/
UP menu. First, try setting LEADING EDGE DOWN to ON.
Depending on the type of media, you might get better
results setting LEADING EDGE UP to ON.

Note
It is best to try other media types first because this is a
universal setting that applies to all pages printed regardless of
the media type.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 353

Wavy brush marks

Figure 271. Wavy brush marks

Table 61. Wavy brush marks

Description Possible causes Solution
Primary color z Poor developing bias 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
toner contact exists. problem to a single color plane.
background z An image drum 2 Reseat the image drum that matches the wavy brush-pattern
covering the cleaning brush failure color.
entire page, exists because of
often with a bad connection or 3 Check the high-voltage power supply and connections to the
sinusoidal toner overload. image drum. Check for good grounding connections in the
(brush-like) image drum door.
z The OPC or carrier
wave pattern has deteriorated. 4 Replace the image drum that matches the wavy brush-pattern
z The high-voltage color.
power supply is 5 Replace the high-voltage power supply.
defective.

354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Color plane misregistration

Figure 272. Color plane misregistration

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 355

Table 62. Color plane misregistration
Description Table 63. Possible Solution
causes
One primary z A bad calibration 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
color plane is exists. problem to a single color plane.
misregistered z An image drum is not 2 Reseat the image drum for the misregistered color.
from the other seated correctly.
three 3 Check the event log for calibration failures, and check the
z A laser scanner is
density calibration sensor window for blockage or
misaligned.
contamination.
z A process cartridge
drive assembly is 4 Make sure that the sensor window cleaning mechanism is
defective. functioning correctly.
z A laser scanner is 5 Open and close the right front door a few times to actuate the
defective. sensor window cleaning mechanism, and then select
z A DC controller PCA CALIBRATE NOW on the control panel.
is defective. 6 Print a laser alignment page to determine if a laser scanner is
misaligned. Adjust the laser scanner if necessary.
7 Replace the laser scanner of the indicated color. Test the new
laser with a laser alignment page and adjust it if necessary.
8 Replace the process cartridge drive assembly.
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
All primary color z A bad calibration 1 Check the event log for calibration failures, and check the
planes are mis- exists. density calibration sensor window for blockage or
registered from z A sensor window is contamination.
each other dirty or blocked. 2 Make sure that the sensor window cleaning mechanism is
z The ITB or the ITB functioning correctly.
drive is defective.
3 Open and close the right front door a few times to actuate the
z The DC controller sensor window cleaning mechanism, and select CALIBRATE
PCA is defective. NOW on the control panel.
4 Check the ITB drive mechanism for correct movement.
Replace it if necessary.
5 Check the ITB for damage. Replace it if necessary.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.

356 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Primary color covers entire page

Figure 273. Primary color covers entire page

Table 64. Primary color covers entire page

Description Possible causes Solution
z A primary z Poor contact exists 1 Reseat the image drum of the indicated color.
color (such as between the primary
2 Check the high-voltage contacts between the image drum
black) covers charging roller of the
and the print engine. Check for continuity back to the high-
the entire indicated color and
voltage power supply.
page the high-voltage
regardless of power supply. 3 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
the intended z A primary charging 4 Replace the high-voltage power supply.
page colors roller has
z The deteriorated.
background z The high-voltage
color might power supply is
have defective.
sinusoidal
waves, similar
to brush
marks, in it

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 357

Ghosted image (98 mm)

Figure 274. Ghosted image (98 mm)

358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Ghosted image (140 mm)

Figure 275. Ghosted image (140 mm)

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 359

Table 65. Ghosted image
Description Possible causes Solution
OPC ghost z The OPC ground is 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
(ghosted image poor. problem to a single color plane, and to isolate fuser ghosts
at 98 mm that z The primary transfer (148 mm repeat) from OPC ghosts (98 mm repeat). Fuser
can be a bias contact is poor. ghosts will ghost into the third column of the print-quality
positive or z The high-voltage troubleshooting page, and OPC ghosts will ghost into the
negative ghost) power supply is second column of the print-quality troubleshooting page.
defective. 2 For an OPC ghost, remove and reseat the image drum for the
indicated color.
3 Check the high-voltage contacts between the image drum and
the print engine back to the high-voltage power supply.
4 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
5 Replace the high-voltage power supply.
Note
Some ghosting cannot be eliminated. In that situation, the
customer can change the page layout to avoid the ghosted image.
OPC ghost 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
(ghosted image problem to a single color plane, and to isolate fuser ghosts
at 140 mm that (140 mm repeat) from OPC ghosts (98 mm repeat). Fuser
can be a ghosts will ghost into the third column of the print-quality
positive or troubleshooting page, and OPC ghosts will ghost into the
negative ghost) second column of the print-quality troubleshooting page.
2 Make sure that media being used is within specifications. See
“Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
3 Make sure that the media type setting on the control panel is
appropriate for the media being used.
4 Remove the fuser assembly and check the rollers for
contamination or damage.
5 Contamination might be removed by gentle cleaning with a soft
cloth, or by printing a few blank pages. Run a fuser cleaning
page (CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY, PROCESS
CLEANING PAGE).
6 Replace the fuser assembly if surface damage exists or
contamination cannot be cleaned.
Note
Always troubleshoot the other components in the printer for the
original cause of the contamination or roller damage before
installing a new fuser assembly.

Note
Some ghosting cannot be eliminated. In that situation, the
customer can change the page layout to avoid the ghosted image.

360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Distorted or misplaced image

Figure 276. Distorted or misplaced image

Table 66. Distorted or misplaced image

Description Possible causes Solution
Entire image is z The media is out of 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
misplaced, specification. problem to a single color plane.
distorted, or z Paper-path or feed 2 If a media-feed problem is suspected, make sure that the
skewed on the problems exist. media being used is within specifications. See “Media
page z A tray is damaged or specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
needs an
3 Check the paper path for obstructions, and check the feed
adjustment.
rollers for damage.
z The laser scanner is
faulty. 4 Feed media from different trays to isolate the problem.
z The DC controller 5 If the problem can be isolated to a single color plane with the
PCA is faulty. print-quality troubleshooting pages, reseat the image drum for
the indicated color.
6 Replace the indicated laser scanner if necessary.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 361

Poorly fused image

Figure 277. Poorly fused image (1 of 2)

362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Figure 278. Poorly fused image (2 of 2)

Table 67. Poorly fused image

Description Possible causes Solution
Image is poorly z The media is out of 1 Make sure that the media being used is within specifications.
fused to the specification. See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
page (toner falls z The PAPER TYPE 2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control panel is
or rubs off in setting is incorrect for appropriate for the media being used.
places) the media being
used. 3 Replace the fuser.
z The fuser is faulty or 4 Replace the low-voltage power supply.
damaged.
z The low-voltage
power supply is
faulty.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 363

Missing color plane

Figure 279. Missing color plane

Table 68. Missing color plane

Description Possible causes Solution
Image prints Primary transfer (OPC to 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to isolate the
with one primary belt) of a particular color problem to a single color plane.
color plane fails because:
2 Remove and reseat the image drum for the indicated color.
missing
z Primary transfer bias 3 Check the high-voltage contacts between the indicated image
is missing. drum and the print engine back to the high-voltage power
z Image drum, primary supply.
charging, or 4 Replace the image drum for the indicated color.
developing biases
are missing. 5 Remove and reseat the ITB. Check the primary transfer bias
contacts for damage or corrosion. Check the ITB ground.
z A laser scanner is
Check the T1 roller of the indicated color for correct
faulty or a laser path
positioning and spring tension.
is blocked.
z The high-voltage 6 Replace the ITB if necessary.
power supply is 7 Check the laser path between the laser scanner assembly
faulty. and the image drum for blockage.
z The DC controller
8 Check the connectors between the DC controller PCA and the
PCA is faulty.
indicated laser scanner assembly. Reconnect them if
necessary.
9 Replace the laser scanner for the indicated color. Test the new
laser with a laser alignment page, and adjust it if necessary.
10 Replace the high-voltage power supply.
11 Replace the DC controller PCA.

364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Blank

Figure 280. Blank

Table 69. Blank

Description Possible causes Solution
All pages are z The high-voltage 1 Print a set of print-quality troubleshooting pages to eliminate
blank power supply is the possibility of a communication, driver, or software program
defective. problem.
z The DC controller 2 If the blank pages persist, replace the high-voltage power
PCA is defective. supply.
3 Replace the DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 365

Hand or fingerprints

Figure 281. Hand or fingerprints

Table 70. Hand or fingerprints

Description Possible causes Solution
Clear finger and Handprints or fingerprints z This defect usually clears up by printing a few pages. Tell the
handprints exist on the ITB (possibly customer to print 10 to 15 pages on lower-cost media, and to
appear on the from installation or jam not touch the ITB.
printed page clearing).

366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Fine, yellow dot background

Figure 282. Fine, yellow dot background

Table 71. Fine, yellow dot background

Description Possible causes Solution
A fine, yellow z The HP color If the 47 mm band countermeasure is undesirable, it can be turned
dot pattern LaserJet 9500 uses a off by using the control panel (CONFIGURE DEVICE, PRINT QUALITY,
background on yellow dot OPTIMIZE, HIGH COVERAGE 1, set to ON). The user might notice an
all printed background for increase in banding. See “High coverage 1” on page 371.
pages counterfeit tracking.
z It takes advantage of Note
a less-noticeable The anti-counterfeiting pattern cannot be turned off.
yellow dot pattern to
reduce banding Note
(particularly at 47 The yellow print cartridge has an extra measure of yellow toner so
mm from start of that the use of yellow dot patterns does not negatively affect the
solid or heavy life of the yellow print cartridge.
halftone fill).

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 367

Toner halos or explosions occur around solid secondary colors

Figure 283. Toner halos or explosions

368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 72. Toner halos or explosions
Description Possible causes Solution
z Toner halos Toner moves away from 1 Make sure that the media being used is within specifications.
or explosions the solid fill at the time of See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1.
form in the secondary transfer.
2 Make sure that the media type setting on the control panel is
white areas
appropriate for the media being used.
around solid,
heavy 3 Keep media wrapped until it is used.
coverage 4 Select colors that are lower coverage (lighter and closer to
z Toner halos primary).
or explosions
might appear 5 The customer might try different settings under PRINT
on the second QUALITY, OPTIMIZE, TRANSFER (DOWN or UP, depending on
side (page 1) the media). Some testing might be necessary to find the
of a duplexed optimal setting.
page (usually Note
in cases of Onsite visits and parts replacement (such as printer parts and
low humidity) consumables) will not alleviate toner explosions.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 369

Control panel print-quality adjustments
There are several control panel options that might help address some print-quality problems. These
settings should be used with discretion and only after making sure that the media being used is
supported, and that the appropriate media type is specified from the control panel.
T1 adjustment
The HP color LaserJet 9500 features automatic color calibration to provide high-quality color output.
In some situations, you can manually adjust the density balance of the four primary toner colors. The
available range for each color is from -5 to +5. The default value is 0.

CAUTION Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering primary transfer biases
and affects all print jobs.

Note This procedure only has an affect on midtone colors. Solid or very light fills are not affected.

1 Press to open the menus.

2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PRINT QUALITY, and then press .
4 Use or to highlight ADJUST COLOR.
5 Use or to highlight the desired color.
6 Use or to highlight the correct density setting.
7 Press to select the density setting.
8 Press to set the density for the next color.
9 After setting the density for each color, press PAUSE/RESUME.
The default values is 0 for each color, a greater negative number might result in lighter or less dense
mid-tones for a particular color plane, and a greater positive number might result in darker or more
dense mid-tones for a particular color plane.
T2 adjustment
These settings control T2 current to correct for media types with poor secondary transfer with the
predefined media types.
When poor secondary transfer (light images) occurs, make sure that the media being used is
supported and that the appropriate media-type setting is selected in the control panel. If these are
correct, decrease the transfer setting (down 1 or down 2). This might result in a darker image,
depending on the type of media. Some medias might experience better secondary transfer using the
up 1 or up 2 setting.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to OPTIMIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to TRANSFER DOWN/UP, and then press .
The T2 settings include:
z TRANSFER DOWN 1=OFF/ON
z TRANSFER DOWN 2=OFF/ON
z TRANSFER UP 1=OFF/ON
z TRANSFER DOWN 2=OFF/ON

Note It is possible to set TRANSFER UP 1, 2, and TRANSFER DOWN 1, 2 to ON at the same time. The default is
used (all OFF) in this situation.

370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Leading edge
The leading edge settings are used to compensate for poor transfer, missing toner, discharge marks,
and mottled appearance on the leading edge. Try setting the printer to LEADING EDGE DOWN first.
Depending on the type of media, you might get better results setting LEADING EDGE UP to ON.
Switching LEADING EDGE DOWN and LEADING EDGE UP to ON decreases the T2 leading edge bias one
step from nominal.
The settings include LEADING EDGE DOWN=OFF/ON (default value is OFF) and LEADING EDGE UP=OFF/ON
(default value is OFF).
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to OPTIMIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to LEADING EDGE DOWN/UP, and then press .
High coverage 1
The HP color LaserJet 9500 implements a very fine yellow dot pattern that eliminates most banding
associated with a dry EP process. The dot patterns are controlled by the high coverage 1 and high
coverage 2 settings. The default value is OFF for high coverage 1, high coverage 2, and high
coverage 3.

Note High coverage 1 and high coverage 2 are not mutually exclusive. If both items are turned on, the yellow
dots turn off.

High coverage 1 is designed for customers to turn off the yellow dot pattern. Perform the following
steps to set high coverage 1:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to OPTIMIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to HIGH COVERAGE 1, and then press .
The settings include:
z OFF: The yellow dots are in a 10-by-10 mm pattern for half-speed printing, and an 8-by-8 mm
pattern for full-speed printing.
z ON: The yellow dots are off.
High coverage 2
High coverage 2 is designed to reduce 47 mm bands in half-speed printing modes. If a line reoccurs
every 47 mm from the start of a strip of color in half-speed printing modes, turn the item to ON.
Otherwise, leave the item OFF. Perform the following steps to set high coverage 2:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to OPTIMIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to HIGH COVERAGE 2, and then press .
The settings include:
z OFF: The yellow dots are in a 10-by-10 mm pattern for half-speed printing, and an 8-by-8 mm
pattern for full-speed printing.
z ON: The yellow dots are in an 8-by-8 mm pattern for half-speed printing and full-speed printing.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 371

High coverage 3
High coverage 3 is designed to reduce 50 mm or 100 mm bands in full-speed print modes. The high
coverage 3 setting eliminates 50 mm or 100 mm bands and the cardstock band (37 mm from the
trailing edge of ledger and 115 mm from the trailing edge of letter for media heavier than 120 g/m²).
The bands are reduced by adjusting the OPC/ITB speed mismatch. If a line or band recurs at 50 mm
or 100 mm intervals or 37 mm from the trailing edge of ledger and 115 mm from the trailing edge of
letter on media larger than 120 g/m², turn this item ON.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to OPTIMIZE, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to HIGH COVERAGE 3, and then press .
The settings include:
z OFF: speed mismatch of 101.5 percent (default)
z ON: speed mismatch of 102 percent

CAUTION Do not change this setting to ON unless the bands are very objectionable because as a result, 47 mm
banding might increase.

Print-quality problems associated with jams

z Make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path.
z The media does not pass through the fuser, which causes image defects to appear on
subsequent documents. Print two or three pages to clean the printer. If the problem persists, see
the next section.
z Print a fuser cleaning page. Press CONFIGURE DEVICE, then press PRINT QUALITY, and then
press PROCESS CLEANING PAGE.

372 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Media and paper-path troubleshooting tools

Note Before beginning media and paper-path troubleshooting, check that the media meets the specifications
listed in “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1. Also, on the control panel make sure that the
appropriate media type is set to support the media being used. Out-of-specification, poor quality, and
incorrect media handling can cause jams and image defects.

Problems with print media are sometimes difficult to detect. Follow a standard troubleshooting
procedure to help isolate media-related problems. Follow these steps:
z Determine the problem source: print media or printer (page 378)
z Isolate the source of the jam (page 379)
z Isolate a media brand (page 380)
z Isolate a media type (page 380)
z Space requirements (page 27) in chapter 1
z Engine test button (page 321)
z Stored and loaded correctly (page 39) in chapter 1
z Media specifications (page 31) in chapter 1

Paper path jam sensors

PS901

PS1501 SR42
SR6
SR5 SR4 SR3
SR33
SR30
SR11 SR12
SR31

SR14
SR13

Figure 284. Paper path jam sensors

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 373

Table 73. Paper path jam sensors
Sensor Sensor name Sensor Sensor name
SR3 Registration sensor SR14 Tray 3 sensor B
SR4 Transparency motor SR30 Duplexer media re-feed sensor
SR5 Multifeed sensor SR31 Duplexer media path sensor
SR6 Fuser input sensor SR33 Duplexer reverse sensor
SR11 Tray 2 sensor A SR42 T2 input sensor
SR12 Tray 2 sensor B PS901 Face-down output sensor
SR13 Tray 3 sensor A PS1501 Fuser output sensor

Note Action for all media jams includes removing the media, checking the flags, testing the sensor with
diagnostics, and checking the connectors from the sensor to the DC controller using the wiring diagram.

Note The printer reports jams as 13 errors. These are described in detail in the numerical error message
section of this chapter. See “Numerical error messages” on page 400.

Table 74. Media jams by location

Jam Description Name Message Action
location
All doors A door open jam is reported if the Door open 13.05.00 JAM 1 Close all of the doors.
following sensors detect media jam INSIDE PAPER
2 Clear the jam.
when a door is opened or closed: PATH
z Tray 2 sensor A (SR11) 3 Check the front door
z Tray 2 sensor B (SR12) interlock switches and all
of the connections.
z Tray 3 sensor A (SR13)
z Tray 3 sensor B (SR14
z Registration sensor (SR3)
z Fuser output sensor (PS1501)
z Face-down output sensor
(PS901)
Input Late media from input accessory. Late 13.20.JJ JAM 1 Open tray 4 and the right
accessory media INSIDE PAPER side door to check for
or lower from input PATH jammed media.
right door accessory
2 Check the paper path
between tray 4 and the
printer.
3 Check the tray-size
guides.
4 Replace the pickup,
separation, or feed
rollers.
Input unit The media is detected by tray 2 Residual 13.32.00 JAM 1 Check the indicated tray.
or lower sensor A and tray 2 sensor B after media jam INSIDE PAPER
2 Check the tray-size
right door recovering from sleep mode or in media PATH
guides.
when the printer is turned on. path 2 or
13.32.00 JAM 3 Open the lower right
INSIDE LOWER door and remove the
RIGHT DOOR jammed media.

374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 74. Media jams by location (continued)
Jam Description Name Message Action
location
Lower right z The media did not reach the Media 13.01.00 JAM 1 Check the indicated tray
door or tray 2 sensor B within a delay jam INSIDE LOWER or open the lower right
pickup unit specified amount of time. at media RIGHT DOOR door.
z The media did not reach the feed or
2 Remove the jammed or
tray 3 sensor B within a area 1 13.01.00 JAM IN
loose media.
specified amount of time. TRAY X
3 Check the tray-size
guides.
4 Replace the pick,
separation, or feed
rollers.
Upper right The media from any input source Media 13.03.00 JAM 1 Open the tray 1 door
door did not reach the registration delay jam INSIDE UPPER (ITB access) and remove
sensor within a specified amount at media RIGHT DOOR the jammed media.
of time. feed or
2 Make sure that the tray 1
area 2 13.03.00 JAM
door is completely
INSIDE LOWER
closed.
RIGHT DOOR
3 Check the paper path
and tray 1 for damage.
4 Check for media in the
lower right door area.
Upper right The multifeed sensor detects a Multifeed 13.15.00 JAM 1 Check the registration
door stack height of more than 0.5 mm jam INSIDE UPPER area for jammed media.
(0.019 inch) RIGHT DOOR
2 If the job is multifeed,
check for supported
media, and check the
pick, separation, and
feed rollers in the source
tray.
3 If the media is fed from
tray 1, check the
separation pad.
4 Check the registration
rollers for correct
functionality.
Upper right The registration sensor (SR3) Too long 13.06.00 JAM 1 Remove the media from
door indicates that media fed from tray media jam INSIDE UPPER tray 1.
1 is longer than what is specified RIGHT DOOR
2 Open the ITB access
by the formatter.
door and remove the
jammed media.
3 Check for supported
media and correct-size
specification on the
control panel.
Upper right The T2 upstream sensor, fuser Residual 13.20.00 JAM 1 Remove any residual
door, lower upstream sensor, or fuser output media in INSIDE PAPER media near T1 and the
left door, or sensor detect media when the media PATH fuser.
front doors door is closed. path 1
2 Check the three sensors
for correct movement
and functionality.
3 Make sure that the fuser,
ITB, and T2 roller are
seated correctly.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 375

Table 74. Media jams by location (continued)
Jam Description Name Message Action
location
Upper right A page did not reach the fuser ITB wrap 13.1D.00 JAM 1 Remove the ITB and
door or upstream sensor within a specified jam INSIDE PAPER check for residual media.
front doors amount of time. PATH Make sure that the ITB is
seated correctly and the
green lever is moved to
the correct position.
2 Check the fuser
upstream sensor for
missing flag or poor
movement.
3 Check for supported
media.
4 Check the discharge
comb area for damage or
contamination.
Lower left The fuser output sensor detects Media 13.06.00 JAM 1 Check for residual media
door media after a specified amount of stay jam INSIDE LOWER inside and near the fuser.
time. at the LEFT DOOR
2 Remove the fuser and
fuser unit or
check the exit sensor for
13.06.00 JAM
correct movement and
INSIDE PAPER
functionality.
PATH
3 Check the fuser rollers
for damage or
contamination.
4 Check the post fuser
paper path for jams.
5 Reseat the fuser.
Upper right The media did not reach the fuser Media 13.05.00 FUSER 1 Remove the duplexer.
door or output sensor within a specified delay jam JAM LOWER LEFT
2 Remove the fuser.
front doors amount of time. at the DOOR
fuser unit or 3 Check the post
13.05.00 JAM secondary transfer area
INSIDE FRONT and the fuser inlet area.
DOOR
Upper right The printer detects media Fuser 13.1C.00 FUSER 1 Check for supported
door or wrapping around the fuser roller. wrap jam JAM LOWER LEFT media and media-type
lower left DOOR settings on the control
door panel.
2 Check for residual media
inside and near the fuser.
3 Remove the fuser and
check the exit sensor for
correct movement and
functionality.
4 Check the fuser rollers
for damage and
contamination.
5 Check the post fuser
paper path for any
obstruction.
6 Reseat the fuser.

376 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 74. Media jams by location (continued)
Jam Description Name Message Action
location
Lower left The media did not reach the Media 13.11.00 JAM 1 Check the seating of the
door switchback sensor within a delay jam INSIDE LOWER duplexer, fuser, and fuser
specified amount of time. at the LEFT DOOR access door.
reversing or
2 Check the face-down
area 13.10.00 JAM
and duplexer diverters
INSIDE DUPLEXER
for correct functionality.
3 Check the fuser and
duplexer area feed roller
driver trains.
Lower left The switchback sensor detects Media 13.11.00 JAM 1 Remove the duplexer
door media after a specified amount of stay jam INSIDE LOWER and check for residual
time. at the LEFT DOOR media.
media or
2 Check the seating of the
reversing 13.11.00 JAM
duplexer, fuser, and fuser
area INSIDE DUPLEXER
access door.
3 Check the face-down
and duplexer diverters
for correct functionality.
4 Check the fuser and
duplexer area feed roller
driver trains.
Lower left The media did not reach the Media 13.12.00 JAM 1 Remove the duplexer.
door or duplex delivery sensor within a delay jam INSIDE DUPLEXER
2 Check the inside of the
duplexer specified amount of time. at the
duplexer and the
media
duplexer cavity for
path to
residual media.
the
duplexer 3 Check the duplex
delivery sensor for
correct movement and
functionality.
4 Check the registration
guides for correct
movement.
5 Check the feed rollers
and drive gear trains for
damage.
Lower left The duplex delivery sensor Media 13.13.00 JAM 1 Remove the duplexer.
door or detects media after a specified stay jam INSIDE DUPLEXER
2 Check the inside of the
duplexer amount of time. at the
duplexer and the
media
duplexer cavity for
path to
residual media.
the
duplexer 3 Check the duplex
delivery sensor for
correct movement and
functionality.
4 Check the registration
guides for correct
movement.
5 Check the feed rollers
and drive gear trains for
damage.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 377

Table 74. Media jams by location (continued)
Jam Description Name Message Action
location
Lower left The duplex stay sensor detects Duplexing 13.29.00 1 Remove the duplexer.
door or media when the doors are closed. stay jam
2 Check the inside of the
duplexer (re-feed)
duplexer and the
duplexer cavity for
residual media.
3 Check the duplex
delivery sensor for
correct movement and
functionality.
Lower left The media did not reach the face- Media 13.09.00 JAM 1 Check the face-down
door down output sensor within a delay jam INSIDE LOWER output sensor for correct
specified amount of time. at the LEFT DOOR movement and
face-down or functionality.
tray 13.09.00 JAM
2 Check the face-down
INSIDE UPPER
and duplex diverters for
LEFT DOOR
correct functionality.
3 Check for deformed or
misaligned delivery
rollers.
4 Check the delivery feed
assembly drive gear
train.
5 Make sure that the upper
and lower left doors are
completely closed.
Lower left The face-down output sensor Media 13.0A.00 JAM 1 Check for residual media
door or detects media after a specified stay jam INSIDE TOP near the face-down
output unit amount of time. at face- OUTPUT BIN output sensor.
down tray or
2 Check for obstructions in
13.0A.00 JAM
the paper path.
INSIDE UPPER
LEFT DOOR 3 Check the feed rollers
and drive gear trains for
damage.
Upper left The face-down output sensor Residual 13.3E.00 JAM 1 Check for residual media
door or detects media after performing an media in INSIDE TOP near the face-down
output unit auto-flush. media OUTPUT BIN output sensor.
path 3 jam or
2 Check for obstructions in
13.3E.00 JAM
the paper path.
INSIDE UPPER
LEFT DOOR 3 Check the feed rollers
and drive gear trains for
damage.

Determine the problem source: print media or printer

When determining the cause of a printer failure, make a distinction between problems that relate to
the printer and problems that involve print media. Often a problem that seems to be related to the
printer is actually a matter of poor print-media selection or handling. To determine whether a problem
is caused by the printer or by the media, try a few simple steps to remedy the situation:
z Turn the media over in the tray to print on the reverse side.
z Rotate the sheets 180 degrees (end to end) to feed with a different leading edge.
If the symptoms cease or change, assume that the problems are caused by the print media.

378 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Using the straightest paper path
Some problems can be avoided by using the straightest available paper path. Usually this means
media feeds from tray 1, and exits into the face-up bin. This path is recommended for envelopes and
labels.

Determine if problem is caused by the duplexing process

Media that has just made a pass through the printer can show increased media curl. Media curl
increases image dropout, and creates pickup and stacking problems. When the second pass is
made, print media might not meet the specifications for moisture and curl. Dry media can hold static
charges that affect print quality and stacking of the duplexed page. Media shrinkage resulting from a
second pass through the printer can cause image misalignment on the duplexed page.

Isolate the source of the jam

Define the source of the media that jams.

Determine where media jams occur

Check where the leading edge of the media stops when a jam occurs.

Determine whether the printer is experiencing misfeeds or multifeed jams

The following are some possible causes of misfeeds or multifeed jams:
z The media might be too heavy or too light. Check basis weight and measure caliper. See “Basis
weight field test” in chapter1.
z The media might be too smooth. Check the finish.
z The customer might be attempting to print embossed media, pre-printed forms, or perforated
media that does not meet HP specifications. See “Media specifications” in chapter 1.
z The media might be loaded incorrectly. Turn over the sheets in the tray to determine if in-ream
curl is causing misfeeds.
z The customer might be fanning media before loading it into the tray.
z The customer might be adding media in small amounts. Do not add small amounts of media or
mix types of media in the tray.
z The printer or media storage environment might be too humid or too dry. See “Storing print
media” in chapter 2.

Print-quality problems associated with media

Use media that meets HP specifications. See “Supported media and capacity for input and output”
on page 32 in chapter 1
z The media that you are using is too heavy or too light for the printer.
z The driver/printer is set incorrectly. Change the media-type setting to match the media the
customer is using.
z The media is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic media.
z The moisture content of the media is uneven, too high, or too low. Use media from a different
source or from an unopened ream of media.
z The media is designed for inkjet, offset press, or another program. Make sure that the media is
for laser or xerographic programs.
z The transparencies that you are using are not designed for the HP color LaserJet 9500. Use only
transparencies that are designed for HP color LaserJet printers.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 379

Isolate a media brand
If the printer jams with only one brand of media, try to remedy the situation:
z Try switching media brands.
z If the media ream in use appears to be old, open a fresh ream of the same media and load it
correctly into the printer. If the problem disappears, investigate storage and handling conditions.

Isolate a media type

When jams and other problems occur frequently, it is often because the customer is using a special
media. Customers must only use print media that conforms to all Hewlett-Packard specifications,
and should always test media before purchasing large quantities. Media should be tested before
storage to verify quality printing results. Then, if problems arise, storage or handling conditions can
isolate the most likely cause. Some types of media that might cause problems include the following:
z adhesive labels
z envelopes
z transparencies
z preprinted forms and letterhead
z embossed media
z perforated media
z chemically treated media
z synthetic media
z coated media
z other special media

Note See “Media specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1 for more information about these types of media.

Media will not feed from tray x when printing from a software program; the paper-path test
works fine
Make sure that the correct media size is set:
z all trays: from the control panel
z tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4: reset the media guides in the correct position in the failing tray
z make sure that the custom-size switch setting is correct

Wrinkling envelopes
z make sure that the input tray is tray 1
z make sure that the output destination is the face-up bin
z place the fuser levers in the up position and retry the envelopes
z try new media (make sure that the envelopes are within specifications; see “Media
specifications” on page 31 in chapter 1)

Poor fusing
z make sure that the fuser levers are in the down position for cut sheet media
z make sure that all packing spacers are removed from inside the printer
z try new media (make sure that the media is within specifications; see “Media specifications” on
page 31 chapter 1)
z make sure that the proper fusing mode for the media is set in the control panel
z make sure that the ac power does not fluctuate out of range during the print cycle

380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Overhead transparency defects
Overhead transparencies can experience any of the image-quality problems that other type of media
can, in addition to defects that are specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are
pliable as they pass through the paper path, they can be marked by the media-handling components.

Note Allow transparencies to cool at least 30 seconds before handling them.

z In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that the
tray is correctly configured for transparencies.
z Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer. See “Supported media and
capacity for input and output” in chapter 1. For more information, see the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Print Media Guide.
z Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots
and smudges.
z Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid fill pages might be caused when
transparencies stick together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches.
z If the selected colors are not what you expected when printed, select different colors in the
software program or printer driver.
z If you are using a reflective overhead projector and the images are too dark when projected, use
a standard overhead projector instead.
Jams occur when media either does not reach or move past a sensor along the paper path in a
specific amount of time. If a jam occurs, a 13.XX PAPER JAM message appears on the control panel.

Media jam
Jams occur most often when the following conditions exist:
z media trays are not loaded correctly
z the print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide
z the media is in poor condition
z the printer needs to be cleaned
If a jam occurs, a 13.XX PAPER JAM message appears on the control panel. For detailed
descriptions of the 13.XX messages and the actions recommended to resolve the errors, see
“Numerical error messages” on page 400.
The following table provides some basic information about general jam troubleshooting.

Table 75. General jam troubleshooting

Check What to do
What is the frequency of the z Verify the frequency of the jam with the customer. Print or display the
jams (for example, continuous, event log to determine jam history. See “Event log page” on page 386.
one jam per 100 pages, one jam
per 1,000 pages)?
Do jams only occur when the z See “Engine test button” on page 321 and “Sensor test (interactive)” on
media is fed from a particular page 311 to isolate the problem.
media input source (for example,
tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, or tray 4)?
Do jams only occur when media z See “Engine test button” on page 321 and “Sensor test (interactive)” on
is output to a specific output bin page 311 to isolate the problem.
(for example, the face-down bin,
the face-up bin, the duplexer, the
stapler)?

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 381

Table 75. General jam troubleshooting
Check What to do
Do jams occur with a specific z Make sure that the media-type setting matches the media being used.
type of media? z Try known good media. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media
Guide.
Where does the leading edge of z Attempt to duplicate the jam. See “Engine test button” on page 321.
the first sheet of media in the Inspect the paper path and all paper-path mechanical assemblies that
paper path stop when a jam are in advance of the leading jam.
occurs? Are any sheets of media
damaged or torn?
Is the customer loading the trays z Observe the customer while he or she loads the media. See proper
correctly? media-handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print
Media Guide.
Is the customer overfilling the z Make sure that the media level is not above the maximum fill marks in
trays? the media trays. Observe the customer while he or she loads media in
the trays.
Are the media tray guides set z Make sure that the tray 2 and the tray 3 media guides are set correctly on
correctly? all sides. For tray 4, make sure that all adjustments are set correctly
(front, back, and side at the top and bottom of the tray).
Does the printer need cleaning? z Check the paper path and paper-path rollers.
When was the user maintenance z Were the pick and separation rollers replaced with the transfer kit?
performed on the printer?
Is the custom-size switch set z Make sure that the switch is set correctly for the media selected.
correctly?

Customer print job

Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source(s) to the problem destination(s). Try to
recreate the jam errors by having the customer perform a paper-path test. See “Engine test button”
on page 321.
When verifying print jobs, make sure that all of the settings are selected to reflect the customer’s
preferences. Keep in mind that the software program settings take priority over driver settings, which
take priority over the control panel settings. If a single setting is not present in the software program,
but is set in the driver, the driver setting overrides the control panel settings.

Note HP Web Jetadmin can override media types and sizes in certain conditions. See the HP LaserJet 9500
Series Printer User Reference Guide for more information.

Clearing jams

Note Open and close all of the printer covers to clear control panel message. After removing a sheet of
media, you might need to check other areas for the presence of other media.

All portions of a jammed piece of media must be removed or you might experience repeated jams.
If the jam persists, make sure that you have located and removed all scraps of media from inside the
printer.

Clearing repeated jams

1 Make sure that the media is loaded correctly in trays and that all width guides are set correctly
(not skewed).
2 Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are using letterhead media, try printing from
a different tray.

382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

3 Do not use previously printed media or torn, worn, or irregular media.
4 Check the media specifications. If it is outside of the recommended specifications, problems
might occur. See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
5 The printer might be dirty. See “Cleaning the printer and accessories” on page 93.

Tests for troubleshooting paper-path problems

The following tests are useful in troubleshooting paper-path and media-related problems.

Print stop test

See “Print stop test” on page 320 for more information.

Paper-path test
See “Paper-path test (and automatic sensors test)” on page 310 for more information.

Sensor test
See “Sensor test (interactive)” on page 311 for more information.

Tray alignment adjustment

Use this menu item to adjust the front-to-back (duplex) alignment of the four margins.
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PRINT QUALITY, and then press .
4 Use or to scroll to SET REGISTRATION, and then press .
5 Follow the printed instructions.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 383

Noise troubleshooting tools
Try to isolate the origin of the noise by using the various hardware diagnostics and component tests
on page 309. Each component test (such as motors, solenoids, and clutches) can be run individually
to see if the noise is associated with a particular component part.
Try to determine when the noise occurs by printing from different input sources, changing the duplex
option, and selecting a different tray. This might isolate the noise to a particular part or stage in the
printing process.

Note It is normal for the fuser to make a cracking or popping noise when the printer is turned on and off.
This sound results from the fuser rollers separating when the printer is turned off and pressurizing
when the printer is turned on. The sound might also occur after a media jam. The fuser rollers separate
when the printer is turned off and after a jam to avoid flat spots on the fuser rollers and to facilitate
clearing a jam.

384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Control panel messages

Make sure to read the exact text of the control panel message, including the error message number
and the text, in order to locate the error message in the error tables. This control panel stores
enhanced information.
Messages that appear on the control panel provide six categories of information. Each message
category is assigned a priority. If more than one condition occurs at the same time, the highest
priority message appears. When it is cleared, the next priority message appears, and so on. The
following are messages and their priorities:
z Status messages—Status messages communicate the current state of the printer. Whenever
the printer is ready and online, the printer status message READY appears unless warning
messages are pending. When the printer is performing a task, such as a reset or a test, the
associated printer status message appears. When the task is complete, the message returns to
READY or PAUSED, depending on the current state of the printer.
z Warning messages—Warning messages are messages that are important enough that the
user must acknowledge them, but not serious enough to cause the printer to stop the printing
process. They are usually transient in nature but they can affect the output, and so a record of
their occurrence is important. Warnings generally alternate with the READY (or PAUSED) status
message and remain on the control panel until the user presses . Warnings appear in most-
recent order (FIFO) with duplicates removed.
z Error messages—Error messages communicate to the customer that some action must be
performed, such as adding media or clearing a jam. Some errors are considered auto-
continuable, because the error message appears on the control panel for 10 seconds, and then
the printer clears the message and continues normal operation. Pressing a control panel key
during the 10-second period cancels the auto-continue feature and initiates the function of the
key that was pressed. Error messages are limited to 19 seven-bit characters (or 9 two-byte
characters) per line up, and to two lines. Unlike status and warning messages, error messages
stop the printing process. The customer has to either fix the problem or give the printer a
different command. If the customer can continue past the error conditions without actually fixing
the problem, then the customer should be able to perform the task by pressing . If only one
option is available when the customer presses , printing should continue by applying the
option shown. If more than one option is available when the customer presses , the options
are listed with the most logical option listed first and highlighted.
z Critical error messages—Critical error messages communicate printer failures to the customer.
Generally, turning power off and then on is required for the printer to resume normal operation. If
the critical error persists, the printer might requires service and the customer must request a
service call. Critical errors are not auto-continuable.
z Output device warning messages—These messages are similar to the warning messages
described previously, except that they relate to the output device. By default, the message is all
that appears if the output device does not provide any additional help. The prompt at the bottom
of the control panel does not appear.
z Output device error messages—These messages are similar to the error messages that are
described above, except that they relate to the output device. By default, the message is all that
appears if the output device does not provide any additional help. The prompt at the bottom of
the control panel does not appear.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 385

Control panel and event log message format
The control panel messages have the following format:
z 13.XY.ZZ JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
z 40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION
The equivalent event log messages have the following format:
z 3 0 13.xy.zz JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
z 1 0 40.00.00 0 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION

Note Print a configuration page to identify the input or output device that is configured. Notice that the error
format only identifies the Jet-Link device number and the device type; it does not identify the input or
output device.

Event log page

Use the event log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures. You can print
or show the event log from the control panel (select PRINT EVENT LOG or SHOW EVENT LOG).
The event log is a first in, first out (FIFO) ordered listing of the last 50 events. The printed event log is
printed in four columns that show event number, page count, error code, and description or
personality. The description or personality gives detail to the error messages. This information is
more useful for troubleshooting.
The following items are tracked and shown on the event log:
z critical errors (some errors that do not appear on the control panel)
z jams
z sensors sensing out of range
z unexpected media size
z complex pages
z buffer overflow

Print an event log

The printer internal event log stores the 50 most recent events, and can be printed at any time. To
print the event log:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to PRINT EVENT LOG, and then press .
4 The event log prints. The message PRINTING EVENT LOG appears on the control panel.

386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Show an event log
Using the event log that appears on the control panel, the customer can scroll through the contents
of the event log from the control panel. Select this to show the 50 most recent events, with the most
recent listed first. Use or to scroll through the event log contents. If the event log is empty, the
message EVENT LOG EMPTY appears on the control panel.
Follow these steps to show the event log:
1 Press to open the menus.
2 Use or to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press .
3 Use or to scroll to SHOW EVENT LOG, and then press .
4 The event log appears on the control panel.

Error number Page count Error code

13.3 PAPER JAM 50 0000006 XX.XX.XX

CHECK RIGHT DOOR

Appears on the Appears in the event log

control panel

Figure 285. Example of events on the event log

Hint Whenever a 13.XX message appears on the control panel, a good practice is to clear the jammed
media from the printer, press PAUSE/RESUME to stop printing, and print the event log. Even if you cannot
print the event log, you can read it on the control panel by using the above steps to display an event log.

Interpret an event log

Each individual entry in the log is called an “event,” while all errors occurring at the same page count
are called an event.
Use the numerical error message table to associate errors in the event log with the control panel
error message. For each error or event, follow the recommended action that is listed in the numerical
error message table starting on page 400.
1 Check the event log for specific error trends in the last 10,000 printed pages.
2 Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do jams tend to occur in a
specific area of the printer?)
3 Record any specific error trends.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 387

Sample event log page

Figure 286. Sample event log page

388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Error message interpretation
Messages appear on the control panel to indicate printer operation errors. Within the groupings listed
below, the alphabetical error messages are listed first, followed by the numerical error messages.

Note Make sure to check all of the connections and the connectors if an error message appears soon after
repairing the printer.
Perform the following steps if a message appears that is not listed in this section:
z turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on again
z make sure that the newest DC controller, formatter, and paper-handling firmware are loaded in
the printer
z perform an engine test (page 321) without the formatter installed to isolate the problem to the
engine or the formatter

Alphabetical error messages

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages

Message Description or explanation Recommended action
ACCESS DENIED z The printer control panel function that z See the network administrator for the
MENUS LOCKED you are trying to gain access to is correct password.
locked to prevent unauthorized access.
BAD DUPLEXER z The duplexer is not connected correctly 1 Turn the printer off and remove the
CONNECTION to the printer. duplexer.
2 Make sure that the duplexer is for
the HP color LaserJet 9500 (there
should not be a fan installed in the
duplexer).
3 Turn the printer on and check for
other error messages.
4 Check the electrical contacts on the
duplexer and on the printer for
damage or obstructions.
5 Turn the printer off.
6 Reinstall the duplexer and then turn
the printer on again.
7 If the error persists, check connector
J124 on the DC controller PCA.
8 Check connector J1 on the low-
voltage power supply, J201 and
J202 on the high-voltage power
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
driver PCA, and J806 on the T driver
PCA.
9 Replace the duplexer.
<BINNAME> FULL z The specified bin is full and must be 1 Empty the bin to continue printing.
emptied for printing to continue. This
2 If the bin is empty, inspect the tray-
should be considered a warning if a job
full sensor flag for damage. Also,
is not pending for output to the full bin.
make sure that the flag moves
When a job is sent to the full bin, it
smoothly.
becomes an error.
3 Check connector J901 on the face-
down delivery PCA, and connector
J821 on the DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 389

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
CHECKING PAPER z The engine is rotating its rollers to z No action is necessary.
PATH check for possible jams and to clear
them automatically.
CHECKING PRINTER z The engine is performing an internal 1 No action is usually necessary.
test.
2 If the printer stops when the
message CHECING PRINTER
appears, turn the printer off and
then turn the printer on again. Also,
perform the following:
• Check the entire paper path for
residual media, and remove any
media that is found.
• Check the paper-path sensors
for correct movement and
functionality.
• Turn the printer off, remove all
optional devices (such as EIOs,
extra memory, finishing devices,
and high-capacity inputs), and
then turn the printer on again.
• Perform an engine test (see
“Engine test print page” on page
321) without the formatter
installed to isolate the problem to
the engine or to the formatter.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY z A print job requested a printer z Print the job by using a printer driver
NOT AVAILABLE language (personality) that is not for a different printer language, or
alternates with available with this printer. The job is not add the requested language to the
READY printed and is cleared from memory. printer (if available).

CLEAN POST CHARGER z The post charger requires cleaning. 1 Clean the post charger. See
z This warning message is prompted “Cleaning the post charger” on page
when the REPLACE BLACK 94 in chapter 4.
CARTRIDGE message is cleared and 2 Select YES when prompted about
the black cartridge count is reset. having cleaned the post charger.
Printing should continue when this
message appears.
z When the user opens the upper right
door or cycles power when this
message appears, the control panel
should pop to the menu item CHARGER
CLEANED in the RESETS submenu.
CLEARING PAPER z The printer jammed, or the printer is z No action is necessary.
PATH turned on and media is detected in the
printer path. The printer is
automatically attempting to eject the
pages.

390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
CLOSE FRONT OR z The front left or left side lower doors 1 Close the front left or the left side
LOWER LEFT DOOR are open. lower doors to continue printing.
2 If the door was open when the
printer was turned on, close the
door, turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on again.
3 Make sure that the interlock switch
and the sensor flag are functioning
correctly. Replace them if
necessary.
4 Check connector J1701L on the left
door switch, intermediate connector
J3018, and connector 821 on the
T driver PCA.
CLOSE FRONT OR z The front or upper right doors are open. 1 Close the right front or the right side
UPPER RIGHT DOOR upper door to continue printing.
2 If the door was open when the
printer was turned on, close the
door, turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on again.
3 Make sure that the interlock switch
and the sensor flag are functioning
correctly. Replace them if
necessary. See “Right door switch
(front and right side doors)” on page
297.
4 Check connector J1701R on the
right door switch, intermediate
connector J3085, and connector
809 on the T driver PCA.
CLOSE LOWER RIGHT z The right side lower door is open. 1 Close the right side lower door to
DOOR continue printing.
2 If the door was open when the
printer was turned on, close the
door, turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on again.
3 Make sure that the interlock switch
and the sensor flag are functioning
correctly. Replace them if
necessary. See “Right door switch
(front and right side doors)” on page
297.
4 Check connector J1041 on the
pickup PCA, intermediate connector
J3000, and connector J118 on the
DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 391

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
CLOSE UPPER LEFT z The left side upper door is open. 1 Close the left side upper door to
DOOR continue printing.
2 If the door was open when the
printer was turned on, close the
door, turn the printer off, and then
turn the printer on again.
3 Make sure that the interlock switch
and the sensor flag are functioning
correctly. Replace them if
necessary. “Left door switch” on
page 296.
4 Check connector J3017 on the
upper left door switch, intermediate
connector J3016, and connector
J821 on the T driver PCA.
DETECTABLE SIZE z A tray is loaded with standard-size 1 Move the switch to the standard
IN TRAY X media, and the switch in the tray is set position.
RECOMMEND MOVE to custom.
2 Make sure that the media guides
SWITCH TO STANDARD are against the media.
DISK DEVICE z The EIO hard disk had a critical failure 1 Turn off the printer.
FAILURE and can no longer be used.
2 Remove and reinstall EIO hard disk.
alternates with
3 Turn the printer on again.
READY
4 If the error persists, replace the EIO
hard disk.
DISK FILE z The requested operation could not be 1 Check the file name and try again.
OPERATION FAILED performed. You might have attempted
2 Check the driver settings to see if
alternates with an illegal operation, such as trying to
any job retention features are
READY download a file to a nonexistent
selected.
directory.
DISK FILE SYSTEM z The disk file system has reached its z Delete files from the EIO hard disk
IS FULL maximum capacity. and then try again. Using the control
alternates with panel, delete stored jobs that are not
READY needed.
Note
HP Web Jetadmin can also be used to
delete files and fonts.
DISK IS WRITE z The disk device is protected and no z Fonts and forms cannot be stored on
PROTECTED new files can be written to it. the disk when the disk is write-
alternates with protected. Use the Windows-based
READY HP Web Jetadmin or the Macintosh-
based HP LaserJet Utility to remove
the write protections from the disk.
EIO DISK X z The EIO hard disk in slot X is spinning z No action is necessary.
SPINNING UP up its platter.

EVENT LOG EMPTY z The user is attempting to view an z No action is necessary.

empty event log by selecting SHOW
EVENT LOG from the control panel.
FLASH DEVICE z The flash DIMM had a critical failure z Remove the flash DIMM and replace
FAILURE and can no longer be used. it with a new one.
alternates with
READY

392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
FLASH FILE z The requested operation could not be z Check the file name and try again.
OPERATION FAILED performed. You might have attempted
alternates with an illegal operation, such as trying to
READY download a file to a nonexistent
directory.
FLASH FILE SYSTEM z The flash disk or file system has 1 Delete files from the flash DIMM or
IS FULL reached maximum capacity. the EIO hard disk, and then try
alternates with again.
READY 2 Use HP Web Jetadmin to download
or delete files and fonts (see the
download utility help for more
information).
3 Using the control panel, delete
stored jobs that are not needed.
FLASH IS WRITE z The flash file is protected, and no new z Use an unprotected file.
PROTECTED files can be written to it.
alternates with
READY
INCORRECT PIN z The wrong PIN is used. z Return to the previous screen and
retype the PIN.
INSERT OR CLOSE z The specified tray is missing or open. 1 Close or insert the specified tray to
TRAY X continue printing.
2 If the error appears when the tray is
installed correctly, check connector
J52 for tray 2, connector J54 for
tray 3, intermediate connector
J3001, and connector J120 on the
DC controller PCA.
INSTALL CLEANER z The cleaner is not installed or is not 1 Make sure that the transfer cleaner
installed correctly. is installed correctly and that the
cleaning kit is within life
specifications.
2 Remove and reseat the cleaner and
the toner collection bottle.
3 Open the front doors and lightly tap
on the waste toner bottle. Close the
front doors and check to see if the
error goes away.
4 Make sure that the front doors are
completely closed.
5 If the error persists, check the
sensor flag mechanism in the toner
collection bottle to make sure that it
moves correctly.
6 Replace the cleaning kit.
7 Check connectors J1403, J1402,
and J1401 on the waste sensor
assembly; intermediate connector
J3081; and connector J821 on the T
driver PCA.
8 Replace the waste sensor assembly.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 393

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
INSTALL TRANSFER z The ITB is not installed or cannot be 1 Open the front doors, lower the
BELT detected. green lever, and then remove and
reseat the ITB.
2 Check the connector on the right
side of the ITB for damage. Replace
the ITB if necessary.
3 Check the harness and the
connectors that support the ITB fan
and the thermistor (J3022), and
check connector J131 on the DC
controller.
INSTALL TRANSFER z The second transfer roller is not 1 Make sure that the secondary
ROLLER installed, or there is a problem when it transfer roller is installed correctly.
is lifted into position. Reseat the secondary transfer roller
is necessary.
2 Defeat the front door interlocks and
check the secondary transfer roller
for correct up and down movement.
3 Check for continuity from the
secondary transfer assembly high-
voltage contacts to the high-voltage
power supply.
4 Check connector J3036 on the
registration motor (M11) and
connector J117 on the DC
controller.
5 Check the four lift arms on the
secondary transfer assembly for
bonds or damage that might inhibit
correct movement up. Repair or
replace the lift arms if necessary.
6 Check the secondary transfer clutch
(CL3) for correct functionality, and
check connectors J3030, J3026,
and J121 on the DC controller.
7 Replace the secondary transfer
assembly.

394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
LOAD TRAY X z A job is sent that requires a specific 1 Make sure that the requested size
[TYPE] [SIZE] type and size of media that is not and type of media is loaded
alternates with available, or the tray-size detection correctly into the specified tray.
mechanism failed.
TO USE ANOTHER 2 Press to use a type and size of
TRAY PRESS media that is available in another
tray.
3 For tray 2, check connectors J52
and J3023 on the tray 2 media
detection switch.
4 For tray 3, check connectors J54
and J3024 on the tray 3 media
detection switch.
5 Check intermediate connectors
J3001, J3076, and J3077; and
connectors J120 and J122 on the
DC controller PCA.
6 Check the upper and lower cassette
paper-width and length-detection
switches for correct operation.
Replace the switches if necessary.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
MANUALLY FEED z The printer is waiting for media to be 1 Load the requested media into
[TYPE] [SIZE] loaded in tray 1 for a manual feed. tray 1. Make sure that the media is
alternates with loaded all the way into the tray.
TO CONTINUE 2 To override the error, press if the
PRESS media you want is available in
another tray.
3 Press to use a type and size
that is available in another tray.
4 If the media is loaded in tray 1 but is
not detected, check the tray 1
sensor flag for correct operation.
5 Check connector J3005 on the tray
sensor, intermediate connectors
J3004 and J3002, and connector
J119 on the DC controller PCA.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
NO JOB TO CANCEL z The CANCEL JOB button was pressed, z No action is necessary.
but there is no active job or buffered
data to cancel.
z The message appears for
approximately two seconds before the
printer returns to the READY state.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 395

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
NON-HP CARTRIDGE z This message appears when a new 1 Remove and replace the indicated
DETECTED print cartridge is installed and it is not a print cartridge, and make sure that
HP print cartridge. It is either a refilled genuine HP print cartridges are
cartridge or a cartridge made by installed. If the print cartridges are
another manufacturer. This message not HP print cartridges, replace
appears until the user installs a them with genuine HP print
genuine HP print cartridge or presses cartridges.
the override key (CANCEL JOB). The
2 Press CANCEL JOB to continue
NON-HP CARTRIDGE IN USE message
printing.
appears for approximately 30 seconds.
Note
Moving a print cartridge that is reporting
a low or out condition to another printer
might cause the print cartridge to report
as a non-HP print cartridge.

3 Check connectors J16, J17, J18,

and J19 on the print cartridge
antenna units, and connectors
J1006, J1007, J1008, and J1009 on
the T driver PCA.
4 Check the e-label on the print
cartridge, and check the antenna
unit. Replace the print cartridge if
you suspect a faulty e-label.
5 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive assembly”
on page 282.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
RAM DISK DEVICE z The RAM disk had a critical failure and z Turn the printer off, and then turn the
FAILURE can no longer be used. printer on again to clear the error.
alternates with
READY
RAM DISK FILE z The requested operation could not be 1 Try again with a different file or
OPERATION FAILED performed. You might have attempted directory.
alternates with an illegal operation, such as trying to
2 Check the driver settings to see if
READY download a file to a nonexistent
any job retention features are
directory.
selected.
RAM DISK FILE z The RAM disk has reached maximum 1 Delete files and then try again, or
SYSTEM IS FULL capacity. turn the printer off and then turn the
alternates with printer on again to delete all of the
READY files on the device. (Delete files
using HP Web Jetadmin, another
software utility, or from the control
panel. See the Help for more
information.)
2 If the error persists, increase the
size of the RAM disk and change
the RAM disk size from the
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu at the
control panel.

396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
RAM DISK IS WRITE z The RAM disk is protected, and no new z No action is necessary.
PROTECTED files can be written to it.
alternates with
READY
REMOVE AND SHAKE z The T-crg (print cartridge) motor cannot 1 Remove and check the indicated
<COLOR> CARTRIDGE turn the indicated print cartridge. print cartridge and the printer side
for damaged drive linkages. Shake
the print cartridge a few times,
reseat the print cartridge, turn the
printer off, and then turn the printer
on again. Replace the print
cartridge or the drive linkages if
necessary.
Note
Make sure that the print cartridges, when
stored, were not exposed to high
temperatures.
2 Check connector 814 on the T driver
PCA.
3 Check color-appropriate
connections near the motor:
• K: J3046
• C: J3047
• M: J3048
• Y: J3049
4 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive assembly”
on page 282.
5 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
RESEND UPGRADE z An error exists in the printer firmware z Resend a valid firmware image.
upgrade.
ROM DISK DEVICE z The ROM disk had a critical failure and z Turn the printer off, and then turn the
FAILURE cannot be used. printer on again to clear the error.
alternates with
READY
ROM DISK FILE z The requested operation could not be z No action is necessary.
OPERATION FAILED performed. You might have attempted
alternates with an illegal operation, such as trying to
READY download a file to a non-existent
directory.
ROM DISK FILE z The ROM disk reached its maximum z Delete files and then try again, or
SYSTEM IS FULL capacity. turn the printer off and then turn the
alternates with printer on again to delete all of the
READY files on the device. (Delete files by
using HP Web Jetadmin, another
software utility, or the control panel.
See the Help for more information.)
ROM DISK IS WRITE z The ROM disk is protected, and no new z Try using a new disk that is not write
PROTECTED files can be written to it. protected.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 397

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
ROTATE PAPER IN z Tray X is loaded with letter or A4 media 1 Rotate the media or change the
TRAY X in the portrait orientation, but the job booklet-making option for the job.
alternates with that used the tray did not specify (The printer will not print until this
READY booklet-making. step is followed.)
z The media in tray X needs to be 2 If the media is landscape, the printer
rotated. continues printing, but a message
appears on the control panel that
the print job prints faster if the media
is rotated.
3 For tray 2, check connectors J52
and J3023 on the tray 2 media-
detection switch.
4 For tray 3, check connectors J54
and J3024 on the tray 3 media-
detection switch.
5 Check intermediate connectors
J3001, J3076, J3077, and
connectors J120 and J122 on the
DC controller PCA.
6 Check the tray 2 and tray 3 media-
width and length-detection switches
for correct operation. Replace the
switches if necessary.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
SIZE MISMATCH z Tray X is loaded with media that is z Reconfigure the tray or move the
TRAY=[SIZE] longer or shorter in the feed direction media to a tray configured for that
than the size configured for the tray. size.
TRAY X EMPTY z Tray X is detected as empty. 1 Load media into tray X.
[TYPE] [SIZE] 2 Reseat the media in tray X.
3 Check the lifter gear of the paper
pickup unit for damage. Replace the
lifter gear or paper pickup unit if
necessary.
4 Check connector J11 and J13 on
the lifter motor, intermediate
connector J3001, and connector
J120 on the DC controller PCA.
5 Check the media detection flag for
damage or obstructed movement.
6 Adjust or replace the paper pickup
unit if necessary.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA. See
“DC controller” on page 286.
TRAY X OPEN z The specified tray is open or is not 1 Close the specified tray.
alternates with closed completely.
2 If this error appears with the tray
READY installed correctly, check connector
J52 for tray 2, connector J54 for
tray 3, intermediate connector
J3001, and connector J120 on the
DC controller PCA.

398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 76. Alphabetical error messages (continued)
Message Description or explanation Recommended action
TRAY X z The custom switch is in the standard z Move the switch to the custom
SIZE=*SELECTED position, and a custom value from the position or reset the menu value to a
SIZE menu is selected. standard size.
alternates with
TO CHANGE, MOVE
SWITCH IN TRAY X
TYPE MISMATCH z The printer detected a different type of 1 Make sure that the correct media is
TRAY X=[TYPE] media in the paper path coming from loaded in the tray.
the tray (X) than the type of media that
2 Check the driver settings to make
is specified for the tray.
sure that the expected media type is
selected. This setting must match
the setting in step 3.
3 Check the media-type settings at
the control panel to make sure that
the printer is set for the media type
that is in the tray.
4 See the printer software online help
for more information.
UNABLE TO MOPY JOB z A job cannot be mopied because of a 1 The disk might be full. Try removing
memory, disk, or configuration unneeded files from the disk.
problem. Only one copy is produced.
2 Uncheck the hard disk in the driver.
UNABLE TO STORE z A job cannot be stored on the printer 1 The disk might be full. Try removing
JOB because of a memory, disk, or unneeded files from the disk.
configuration problem.
2 Uncheck the hard disk in the driver.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 399

Numerical error messages

Table 77. Numerical error messages

Message Explanation Recommended action
10.XX.YY SUPPLIES z The printer cannot read or write to at 1 In the instance of 10.00, 10.20
ERROR least one print cartridge or image and 10.30 errors, check if refilled
Note drum memory tag, or at least one cartridges or drums are used.
Replacing the image drum memory tag is missing. Replace them with HP
might correct the problem consumables.
temporarily because the XX description
Note
drum contains toner for 00 = e-label memory data error
If a drum or cartridge reached a “low”
about 50 pages. If the 10 = e-label memory is missing
or “out” condition and was moved to a
problem reoccurs after the 20 = refilled, non-HP supply (only
different printer, it might be reported as
image drum is replaced, appears in the event log)
a NON HP SUPPLY.
check the print cartridge or 30 = cloned cartridge/supply (only
the toner delivery system. appears in the event log) 2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
90 = toner replenishment the printer on again to possibly
malfunction reported by the image clear the error.
drum 3 Replace the indicated supply.

YY description 4 Check the print cartridge or image

00 = black print cartridge drum e-label indicator for damage.
01 = cyan print cartridge Replace the print cartridge or the
02 = magenta print cartridge image drum if necessary.
03 = yellow print cartridge 5 For print cartridges, check:
05 = black image drum
06 = cyan image drum • connectors J16, J17, J18, and
07 = magenta image drum J19 on the antenna PCAs.
08 = yellow image drum • connectors J1001, J1006,
J1007, J1008, and J1009 on
When a 10.20.YY or 10.30.YY the memory controller PCA.
error occurs, a question mark is • connector J802 on the T driver
placed on the gas gauge of the PCA.
supply or supplies with the error.
These errors are noted in the event 6 For image drums, check:
log and NON HP SUPPLY IN USE • connectors J12, J13, J14, and
appears on the control panel. J15 on the antenna PCAs.
• connectors J1001, J1002,
If multiple supplies have this error, a
J1003, J1004, and J1005 on
10.XX.YY error is displayed for the the memory controller PCA.
first supply detected with the error.
When the error corresponding to the • connector J802 on the T driver
first supply is resolved, another PCA.
10.XX.YY error is displayed for the 7 Replace the antenna PCA for the
next supply. This continues for all of indicated cartridge or drum.
the supplies errors.
8 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
Note crg (print cartridge) drive
The consumables gas gauge and assembly” on page 282.
supplies status menu are always 9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
updated to indicate all supplies with See “DC controller” on page 286.
a supplies memory error, even
z In the instance of a 10.90.YY error,
though the message refers to a
the image drum is reporting toner
single supply.
concentration-to-carrier is very
low. This error might occur when
Note
non-HP supplies are used. Make
00 = memory data error might be
sure that the toner delivery system
caused when using non-HP
and shutters are functioning
supplies.
correctly.

400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.01.00 JAM INSIDE z A media delay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the media from the lower
LOWER RIGHT DOOR paper pickup area. right door, tray 2 and tray 3, and
or z The media did not reach the tray 2 the upper right door (ITB access)
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY X delivery sensor B (SR12) or the if necessary.
tray 3 delivery sensor B (SR14) 2 Check the tray-size guides for
within the specified time. correct settings.
z If this error reoccurs, it is a
3 Check the tray 2 delivery sensor B
13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY X error.
and the tray 3 delivery sensor B
(SR12 and SR14; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
4 Replace the pick and feed rollers if
necessary.
5 Replace the PIU.
13.03.00 JAM INSIDE z A media delay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the media from the
UPPER RIGHT DOOR registration area. tray 1/registration area.
or z The media from any input source did 2 Check that the tray 1 assembly is
13.03.00 JAM INSIDE not reach the registration sensor aligned and closes correctly.
LOWER RIGHT DOOR (SR3) within the specified time.
3 Check the registration sensor
z If this error reoccurs, it is a
(SR3; see “Paper path jam
13.03.00 JAM INSIDE LOWER
sensors” on page 373) for correct
RIGHT DOOR error.
functionality, and check the
supporting connectors to the DC
controller PCA.
13.05.00 FUSER JAM z A media delay jam occurred before 1 Remove the jammed media from
LOWER LEFT DOOR the fuser. The media did not reach the ITB and the fuser area through
or the fuser output sensor (PS1501) the lower/left door or the front
13.05.00 JAM INSIDE within the specified time. doors. Removing the fuser and
z If this error reoccurs, it is a ITB might be helpful.
FRONT DOOR
13.05.00 JAM INSIDE FRONT 2 Check the fuser output sensor
DOOR error. (PS1501; see “Paper path jam
sensors” on page 373) and its flag
for correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
13.06.00 JAM INSIDE z A media stay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the jammed media from
LOWER LEFT DOOR fuser. The media is detected at the the fuser area through the lower/
or fuser output sensor (PS1501) longer left door or the front doors.
13.06.00 JAM INSIDE than the specified time. Removing the fuser might be
z If this error reoccurs, it is a helpful.
PAPER PATH
13.06.00 JAM INSIDE PAPER 2 Check the fuser output sensor
PATH error. (PS1501; see “Paper path jam
sensors” on page 373) and its flag
for correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 401

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.07.00 JAM INSIDE z A multifeed jam occurred. 1 Remove the media from the
UPPER RIGHT DOOR z Multiple pages, with a stack height of registration area.
more than 0.5 mm, arrived at the 2 Make sure that the media being
multifeed sensor (SR5) on the used is within specifications, and
registration assembly. that the correct media type
settings for the media being used
are set on the control panel.
3 Check the tray pickup and feed
rollers. Replace the rollers if
necessary.
4 Check the separation pad if the
media is fed from tray 1.
5 Check the multifeed sensor (SR5;
see “Paper path jam sensors” on
page 373) flag on the registration
assembly for damage or binding.
6 Check the multifeed sensor (SR5;
see “Paper path jam sensors” on
page 373) for correct functionality,
and check the supporting
connectors to the DC controller
PCA.
7 Check connector J3101 near the
multifeed sensor, intermediate
connectors J3100 and J3037, and
connector J121 on the
DC controller PCA.
8 Replace the registration assembly.
See “Registration assembly” on
page 269.
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
13.09.00 JAM INSIDE z A media delay jam occurred. 1 Remove the media from the fuser
LOWER LEFT DOOR z The media did not reach the face- access area, the duplex diverter,
or down output sensor (PS901) within or the face-down delivery area
13.09.00 JAM INSIDE the specified time. through the lower left or upper left
z If this error reoccurs, it is a doors.
UPPER LEFT DOOR
13.09.00 INSIDE UPPER LEFT 2 Check the face-down and duplex
DOOR error. diverters for correct functionality.
3 Check for deformed rollers.
4 Make sure that the upper and
lower left doors are completely
closed.
5 Check the face-down output
sensor (PS901; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.

402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.0A.00 JAM INSIDE z A media stay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the media from the fuser
TOP OUTPUT BIN face-down tray. The printer detected access area, the duplex diverter,
or that media is at the face-down output or the face-down delivery area
13.0A.00 JAM INSIDE sensor longer than the specified through the left lower door and the
time. left upper door.
UPPER LEFT DOOR
z If this error reoccurs, it is a 2 Check the face-down sensor
13.0A.00 JAM INSIDE UPPER (PS901; see “Paper path jam
LEFT DOOR error. sensors” on page 373) for correct
functionality, and check the
supporting connectors to the DC
controller PCA.
13.10.00 JAM INSIDE z A media stay jam occurred in the 1 Check for obstructions and
LOWER LEFT DOOR reversing area. residual media in the paper path
or z The media did not reach the in the post fuser and duplexer
13.10.00 JAM INSIDE duplexer media reverse sensor diverter area.
DUPLEXER (SR33) within the specified time. 2 Make sure that the lower left door
z If this error reoccurs, it is a closes correctly.
13.10.00 JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
3 Check the duplex diverter
error.
mechanism and the duplex
diverter solenoid for correct
functionality.
4 Check the duplexer media reverse
sensor (SR33; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality.
5 Check the supporting connectors
to the DC controller PCA.
13.11.XY JAM IN INPUT z Media is late from tray 4. 1 Check for jammed media by
ACCESSORY Note opening tray 4 and opening the
XY can be 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, or 10. lower right door.
2 Check the paper-path transition
between tray 4 and the print
engine.
3 Check the tray-size guides for
correct settings.
4 Replace the pickup rollers and the
feed rollers if they are worn.
13.11.00 JAM INSIDE z A media stay jam occurred in the 1 Check for obstructions and
LOWER LEFT DOOR reversing area. residual media in the paper path
or z The duplexer reverse sensor (SR33) in the post fuser and duplexer
13.11.00 JAM INSIDE detects residual media beyond the diverter area.
DUPLEXER specified time. 2 Make sure that the lower left door
z If this error reoccurs, it is a closes correctly.
13.11.00 JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER
3 Check the duplex diverter
error.
mechanism and the duplex
diverter solenoid for correct
functionality.
4 Check the duplexer reverse
sensor (SR33; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality.
5 Check the supporting connectors
to the DC controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 403

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.11.05 JAM IN INPUT z A page is jammed in the paper path 1 Clear the jam in the indicated
ACCESSORY at the registration area. area.
z A pickup delay jam occurred. 2 Close the door so the printer
attempts to clear the paper path.
3 Perform a paper-path test.
4 If the error persists, replace the
paper pickup assembly.
13.11.06 PICKUP z A page is jammed in the pickup area 1 Clear the jam in the indicated area
STATIONARY JAM of the input accessory. of the input device.
2 Remove the media from the right
door of the printer engine.
13.11.07 JAM IN INPUT z A page is jammed in the right door 1 Clear the jam in the indicated
ACCESSORY area. area.
z A page stopped in the registration 2 Close the door so the printer
area. attempts to clear the paper path.
3 If the error persists, replace the
vertical transfer unit.
13.11.08 JAM IN INPUT z A page is jammed in the paper path 1 Clear the jam in the indicated
ACCESSORY at the vertical transfer unit area.
registration area.
2 Close the door so the printer
z A paper delivery delay jam occurred. attempts to clear the paper path.
3 Make sure that the vertical
transfer sensor is functional.
4 If the error persists, replace the
vertical transfer sensor.
5 Replace the vertical transfer unit.
13.11.09 JAM IN INPUT z A page is jammed in the paper path 1 Clear the jam in the indicated
ACCESSORY at the right door area. area.
z A paper delivery stationary jam 2 Close the door so the printer
occurred. attempts to clear the paper path.
3 Replace the paper path
connection unit.
4 Replace the vertical registration
assembly.
5 If the error persists, replace the
diverter.
13.11.10 RESIDUAL JAM z A page is jammed in the delivery 1 Clear the jam.
IN DELIVERY AREA area when the power is turned on or
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
when the front door is closed.
the printer on again.
3 Replace the paper path
connection unit.
4 Replace the vertical registration
assembly.

404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.12.00 JAM INSIDE z A media delay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the duplexer and check
DUPLEXER duplexer. for correct seating, residual
z The media did not reach the media, or obstructions.
duplexer media path sensor (SR31) 2 Check the inside of the duplexer
within the specified time. and the duplex cavity for residual
media or obstructions.
3 Check the duplexer side
registration guides for free
movement. Replace the duplexer
if necessary. See “Duplexer” on
page 244.
4 Check the feed rollers and the
drive gear trains for damage.
Replace them if necessary.
5 Check the duplexer media path
sensor (SR31; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
13.12.11 JAM IN LEFT z A staple jam exists in the stapling 1 Clear the jam.
ACCESSORY unit.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
3 Test the staple sliding motor (M8).
4 Make sure that the stapler unit
slides to the home position at
power on.
5 Make sure that the staple
cartridge is installed correctly.
6 Make sure that no damaged
staples exist in the staple
cartridge or in the stapler unit.
7 Test another staple cartridge.
8 Check all of the cable connections
at the module and at the
controller PCA.
9 Replace the stapler unit.
10 Replace the controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 405

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.12.21 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (initial jam) exists in the flipper 1 Clear the jam.
ACCESSORY assembly.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
3 Clean the optical entry sensor.
4 Make sure that the entry sensor
moves freely, and run the sensor
check mode to test the entry
sensor.
5 Calibrate the flipping sensor D/A
clear.
6 Activate the reverse motor (M9) to
make sure that the motor
activates the assembly.
7 Make sure that the paper guide
wire is positioned correctly.
8 Replace the flipper assembly.
9 Replace the controller PCA.
13.12.22 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (stay jam) exists in the flipper z Perform the steps for a 13.12.21
ACCESSORY assembly. error.

13.12.23 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (delay jam) exists in the flipper z Perform the steps for a 13.12.21
ACCESSORY assembly. error.

13.12.31 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (initial jam) exists in the paper- 1 Make sure that the printer and the
ACCESSORY path area. finishing device are installed on a
flat, solid surface.
2 Make sure that the printer is
processing media correctly.
3 Clear the jam.
4 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
5 Replace the controller PCA.
6 Make sure that the media in use
meets specifications. See “Media
specifications” on page 31.
7 Replace the whole unit.
8 Replace the flipper assembly.
13.12.32 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (stay jam) exists in the paper- z Perform the steps for a 13.12.31
ACCESSORY path area. error.

13.12.33 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (delay jam) exists in the z Perform the steps for a 13.12.31
ACCESSORY paper-path area. error.

406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.12.34 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (ejectors jam) exists in the 1 Clear the jam.
ACCESSORY paper-path area.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
3 Make sure that the stapled jobs
meet the required specifications.
4 Make sure that the number of
sheets per document are within
specifications. See “Media
specifications” on page 31.
5 Make sure that the media in use
meets specifications. See “Media
specifications” on page 31.
6 Make sure that the stapler is the
home position.
7 Replace the whole unit.
13.12.41 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (initial jam) exists in the 1 Make sure that there is no media
ACCESSORY folding/booklet area. inside the output device at power
on.
2 Make sure that the booklet meets
specifications. See “Supported
media and capacity for input and
output” on page 32.
3 Clear the jam.
4 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
5 Activate the staple-fold motor (M7)
to make sure that the assembly
works.
6 Perform the booklet adjustments
as needed.
7 Check all cable connections at the
module and at the controller PCA.
8 Replace the folding mechanism.
9 Replace the controller PCA.
13.12.42 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (stay jam) exists in the folding/ z Perform the steps for a 13.12.41
ACCESSORY booklet area. error.

13.12.43 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (delay jam) exists in the z Perform the steps for a 13.12.41
ACCESSORY folding/booklet area. error.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 407

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.12.51 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (initial jam) exists in the 1 Clear the jam.
ACCESSORY booklet bin area.
2 Make sure that the booklet meets
specifications. See “Supported
media and capacity for input and
output” on page 32.
3 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again.
4 Activate the booklet bin sliding
motor (M10) to make sure that the
assembly works.
5 At power on, make sure that the
booklet stopper moves completely
in and out.
6 Check all cable connections at the
module and at the controller PCA.
7 Replace the booklet bin.
8 Replace the controller PCA.
13.12.52 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (stay jam) exists in the booklet z Perform the steps for a 13.12.51
ACCESSORY bin area. error.

13.12.53 JAM IN LEFT z A jam (delay jam) exists in the z Perform the steps for a 13.12.51
ACCESSORY booklet bin area. error.

13.13.00 JAM INSIDE z A media stay jam occurred in the 1 Remove the duplexer and check
DUPLEXER duplexer. for correct seating, residual
z The media did not reach the media, or obstructions.
duplexer media path sensor (SR31) 2 Check the inside of the duplexer
within the specified time. and the duplex cavity for residual
media or obstructions.
3 Check the duplexer side
registration guides for free
movement. Replace the duplexer
if necessary.
4 Check the feed rollers and the
drive gear trains for damage.
Replace them if necessary.
5 Check the duplex media path
sensor (SR31; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
6 If the error persists, replace the
duplexer. See “Duplexer” on page
244.

408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.1C.00 FUSER JAM z A fuser wrap jam occurred. The 1 Make sure that the media being
LOWER LEFT DOOR printer detected that media is used is within specifications, and
wrapped around the fuser roller. that the correct media type
settings for the media being used
are set on the control panel.
2 Remove the media from the fuser
through the lower left door.
Removing the fuser assembly
might be helpful.
3 Check the fuser output sensor
(PS1501; see “Paper path jam
sensors” on page 373) and its flag
for correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
4 Check the fuser rollers for
damage or contamination. Verify
fuser integrity by printing a demo
or configuration page.
5 Replace the fuser assembly if
necessary. See “Fuser” on page
245.
13.1D.00 JAM INSIDE z An ITB wrap jam occurred. 1 Make sure that the media being
PAPER PATH z The media did not reach the fuser used is within specifications, and
input sensor (SR6) within the that the correct media type
specified time. settings for the media being used
are set on the control panel.
2 Remove and check the ITB for
residual media.
3 Check the T2 area for residual
media.
4 Check the ITB for media-caused
damage. Replace the ITB if
necessary.
5 Check the fuser input sensor
(SR6; see “Paper path jam
sensors” on page 373) for correct
functionality, and check the
supporting connectors to the DC
controller PCA.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 409

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.20.00 JAM INSIDE z A residual media jam occurred in the 1 Check the paper path from the
PAPER PATH paper path. registration area to the T2 area
z The T2 input sensor (SR42), the and through the fuser. If there is
fuser input sensor (SR6), and/or the jammed media, remove the ITB
fuser output sensor (PS1501) detect and fuser. Remove the jammed
media when the printer doors are media.
closed. 2 Check the right side lower door
area for residual media or jammed
sensor flags.
3 Check the T2 input sensor
(SR42), the fuser upstream
sensor (SR6), and the fuser
output sensor (PS1501) for
correct flag movement and
functionality (see “Paper path jam
sensors” on page 373).
4 Check connectors J3207 and
J121 on the DC controller.
5 Check the supporting connectors
to the DC controller PCA.
13.25.00 JAM INSIDE z The media is detected as longer 1 Check for supported media, and
UPPER RIGHT DOOR than what is configured on the that the media size for the tray is
control panel, as reported by the correctly set on the control panel.
registration sensor (SR3).
2 Make sure that the software
program or the driver settings are
requesting the size of media that
is in the tray. (This is particularly
important if the tray size is set to
ANY SIZE because the printer
registers that the media is the size
requested from the job.)
13.29.00 JAM INSIDE z A re-feeding jam occurred in the 1 Remove the duplexer, and check
DUPLEXER duplexer. the inside of the duplexer and the
z The duplexer media re-feed sensor duplex cavity for residual media.
(SR30) detects media when the 2 Check the duplexer media re-feed
printer doors are closed. sensor (SR30; see “Paper path
jam sensors” on page 373) for
correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.
3 If the error persists, replace the
duplexer. See “Duplexer” on page
244.
13.3E.00 JAM INSIDE z Residual media is detected under 1 Remove the media from the face-
TOP OUTPUT BIN the face-down output sensor down delivery area.
or (PS901).
2 Check the face-down output
13.3E.00 JAM INSIDE z If this error reoccurs, it is a sensor (PS901; see “Paper path
UPPER LEFT DOOR 13.3E.00 JAM INSIDE UPPER jam sensors” on page 373) for
LEFT DOOR error. correct functionality, and check
the supporting connectors to the
DC controller PCA.

410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
13.32.00 JAM IN TRAY X z Residual media is detected in or 1 Remove the media from the
or near tray 2 or tray 3 as indicated at pickup area of tray 2 or tray 3
13.32.00 JAM INSIDE power on, or when the printer is through the tray or the lower right
LOWER RIGHT DOOR coming out of PowerSave mode. door.
z If this error reoccurs, it is a 2 Check the tray-size guides for
13.32.00 JAM INSIDE LOWER correct settings.
RIGHT DOOR error.
3 Check the tray 2 media path
sensor A (SR11) and the tray 2
media path sensor B (SR12) for
correct functionality (see “Paper
path jam sensors” on page 373).
Check the supporting connectors
to the DC controller PCA.
4 Check the tray 3 media path
sensor A (SR13) and the tray 3
media path sensor B (SR14) for
correct functionality (see “Paper
path jam sensors” on page 373).
Check the supporting connectors
to the DC controller PCA.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY z This message indicates that more z Press to print the transferred
alternates with data has been received from the data (some data might be lost),
TO CONTINUE PRESS computer than fits in the printer and then simplify the print job or
internal memory. install additional memory.
z Press to continue printing. Only
the amount of data that fits in the
printer internal memory is printed.
The remainder of the job is
cancelled.
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX z The page-formatting process was 1 Press to print the transferred
alternates with not fast enough for the printer. data (some data might be lost).
TO CONTINUE PRESS z There might be some data lost on 2 The page protection item appears
the page that was being formatted in the CONFIGURE DEVICE -
when the error occurred. DEFAULTS - EVENTS - menu, and
should be set to ON to print the
page.
3 When the page is successfully
printed, PAGE PROTECT=ON, should
be set back to AUTO.
4 If this error appears often, simplify
the print job.
22 EIO X z Too much data was sent to the EIO 1 Press to print the transferred
BUFFER OVERFLOW card in the specified slot (X). An data (some data might be lost).
improper communications protocol
2 Check the host configuration.
might be in use.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 411

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
22 PARALLEL I/O z Too much data was sent to the 1 Check for a loose cable
BUFFER OVERFLOW parallel port. connection, and be sure to use a
alternates with high-quality cable. (Some non-HP
TO CONTINUE PRESS parallel cables might be missing
pin connections or might
otherwise not conform to the
IEEE-1284 specification.)
2 This error can occur if the print
driver in use is not IEEE-1284
compliant. For best results, use
the HP print driver that came with
the printer or download the latest
HP driver for this printer at http://
www.hp.com/support/lj9500.
3 Press to clear the error (data
will be lost).
22 SERIAL I/O z The printer serial buffer overflowed z Press to print the transferred
BUFFER OVERFLOW during a busy state. data (some data might be lost)

40 BAD SERIAL z A serial data error (parity, framing, or z Press to clear the error and
TRANSMISSION line overrun) occurred during the continue printing.
reception of data from the computer.
40 EIO X BAD z The connection between the printer z Press to clear the error and
TRANSMISSION and the EIO card in the specified slot continue printing.
has been abnormally broken.
41.X PRINTER ERROR z A temporary printing error occurred. 1 Press to clear the error and
alternates with continue printing.
TO CONTINUE PRESS X description
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
1 = unknown misprint error
the printer on again to clear the
2 = beam detect misprint
error.
3 = media feed error (size)
5 = media feed error (type) 3 If the error persists, troubleshoot
6 = ITB detection error the laser system (41.2), the
media feed mechanisms, the
media size/type settings, and the
ITB seating.
41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE z Tray (X) is loaded with media that is 1 Check the media size definition for
TRAY X longer or shorter in the feed direction the specified tray. If necessary,
alternates with than the size configured for the tray. reconfigure the media size
TO CHANGE SIZE defined for the tray.
PRESS 2 Press to get to TRAY X SIZE=.
Reconfigure the size in a tray so
that the printer uses a tray with the
size that is required for the print
job.
3 If the error does not clear, turn the
printer off, and then turn the
printer on again.
4 If the error persists, check the tray
size sensor mechanisms, the
registration sensor for correct
functionality, and the supporting
connectors to the
DC controller PCA.

412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE z Tray (X) is loaded with media that is 1 Check the media type definition
TRAY X not of the same type configured for for the specified tray.
alternates with the tray.
2 If necessary, reconfigure the
TO CHANGE TYPE PRESS Note media type for the tray.
The printer only detects media or OHTs.
3 If the error does not clear, turn the
printer off, and then turn the
printer on again.
4 If the error persists, check the
transparency sensor for correct
functionality. Check connector
J3032 on the transparency
sensor, intermediate connector
J3027, and connector J121 on the
DC controller PCA.
49.XXYY PRINTER ERROR z A critical formatter firmware error Note
occurred which caused the The printer 49 errors are usually not
processor on the formatter to cease fixed by replacing the formatter.
operation.
Note 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
Unique subcodes are constructed by the printer on again to clear the
creating a unique error of an 8-bit error.
component ID (XX) and an 8-bit
component specific error (YY). The 2 Make sure that the customer is
component ID and component specific using a known good software
error are useful in determining which program, good driver, good
part of the firmware failed. cabling, and good connections.
3 Print a configuration page to make
sure that the printer has the most
recent release of formatter
firmware. If necessary, flash the
printer with new firmware.
4 Check all of the accessory
hardware, such as memory
DIMMs and EIO devices, on the
formatter by removing them.
(Removing the hardware
eliminates them as possible
causes of the error.)
5 If the error persists, the formatter
might need to be replaced. See
“Formatter PCB” on page 288.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 413

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
50.X z A fuser error occurred. Power cycle 1 Remove the fuser and check it for
the printer to continue. damage or jammed media.
2 Make sure that the printer is
X description
plugged into appropriate ac
1 = low fuser temperature
voltage.
2 = fuser detected not coming to
operating temperature after a jam or 3 Turn the printer off, let it cool for
open door 10 minutes, and then turn the
3 = high fuser temperature printer on again to possibly clear
6 = open fuser heating circuit the error.
between the fuser and low-voltage 4 Replace the fuser.
power supply
7 = fuser pressure release 5 Check the fuser/print engine
mechanism failure electrical connectors J3019 for
damage.
6 Check connector J1501 on the
fusing sensor PCA and connector
J115 on the DC controller PCA.
7 Check for a fuser drive or fuser
motor failure. Replace if
necessary. See “Fuser motor” on
page 284 or “Fuser drive
assembly” on page 285.
8 Replace the power supply unit.
See “Low-voltage power supply”
on page 268.
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
51.XY PRINTING ERROR z A laser scanner assembly laser error CAUTION
alternates with occurred. When servicing the printer with the top
TO CONTINUE CYCLE cover off, cover the top of the printer to
POWER X description prevent light leaks which might blind
1 = beam detect error the laser/scanner beam detect
2 = laser error sensors.
1 Check the FFCs for damage, and
Y description
make sure that they are correctly
0 = no color
centered and seated in the
K = black
connectors. Replace the FFCs if
C = cyan
necessary.
M = magenta
Y = yellow 2 The following are color-specific
steps:
z K laser
Check connector J3012 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3056
on the scanner motor, connector
J3061 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z C laser
Check connector J3011 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3059
on the scanner motor, connector
J3062 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z M laser
Check connector J3010 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3053
on the scanner motor, connector
J3063 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z Y laser
Check connector J3009 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3050
on the scanner motor, connector
J3064 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J817 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J108
on the DC controller PCA.
3 Check FFC connectors J103 and
J106 on the DC controller PCA,
J9002 on the formatter cage, and
J801 on the T driver PCA.
4 Replace the necessary laser
scanner unit. See “Laser/scanner
assembly” on page 217.
5 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 415

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
52.X PRINTER ERROR z A laser scanner assembly error CAUTION
alternates with occurred. When servicing the printer with the top
TO CONTINUE CYCLE cover off, cover the top of the printer to
POWER X description prevent light leaks which might blind
1 = scanner error the laser/scanner beam detect
2 = scanner startup error sensors.
3 = scanner rotation error
1 The following are color-specific
steps:
Y description
0 = no color z K laser
K = black Check connector J3012 on the
C = cyan laser driver PCA, connector J3056
M = magenta on the scanner motor, connector
Y = yellow J3061 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z C laser
Check connector J3011 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3059
on the scanner motor, connector
J3062 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z M laser
Check connector J3010 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3053
on the scanner motor, connector
J3063 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J815 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J110
on the DC controller PCA.
z Y laser
Check connector J3009 on the
laser driver PCA, connector J3050
on the scanner motor, connector
J3064 on the beam detect PCA,
connectors J812 and J817 on the
T driver PCA, and connector J108
on the DC controller PCA.
2 Check FFC connectors J103 and
J106 on the DC controller PCA,
J9002 on the formatter cage, and
J801 on the T driver PCA.
3 Check the FFCs for damage, and
make sure that they are correctly
centered and seated in the
connectors. Replace the FFCs if
necessary.
4 Replace the necessary laser
scanner unit. See “Laser/scanner
assembly” on page 217.
5 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
53.10.05 PRINTER ERROR z A DIMM is installed in both the 168- z This is an invalid configuration.
alternates with pin DIMM slot 4 and in the 100-pin DIMMs cannot be installed in both
TO CONTINUE CYCLE DIMM slot 5. slots at the same time. Remove
POWER one of the DIMMs, or move one of
the DIMMs to a different slot.
53.XY.ZZ PRINTER ERROR z A problem exists with the printer z Turn the printer off, and then
alternates with memory. replace the DIMM that caused the
TO CONTINUE CYCLE error.
POWER X DIMM type
1 = RAM

Y device location
1 = DIMM slot 1
2 = DIMM slot 2
3 = DIMM slot 3
4 = DIMM slot 4

ZZ error number
0 = unsupported memory
1 = unrecognized memory
2 = unsupported memory
3 = failed RAM test
4 = exceeded maximum RAM size
5 = invalid DIMM speed

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 417

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
54.XX PRINTER ERROR z The printer 54 errors indicate sensor z 54.01 procedure:
abnormalities. Sensor abnormalities
1 Check that all of the
are caused by failed or blocked
environmental requirements are
sensors, or sensors reporting results
met.
outside an expected range.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
Note the printer on again.
Some 54 errors do not stop the 3 Check connector K3013 on the
printing process, and are only noted temperature/humidity sensor,
in the event log but not on the control intermediate connector J3085,
panel. and connector J807 on the
T driver PCA.
XX description
00 = ITB misalignment (check the 4 Replace the temperature/humidity
event log for a 54.27 error and cycle sensor. See “Temperature and
power to recover) humidity sensor” on page 266.
01 = environmental temperature 5 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
sensor output is abnormal (appears crg (print cartridge) drive
only in the event log) assembly” on page 282.
05 = OHT sensor failure (appears
only in the event log) 6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
06 = density sensor failure See“DC controller” on page 286.

Note z 54.06, 54.11, 54.12, 54.13, 54.14,

For errors 11 through 14, the density and 54.30 procedure:
is set to the highest or lowest
possible value. This usually occurs 1 Check the cleaning blade and ITB
because the calibration patches are for evidence of a cleaning blade
not on the ITB correctly. These failure (which might cause the
errors appear only in the event log. density calibration to fail).
2 Check the right door actuated
11 = yellow density sensor (the cleaning mechanism for correct
engine detects abnormality in the functionality.
yellow density control and the
3 Select CALIBRATE NOW and
engine default is used)
PRINT STOP TEST on the control
12 = magenta density sensor (the
panel to check correct formations
engine detects abnormality in the
of the calibration swatches on the
magenta density control and the
ITB. If the swatches are light or
engine default is used)
missing a color, check the T1
13 = cyan density sensor (the engine
components, image drum, and
detects abnormality in the cyan
print cartridge for the missing or
density control and the engine
light color. Also, check for
default is used)
malformed or too light swatches,
14 = black density sensor (the
stray toner from cleaning failures,
engine detects abnormality in the
and ITB damage.
black density control and the engine
default is used) 4 Check connector J3014 at the
density sensor, intermediate
Note connector J3072 and J3080, and
Errors 15 through 18 only appear in connector J808 on the
the event log and printing continues. T driver PCA.
5 Replace the density/color
15 = yellow CPR sensor (the engine
registration sensor assembly. See
cannot detect the yellow CPR
“Density and registration sensor
pattern on the ITB)
assembly” on page 248.
16 = magenta CPR sensor (the
engine cannot detect the magenta 6 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
CPR pattern on the ITB) crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
54.XX PRINTER ERROR z 17 = cyan CPR sensor (the engine z 54.05 procedure:
(continued) cannot detect the cyan CPR pattern
1 Clean the OHT sensor.
on the ITB)
18 = black CPR sensor (the engine 2 Check the transparency sensor for
cannot detect the black CPR pattern correct functionality.
on the ITB) 3 Check connectors J3032 on the
20 = CPR sensor (output is transparency sensor, intermediate
abnormal or the engine cannot connector J3027, and connector
detect any of the CPR patterns on J121 on the DC controller PCA.
the ITB)
z 54.15, 54.16, 54.17, 54.18, and
Note 54.20 procedure
Errors 21 through 24 indicate a toner 1 Check the color and the tray 1
concentration sensor failure. dependent items for the specified
color.
21 = yellow image drum t/d ratio
sensor 2 Defeat the right side upper door
22 = magenta image drum t/d ratio (ITB access) interlocks and check
sensor during a calibration that the
23 = cyan image drum t/d ratio density patches are formed
sensor correctly on the ITB.
24 = black image drum t/d ratio 3 Print a laser alignment page to
sensor check for adjustable CPR
27 = ITB misalignment sensor problems.

Note 4 Check the cleaning blade and ITB

27 = ITB misalignment sensor for evidence of a cleaning blade
appears in the event log, but it might failure (which might cause the
appear as a 54.00 error on the density calibration to fail), and
control panel. check the ITB for damage.
5 Check the right door actuated
cleaning mechanism for correct
functionality.
28 = clean density/CPR sensor
6 Select CALIBRATE NOW and
warning (only appears in the event
PRINT STOP TEST on the control
log)
panel to check correct formations
of the calibration swatches on the
Note
ITB (set to 7,000 milliseconds for
For error 28, the CLEAN SENSORS
a CPR pattern check). If the
54.28.01 (density sensor is dirty)
swatches are light or missing a
or CLEAN SENSORS 54.28.02
color, check the T1 components,
(CPR sensor is dirty) appears on the
image drum, and print cartridge
event log.
for the missing or light color. Also,
check for malformed or too light
29 = clean density/CPR sensor
swatches, stray toner from
failed (only appears in the event log
cleaning failures, and ITB
and CLEAN SENSORS appears on the
damage.
control panel)
30 = halftone calibration error 7 Check the ITB for smooth belt
rotation and belt travel. Replace
the ITB if movement problems or
damage exists.
8 Check connector J3073 and
J3074 at the CPR sensors,
intermediate connector J3080,
and connector J808 on the
T driver PCA.
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 419

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
54.XX PRINTER ERROR 10 Replace the density/color
(continued) registration sensor assembly. See
“Density and registration sensor
assembly” on page 248.
11 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
z 54.21, 54.22, 54.23, and 54.24
procedure
1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
2 Check the indicated image drum
for damaged high-voltage
contacts, and check the contacts
for continuity to the high-voltage
power supply.
3 Check the image drum high-
voltage pins on the print engine.
4 Check the following connectors:
a Yellow: J3040 and J804 on
the T driver PCA.
b Magenta: J3038 and J804 on
the T driver PCA.
c Cyan: J3044 and J805 on the
T driver PCA.
d Black: J3042 and J805 on the
T driver PCA.
5 Replace the indicated image
drum. (Make sure that the printer
is turned off, and then turned on
again after the image drum is
replaced.) See “Process
cartridges (image drums)” on
page 189.
6 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

z 54.27 and 54.00 procedure

1 Remove the ITB and check the
belt for correct alignment and
movement.
2 Replace the ITB and seat it
correctly.
3 Check connector J3075 and J618
on the P driver PCA.
4 Replace the ITB. See
“Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)”
on page 246.

420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
54.XX PRINTER ERROR 5 Replace the P driver PCA. See
(continued) “P-crg (image drum) drive
assembly” on page 278.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
z 54.28 procedure
1 Make sure that the density/color
sensor shutter is in the open
position when the front right door
is closed.
2 Open and close the front right
door to clean the sensor
assembly.
3 Adjust or replace the sensor
cleaning assembly that is
actuated by the front right door.
4 Replace the density/color
registration sensor assembly. See
“Density and registration sensor
assembly” on page 248.
z 54.29 procedure
1 Check the right door actuated
cleaning mechanism for correct
functionality.
2 Adjust or replace the sensor
cleaning assembly that is
actuated by the front right door.
3 Replace the density/color
registration sensor assembly. See
“Density and registration sensor
assembly” on page 248.
55.XX PRINTER ERROR z The engine is not communicating 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
alternates with with the formatter. the printer on again to clear the
TO CONTINUE CYCLE z The communication link between the error.
POWER formatter and the DC controller PCA 2 Turn the printer off and reseat the
is lost. formatter.
3 Print a configuration page to make
sure that the formatter has the
latest firmware image. If it does
not, perform a flash upgrade.
4 Check the connectors on the FFC
between the formatter cage and
the DC controller PCA.
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
6 Replace the formatter. See
“Formatter PCB” on page 288.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 421

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
56.X PRINTER ERROR z A temporary printer error occurred. 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
alternates with the printer on again to clear the
TO CONTINUE CYCLE error.
POWER 2 Turn the printer off and reseat the
formatter.
3 Print a configuration page to make
sure that the formatter has the
latest firmware image. If it does
not, perform a flash upgrade.
4 Check the connectors on the FFC
between the formatter cage and
the DC controller PCA.
5 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
6 Replace the formatter. See
“Formatter PCB” on page 288.
57.X0 PRINTER ERROR z The printer detects that a fan motor 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
has failed. the printer on again to clear the
error.
X description
2 Check the indicated fan, and
1 = cartridge fan (FM 3)
check for correct movement of the
3 = low-voltage power supply fan
blades and motor.
(FM5)
5 = face-up delivery paper path fans 3 Check the connectors that apply
(FM1 or FM6) to the X error:
6 = paper-path fan (FM2) 1: J3078 and J820 on the
7 = fuser fan (FM4) T driver PCA.
9 = ozone/exhaust fan (FM7) 3: J3 on the low-voltage power
supply, and J102 on the
DC controller PCA.
5: J3079 and J3087 at the fans,
intermediate connector J086, and
J811 on the T driver PCA.
6: J818 on the T driver PCA.
7: J819 on the T driver PCA.
9: J3089 at the fan, and J823 on
the T driver PCA.
4 Check connector J1 on the low-
voltage power supply, J210 and
J202 on the high-voltage power
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
driver PCA, and J806 on the T
driver PCA.
5 Replace the fan if voltage is
supplied to it at power on and it
fails. See chapter 6.
6 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA if
X = 3 (FM5). See “DC controller”
on page 286.

422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
58.X0 PRINTER ERROR z A printer error occurred where a 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
alternates with memory tag CPU error was detected the printer on again to clear the
TO CONTINUE CYCLE z Cycle power to continue. error.
POWER 2 If the error persists, reseat the
X description: print cartridges and the image
1 = N/A drums.
2 = air temperature sensor
3 = CPU 3 Check the memory tag on the
4 = power supply consumables for damage.
Replace the consumable if it is
damaged. See “Consumables” on
page 187.
4 Check the antenna assemblies for
each consumable, and the
connections to the memory board.
5 Replace the memory board.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 423

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR z The printer detects a motor that fails Note
alternates with to turn or fails to turn at speed. If turning the printer off and on again
TO CONTINUE CYCLE does not resolve the 59.00 or 59.A0
POWER X description error, remove and reinstall the image
0 = motor error (not possible for the transfer cleaner.
HP color LaserJet 9500)
1 = motor startup error z Print cartridge motor errors
2 = motor rotation error (remove and shake)
3 = fuser motor startup error There are no 59 errors associated with
4 = fuser motor rotation error the print cartridge motor errors. When
5 = image drum motor startup error the engine reports a fail to rotate for
6 = image drum motor rotation error these motors, the error REMOVE AND
8 = developer motor failure SHAKE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE appears.
9 = ITB motor startup error
A = ITB motor rotation error 1 Remove and check the indicated
D = registration motor starting error print cartridge. Check the engine
E = registration motor rotation error for damaged drive linkages.
2 Gently shake the print cartridge,
Note reseat it, and turn the printer on.
59.XY errors with X = A, D, or E
3 Turn the printer off, and then turn
noted in the log appear as
the printer on again to clear the
59.10.00, 59.13.00, and
error.
59.14.00 respectively (59.XX.YY),
where XX is a decimal conversion of 4 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
the hexadecimal control panel from the control panel to test each
display error. motor for correct functionality.
5 Check connector J1 on the low-
Note
voltage power supply, J210 and
Print cartridge motor errors are
J202 on the high-voltage power
indicated as REMOVE AND SHAKE
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
<COLOR> CARTRIDGE.
driver PCA, and J806 on the T
driver PCA.
Y description
0 = no color 6 Replace the print cartridge and
K = black the drive linkages if necessary.
C = cyan Note
M = magenta Make sure that the print cartridges,
Y = yellow when stored, were not exposed to high
temperatures.
7 Check connector 814 on the
T driver PCA.
8 Check the color-appropriate
connectors:
• K: J3046 near the motor
• C: J3047 near the motor
• M: J3048 near the motor
• Y: J3049 near the motor
9 Replace the T driver PCA. See “T-
crg (print cartridge) drive
assembly” on page 282.
10 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR z Fuser motor errors
alternates with 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
TO CONTINUE CYCLE the printer on again to clear the
POWER error.
(continued)
2 Remove and check the fuser for
jammed media and damaged
drive gears.
3 Perform a motor diagnostics test.
4 Check connector J3035 at the
fuser motor and connector J116
on the DC controller PCA.
5 Check the fuser drive train for
correct movement. Replace the
fuser drive train if necessary.
6 Replace the fuser motor. See
“Fuser motor” on page 284.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
z Image drum motor errors
1 Gently shake the print cartridge,
reseat it, and turn the printer on.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Remove and check the indicated
image drum, and check the
engine for damaged drive
linkages.
4 Reseat the image drum.
5 Replace the image drum and the
drive linkages if necessary.
6 Check connector J1 on the low-
voltage power supply, J210 and
J202 on the high-voltage power
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
driver PCA, and J806 on the T
driver PCA.
Note
Make sure that the print cartridges,
when stored, were not exposed to high
temperatures.
7 Check FFC connectors J104 and
J105 on the DC controller PCA,
and connectors J601 and J616 on
the P driver PCA (especially if the
printer has been serviced
recently).
8 Make sure that the FFC is
centered and that it is completely
inserted into the connector.
Replace the FFC if it is damaged.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 425

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR 9 Check the color-appropriate
alternates with connectors:
TO CONTINUE CYCLE • K: J610 and J613 on the
POWER P driver PCA, J701K for the
(continued) encoder, and J3097 on the
motor.
• C: J607 and J614 on the
P driver PCA, J701C for the
encoder, and J3095 on the
motor.
• M: J605 and J615 on the
P driver PCA, J701M for the
encoder, and J3093 on the
motor.
• Y: J603 and J617 on the
P driver PCA, J701Y for the
encoder, and J3091 on the
motor.
10 Check the process cartridge drive
assembly encoders and motors
for correct functionality. Replace
the encoders and motors if
necessary.
11 Replace the process cartridge
drive assembly. See “T-crg (print
cartridge) drive assembly” on
page 282.
12 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
z Registration motor errors
1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
2 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test the
registration motor for correct
functionality.
3 Check the registration motor drive
linkages for correct functionality.
Replace the linkages if necessary
4 Check connector J3036 at the
registration motor and connector
J117 on the DC controller PCA.
5 Replace the registration motor.
See “Registration assembly” on
page 269.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR z Developer motor errors
alternates with 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
TO CONTINUE CYCLE the printer on again to clear the
POWER error.
(continued)
2 Remove and check the indicated
image drum, and check the
engine for damaged drive
linkages.
3 Reseat the image drum and turn
the printer on.
4 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test each
motor for correct functionality.
5 Replace the image drum and the
drive linkages if necessary.
6 Check connector J1 on the low-
voltage power supply, J210 and
J202 on the high-voltage power
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
driver PCA, and J806 on the T
driver PCA.
7 Check FFC connectors J104 and
J105 on the DC controller PCA,
and connectors J601 and J616 on
the P driver PCA (especially if the
printer has been serviced
recently).
8 Make sure that the FFC is
centered and that it is completely
inserted into the connector.
Replace the FFC if it is damaged.
9 Check the color-appropriate
connectors:
• K: J609 on the P driver PCA,
and J3096 on the motor.
• C: J606 on the P driver PCA,
and J3094 on the motor.
• M: J604 on the P driver PCA,
and J3092 on the motor.
• Y: J602 on the P driver PCA,
and J3090 on the motor.
10 Check the process cartridge drive
assembly encoders and motors
for correct functionality.
11 Replace the process cartridge
drive assembly. See “T-crg (print
cartridge) drive assembly” on
page 282.
12 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 427

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR z Registration motor error
alternates with 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
TO CONTINUE CYCLE the printer on again to clear the
POWER error.
(continued)
2 Check the registration assembly
for damage or jammed media.
3 Check the gear train on the
registration drive assembly for
correct functionality.
4 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test each
motor for correct functionality.
5 Check connector J3036 on the
registration motor, and connector
J117 on the DC controller PCA.
6 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test each
motor for correct functionality.
7 Check connector J3036 on the
registration motor, and connector
J117 on the DC controller PCA.
8 Replace the registration motor.
See “Delivery fan” on page 276.
9 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286
z ITB motor error
1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
2 Partially remove the ITB.
3 Turn the fly wheel on the right side
to check the ITB for damage and
correct movement. Check the
drive linkages from the ITB motor
for damage. Replace any
damaged hardware.
4 Reseat the ITB and raise the
green lever.
5 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test the
ITB motor for correct functionality.
6 Remove and reseat the
secondary transfer roller and the
cleaning blade/toner collection
bottle.
7 Check connector J1 on the low-
voltage power supply, J210 and
J202 on the high-voltage power
supply, J608 and J612 on the P
driver PCA, and J806 on the T
driver PCA.
8 PCA (especially if the printer was
recently serviced).

428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
59.XY PRINTER ERROR 9 Make sure that the FFC is
alternates with centered and that it is completely
TO CONTINUE CYCLE inserted into the connector.
POWER Replace the FFC if it is damaged.
(continued) 10 Check connector J3098 at the
motor, and connector J611 on the
P driver PCA.
11 Check FFC connector J104 on the
DC controller PCA, and FFC
connector J601 on the P driver
T2 clutch error
1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
2 Use the hardware diagnostic tools
from the control panel to test each
motor for correct functionality.
3 Remove and reseat the
secondary transfer roller and the
cleaning blade/toner collection
bottle.
4 Check the secondary transfer
assembly for damage or jammed
media.
5 Check connector J3030 on the
secondary transfer assembly,
intermediate connector J3026,
and connector J121 on the
DC controller PCA.
6 Replace the secondary transfer
assembly. See “Secondary
transfer assembly (T2)” on page
253.
7 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 429

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
60.X PRINTER ERROR z The tray number specified by X is 1 Check the indicated media tray for
lifting media to the top of the tray for correct functionality of all of the
proper feeding but an obstruction is parts. Replace the media tray if
preventing the tray from lifting necessary.
correctly.
2 Check connector J11 near the
pickup motor, connector J12 near
X description
the pickup roller up/down motor,
2: tray 2 cassette lifter
and connector J13 near the lifter
3: tray 3 cassette lifter
motor.
4: tray 4 cassette tray
8: tray 2 pickup roller lifter 3 Check intermediate connector
9: tray 3 pickup roller lifter J3001, and connector J120 on the
DC controller PCA.
4 Check the connectors for the
media-size detection switches
J52, J54, J3076, and J3077.
5 Replace the paper pickup
assembly. See “Pickup unit” on
page 258.
6 Replace the DC controller PCA.
See “DC controller” on page 286.
64.X PRINTER ERROR z A scan buffer (video DMA) error 1 Turn the printer off, and then turn
alternates with occurred. the printer on again to clear the
TO CONTINUE CYCLE error.
POWER 2 Perform a cold reset. See “The
NVRAM reset sequence resets all
NVRAM values when a hard disk
drive is not used.” on page Note88
in chapter 3.
3 Turn the printer off, remove all of
the extra memory and EIO
devices, and turn the printer on
again.
4 Replace the formatter or the
firmware DIMM. See “Formatter
PCB” on page 288.
66.12.11 z A stapler carriage motor failure (M8) 1 Make sure that the stapler
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE occurred. cartridge is seated in the stapler
unit correctly.
2 Activate the staple sliding motor
(M8) by performing a mechanical
test.
3 Make sure that the stapler unit
slides to the home position.
4 Replace the stapler unit.
5 Replace the controller PCA.
6 Replace the whole unit.

430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
66.12.31 z A home position timeout (M1) 1 Check all of the cable connections
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE occurred. at the controller PCA.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Activate the delivery motor (M1)
by performing a mechanical test.
4 Replace the controller PCA.
5 Replace the whole unit.
66.12.32 z A home position timeout for aligning z Perform the steps for a 66.12.31
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE paddles occurred. error.

66.12.33 z A delivery motor (M6) failure z Perform the steps for a 66.12.31
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE occurred. error.

66.12.34 z A front aligning plate motor (M4) 1 Check all of the cable connections
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE failure occurred. at the controller PCA.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Activate the front and back
aligning plate motors (M4 and M5)
by performing a mechanical test.
4 Adjust the front jogger by
performing a calibration
procedure.
5 Replace the controller PCA.
6 Replace the whole unit.
66.12.35 z A back aligning plate motor (M5) z Perform the steps for a 66.12.34
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE failure occurred. error.

66.12.36 z A stacker bin fluctuation motor (M6) 1 Check all of the cable connections
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE failure occurred. at the controller PCA.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Activate the stacker bin fluctuation
motor (M6) by performing a
mechanical test.
4 Make sure that the stacker bin
moves up and down at the power-
on sequence.
5 Send two pages through as a test.
6 Replace the controller PCA.
7 Replace the whole unit.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 431

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
66.12.41 z A staple-fold motor (M7) failure 1 Check all of the cable connections
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE occurred. at the controller PCA.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Activate the staple-fold motor (M7)
by performing a mechanical test.
4 Perform a booklet adjustment as
needed.
5 Replace the folding mechanism.
6 Replace the controller PCA.
66.12.51 z A booklet bin slide motor (M10) 1 Check all of the cable connections
OUTPUT DEVICE FAILURE failure occurred. at the controller PCA.
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
3 Activate the booklet bin slide
motor (M10) by performing a
mechanical test.
4 At power on, make sure that the
booklet stopper moves completely
in and out.
5 Replace the booklet bin.
6 Replace the controller PCA.
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE z An error occurred in the printer 1 Pressing should clear the
ERROR nonvolatile memory (NVRAM), and error.
alternates with one or more printer settings is reset
2 Perform a cold reset. See “The
TO CONTINUE PRESS to its factory default. Printing can
NVRAM reset sequence resets all
continue, but there might be some
NVRAM values when a hard disk
unexpected functions because an
drive is not used.” on page
error occurred in permanent storage.
Note88.
X description 3 Turn the printer off, remove all of
0 = onboard NVRAM the extra memory and EIO
1 = removable disk (flash or hard) devices, and then turn the printer
on again.
4 For 68.1 errors, remove files from
the hard disk by using the control
panel or Web Jetadmin.
5 Reinitialize the hard disk drive.
See “Hard disk reinitialization” on
page 86 in chapter 3.
6 Perform a NVRAM initialization.

432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE z The printer NVRAM is full. Some 1 Pressing should clear the
FULL saved settings in the NVRAM might error.
alternates with reset to the factory defaults. Printing
2 Perform a cold reset. See “The
TO CONTINUE PRESS can continue, but there might be
NVRAM reset sequence resets all
some unexpected functions because
NVRAM values when a hard disk
an error occurred in permanent
drive is not used.” on page
storage.
Note88.
X description 3 Turn the printer off, remove all of
0 = onboard NVRAM the extra memory and EIO
1 = removable disk (flash or hard) devices, and then turn the printer
on again.
4 For 68.1 errors, remove files from
the hard disk by using the control
panel or Web Jetadmin.
5 Reinitialize the hard disk drive.
See “Hard disk reinitialization” on
page 86 in chapter 3.
6 Perform a NVRAM initialization.
68.X PERMANENT STORAGE z The printer NVRAM is failing to 1 Pressing should clear the
WRITE FAIL write. Printing can continue, but error.
there might be some unexpected
2 Perform a cold reset. See “The
functions because an error occurred
NVRAM reset sequence resets all
in permanent storage.
NVRAM values when a hard disk
drive is not used.” on page
X = description
Note88.
0 = onboard NVRAM
1 = removable (flash or hard) 3 Turn the printer off, remove all of
the extra memory and EIO
devices, and then turn the printer
on again.
4 For 68.1 errors, remove files from
the hard disk by using the control
panel or Web Jetadmin.
5 Reinitialize the hard disk drive.
See “Hard disk reinitialization” on
page 86 in chapter 3.
6 Perform a NVRAM initialization.
69.X PRINTER ERROR z A temporary printer error occurred. 1 Turn the printer off, reseat the
duplexer, and then turn the printer
00 (duplex D-roller is not detected at on again to clear the error.
the home position)
2 Remove the duplexer and check
01 (duplex slide adjustment failure)
for proper seating, residual media,
or obstructions.
3 Check the inside of the duplexer
and the duplex capacity for
residual media or obstructions.
4 Check the duplexer-side
registration guides for correct
functionality. Replace the duplexer
if necessary. See “Duplexer” on
page 244.
5 Check the feed rollers and drive
gear trains for damage. Replace
them if necessary.

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 433

Table 77. Numerical error messages (continued)
Message Explanation Recommended action
79.XXXX PRINTER ERROR z A critical hardware error occurred. z Turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on again to clear the
error.
8X.YYYY z The EIO accessory card in slot X has 1 Turn the printer off.
encountered a critical error as
2 Remove the EIO accessory card.
specified by YYYY.
Reseat the card securely into the
specified slot.
3 Turn the printer on again.
4 Insert the card into a different slot.
5 If the error persists, the EIO
accessory card might need to be
replaced.

434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Data and communication troubleshooting tools

Note Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve
these problems might not be covered by the HP warranty. Refer the customer to the network
administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems.
If you think that the problem is because of a customer error, data, communication, application, or
driver problem, verify that the print engine is functioning correctly. To do this, print any of the built-in
pages from the control panel. The demonstration page, configuration pages, and print-quality pages
are useful for this check. If the internal pages print correctly, the printer is probably not the problem.
Make sure you check the communication, driver, application, or customer error.
One method to check communication and data connections is to change the method of data transfer.
For example, if the printer is connected through a network, try using a parallel connection. The
problem might be solved quickly through the process of elimination.
Checking program and driver problems is similar. If the customer indicates that there are failures
when using a single program, try printing from a different program. Also, if the customer indicates
that there are failures while using the PostScript driver, try printing from the PCL driver.

Test message
After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the IBM-compatible
computer. Enter the following at the MS-DOS prompt:
C:\DIR>LPT1 ENTER (for printing to parallel port #1)
The printer should print a directory listing of the C:\ directory.

EIO troubleshooting
The Jetdirect configuration page shown in figure 287 contains valuable information about the current
status of the EIO accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying your
network consultant of a problem, always print a configuration page. If an EIO accessory is installed,
the Jetdirect configuration page also prints.
See the HP Jetdirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for detailed explanations of network
issues.

Software/network troubleshooting
The following scenarios are intended to identify specific conditions that cause 49 errors, or provide
adjustments that might eliminate the error message.
Error occurs when printing from a specific environment or software program
z print from a different software program
z print different documents within the same software program
z change the graphics mode in the printer properties
z change the resolution setting in the printer properties
z select a PostScript driver rather than PCL (Windows only)
z use a different font, if possible (font selections might not be accessible in some environments or
software programs)
z adjust the margin settings, if possible

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 435

Error occurs when printing a specific document
z change the graphics mode in the printer properties
z change the resolution setting in the printer properties
z select a PostScript driver rather than a PCL (Windows only)
z use a different font, if possible, or utilize fewer font changes
z adjust the margin settings, if possible
z if graphics are used, try using fewer graphics on each page or rearrange the graphics on the
page
z recreate the document

Jetdirect configuration
z If the EIO Jetdirect print server successfully turns on and completes its internal diagnostics, the
I/O CARD READY message appears. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message
appears followed by a two-digit error code. Consult the HP Jetdirect Network Interface
Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action.
z The “Network Statistics” column indicates the status of network activity. Bad packets, framing
errors, unsendable packets, and collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage (greater than
1 percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All of the statistics are set to zero
when the printer is turned off.
z A “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is
connected. If the Node Name reads “NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx = last six digits of the EIO LAN
address), the EIO card is not configured for a Novell server. This could indicate that the card is
operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network administrator if the
Node Name is not present.
z In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is “192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate
the printer with this default address. The error message ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS might
appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP/IP protocol is not being
used. Please check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the
printer.

Verify network and server operation

z try to print the job to the printer parallel port
z try to print from the host system through the network to another printer (contact the network
administrator for assistance)

436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

Jetdirect page
Use the Jetdirect page to view current network settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to
verify network statistics or protocol information. The Jetdirect page prints with the configuration page.
Jetdirect page elements
A. HP Jetdirect configuration
B. Network statistics
C. Protocol information

Figure 287. Sample Jetdirect page

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 437

Tray 4 troubleshooting tools
Tray 4 can run standalone diagnostics to test the device motors, functionality, and sensors. You
need one power cord, one #2 Phillips screwdriver, and a small, flat-blade screwdriver for the DIP
switches.

Tray 4 diagnostics label

The tray 4 diagnostics label is located on the inside of the tray 4 back cover.

Table 78. DIP switch settings

DIP switch Normal Motor test Standalone Sensor test
running test
1 Off On On Off
2 Off On Off Off
3 Off Off Off On
4 Off On On On

Note Make sure that you turn the power supply off and set all of the DIP switches to the OFF position (normal
settings) when you finish the diagnostics, or the unit will not work correctly. Then, replace the back
cover.

Tray 4 motor test

This test verifies that the three motors on tray 4 are functioning correctly.
1 Identify the back cover (opposite from the tray door). Remove the four screws in the back cover,
and then remove the back cover.
2 Open tray 4.
3 Set the DIP switches on the controller PCA to motor test mode.
4 Pull out on the blue handle to turn the power supply switch to diagnostic mode.
• if the motors are working correctly, you hear them as they rotate continuously
• if the motors do not rotate, replace the corresponding FRU (either the paper pickup assembly
or the paper-deck drive assembly)
5 To stop the test, set the power switch to the operational mode (push in), and reset the DIP
switches on the controller PCA to the OFF position.

Tray 4 standalone running test

This test verifies that tray 4 is functioning correctly. For this test, use the LED that is located on the
controller PCA on tray 4.

Note If tray 4 is mounted underneath the printer, jams might occur because the printer will not pick up the
media. To prevent excessive jams during this test, feed only six to eight pages.

1 Make sure that media is loaded in tray 4.

2 Set the DIP switches on the tray 4 controller PCA for standalone running mode.
3 Pull the blue power supply switch outward to set the power supply switch to the diagnostic mode.
The motors start and media should lift from the tray.
• if the unit does not work correctly, the lower service LED on the controller PCA flashes in a
pattern that indicates the problem (see table 79 for an interpretation of the LED patterns)

438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

4 To stop the test, set the power supply switch to the operational mode, and set the DIP switches
on the controller PCA to the OFF position (see table 78). Open tray 4 and remove any media
from the paper path.

Tray 4 sensor test

This test manually activates the sensors on tray 4 to test if they are working correctly.
1 Set the DIP switches on the controller PCA for sensor test mode.
2 For each paper sensor:
• open tray 4
• remove the metal spring that holds the sensor unit in place (secured by 1 screw)
• pull out the sensor unit
3 To set the power supply switch to the diagnostic mode, pull the blue power supply switch
outward.
4 To manually activate each sensor, press it in with your finger.
• When you activate the sensor, the bottom service LED on the controller PCA illuminates.
When you release the sensor, the LED goes dark.
• If the LED does not illuminate, a problem exists with the sensor. Replace the corresponding
FRU.
5 To stop the test, set the power supply switch to the operational mode, and set the DIP switches
on the controller PCA to the OFF position (see table 78).

ENWW Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 439

Tray 4 light pattern interpretation
If tray 4 is working correctly, it picks up media from the tray and feeds it to the printer, and the bottom
service light flashes regularly every 0.5 second.

Table 79. Tray 4 light pattern interpretation

Long Short (0.03 Error number/ Recommended action
(1 second) second) meaning
3 1 66.11.01 Lift the tray by hand to make sure that it lifts freely.
Lifter malfunction Make sure that the paper size plates are installed
correctly (in the same corresponding slots) and are not
bent. If neither of these is the problem, replace tray 4.
2 1 13.11.11 The media does not reach the sensor. Open the door,
Registration sensor and remove the media. Replace the paper pickup
delay jam assembly.
2 2 13.11.3B Open the door, and remove the media. Check the
Registration sensor sensors, and replace the corresponding FRU.
station jam/initial jam
2 3 13.11.31 The media did not reach the sensor. Open the door,
Jam sensor delay jam and remove the media. Replace the paper pickup
assembly.
2 4 13.11.21 Open the door and remove the media.
13.11.2B
Jam sensor stationary
jam/initial jam
1 1 Paper path door is Close the door.
open
1 2 Media tray is open Close the tray.

Wrong-size media is
loaded Load the correct size of media, or check the sensors.
1 3 No media in the tray Load media, or check the sensors.

Note If the LED does not come on, replace the paper-deck PCA or the universal power-supply assembly.

Tray 4 does not print media

z make sure that power is supplied to tray 4
z print a configuration page and make sure that tray 4 is listed in the paper-handling options
section
z run a paper-path test from tray 4 (if the test is successful, the paper-size detection switches
might have failed or an incorrect size might be specified in the software program)
z make sure that the custom-size switch setting is correct

440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW

8 Parts and diagrams

Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Ordering parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Customer support information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Kits, supplies, accessories, exchange parts, and documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Hardware identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Illustrations and parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
External covers and panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Left cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Right door assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Internal components (1 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Internal components (2 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Internal components (3 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Internal components (4 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Internal components (5 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Internal components (6 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Internal components (7 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Internal components (8 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Internal components (9 of 9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Registration drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fuser drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Cassette assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Registration assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Delivery feed assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Face down delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Delivery cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fuser assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
PCB assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 441

Tray 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tray 4 main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Tray 4 drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Tray 4 PCA location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Master parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

442 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Introduction

The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the printer and their component
parts. Parts shown in magenta are field replacable units (FRUs). A table accompanies each
exploded-view diagram. Each table lists the item number for represented parts, the associated part
number for the item (if it can be ordered), the quantity, and a description of the part. Parts that are
listed as not orderable are available by ordering the higher-level assembly or FRU.

Note When looking for an electrical part, pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column
to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct printer model.

Ordering parts
All standard part numbers listed are stocked and can be ordered from HP’s Customer Services and
Support Organization. The following website allows you to search for HP product parts using the HP
product name or model number, part number, or by choosing an HP product from a list.
http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo
To order parts, go to
http://www.partsdirect.hp.com
Consumables and accessories like those listed in table 81 can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard.
Supplies, accessories, and consumables can be ordered from the following websites
z North America: http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies
z Canada: http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
z Europe: http://www.hp.com/go/supplies
z Asia Pacific: http://www.hp.com/paper

Customer support information

Before visiting the printer support website (URL: www.hp.com/support/lj9500) or the Customer
Services and Support Organization (URLs listed above), obtain the following information and print
the specified diagnostic pages.
z Printer model-found on the upper-right corner of the front doors of the printer.
z Serial number-found inside the front doors, in the lower-right corner.
z Configuration page, EIO Jetdirect card page, event log.

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 443

Terminology

Table 80. Term decoder

HP term Parts listing Definition
Image drum P-crg Process cartridge (carrier, OPC, charge roller, developer sleeve)

Print cartridge T-crg Toner cartridge

Toner collection bottle Waste toner bottle assembly Receptacle for waste toner from EP process

Image transfer roller Transfer roller assembly Secondary transfer roller (T2)

Image transfer belt Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) Image transfer belt (ITB)
assembly

Post charger Not orderable (part of the ITB) Corona wire to facilitate secondary transfer

Transfer cleaner ITB cleaner assembly ITB cleaning blade

444 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Kits, supplies, accessories, exchange parts, and documentation

Note If item does not have a product number, use the service part number to order that item.

Table 81. Kits and supplies

Item Product Service part Description
Number number
Print cartridge, black C8550A C8550-67901 Replacement print cartridge

Print cartridge, cyan C8551A C8551-67901 Replacement print cartridge

Print cartridge, yellow C8552A C8552-67901 Replacement print cartridge

Print cartridge, magenta C8553A C8553-67901 Replacement print cartridge

Image drum, black C8560A C8560-67901 Replacement image drum

Image drum, cyan C8561A C8561-67901 Replacement image drum

Image drum, yellow C8562A C8562-67901 Replacement image drum

Image drum, magenta C8563A C8563-67901 Replacement image drum

Image transfer Kit C8555A C8555-67901 One image transfer belt, one image
transfer roller, nine paper rollers,
and one ozone filter

Image cleaning kit C8554A C8554-67901 One air filter, one transfer cleaner,
and one toner collection bottle

Fuser kit C8556A RG5-6098-000CN new One fuser assembly

C8546-69007 exchange

Table 82. Accessories, exchange parts, and documentation

Item Product Service part Description
number number
Staple cartridge for stapler/ C8091A C8085-67901 Replacement cartridge
stacker
Staple cartridge for Multifunction C8092A C8088-60541 Replacement cartridge
Finisher
Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) No product number. RG5-6400-030CN new Entire assembly
assembly C8546-69002 exchange

Cartridge drive assembly No product number. RG5-6188-030CN new Entire assembly

C8546-69006 exchange

Power supply 110 V No product number. C8546-69003 exchange PCA assembly

Power supply 220 V No product number. C8546-69004 exchange PCA assembly

Formatter assembly No product number. C8546-67911 Does not include memory,

firmware, or EIO card

DC controller No product number. C8546-67906 new PCA

C8546-69005 exchange

Control panel overlays See “External covers and panels (2 of 2)” on page 451. (Figure 289; reference 22)

16 MB DIMM C9712CA C9712-67907 Flash firmware DIMM for formatter

64MB DIMM C7848A Q1887-67901 Memory DIMM

128 DIMM C7850A C7850-67901 Memory DIMM

256 MB DIMM C9653A C9653-67901 Memory DIMM

Font DIMM—simplified Chinese C4293A 5184-5248 Font DIMM

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 445

Table 82. Accessories, exchange parts, and documentation
Item Product Service part Description
number number
Font DIMM—traditional Chinese C4292A 5184-5247 Font DIMM

HP Fast InfaRed Connect Pod C4103A C4103-67901 Wireless printing device

Hard disk No product number. J6054-69021 20 GB

HP Jetdirect 615N Fast Ethernet No product number. J6057-69001 Ethernet EIO card
(10/100 Base-TX)
HP Jetdirect Connectivity (USB) J4135A J4135-61001 USB EIO card

2,000-sheet feeder (tray 4) C8531A C8531-67902 new Includes the cassette

C8531-69004 exchange

2,000-sheet feeder (tray 4) No product number. RG5-6212-230CN new Cassette only

cassette C8531-69011 exchange

3,000-sheet stacker C8084A Not orderable Finishing device

3,000-sheet stapler/stacker C8085A Not orderable Finishing device

Multifunction finisher C8088A C8088-60500 new Finishing device

C8088-69500 exchange

Duplexer C9674A C9674-67901 new Required for two-sided printing

C9674-69001 exchange

Discharge comb cleaning brush No product number. RB2-7615-000CN Used to clean the transfer cleaner
corona wire

Power cord No product number. 8120-6812 United States

Power cord No product number. 5181-3530 Mexico, Brazil, Canada (FR/EN)

Power cord No product number. 8120-6811 Germany, Spain, France,

Netherlands, Norway, Sweden,
Finland, Italy, Russia, Czech
Republic, Hungary, Poland, Saudi
Arabia, Korea, Greece, Turkey,
Portugal

Power cord No product number. 8120-6800 Israel

Power cord No product number. 8121-0780 India

Service manual bundle No product number. C8546-99001 Printer and finishing devices

Training kit for HP color LaserJet No product number. C8546-60109 CD- based service training
9500 printer materials

User guide Electronic versions ready to print at: Mini-manual that goes inside of the
http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500 right door of the HP color LaserJet
9500 series printer

HP color LaserJet 9500 Series Electronic versions ready to print at: Electronic versions of the user
Printer Use guide and User http://www.hp.com/support/lj9500 guide and the user reference guide.
reference guide

446 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Hardware identification

Table 83. Common hardware

Example Type and uses

z Long aluminum finish (M3 by 8)

• Plastic to sheet metal
• Long-reach sheet metal (P-cartridge motor assembly)
z Short brass finish (M3 by 6)
• Sheet metal to sheet metal

z Short black finish (M3 by 8)

• Laser/scanner assemblies

z Self-threading brass finish (M4)

• Sheet metal to plastic

Table 84. Common torque values

Material HP recommended torque value
Plastic to metal 5.5 lb-inch

Metal to metal 10 lb-inch

PCBA 5.5 lb-inch

Plastic to plastic 5.5 lb-inch

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 447

Illustrations and parts lists

The following illustration and parts tables show the field replaceable units (FRUs). Two tables at the
end of this chapter list all of the parts shown in this chapter. Both tables also contain the figure
numbers in this chapter that show the parts.

Note Parts shown in magenta are FRUs. Other parts are not service-replaceable. Callout numbers that are
followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear.

External covers and panels

24 1

See page 497.

16
4 25

See page 452.

26

7
19

18
6

Figure 288. External covers and panels (1 of 2)

448 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 85. External covers and panels (1 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 288; 1 Cover, left upper RB2-7336-000CN 1

Figure 288; 2 Cap, cover Not orderable 2

Figure 288; 3 Cover, left lower RB2-5687-000CN 1

Figure 288; 4 Cover, left front RB2-7335-000CN 1

Figure 288; 6 Cover, front right RB2-5682-000CN 1

Figure 288; 7 Cover, front left RB2-5683-000CN 1

Figure 288; 16 Cover, left back assembly RG5-6111-000CN 1

Figure 288; 18 Door, front right assembly RG5-6113-000CN 1

Figure 288; 19 Door, front left assembly RG5-6114-000CN 1

Figure 288; 24 Tray, face-up delivery RB2-5690-000CN 1

Figure 288; 25 Label, outlet 110 V Not orderable 1

Label, outlet 220 V Not orderable 1

Figure 288; 26 Tongs, jam removal RF5-3535-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 449

See page 486.
and
See page 488.

See page 453.

Figure 289. External covers and panels (2 of 2)

450 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 86. External covers and panels (2 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 289; 5 Cover, right lower RB2-5689-000CN 1

Figure 289; 8 Cover, right back RB2-7352-000CN 1

Figure 289; 9 Filter, air RB2-7170-000CN 1

Figure 289; 10 Hood, fan RF5-3555-000CN 1

Figure 289; 11 Cover, blanking Not orderable 1

Figure 289; 12 Tray, delivery movable RB2-7341-000CN 1

Figure 289; 13 Cover, top right RB2-7321-000CN 1

Figure 289; 14 Cover, right upper RB2-7332-000CN 1

Figure 289; 15 Display, panel assembly (control panel) RG5-6115-000CN 1

Figure 289; 17 Cover, top left assembly RG5-6112-000CN 1

Figure 289; 20 Cover, rear assembly RG5-6042-000CN 1

Figure 289; 21 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—English C8546-40002 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—French (European) C8546-40003 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Italian C8546-40004 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—German C8546-40005 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Spanish (Castilian) C8546-40006 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Dutch C8546-40007 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Portuguese (Brazilian) C8546-40008 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Norwegian C8546-40009 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Swedish C8546-40010 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Finnish C8546-40011 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Danish C8546-40012 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Polish C8546-40013 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Russian C8546-40014 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Czech C8546-40015 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hungarian C8546-40016 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Chinese, traditional C8546-40017 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Chinese, simplified C8546-40018 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Korean C8546-40019 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Japanese C8546-40020 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Turkish C8546-40021 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hebrew C8546-40022 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Greek C8546-40023 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Arabic C8546-40024 1

Figure 289; 23 Cover, right front RB2-7331-000CN 1

Figure 289; 27 Filter, ozone RB2-7206-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 451

Left cover assembly

Figure 290. Left cover assembly

Table 87. Left cover assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 290; all Cover, left assembly RG5-6149-000CN 1

Figure 290; 1 Dampener, left cover assembly RG5-6185-000CN 1

452 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Right door assembly

Figure 291. Right door assembly

Table 88. Right door assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 291; all Door, right assembly RG5-6108-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 453

Internal components (1 of 9)

Figure 292. Internal components (1 of 9)

454 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 89. Internal components (1 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 292; 1 Cover, inner left upper Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 2 Cover, inner left lower Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 3 Cover, inner right upper Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 4 Cover, inner right lower assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 5 Cover, inner Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 6 Waste toner sensor assembly (J1402, J1403) RG5-6038-000CN 1

Figure 292; 7 Waste toner bottle assembly RG5-6040-000CN 1

Figure 292; 8 Toner cartridge lever assembly RG5-6121-000CN 4

Figure 292; 9 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 11

Figure 292; 10 ITB cleaner assembly RG5-6041-000CN 1

Figure 292; 11 Waste toner connecting cable (J1701L, J3018L) Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 12 Screw, M4X6 Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 13 Tray, catch RB2-7207-000CN 1

Figure 292; 14 Cover, scanner Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 15 Cover, pickup cable Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 16 Cable, support left Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 17 Cable support right Not orderable 1

Figure 292; 18 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 5

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 455

Internal components (2 of 9)

Figure 293. Internal components (2 of 9)

456 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 90. Internal components (2 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 293; 1 Plate, mount Not orderable 1

Figure 293; 2 Screw, RS M3X12 Not orderable 2

Figure 293; 3 Soft link shaft assembly RG5-6122-000CN 1

Figure 293; 4 Lift link front assembly RG5-6131-000CN 1

Figure 293; 5 Lift link rear assembly RG5-6132-000CN 1

Figure 293; 6 Lever assembly RG5-6134-000CN 1

Figure 293; 7 Link rear unit RG5-6147-000CN 1

Figure 293; 8 Transfer link front assembly RG5-6146-000CN 1

Figure 293; 9 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 11

Figure 293; 10 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 293; 11 Ring, E Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 457

Internal components (3 of 9)

See page 476.

See page 495.

See page 496.

See page 498.

Figure 294. Internal components (3 of 9)

458 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 91. Internal components (3 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 294; 1 Mount, positioning Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 2 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly RG5-6400-030CN new 1

C8546-69002 exchange

Figure 294; 3 Screw, TP M4X8 Not orderable 2

Figure 294; 4 Mount, dampener RB2-5570-020CN 2

Figure 294; 5 Main fuser front guide assembly RG9-1595-000CN 1

Figure 294; 6 Sub fuser front guide assembly RG9-1596-000CN 1

Figure 294; 7 Screw, with washer M4X6 Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 8 Plate, feeder support Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 9 Plate, duplexing support Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 10 Plate, fuser positioning Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 11 Mount, lower fuser sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 12 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 6

Figure 294; 13 Guide, drawer cable Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 14 Spring, tension RS6-2442-000CN 1

Figure 294; 15 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 11

Figure 294; 16 Photo interrupter (TLP1241, SR6, J3034) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 294; 17 Clamp, cable Not orderable 4

Figure 294; 18 Clip, cable Not orderable 2

Figure 294; 19 Fuser sensor PCB assembly RG5-5914-000CN 1

Figure 294; 20 Fuser connecting cable assembly (J10, J60, J61, J114, J3019D) RG5-5925-000CN 1

Figure 294; 21 Fuser sensor cable assembly (J115, J1501, J3034) RG5-5932-000CN 1

Figure 294; 22 Foot Not orderable 4

Figure 294; 23 Mount, positioning Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 24 Cover, shield back delivery assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 294; 25 Cover, shield front delivery assembly Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 459

Internal components (4 of 9)

Figure 295. Internal components (4 of 9)

460 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 92. Internal components (4 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 295; 1 Plate, control panel support Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 2 Guide, cleaner RB2-7181-000CN 2

Figure 295; 3 Cover, interlock Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 4 Link, holder lift RB2-7258-000CN 1

Figure 295; 5 Support, cleaning front RB2-7570-000CN 1

Figure 295; 6 Plate, positioning RB2-7537-000CN 1

Figure 295; 7 cover, support plate Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 8 Support, side plate hinge RB2-7302-000CN 2

Figure 295; 9 Pin, open/close cover support Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 10 Guide, support pin Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 11 Support, cleaning front RB2-7515-000CN 1

Figure 295; 12 Plate, positioning Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 13 Plate, mount RF5-3505-000CN 1

Figure 295; 14 Support door hinge RF5-3506-000CN 1

Figure 295; 15 Support door hinge RF5-3507-000CN 1

Figure 295; 16 Support door hinge RF5-3508-000CN 1

Figure 295; 17 Support door hinge RF5-3509-000CN 1

Figure 295; 18 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 19 Right roller catch assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 20 Left roller catch assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 21 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 11

Figure 295; 22 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 4

Figure 295; 23 Pin, hinge Not orderable 2

Figure 295; 24 P-crg open/close cover assembly RG5-6182-000CN 1

Figure 295; 25 Registration sensor assembly (J3080) RG5-6123-020CN 1

Figure 295; 26 Rail, guide front RF5-3545-000CN 1

Figure 295; 27 Plate, shaft front Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 28 Lever, adjusting Not orderable 1

Figure 295; 29 Photo interrupter (TLP1241, SR44, J3020) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 295; 30 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) sensor cable assembly (J3015, J3020) RG5-5960-000CN 1

Figure 295; 31 Cover, rail RB2-7531-000CN 1

Figure 295; 32 Screw, M3X8 Not orderable 4

Figure 295; 33 Clamp, cable Not orderable 5

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 461

Internal components (5 of 9)

See page 492.

See page 494.

See page 490.

See page 480.

See page 482.
See page 484.
See page 472.

Figure 296. Internal components (5 of 9)

462 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 93. Internal components (5 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 296; 1 Torque limiter RB2-5759-000CN 1

Figure 296; 2 Roller RF5-3338-000CN 4

Figure 296; 3 Roller, pickup RF5-3340-000CN 2

Figure 296; 4 Damper front assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 5 Damper rear assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 6 Transfer roller assembly RG5-6178-000CN 1

Figure 296; 7 Plate, eliminator contact Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 8 Hook, registration front Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 9 Block, registration front Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 10 Block, registration rear Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 11 Shaft, registration hook Not orderable 2

Figure 296; 12 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 13 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 14 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 15 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 16 Hook, registration rear Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 17 Motor, DC24 V (M11, J3036) RH7-1518-000CN 1

Figure 296; 18 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 11

Figure 296; 19 Guide, registration paper front lower Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 20 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 2

Figure 296; 21 Cable, BD auto registration (J812, J815, J816, J817, J3050D, Not orderable 1
J3053D, J3056D, J3059D, J3061, J3062, J3063, J3064)

Figure 296; 22 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 4

Figure 296; 23 Guide, pickup Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 24 Guide, duplexing front Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 25 Guide, duplexing rear Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 26 Guide, fuser support front Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 27 Cover, motor Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 28 Guide, panel cable Not orderable 1

Figure 296; 29 Scanner assembly C8546-69002 4

Figure 296; 30 Plate, scanner adjustment shim 1 Not orderable Varies

Figure 296; 31 Plate, scanner adjustment shim 2 Not orderable Varies

Figure 296; 32 Holder, scanner adjustment shim Not orderable 8

Figure 296; 33 Spring, compression RS6-2840-000CN 1

Figure 296; 34 Cover, transfer front RB2-7445-000CN 1

Figure 296; 35* Link, front RF5-3502-000CN 1

Figure 296; 36* Holder, stop RB2-7501-000CN 1

Figure 296; 37 Clamp, cable Not orderable 5

Figure 296; 38 Clamp, cable Not orderable 4

Figure 296; 39 Clamp, cable Not orderable 2

*Always order both item number 35 and item number 36 together.

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 463

Internal components (6 of 9)

See page 473.

See page 474.

Figure 297. Internal components (6 of 9)

464 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 94. Internal components (6 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 297; 1 Plate, rail support Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 2 Block, damper RB2-7217-000CN 1

Figure 297; 3 Clip, cable Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 4 Fuser plate, high-voltage Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 5 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 2

Figure 297; 6 Cartridge, click support assembly RG5-6141-000CN 1

Figure 297; 7 Support, claw (magenta, cyan) Not orderable 2

Figure 297; 8 Block, right Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 9 Cover, latch Not orderable 2

Figure 297; 10 Duct, fan Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 11 Rail, guide rear Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 12 Support, cleaner rear Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 13 Plate, mount Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 14 Plate, contact Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 15 Support, cleaner rear support Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 16 Holder, positioning Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 17 Hinge, right cover Not orderable 2

Figure 297; 18 Spring, tension Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 19 Right upper crossmember cable (J1701R, J3015D, J3013, J3085) RG5-5943-000CN 1

Figure 297; 20 Screw, stepped M3 Not orderable 3

Figure 297; 21 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) duct unit Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 22 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 10

Figure 297; 23 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 10

Figure 297; 24 Guide, fuser support Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 25 Magenta cartridge rail assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 26 Cyan cartridge rail assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 27 Black cartridge rail assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 28 Toner cartridge cable (J612, J806) RG5-5939-000CN 1

Figure 297; 29 Rail, cartridge (yellow) Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 30 Rail, guide rear RF5-3546-000CN 1

Figure 297; 31 Plate, grounding RB2-7281-000CN 1

Figure 297; 32 Cam, right Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 33 Cam, left Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 34 Retainer, cleaner rear Not orderable 1

Figure 297; 35 Holder, edge Not orderable 2

Figure 297; 36 Block, support Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 465

Internal components (7 of 9)

Figure 298. Internal components (7 of 9)

466 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 95. Internal components (7 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 298; 1 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 10

Figure 298; 2 Angle adjustment plate assembly Not orderable 4

Figure 298; 3 Paper delivery sensor assembly (SR 2, J3016, J3017) RG5-6152-000CN 1

Figure 298; 4 Left interlock assembly RG5-6037-000CN 1

Figure 298; 5 Holder, ozone Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 6 Duct, ozone Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 7 Clip, cable Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 8 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 3

Figure 298; 9 Cable, laser assembly (J108, J109, J110, J111, J3009, J3010, J3011, RG5-6148-000CN 1
J3012)

Figure 298; 10 M-purpose support assembly rear RG5-6107-000CN 1

Figure 298; 11 Slide arm assembly RG5-6130-000CN 1

Figure 298; 12 Humidity sensor assembly RG5-6153-000CN 1

Figure 298; 13 Right interlock assembly RG5-6036-000CN 1

Figure 298; 14 Fan (FM3, J3078) RH7-1554-000CN 1

Figure 298; 15 Holder, fan Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 16 Fan (FM7, J3089) RH7-1564-000CN 1

Figure 298; 17 Cover, fan Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 18 Clamp, cord Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 19 Clamp, cable Not orderable 8

Figure 298; 20 Clip, cable Not orderable 1

Figure 298; 21 Cover, sensor Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 467

Internal components (8 of 9)

Figure 299. Internal components (8 of 9)

468 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 96. Internal components (8 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 299; 1 Support, right door stop Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 2 Cover, registration Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 3 Crossmember, rear Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 4 Rod, switch RB2-7354-000CN 1

Figure 299; 5 Cover, transfer cable RB2-7444-000CN 1

Figure 299; 6 Left rail upper assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 7 Left rail lower assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 8 Right rail assembly Not orderable 2

Figure 299; 9 Connector assembly (J3007) RG5-5779-000CN 1

Figure 299; 10 End paper sensor assembly (J3023, J3076, J3024, J3077, SW3, J3023, RG5-5699-000CN 2
SW4, J3024)

Figure 299; 11 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 6

Figure 299; 12 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 4

Figure 299; 13 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 14 Connector, 3P (J3078) VS1-5057-003CN 1

Figure 299; 15 Connector, 5P (J3089) VS1-5057-005CN 1

Figure 299; 16 Connector, 10P (J3085) VS1-5057-010CN 1

Figure 299; 17 Connector, 20P (J3080) VS1-5057-020CN 1

Figure 299; 18 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 299; 19 Clip, cable Not orderable 8

Figure 299; 20 Clip, cable Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 469

Internal components (9 of 9)

Figure 300. Internal components (9 of 9)

470 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 97. Internal components (9 of 9)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 300; 1 High-voltage PCB assembly RG5-6031-000CN 1

Figure 300; 2 High-voltage connector PCB assembly (J206) RG5-6032-000CN 1

Figure 300; 3 Shield case assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 4 Holder, upper fan Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 5 Holder, lower fan Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 6 Guide, main cable Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 7 Power supply assembly 110-127 V (FM5, 100-127 V) RH3-2236-000CN new 1
C8546-69003 exchange
Power supply assembly 220-240 V (FM5, 220-240 V) RH3-2237-000CN new 1
C8546-69004 exchange

Figure 300; 8 Power supply mount assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 9 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 6

Figure 300; 10 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 10

Figure 300; 11 DC controller PCB assembly RG5-5901-000CN new 1

C8546-69005 exchange

Figure 300; 12 High-voltage holder assembly RG5-6129-000CN 1

Figure 300; 13 Cable, rear lower (J3, J4, J5, J9, J70, J102, J113, J117, J118, J119, J120, RG5-5919-000CN 1
J124, J125, J129, J130, J810, J824, J3000D, J3000DH, J3001D,
J3001DH, J3002D, J3002DH, J3007DAJ3007DB, J3036,J3037DB, J9501,
J9502, J9503, J9504))

Figure 300; 14 Cable, process cartridge (J202, J608) RG5-5938-000CN 1

Figure 300; 15 Cable, high-voltage control (J101, J203) RG5-5940-000CN 1

Figure 300; 16 Cable, fuser motor (J116, J3035) RG5-5952-000CN 1

Figure 300; 17 Cable, formatter (J2, J9002) RG5-5933-000CN 1

Figure 300; 18 Cable, high-voltage (J1, J201) RG5-5937-000CN 1

Figure 300; 19 Cable, rear upper (J112, J123, J803, J811, J821, J901, J3008, J3016D, RH5-5920-000CN 1
J3018D, J3069D, J3086D)

Figure 300; 20 Fan (FM2, J818) RH7-1521-000CN 1

Figure 300; 21 Fan (FM4, J819) RH7-1522-000CN 1

Figure 300; 22 Cable, rear holder assembly (J122, J3076, J3077D) RG5-6159-000CN 1

Figure 300; 23 Cable, flat (J103, J9002) RH2-5509-000CN 1

Figure 300; 24 Cable, flat (J104, J106< J601, J616, J801) RH2-5507-000CN 1

Figure 300; 25 High-voltage power supply PCB unit RH3-0353-000CN 1

Figure 300; 26 Plate, test switch Not orderable 1

Figure 300; 27 Cable, post controller (J210, J501) RG5-5966-000CN 1

Figure 300; 28 Regulator PCB assembly RG5-5971-000CN 1

Figure 300; 29 Cable, rear lower (J121, J3025D, J3027D), J3022D, J3026D) RG5-5975-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 471

Registration drive assembly

Figure 301. Registration drive assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

Table 98. Registration drive assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 301; all Registration drive assembly RG5-6015-000CN 1

Figure 301; 1 Pin holder unit (registration drive assembly; J3022) RG5-6192-000CN 1

472 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive)

Figure 302. Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive)

Table 99. Process cartridge drive assembly (image drum drive)

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 302; all Process cartridge drive assembly (J613, J614, J615, M8, J609, J12, J13, RG5-6188-030CN new 1
J14, J15, J1002, J1003, J1004, J1005, M7, J610, M9, J611, M2, J604, C8546-69006 exchange
J606, M1, M3, M5, J603, J605, J607)

Figure 302; 1 Antenna holder assembly RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 302; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 473

Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive)

Figure 303. Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

474 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 100. Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 303; all Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-6022-000CN 1

Figure 303; 1 Memory switch PCB assembly RG5-5909-000CN 1

Figure 303; 2 Cable, flat (J802, J1001) RH2-5508-000CN 1

Figure 303; 3 Toner drive cable (J813, J814, J3046, J3047, J3048, J3049, J3065, J3066, RG5-5930-000CN 1
J3067, J3068)

Figure 303; 4 Antenna holder assembly (J16-J19, J1006-J1009) RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 303; 5 Toner cartridge motor assembly (M12, M13, M14, M15, J3046, J3047, Not orderable 1
J3048, J3049)

Figure 303; 6 crg driver PCB assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-5907-020CN 1

Figure 303; 7 Cable, right rear 1 (J808, J3080D) RG5-5962-000CN 1

Figure 303; 8 Cable, right rear 2 (J807, J808, J820, J822, J823, J3078D, J3085D, RG5-5963-000CN 1
J3089D)

Figure 303; 9 Sheet, insulating Not orderable 1

Figure 303; 10 Photo-interrupter TLP1241 (J16, J17, J18, J19, J1006, J1007, J1008, WG8-5362-000CN 4
J1009)

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 475

Fuser drive assembly

Figure 304. Fuser drive assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T" indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

476 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 101. Fuser drive assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 304; all Fuser drive assembly RG5-6018-000CN 1

Figure 304; 1 Motor, DC24 V (M10, J3035) RH7-1519-000CN 1

Figure 304; 2 Coupler Not orderable 1

Figure 304; 3 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 477

Cassette assembly

Figure 305. Cassette assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

478 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 102. Cassette assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 305; all Cassette (use this part number to order the entire assembly) RG5-5635-080CN 2

Figure 305; 1 Cover, front Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 2 Gear, 11 teeth Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 3 Holder, rear Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 4 Cam, width sensing Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 5 Plate, coupler Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 6 Roller, cassette Not orderable 2

Figure 305; 7 Plate, left stop Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 8 Plate, right stop Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 9 Claw, lock Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 10 Shaft, lock Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 11 Holder, lock Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 12 Guide Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 13 Gear, 20 teeth Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 14 Plate, grounding Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 15 Arm, cassette Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 16 Knob, cassette Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 17 Holder, cover Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 18 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 19 Holder, mount Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 20 Pin, grounding Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 21 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 22 Plate, lifting Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 23 Plater, lifter Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 24 Spring, tension Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 25 Spring, tension Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 26 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 27 Label, control Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 28 Screw, with washer M3X29.5 Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 29 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 30 Side, standard plate assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 31 Side, plate guide assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 305; 32 End plate guide assembly Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 479

Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3)

Figure 306. Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

480 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 103. Paper pickup assembly (1 of 3)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 306; all Paper pickup assembly (use this part number to order the entire assembly) RG5-6196-000CN 1
Figure 307; all
Figure 308; all

Figure 306; 2 Motor, pickup assembly (M23, J11) Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 3 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 5

Figure 306; 4 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 5

Figure 306; 24 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 12

Figure 306; 27 Lever, release Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 28 Flag, right cover assembly Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 29 Arm, lock Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 30 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 31 Spring, compression Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 32 Spring, tension Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 32 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 5

Figure 306; 34 Holder, gear Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 36 Rod, pickup Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 37 Motor, DC24 V (M24, J12) (M25, J13) Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 46 Spring, tension Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 47 Screw, with washer RS M3X6 Not orderable 4

Figure 306; 48 Ring, E Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 49 Paper width sensor unit (SW5, J52, SW6, J54) Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 50 Flag, sensor Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 51 Holder, gear Not orderable 1

Figure 306; 52 Spring, torsion Not orderable 2

Figure 306; 115 Connector, 4P (J11) Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 481

Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3)

Figure 307. Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

482 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 104. Paper pickup assembly (2 of 3)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 307; 1 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 5

Figure 307; 6 Guide, pickup out Not orderable 1

Figure 307; 7 Plate, right support Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 8 Crossmember, pickup Not orderable 1

Figure 307; 20 Spring, tension Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 21 Spring, tension Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 22 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 5

Figure 307; 23 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 13

Figure 307; 24 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 12

Figure 307; 80 Guide, right Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 81 Guide, feed out Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 82 Roller, feed Not orderable 4

Figure 307; 83 Shaft, feed roller Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 84 Holder, feed roller Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 85 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 4

Figure 307; 86 Ring, E Not orderable 4

Figure 307; 87 Holder, retard Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 88 Plate, holder support Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 89 Shaft, retard Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 90 Bushing Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 92 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 93 Pin, dowel Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 94 Ring, E Not orderable 2

Figure 307; 107 Feed PCB assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 307; 108 Cable, pickup Not orderable 1

Figure 307; 109 Plate, front m-purpose support Not orderable 1

Figure 307; 112 Ring, E Not orderable 2

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 483

Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3)

Figure 308. Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

484 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 105. Paper pickup assembly (3 of 3)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 308; 5 Roller, vertical path Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 9 Guide, front inlet Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 10 Timing belt Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 11 Vertical path drive gear unit Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 12 Vertical Path pulley unit Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 13 Bushing Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 14 Bushing Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 15 Bushing Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 19 Spring, tension Not orderable 3

Figure 308; 23 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 13

Figure 308; 24 Screw, RS M3X8 Not orderable 12

Figure 308; 25 Ring, E Not orderable 5

Figure 308; 26 Ring, E Not orderable 4

Figure 308; 56 Roller, feed Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 57 Guide, pickup feed Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 58 Holder, feed sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 59 Flag, feed sensor Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 60 Spring, torsion Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 61 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 62 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 65 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 66 Pin, dowel Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 67 Ring, E Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 68 Roller, feed Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 69 Guide, feed roller Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 70 Holder, feed sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 71 Flag, feed sensor Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 72 Spring, torsion Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 73 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 74 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 77 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 78 Pin, dowel Not orderable 1

Figure 308; 79 Ring, E Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 95 Flag, paper sensor Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 96 Guide, inlet Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 97 Holder, pickup Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 98 Holder, pickup roller Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 99 Flag, paper height Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 100 Shaft, pickup Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 101 Shaft, feed Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 102 Bushing Not orderable 4

Figure 308; 105 Ring, E Not orderable 2

Figure 308; 106 Ring, E Not orderable 2

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 485

Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2)

Figure 309. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

486 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 106. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (1 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 309; all Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) RG5-6090-070CN 1
Figure 310; all

Figure 309; 4 Bushing Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 5 Bushing, right Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 7 Plate, grounding Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 8 Plate, grounding Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 9 Plate, grounding Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 10 Pad RF5-3489-000CN 2

Figure 309; 11 Pad, separation RF5-3490-000CN 1

Figure 309; 12 Plate, paper pickup guide Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 13 Plate, paper pickup cover Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 15 Cover, multipurpose sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 16 Holder, pad Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 17 Guide, paper Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 23 Bushing, left Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 24 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 27 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 28 Spring, compression Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 29 Connector, 2P (J3003) Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 30 Connector, 3P (J3004) Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 31 Screw, M4X10 Not orderable 6

Figure 309; 32 Screw, M4X8 Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 33 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 6

Figure 309; 34 Roller, pickup RB2-1820-000CN 1

Figure 309; 35 Paper guide plate assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 36 Multipurpose sensor cable (J3004, J3005) Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 39 Multipurpose drive assembly (SL1, J3003, SR1, J3005) Not orderable 1

Figure 309; 40 Front registration crossmember assembly Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 487

Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2)

Figure 310. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

488 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 107. Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) (2 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 310; 2 Arm, sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 3 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 6 Knob Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 18 Lever, sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 19 Frame, paper sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 20 Spring, torsion Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 21 Flag, sensor Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 22 Mount, shaft Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 37 Multipurpose tray assembly (SR43, J3084) Not orderable 1

Figure 310; 38 Multipurpose, cover assembly (J3002, J3003, J3004, J3006, J3084) Not orderable

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 489

Registration assembly

Figure 311. Registration assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

490 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 108. Registration assembly
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 311; all Registration assembly (use this part number to order the entire assembly; RG5-6016-000CN 1
SR5)

Figure 311; 1 Registration sensor holder assembly (SR4, J3032, SR3, J3031, J3027, Not orderable 1
J3029, J3031, J3032, J3100)

Figure 311; 2 Cable, sensor (J3100, J3101) Not orderable 1

Figure 311; 3 Clutch, electrical mechanical (CL, J3029) Not orderable 1

Figure 311; 4 Clutch, electrical mechanical (CL1, J3028) Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 491

Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2)

Figure 312. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T" indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

492 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 109. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (1 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 312; all Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6179-000CN 1
Figure 313; all assembly; J3026, J3030, J3081, CL3, J3030, SR42)

Figure 312; 2 Gear holder assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 312; 4 Crossmember assembly Not orderable 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 493

Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2)

Figure 313. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2)

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

Table 110. Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (2 of 2)

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 313; 1 Secondary transfer (T2) cable assembly (use this part number to order the RG5-6179-000CN 1
entire assembly)

Figure 313; 3 Guide, holder assembly Not orderable 1

494 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Delivery feed assembly

Assembled view

Figure 314. Delivery feed assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

Table 111. Delivery feed assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 314; all Delivery feed assembly (use this part number to order the entire assembly; RG5-6150-000CN 1
SL2, J3069))

Figure 314; 1 Door tape RB2-7447-000CN 1

Figure 314; 2 Screw, RS M3X6 Not orderable 2

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 495

Face down delivery assembly

Figure 315. Face down delivery assembly

Note Callout numbers that are followed by a “T” indicate the number of teeth on the specified gear. For
example, 21T is a gear with 21 teeth.

Table 112. Face down delivery feed assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 315; all Face-down delivery assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6017-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 315; 1 Face-down delivery sensor PCB assembly Not orderable 1

496 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Delivery cover assembly

Assembled view

Figure 316. Delivery cover assembly

Table 113. Delivery cover assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 316; all Delivery cover assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6151-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 316; 1 Delivery fan cable Not orderable 1

Figure 316; 2 Fan RH7-1546-000CN 2

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 497

Fuser assembly

Figure 317. Fuser assembly

Table 114. Fuser assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 317; all Fuser assembly RG5-6098-000CN new 1
C8546-69007 exchange

498 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

PCB assemblies

Figure 318. PCB assemblies

Table 115. PCB assemblies

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 318; 1 DC controller PCB assembly RG5-5901-000CN 1

Figure 318; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

Figure 318; 3 Memory switch PCB assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 318; 4 Feed PCB assembly Not orderable 1

Figure 318; 5 crg (print cartridge) driver assembly RG5-5907-020CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 499

Tray 4

Tray 4 main body

Figure 319. Tray 4 main body (1 of 2)

500 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 116. Tray 4 main body (1 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 319; 1 Cover, front RB2-7648-000CN 1

Figure 319; 2 Cover, right RB2-7649-000CN 1

Figure 319; 3 Cover, right back RB2-7650-000CN 1

Figure 319; 4 Cover, left back RB2-7651-000CN 1

Figure 319; 5 Cover, center RB2-7652-000CN 1

Figure 319; 6 Cover, back RF5-3644-000CN 1

Figure 319; 7 Cover, left RF5-3645-000CN 1

Figure 319; 8 Screw, stepped RS5-9099-000CN

Figure 319; 9 Screw, W/W, M4 by 6 XA-0994-000CN

Figure 319; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7400-000CN

Figure 319; 11 Paper path connection unit (PPCU) RG5-6227-000CN 1

Figure 319; 12 Paper input unit (PIU) RG5-6208-120CN 1

Figure 319; 13 Feed/separation rollers RF5-3338-000CN 3

Figure 319; 14 Tray 4 vertical registration assembly (VTU/VRA) RG5-6225-050CN 1

Figure 319; 15 Tray 4 RG5-6212-230CN 1

Figure 319; 16 Lever, standard/custom RB2-7762-000CN 1

Figure 319; 17 Caster RB2-7709-000CN 1

Figure 319; 18 Screw, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN

Not shown Tray 4-to-engine stabilizing screws 0515-4318 2

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 501

Figure 320. Tray 4 main body (2 of 2)

502 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 117. Tray 4 main body (2 of 2)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 320; 1 Caster, back RB2-7678-000CN 2

Figure 320; 2 Caster, front swivel RB3-0304-040CN 2

Figure 320; 3 Screw, M5 by 12 XA9-0912-000CN

Figure 320; 6 Switch assembly (SW21) RG5-6206-000CN 1

Figure 320; 7 Paper size sensing assembly RG5-6207-040CN 1

Figure 320; 8 Screws, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN

Figure 320; 9 Paper volume sensing assembly RG5-6229-000CN 1

Figure 320; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7300-607CN

Figure 320; 11 Screw, M4 by 6 XA9-0994-000CN

Figure 320; 12 Power supply RG5-6250-000CN 1

Figure 320; 13 Jet-Link holder RB2-7662-000CN 1

Figure 320; 14 Jet-Link cable assembly RG5-6240-000CN 1

Figure 320; 15 Jet-Link grounding cable RG5-6249-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 503

Tray 4 drive assembly

Figure 321. Tray 4 drive assembly

Table 118. Tray 4 drive assembly

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 321; all Tray 4 deck drive assembly RG5-6228-040CN 1

Figure 321; 1 Motor (M303) RH7-1481-000CN 1

Figure 321; 2 Screw, M3 by 6 XB2-6300-607CN

504 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Tray 4 PCA location

Figure 322. Tray 4 PCA location

Table 119. Tray 4 PCA location

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 322; 1 Paper size PCA RG5-6238-000CN 1

Figure 322; 2 Paper volume PCA RG5-6237-000CN 1

Figure 322; 3 Deck controller PCA RG5-6235-100CN 1

Figure 322; 4 LED PCA RG5-6239-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 505

Master parts lists

Alphabetical parts list

Note The master parts tables (alphabetical and numerical) list FRUs available from HP. For a complete list
of parts found in the HP LaserJet 9500 series printer, refer to the exploded view illustrations in this
chapter. Parts not listed in this table might be part of a larger subassembly.

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list

Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 302; 1 Antenna holder assembly RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 303; 4 Antenna holder assembly RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 297; 2 Block, damper RB2-7217-000CN 1

Figure 300; 23 Cable, flat RH2-5509-000CN 1

Figure 300; 24 Cable, flat RH2-5507-000CN 1

Figure 303; 2 Cable, flat RH2-5508-000CN 1

Figure 300; 17 Cable, formatter RG5-5933-000CN 1

Figure 300; 16 Cable, fuser motor RG5-5952-000CN 1

Figure 300; 18 Cable, high-voltage RG5-5937-000CN 1

Figure 300; 15 Cable, high-voltage control RG5-5940-000CN 1

Figure 298; 9 Cable, laser assembly RG5-6148-000CN 1

Figure 300; 27 Cable, post controller RG5-5966-000CN 1

Figure 300; 14 Cable, process cartridge RG5-5938-000CN 1

Figure 300; 22 Cable, rear holder assembly RG5-6159-000CN 1

Figure 300; 13 Cable, rear lower RG5-5919-000CN 1

Figure 300; 29 Cable, rear lower RG5-5975-000CN 1

Figure 300; 19 Cable, rear upper RH5-5920-000CN 1

Figure 303; 7 Cable, right rear 1 RG5-5962-000CN 1

Figure 303; 8 Cable, right rear 2 RG5-5963-000CN 1

Figure 297; 6 Cartridge, click support assembly RG5-6141-000CN 1

Figure 305; all Cassette (use this part number to order the entire assembly) RG5-5635-080CN 2

Figure 319; 17 Caster RB2-7709-000CN 1

Figure 320; 1 Caster, back RB2-7678-000CN 2

Figure 320; 2 Caster, front swivel RB3-0304-040CN 2

Figure 299; 9 Connector assembly RG5-5779-000CN 1

Figure 299; 16 Connector, 10P VS1-5057-010CN 1

Figure 299; 17 Connector, 20P VS1-5057-020CN 1

Figure 299; 14 Connector, 3P VS1-5057-003CN 1

Figure 299; 15 Connector, 5P VS1-5057-005CN 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay —Chinese, simplified C8546-40018 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay-Arabic C8546-40024 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Chinese, traditional C8546-40017 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Czech C8546-40015 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Danish C8546-40012 1

506 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Dutch C8546-40007 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—English C8546-40002 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Finnish C8546-40011 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—French (European) C8546-40003 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—German C8546-40005 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Greek C8546-40023 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hebrew C8546-40022 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hungarian C8546-40016 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Italian C8546-40004 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Japanese C8546-40020 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Korean C8546-40019 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Norwegian C8546-40009 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Polish C8546-40013 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Portuguese (Brazilian) C8546-40008 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Russian C8546-40014 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Spanish (Castilian) C8546-40006 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Swedish C8546-40010 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Turkish C8546-40021 1

Figure 319; 6 Cover, back RF5-3644-000CN 1

Figure 319; 5 Cover, center RB2-7652-000CN 1

Figure 319; 1 Cover, front RB2-7648-000CN 1

Figure 288; 7 Cover, front left RB2-5683-000CN 1

Figure 288; 6 Cover, front right RB2-5682-000CN 1

Figure 319; 7 Cover, left RF5-3645-000CN 1

Figure 290; all Cover, left assembly RG56149-000CN 1

Figure 319; 4 Cover, left back RB2-7651-000CN 1

Figure 288; 16 Cover, left back assembly RG5-6111-000CN 1

Figure 288; 4 Cover, left front RB2-7335-000CN 1

Figure 288; 3 Cover, left lower RB2-5687-000CN 1

Figure 288; 1 Cover, left upper RB2-7336-000CN 1

Figure 295; 31 Cover, rail RB2-7531-000CN 1

Figure 289; 20 Cover, rear assembly RG5-6042-000CN 1

Figure 319; 2 Cover, right RB2-7649-000CN 1

Figure 319; 3 Cover, right back RB2-7650-000CN 1

Figure 289; 8 Cover, right back RB2-7352-000CN 1

Figure 289; 23 Cover, right front RB2-7331-000CN 1

Figure 289; 5 Cover, right lower RB2-5689-000CN 1

Figure 289; 14 Cover, right upper RB2-7332-000CN 1

Figure 289; 17 Cover, top left assembly RG5-6112-000CN 1

Figure 289; 13 Cover, top right RB2-7321-000CN 1

Figure 299; 5 Cover, transfer cable RB2-7444-000CN 1

Figure 296; 34 Cover, transfer front RB2-7445-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 507

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 318; 5 crg (print cartridge) driver assembly RG5-5907-020CN 1

Figure 303; 6 crg driver PCB assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-5907-020CN 1

Figure 290; 1 Dampener, left cover assembly RG5-6185-000CN 1

Figure 318; 1 DC controller PCB assembly RG5-5901-000CN new 1

C8546-69005 exchange

Figure 322; 3 Deck controller PCA RG5-6235-100CN 1

Figure 316; all Delivery cover assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6151-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 314; all Delivery feed assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6150-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 289; 15 Display, panel assembly (control panel) RG5-6115-000CN 1

Figure 288; 19 Door, front left assembly RG5-6114-000CN 1

Figure 288; 18 Door, front right assembly RG5-6113-000CN 1

Figure 291; all Door, right assembly RG56149-000CN 1

Figure 299; 10 End paper sensor assembly RG5-5699-000CN 2

Figure 315; al Face-down delivery assembly (use this part number to order the RG5-6017-000CN 1
entire assembly)

Figure 298; 14 Fan RH7-1554-000CN 1

Figure 298; 16 Fan RH7-1564-000CN 1

Figure 300; 20 Fan RH7-1521-000CN 1

Figure 300; 21 Fan RH7-1522-000CN 1

Figure 316; 2 Fan RH7-1546-000CN 2

Figure 319; 13 Feed/separation rollers RF5-3338-000CN 3

Figure 289; 9 Filter, air RB2-7170-000CN 1

Figure 289; 27 Filter, ozone RB2-7206-000CN 1

Figure 317; all Fuser assembly RG5-6098-000CN new 1

C8546-69007 exchange

Figure 294; 20 Fuser connecting cable assembly RG5-5925-000CN 1

Figure 304; all Fuser drive assembly RG5-6018-000CN 1

Figure 294; 21 Fuser sensor cable assembly RG5-5932-000CN 1

Figure 294; 19 Fuser sensor PCB assembly RG5-5914-000CN 1

Figure 295; 2 Guide, cleaner RB2-7181-000CN 2

Figure 300; 2 High-voltage connector PCB assembly RG5-6032-000CN 1

Figure 300; 12 High-voltage holder assembly RG5-6129-000CN 1

Figure 300; 1 High-voltage PCB assembly RG5-6031-000CN 1

Figure 300; 25 High-voltage power supply PCB unit RH3-0353-000CN 1

Figure 296; 36 Holder, stop (Also order RF5-3502-000CN at the same time) RB2-7501-000CN 1

Figure 289; 10 Hood, fan RF-5-3555-000CN 1

Figure 298; 12 Humidity sensor assembly RG5-6153-000CN 1

Figure 294; 2 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly RG5-6180-030CN 1

Figure 292; 10 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner assembly RG5-6041-000CN 1

Figure 295; 30 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) sensor cable assembly RG5-5960-000CN 1

Figure 320; 14 Jet-Link cable assembly RG5-6240-000CN 1

Figure 320; 15 Jet-Link grounding cable RG5-6249-000CN 1

508 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 320; 13 Jet-Link holder RB2-7662-000CN 1

Figure 322; 4 LED PCA RG5-6239-000CN 1

Figure 298; 4 Left interlock assembly RG5-6037-000CN 1

Figure 293; 6 Lever assembly RG5-6134-000CN 1

Figure 319; 16 Lever, standard/custom RB2-7762-000CN 1

Figure 293; 5 Lift link shaft assembly RG5-6132-000CN 1

Figure 293; 4 Lift rod front assembly RG5-6131-000CN 1

Figure 293; 7 Link rear unit RG5-6147-000CN 1

Figure 296; 35 Link, front (Also order RB2-7501-000CN at the same time) RF5-3502-000CN 1

Figure 295; 4 Link, holder lift RB2-7258-000CN 1

Figure 294; 5 Main fuser front guide assembly RG9-1595-000CN 1

Figure 309; all Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) RG5-6090-070CN 1

Figure 310; all

Figure 303; 1 Memory switch PCB assembly RG5-5909-000CN 1

Figure 321; 1 Motor (M303) RH7-1481-000CN 1

Figure 296; 17 Motor, DC24V RH7-1518-000CN 1

Figure 304; 1 Motor, DC24V RH7-1519-000CN 1

Figure 294; 4 Mount, dampener RB2-5570-020CN 2

Figure 298; 10 M-purpose support assembly rear RG5-6107-000CN 1

Figure 298; 3 Paper delivery sensor assembly RG5-6152-000CN 1

Figure 319; 12 Paper input unit (PIU) RG5-6208-120CN 1

Figure 319; 11 Paper path connection unit (PPCU) RG5-6227-000CN 1

Figure 306; all Paper pickup assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6196-000CN 1
Figure 307; all assembly)
Figure 308; all

Figure 322; 1 Paper size PCA RG5-6238-000CN 1

Figure 320; 7 Paper size sensing assembly RG5-6207-040CN 1

Figure 322; 2 Paper volume PCA RG5-6237-000CN 1

Figure 320; 9 Paper volume sensing assembly RG5-6229-000CN 1

Figure 295; 24 P-CRG open/close cover assembly RG5-6182-000CN 1

Figure 294; 16 Photo interrupter (TLP1241) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 295; 29 Photo interrupter (TLP1241) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 303; 10 Photo-interrupter TLP1241 WG8-5362-000CN 4

Figure 301; 1 Pin holder unit (registration drive assembly) RG5-6192-000CN 1

Figure 297; 31 Plate, grounding RB2-7281-000CN 1

Figure 295; 13 Plate, mount RF5-3505-000CN 1

Figure 295; 6 Plate, positioning RB2-7537-000CN 1

Figure 320; 12 Power supply RG5-6250-000CN 1

Figure 300; 7 Power supply assembly 110-127V RH3-2236-000CN new 1

C8546-69003 exchange
Power supply assembly 220-240V RH3-2237-000CN new 1
C8546-69004 exchange

Figure 302; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

Figure 318; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 509

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 302; all Process cartridge drive assembly RG5-6188-030CN new 1
C8546-69006 exchange

Figure 295; 26 Rail, guide front RF5-3545-000CN 1

Figure 297; 30 Rail, guide rear RF5-3546-000CN 1

Figure 311; all Registration assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6016-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 301; all Registration drive assembly RG5-6015-000CN 1

Figure 295; 25 Registration sensor assembly RG5-6123-020CN 1

Figure 300; 28 Regulator PCB assembly RG5-5971-000CN 1

Figure 298; 13 Right interlock assembly RG5-6036-000CN 1

Figure 297; 19 Right upper crossmember cable RG5-5943-000CN 1

Figure 299; 4 Rod, switch RB2-7354-000CN 1

Figure 296; 2 Roller RF5-3338-000CN 4

Figure 296; 3 Roller, pickup RF5-3340-000CN 2

Figure 296; 29 Scanner assembly RG5-6181-000CN 4

Figure 321; 2 Screw, M3 by 6 XB2-6300-607CN

Figure 320; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7300-607CN

Figure 320; 11 Screw, M4 by 6 XA9-0994-000CN

Figure 319; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7400-000CN

Figure 319; 18 Screw, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN

Figure 320; 3 Screw, M5 by 12 XA9-0912-000CN

Figure 319; 8 Screw, stepped RS5-9099-000CN

Figure 319; 9 Screw, W/W, M4 by 6 XA-0994-000CN

Figure 320; 8 Screws, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN

Figure 312; all Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (use this part number to order the RG5-6179-000CN 1
Figure 313; all entire assembly)

Figure 298; 11 Slide arm assembly RG5-6130-000CN 1

Figure 293; 3 Soft link shaft assembly RG5-6122-000CN 1

Figure 296; 33 Spring, compression RS6-2840-000CN 1

Figure 294; 14 Spring, tension RS6-2442-000CN 1

Figure 294; 6 Sub fuser front guide assembly RG9-1596-000CN 1

Figure 295; 5 Support, cleaning front RB2-7570-000CN 1

Figure 295; 11 Support, cleaning front RB2-7515-000CN 1

Figure 295; 8 Support, side plate hinge RB2-7302-000CN 2

Figure 320; 6 Switch assembly (SW21) RG5-6206-000CN 1

Figure 297; 28 Toner cartridge cable RG5-5939-000CN 1

Figure 303; all Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-6022-000CN 1

Figure 292; 8 Toner cartridge lever assembly RG5-6121-000CN 4

Figure 303; 3 Toner drive cable RG5-5930-000CN 1

Figure 288; 26 Tongs, jam removal RF5-3535-000CN 1

Figure 296; 1 Torque limiter RB2-5759-000CN 1

Figure 293; 8 Transfer link front assembly RG5-6146-000CN 1

Figure 296; 6 Transfer roller assembly RG5-6178-000CN 1

510 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 120. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 319; 15 Tray 4 RG5-6212-230CN 1

Figure 321; all Tray 4 deck drive assembly RG5-6228-040CN 1

Figure 319; 14 Tray 4 vertical registration assembly (VTU/VRA) RG5-6225-050CN 1

Not shown Tray 4-to-engine stabilizing screws 0515-4318 2

Figure 288; 24 Tray face up delivery RB2-5690-000CN 1

Figure 292; 13 Tray, catch RB2-7207-000CN 1

Figure 289; 12 Tray, delivery movable RB2-7341-000CN 1

Figure 292; 7 Waste toner bottle assembly RG5-6040-000CN 1

Figure 292; 6 Waste toner sensor assembly RG5-6038-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 511

Numerical parts list

Note The master parts tables (alphabetical and numerical) list FRUs available from HP. For a complete list
of parts found in the HP LaserJet 9500 series printer, refer to the exploded view illustrations in this
chapter. Parts not listed in this table might be part of a larger subassembly.

Table 121. Numerical parts list

Ref Description Part number Qty
Not shown Tray 4-to-engine stabilizing screws 0515-4318 2
Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—English C8546-40002 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—French (European) C8546-40003 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Italian C8546-40004 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—German C8546-40005 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Spanish (Castilian) C8546-40006 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Dutch C8546-40007 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Portuguese (Brazilian) C8546-40008 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Norwegian C8546-40009 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Swedish C8546-40010 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Finnish C8546-40011 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Danish C8546-40012 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Polish C8546-40013 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Russian C8546-40014 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Czech C8546-40015 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hungarian C8546-40016 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Chinese, traditional C8546-40017 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay —Chinese, simplified C8546-40018 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Korean C8546-40019 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Japanese C8546-40020 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Turkish C8546-40021 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Hebrew C8546-40022 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay—Greek C8546-40023 1

Figure 289; 22 Control panel overlay-Arabic C8546-40024 1

Figure 294; 4 Mount, dampener RB2-5570-020CN 2

Figure 288; 6 Cover, front right RB2-5682-000CN 1

Figure 288; 7 Cover, front left RB2-5683-000CN 1

Figure 288; 3 Cover, left lower RB2-5687-000CN 1

Figure 289; 5 Cover, right lower RB2-5689-000CN 1

Figure 288; 24 Tray face up delivery RB2-5690-000CN 1

Figure 296; 1 Torque limiter RB2-5759-000CN 1

Figure 289; 9 Filter, air RB2-7170-000CN 1

Figure 295; 2 Guide, cleaner RB2-7181-000CN 2

Figure 289; 27 Filter, ozone RB2-7206-000CN 1

Figure 292; 13 Tray, catch RB2-7207-000CN 1

Figure 297; 2 Block, damper RB2-7217-000CN 1

512 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 121. Numerical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 295; 4 Link, holder lift RB2-7258-000CN 1

Figure 297; 31 Plate, grounding RB2-7281-000CN 1

Figure 295; 8 Support, side plate hinge RB2-7302-000CN 2

Figure 289; 13 Cover, top right RB2-7321-000CN 1

Figure 289; 23 Cover, right front RB2-7331-000CN 1

Figure 289; 14 Cover, right upper RB2-7332-000CN 1

Figure 288; 4 Cover, left front RB2-7335-000CN 1

Figure 288; 1 Cover, left upper RB2-7336-000CN 1

Figure 289; 12 Tray, delivery movable RB2-7341-000CN 1

Figure 289; 8 Cover, right back RB2-7352-000CN 1

Figure 299; 4 Rod, switch RB2-7354-000CN 1

Figure 299; 5 Cover, transfer cable RB2-7444-000CN 1

Figure 296; 34 Cover, transfer front RB2-7445-000CN 1

Figure 296; 36 Holder, stop (Also order RF5-3502-000CN at the same time) RB2-7501-000CN 1

Figure 295; 11 Support, cleaning front RB2-7515-000CN 1

Figure 295; 31 Cover, rail RB2-7531-000CN 1

Figure 295; 6 Plate, positioning RB2-7537-000CN 1

Figure 295; 5 Support, cleaning front RB2-7570-000CN 1

Figure 319; 1 Cover, front RB2-7648-000CN 1

Figure 319; 2 Cover, right RB2-7649-000CN 1

Figure 319; 3 Cover, right back RB2-7650-000CN 1

Figure 319; 4 Cover, left back RB2-7651-000CN 1

Figure 319; 5 Cover, center RB2-7652-000CN 1

Figure 320; 13 Jet-Link holder RB2-7662-000CN 1

Figure 320; 1 Caster, back RB2-7678-000CN 2

Figure 319; 17 Caster RB2-7709-000CN 1

Figure 319; 16 Lever, standard/custom RB2-7762-000CN 1

Figure 320; 2 Caster, front swivel RB3-0304-040CN 2

Figure 319; 13 Feed/separation rollers RF5-3338-000CN 3

Figure 296; 2 Roller RF5-3338-000CN 4

Figure 296; 3 Roller, pickup RF5-3340-000CN 2

Figure 296; 35 Link, front (Also order RB2-7501-000CN at the same time) RF5-3502-000CN 1

Figure 295; 13 Plate, mount RF5-3505-000CN 1

Figure 288; 26 Tongs, jam removal RF5-3535-000CN 1

Figure 295; 26 Rail, guide front RF5-3545-000CN 1

Figure 297; 30 Rail, guide rear RF5-3546-000CN 1

Figure 289; 10 Hood, fan RF-5-3555-000CN 1

Figure 319; 6 Cover, back RF5-3644-000CN 1

Figure 319; 7 Cover, left RF5-3645-000CN 1

Figure 305; all Cassette (use this part number to order the entire assembly) RG5-5635-080CN 2

Figure 299; 10 End paper sensor assembly RG5-5699-000CN 2

Figure 299; 9 Connector assembly RG5-5779-000CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 513

Table 121. Numerical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 318; 1 DC controller PCB assembly RG5-5901-000CN new 1
C8546-69005 exchange

Figure 302; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

Figure 318; 2 Process cartridge (image drum) PCB assembly RG5-5905-000CN 1

Figure 318; 5 crg (print cartridge) driver assembly RG5-5907-020CN 1

Figure 303; 6 crg driver PCB assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-5907-020CN 1

Figure 303; 1 Memory switch PCB assembly RG5-5909-000CN 1

Figure 294; 19 Fuser sensor PCB assembly RG5-5914-000CN 1

Figure 300; 13 Cable, rear lower RG5-5919-000CN 1

Figure 294; 20 Fuser connecting cable assembly RG5-5925-000CN 1

Figure 303; 3 Toner drive cable RG5-5930-000CN 1

Figure 294; 21 Fuser sensor cable assembly RG5-5932-000CN 1

Figure 300; 17 Cable, formatter RG5-5933-000CN 1

Figure 300; 18 Cable, high-voltage RG5-5937-000CN 1

Figure 300; 14 Cable, process cartridge RG5-5938-000CN 1

Figure 297; 28 Toner cartridge cable RG5-5939-000CN 1

Figure 300; 15 Cable, high-voltage control RG5-5940-000CN 1

Figure 297; 19 Right upper crossmember cable RG5-5943-000CN 1

Figure 300; 16 Cable, fuser motor RG5-5952-000CN 1

Figure 295; 30 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) sensor cable assembly RG5-5960-000CN 1

Figure 303; 7 Cable, right rear 1 RG5-5962-000CN 1

Figure 303; 8 Cable, right rear 2 RG5-5963-000CN 1

Figure 300; 27 Cable, post controller RG5-5966-000CN 1

Figure 300; 28 Regulator PCB assembly RG5-5971-000CN 1

Figure 300; 29 Cable, rear lower RG5-5975-000CN 1

Figure 301; all Registration drive assembly RG5-6015-000CN 1

Figure 311; all Registration assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6016-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 315; al Face-down delivery assembly (use this part number to order the RG5-6017-000CN 1
entire assembly)

Figure 304; all Fuser drive assembly RG5-6018-000CN 1

Figure 303; all Toner cartridge drive assembly (print cartridge drive) RG5-6022-000CN 1

Figure 302; 1 Antenna holder assembly RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 303; 4 Antenna holder assembly RG5-6026-000CN 4

Figure 300; 1 High-voltage PCB assembly RG5-6031-000CN 1

Figure 300; 2 High-voltage connector PCB assembly RG5-6032-000CN 1

Figure 298; 13 Right interlock assembly RG5-6036-000CN 1

Figure 298; 4 Left interlock assembly RG5-6037-000CN 1

Figure 292; 6 Waste toner sensor assembly RG5-6038-000CN 1

Figure 292; 7 Waste toner bottle assembly RG5-6040-000CN 1

Figure 292; 10 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner assembly RG5-6041-000CN 1

Figure 289; 20 Cover, rear assembly RG5-6042-000CN 1

Figure 309; all Manual feed pickup assembly (tray 1) RG5-6090-070CN 1

Figure 310; all

514 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 121. Numerical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 317; all Fuser assembly RG5-6098-000CN new 1
C8546-69007 exchange

Figure 298; 10 M-purpose support assembly rear RG5-6107-000CN 1

Figure 288; 16 Cover, left back assembly RG5-6111-000CN 1

Figure 289; 17 Cover, top left assembly RG5-6112-000CN 1

Figure 288; 18 Door, front right assembly RG5-6113-000CN 1

Figure 288; 19 Door, front left assembly RG5-6114-000CN 1

Figure 289; 15 Display, panel assembly (control panel) RG5-6115-000CN 1

Figure 292; 8 Toner cartridge lever assembly RG5-6121-000CN 4

Figure 293; 3 Soft link shaft assembly RG5-6122-000CN 1

Figure 295; 25 Registration sensor assembly RG5-6123-020CN 1

Figure 300; 12 High-voltage holder assembly RG5-6129-000CN 1

Figure 298; 11 Slide arm assembly RG5-6130-000CN 1

Figure 293; 4 Lift rod front assembly RG5-6131-000CN 1

Figure 293; 5 Lift link shaft assembly RG5-6132-000CN 1

Figure 293; 6 Lever assembly RG5-6134-000CN 1

Figure 297; 6 Cartridge, click support assembly RG5-6141-000CN 1

Figure 293; 8 Transfer link front assembly RG5-6146-000CN 1

Figure 293; 7 Link rear unit RG5-6147-000CN 1

Figure 298; 9 Cable, laser assembly RG5-6148-000CN 1

Figure 290; all Cover, left assembly RG56149-000CN 1

Figure 291; all Door, right assembly RG56149-000CN 1

Figure 314; all Delivery feed assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6150-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 316; all Delivery cover assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6151-000CN 1
assembly)

Figure 298; 3 Paper delivery sensor assembly RG5-6152-000CN 1

Figure 298; 12 Humidity sensor assembly RG5-6153-000CN 1

Figure 300; 22 Cable, rear holder assembly RG5-6159-000CN 1

Figure 296; 6 Transfer roller assembly RG5-6178-000CN 1

Figure 312; all Secondary transfer assembly (T2) (use this part number to order the RG5-6179-000CN 1
Figure 313; all entire assembly)

Figure 294; 2 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) assembly RG5-6180-030CN 1

Figure 296; 29 Scanner assembly RG5-6181-000CN 4

Figure 295; 24 P-CRG open/close cover assembly RG5-6182-000CN 1

Figure 290; 1 Dampener, left cover assembly RG5-6185-000CN 1

Figure 302; all Process cartridge drive assembly RG5-6188-030CN new 1

C8546-69006 exchange

Figure 301; 1 Pin holder unit (registration drive assembly) RG5-6192-000CN 1

Figure 306; all Paper pickup assembly (use this part number to order the entire RG5-6196-000CN 1
Figure 307; all assembly)
Figure 308; all

Figure 320; 6 Switch assembly (SW21) RG5-6206-000CN 1

Figure 320; 7 Paper size sensing assembly RG5-6207-040CN 1

Figure 319; 12 Paper input unit (PIU) RG5-6208-120CN 1

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 515

Table 121. Numerical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 319; 15 Tray 4 RG5-6212-230CN 1

Figure 319; 14 Tray 4 vertical registration assembly (VTU/VRA) RG5-6225-050CN 1

Figure 319; 11 Paper path connection unit (PPCU) RG5-6227-000CN 1

Figure 321; all Tray 4 deck drive assembly RG5-6228-040CN 1

Figure 320; 9 Paper volume sensing assembly RG5-6229-000CN 1

Figure 322; 3 Deck controller PCA RG5-6235-100CN 1

Figure 322; 2 Paper volume PCA RG5-6237-000CN 1

Figure 322; 1 Paper size PCA RG5-6238-000CN 1

Figure 322; 4 LED PCA RG5-6239-000CN 1

Figure 320; 14 Jet-Link cable assembly RG5-6240-000CN 1

Figure 320; 15 Jet-Link grounding cable RG5-6249-000CN 1

Figure 320; 12 Power supply RG5-6250-000CN 1

Figure 294; 5 Main fuser front guide assembly RG9-1595-000CN 1

Figure 294; 6 Sub fuser front guide assembly RG9-1596-000CN 1

Figure 300; 24 Cable, flat RH2-5507-000CN 1

Figure 303; 2 Cable, flat RH2-5508-000CN 1

Figure 300; 23 Cable, flat RH2-5509-000CN 1

Figure 300; 25 High-voltage power supply PCB unit RH3-0353-000CN 1

Figure 300; 7 Power supply assembly 110-127V RH3-2236-000CN new 1

C8546-69003 exchange
Power supply assembly 220-240V RH3-2237-000CN new 1
C8546-69004 exchange

Figure 300; 19 Cable, rear upper RH5-5920-000CN 1

Figure 321; 1 Motor (M303) RH7-1481-000CN 1

Figure 296; 17 Motor, DC24V RH7-1518-000CN 1

Figure 304; 1 Motor, DC24V RH7-1519-000CN 1

Figure 300; 20 Fan RH7-1521-000CN 1

Figure 300; 21 Fan RH7-1522-000CN 1

Figure 316; 2 Fan RH7-1546-000CN 2

Figure 298; 14 Fan RH7-1554-000CN 1

Figure 298; 16 Fan RH7-1564-000CN 1

Figure 319; 8 Screw, stepped RS5-9099-000CN

Figure 294; 14 Spring, tension RS6-2442-000CN 1

Figure 296; 33 Spring, compression RS6-2840-000CN 1

Figure 299; 14 Connector, 3P VS1-5057-003CN 1

Figure 299; 15 Connector, 5P VS1-5057-005CN 1

Figure 299; 16 Connector, 10P VS1-5057-010CN 1

Figure 299; 17 Connector, 20P VS1-5057-020CN 1

Figure 294; 16 Photo interrupter (TLP1241) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 295; 29 Photo interrupter (TLP1241) WG8-5362-000CN 1

Figure 303; 10 Photo-interrupter TLP1241 WG8-5362-000CN 4

Figure 319; 9 Screw, W/W, M4 by 6 XA-0994-000CN

Figure 319; 18 Screw, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN NA

516 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 121. Numerical parts list (continued)
Ref Description Part number Qty
Figure 320; 8 Screws, M4 by 8 XA9-0732-000CN

Figure 320; 3 Screw, M5 by 12 XA9-0912-000CN

Figure 320; 11 Screw, M4 by 6 XA9-0994-000CN

Figure 321; 2 Screw, M3 by 6 XB2-6300-607CN

Figure 320; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7300-607CN

Figure 319; 10 Screw, M4 by 6 XB6-7400-000CN

ENWW Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 517

518 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW
Index
Numerics cables, flat flexible (FFCs)
2,000-sheet feeder. See tray 4 removing and replacing 185
signals 118
calibration
A color plane registration (CPR) 155
A4 media settings 62
environment 166
AC/DC power conversion 137
halftone 168
accessories
laser beam skew 157
available 21
menu settings 66
diagrams 26
skipping 89
ordering 47, 443
caliper field test 42
part numbers 445
Cancel Job button 54
verifying installation 323
capacities, trays and bins 32
acoustic emissions
carbonless media 39
specifications 24
cardstock mode 67
adhesive labels
cartridges
print modes 67
block diagram 109
specifications 36
diagrams 158
adjustment, laser/scanner
drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 474
about 223
drive assembly, removing and replacing 282
page, printing 219
motor, testing 78
page, reading 221
motors, operations 140
step 1 224
non-HP 96
step 2 228
operations 160
alphabetical lists
part numbers 96, 445
messages 389
removing 183, 187
part numbers 506
storing 97
APC (automatic light emission control) 151
terminology 444
AppleTalk settings 72
testing 75
applications, changing settings from 81
warranty 50
auto continue 70
cassette assembly, diagrams and part numbers 478
auto sense mode 67
cassettes. See trays
CD-ROM, parts information 48
B charging operations 159
back cover, removing and replacing 214 checks. See tests
band test, color 77 chemically treated media 38
basis-weight field test 40 circuits
beams capacity 23
detect errors 153, 155 DC controller 131
operations 148, 149 flat flexible cable (FFC) signals 118
skew calibration 157 laser diodes 150
belt test 78 wiring diagrams 114
bins cleaning
capacities 32 components 94
default, setting 61 precautions 93
locating 25 toner, spilled 93
blank waste toner operations 164, 165
control panel display 308 cleaning blade
blinking lights, interpreting diagrams 158
tray 4 440 operations 164, 165
blisters mode 68 removing and replacing 192
block diagram 109 terminology 444
bond paper, weight equivalence table 40 cleaning kit
box page count, resetting 79
contents 30 part numbers 445
size 27 cleaning page 66
buttons, control panel 54 clearable warnings 70
clothing, toner on 93
C clutches
cables diagrams 131, 142
paper path 169, 177
troubleshooting 323
cables, connectors 25

ENWW Index 519

cold reset DC controller
paper size settings 79 circuit components 131
performing 89 color plane registration (CPR) 155
color connectors, checking for damage 186
band test 77 engine-control system 130
mode 69 feeding operations 169
plane registration (CPR) 155 flat flexible cable (FFC) signals 118
settings 64 formatter operations 146
components halftone calibration control 168
block diagram 109 high-voltage power supply 138
internal, diagrams and part numbers 454 last sheet detection, tray 1 176
testing 76 media size detection 171
configuration page motors and fans 139
HP Jetdirect 437 operations 134
using 323 paper width detection, tray 1 175
configuration page, printing 58 part numbers 445
Configure Device menu 61 pickup operations tray 2 or 3 172
connectors removing and replacing 286
DC controller, checking for damage 186 scanner motor 154
locating 25, 126 T driver circuit 135
consumables. See supplies tray 1 pickup operations 174
continue settings 70 default settings, restoring
control panel print modes 68
blank, troubleshooting 308 printer 74
clearable warning settings 70 delivery cover assembly, diagrams and part numbers 497
cover, removing and replacing 195 delivery fan
default settings 81 diagrams 141
language 70, 81 removing and replacing 276
lights and buttons 54 delivery feed assembly, diagrams and part numbers 495
locating 25 delivery unit sensor, removing and replacing 239
menus 56 delivery unit, removing and replacing 235
messages, alphabetical list 389 demo page, printing 58
overlay, removing and replacing 194 density
part numbers 445 control operations 166, 167
removing and replacing 195 image formation operations 159
service ID 79 sensor assembly, removing and replacing 248
copies, default number 61 developer motors test 78
counts, page 79 developing cylinder
Courier font settings 62 block diagram 109
covers operations 160
back, removing and replacing 214 developing motors 139
diagrams and part numbers 448 devices
left back, removing and replacing 210 verifying installation 323
left lower, removing and replacing 211 D-half (halftone calibration) 168
left upper, removing and replacing 198 diagnostics
right back, removing and replacing 213 menu 75
top left, removing and replacing 201 DIMMs
top right, removing and replacing 199 part numbers 445
upper right, removing and replacing 196 slots 146
CPR (color plane registration) 155 specifications 20
CPU, DC controller PCA 134, 135 DIMMs (dual inline memory modules)
curl verifying installation 323
grain test 42 diodes, laser 150, 151
current capacity 23 DIP switches, tray 4 438
custom media directory file page 58
configuring trays 83 using 328
detection operations 171 disk. See hard disk
Customer care Reseller Sales and Support Center 48 DLC/LLC settings 72
cut edge condition field test, media 43 documentation
cutouts, avoiding media with 38 ordering 49, 443
part numbers 446
D
damaged connectors, DC controller 186

520 Index ENWW

doors ESD (electrostatic discharge) precautions 183
diagrams and part numbers 448 event log
front, removing and replacing 203 configuration page 324
fuser, removing and replacing 204 diagnostics menu 75
image drum, removing and replacing 215 exchange program 47
ITB, removing and replacing 206 eye contact, toner 93
jam detection operations 178
left switch, removing and replacing 296 F
locating 25 face down delivery assembly, diagrams and part numbers 496
right switch, removing and replacing 297
face-up deflector 109
upper left sensor, removing and replacing 299 face-up delivery fans 141
dots per inch (dpi) 20 face-up solenoid test 78
downloading drivers 47
factory defaults, restoring
dpi (dots per inch) 20 print modes 68
drivers printer 74
downloading 47
fans
included 20 delivery, removing and replacing 276
drums, image diagrams 131, 139
block diagram 109
fuser, removing and replacing 277
diagrams 158 right back, removing and replacing 251
door, removing and replacing 215 right front, removing and replacing 252
drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 473
Fast Infrared (FIR) connect 25
drive assembly, removing and replacing 278 fasteners, types 184
handling 98 FastRes 20
motor test 78
features, printer 20
motors, operations 139 feed guide, cleaning 94
non-HP 96 feed rollers
operations 159
block diagram 109
part numbers 98, 445 operations 169, 172
removing 183, 189 feed unit, vertical 240
terminology 444
feeding operations
testing 75 last sheet detection, tray 1 176
warranty 50 lifting 173
dual-beam method 149
paper path 169, 177
duplexer testing 78
deflector 109 tray 1 174
part numbers 446
tray 2 or 3 172
removing and replacing 244 feeding problems, ADF 381
settings 62 FFCs (flat flexible cables)
duty cycle 21
removing and replacing 185
signals 118
E fiber composition test 43
edge printing 85 field replaceable units (FRUs)
EIO cards part numbers 448
part numbers 446 removing and replacing 183
slots 21, 25 file directory page 58
EIO disk. See hard disk using 328
EIO submenu 72 finish test, paper 42
electrical specifications 23 FIR connector 25
electrophotographic process 158 firmware updates
electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions 183 downloading 99
embossed media, specifications 38 Macintosh 102
energy consumption 23 messages received during 105
engine troubleshooting 105
control system, block diagram 130 UNIX 100
envelopes Windows, FTP 101
default size 61 Windows, local port 99
grain test 42 Windows, LPR commands 104
print mode 67 Windows, network 100
specifications 35 first aid procedures, toner 93
storing 39 first page out, specifications 20
environment calibration control 166 flags, diagrams 109
environmental specifications flashing lights, interpreting
printer 23, 24 tray 4 440
storing media 39 flat flexible cables (FFCs)
equivalence table, paper weight 40 removing and replacing 185
error messages signals 118
log 75 focusing lenses, operations 148, 149
settings 70

ENWW Index 521

fonts hard disk
Courier settings 62 file directory page 58
DIMMs, part numbers 445 included 21
included 20 part numbers 446
list, printing 58 reinitializing 86
PCL settings 63 skip disk function 89
foreign interface harness (FIH) 25 hard disks
formatter file directory page 328
cage, removing and replacing 289 harnesses, wiring 183
color plane registration (CPR) 155 heartbeat LED, formatter 147
halftone calibration control 168 heaters, operations 136
heartbeat LED 147 heavy media mode 67
operations 146 held jobs 57, 69
part numbers 445 help
PCB, removing and replacing 288 troubleshooting 303
power supplies 137 high-voltage contact, removing and replacing 291
forms, preprinted 37 high-voltage power supply
frequent jams, troubleshooting 382 operations 138
front doors removing and replacing 267
locating 25 HP Fast Infrared (FIR) connector 25
removing and replacing 203 HP FastRes 20
front fuser guide, cleaning 94 HP Jetdirect
front paper sensor, removing and replacing 300 configuration page 437
FRUs (field replaceable units) HP Jetdirect print servers
part numbers 448 connector, locating 25
removing and replacing 183 EIO submenu 72
FTP firmware updates included 20
Macintosh 102 model number 21
Windows 101 troubleshooting 436
furnish test, media 43 HP Jet-Link
fuser cabling, troubleshooting 323
cleaning 94 HP Jet-Link connector 25
control circuit operations 136 HP LaserJet utility, Macintosh firmware updates 103
diagrams 158 HP media 33
door, removing and replacing 204 HP PCL 5c driver 20
drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 476 HP Web JetAdmin, firmware updates 104
drive assembly, removing and replacing 285 humidity
front paper sensor, removing and replacing 300 calibration control 166
kit, part numbers 445 meter, suppliers 44
kit, resetting page count 79 sensor, removing and replacing 266
media compatibility 36 specifications 24
part numbers 498 storing media 39
removing and replacing 245
sensor PCA, removing and replacing 301 I
warranty 50 I/O submenu 71
fuser fan
identification label 22
diagrams 141 image cleaning kit, part numbers 445
removing and replacing 277 image density detection operations 167
fuser motor
image drums
diagrams 140 block diagram 109
removing and replacing 284 diagrams 158
testing 78
door, removing and replacing 215
fusing rollers drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 473
block diagram 109 drive assembly, removing and replacing 278
operations 163
handling 98
motor test 78
G motors, operations 139
glossy mode 67 non-HP 96
grain field test 42 operations 159
gray levels 20 part numbers 98, 445
guides, cleaning 94 removing 183, 189
terminology 444
H testing 75
halftone calibration control 168 warranty 50
image formation operations 158
image mask control 152
image quality, troubleshooting. See print quality, troubleshooting
image stabilization control 166
image transfer kit, part numbers 445

522 Index ENWW

imaging area 85 Jetdirect print servers
Information menu 58 connector, locating 25
information pages EIO submenu 72
configuration 323 included 20
file directory 328 model number 21
HP Jetdirect 437 troubleshooting 436
supplies status 325 Jet-Link connector 25
ingestion, toner 93 job storage 57, 69
inhalation, toner 93
initialization K
hard disk 86 kits
NVRAM 87, 88 page count, resetting 79
input trays
part numbers 445
behavior modes 69
capacities 32
custom media settings 83 L
detection operations 171 labels
diagrams and part numbers 478 print modes 67
included 20 specifications 36
jam detection operations 178 language, control panel 70, 81
last sheet detection, tray 1 176 languages
lifting operations 173 verifying installation 323
locating 25 languages, printer
media size detection operations 169, 171 included 20
media supported 32 settings 70
motors, testing 78 laser/scanner assemblies
paper path operations 169 adjusting 223, 224, 228
paper path test 75 adjustment page, printing 219
paper-handling menu 59 adjustment page, reading 221
paper-width detection, tray 1 175 Beam detect errors 153
pickup operations, cassettes 172 beam skew calibration 157
pickup operations, tray 1 174 block diagram 109
printable area 85 laser control operations 150, 151
registration 64 operations 148, 149
sensors, diagrams 133, 142 power supplies 137
separation pad, cleaning 95 removing and replacing 217
standard paper size, setting 82 scanner motor control 154, 155
installation testing 78
box contents 30 LaserJet utility, Macintosh firmware updates 103
space requirements 27 last sheet detection, tray 1 176
verifying for accessories 323 LEDs
interface connections 21, 25 tray 4 440
intermediate transfer belt. See ITB LEDs. See lights
internal components, diagrams and part numbers 454 left back cover, removing and replacing 210
INTR (initial rotation) sequence 111 left bin, locating 25
IP address 69, 436 left cover, diagrams and part numbers 452
IPX/SPX settings 72 left door switch, removing and replacing 296
ITB left lower cover, removing and replacing 211
block diagram 109 left side access door, locating 25
cleaning operations 164 left upper cover, removing and replacing 198
density detection operations 167 lenses, operations 148, 149
diagrams 158 letterhead specifications 37
door, removing and replacing 206 lifter motor 141
fan 141 lifting operations 173
motor 139 light control, laser diodes 150, 151
operations 161 light media mode 67
part numbers 445 lights
removing 183 control panel 54
removing and replacing 246 formatter heartbeat LED 147
sensor, removing and replacing 298 limited warranty 50
terminology 444 link speed 73
long-grain paper test 42
low-voltage power supply
J operations 137
jams
removing and replacing 268
cleaning spilled toner 93
LPR commands, firmware updates 104
detection operations 111, 178
LSTR (last rotation) sequence 111
multifeeds, troubleshooting 379
recovery settings 70
JetAdmin, firmware updates 104

ENWW Index 523

M motors
Macintosh firmware updates 102 diagrams 131, 139
maintenance fuser, removing and replacing 284
agreements 50 paper path 169, 177
cleaning procedures 93, 94 pickup operations, tray 2 or 3 172
counts, resetting 79 power supplies 137
manual feed registration assembly, removing and replacing 269
pickup assembly, diagrams and part numbers 486 scanner 154, 155
settings 62 testing 78
manuals MPPCA 175
ordering 49 multifeeds
part numbers 446 troubleshooting 379
map, menu 56 multifunction finisher
margins 85 locating 26
mask control, image 152 Output Setup submenu 71
media part numbers 446
custom sizes 83 supplies, part numbers 445
default size 61, 79
envelopes 35 N
finish test 42 networks
HP 33 features 21
last sheet detection, tray 1 176 next-day onsite service 51
lifting operations 173 noise
optimize settings 65 specifications 24
preprinted 37 non-HP print cartridges 96
print modes 64, 67 Novell Status information 436
recommended 33 numerical lists
selecting 31 part numbers 512
sensors 133 NVRAM
size detection operations 169, 171 initialization 87, 88
sizes supported 32
storing 39
test tools 44
O
on/off switch 25
testing 39
onsite service agreements 51
tray settings 59, 82
operating environment
troubleshooting 77
calibration 166
types 35
specifications 23, 24
weight equivalence table 40
width detection, tray 1 175
media jams. See jams
memory
clearing 89
configuration page information 324
DIMM slots 146
NVRAM initialization 87, 88
part numbers 445
specifications 20
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 20
menus, control panel 56
messages
alphabetical list 389
log 75
settings 70
MEt (Memory Enhancement technology) 20
metal, screws for 184
metric weight equivalence table, paper 40
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
mirrors, operations 148, 149
misfeeds, ADF 381
misfeeds, troubleshooting 379
model number 22
moisture
media content field test 42
meters, suppliers 44
mono mode 69
monthly duty cycle 21

524 Index ENWW

operations paper
Beam detect errors 153, 155 custom sizes 83
block diagram 109 default size 61, 79
cassette detection 171 finish test 42
color plane registration (CPR) 155 HP 33
connector location diagrams 126 last sheet detection, tray 1 176
DC controller 131, 134 lifting operations 173
density detection 167 optimize settings 65
dual-beam method 149 preprinted 37
electrophotographic process 158 print modes 64, 67
engine control system 130 recommended 33
environment calibration 166 selecting 31
fans 139 sensors 133
flat flexible cable (FFC) signals 118 size detection operations 169, 171
formatter 146 sizes supported 32
formatter heartbeat LED 147 storing 39
fuser control circuit 136 test tools 44
halftone calibration 168 testing 39
high-voltage power supply 138 tray settings 59, 82
image formation 158 troubleshooting 77
image mask control 152 types 35
image stabilization 166 weight equivalence table 40
jam detection 178 width detection, tray 1 175
laser control 150, 151 Paper handling menu 59
laser/scanner system 148 paper jams. See jams
laser-beam skew calibration 157 paper path
last sheet detection, tray 1 176 operations 169, 177
lifting 173 test 75
low-voltage power supply 137 paper pickup assembly, diagrams and part numbers 480
media size detection 169, 171 parallel cable connector 25
motors 139 Parallel Input submenu 71
paper path 169, 177 parts
paper-width detection, tray 1 175 alphabetical list 506
pickup, tray 1 174 CD-ROM 48
pickup, tray 2 or 3 172 numerical list 512
scanner motor 154, 155 ordering 47, 443
sequences 110 removing and replacing 183
systems 108 voltage 443
T driver PCA 135 Pause/Resume button 55
timing chart 112 PCB assemblies, diagrams and part numbers 499
optimize media settings 65 PCBA, screws for 184
ordering PCL
documentation and software 49 font list, printing 58
parts and supplies 47, 443 included 20
output bins submenu 63
capacities 32 P-crg drive assembly, removing and replacing 278
default, setting 61 perforated media, avoiding 38
locating 25 periods, operations 110
output quality, troubleshooting. See print quality, troubleshooting personalities
Output Setup submenu 71 included 20
overhead transparencies settings 70
printer modes 67 verifying installation 323
specifications 37 pH test kit 44
overheating control 136 phases, operations 110
overlay for control panel, removing and replacing 194 phone numbers
override A4/letter settings 62 ordering documentation and software 49
ozone ordering supplies 47
fan 141 service agreements 51
filter 25 support 48
physical specifications 22
P pickup assembly, diagrams and part numbers 480
packaging, removing 27 pickup motor 141
pickup rollers
page counts 79
pages per minute (ppm) 20 block diagram 109
panels. See covers motors 140
operations 172, 174
tray 1, removing and replacing 294

ENWW Index 525

pickup system operations Print Quality submenu 64
cassette detection 171 PRINT sequence 111
feeding 169, 171 print servers, HP Jetdirect
last sheet detection, tray 1 176 connector, locating 25
lifting 173 EIO submenu 72
paper path 177 included 20
tray 1 174 model number 21
tray 2 or 3 172 print stop test 77
pickup unit, removing and replacing 258 printable area 85
PIN, Service menu 79 printer drivers
PJL (printer job language) 20 downloading 47
plastic, screws for 184 included 20
pliers, required 184 printer job language (PJL) 20
ports printer messages
included 21 alphabetical list 389
locating 25 Printing submenu 61
post charger priority onsite service 51
cleaning 94 private jobs 57, 69
diagrams 158 process cartridges. See image drums
operations 162 production code 22
removing and replacing 292 programs, changing settings from 81
PostScript Level 3 emulation 20 proof and hold jobs 57, 69
power protocol settings 72
consumption 23 protocols, network
operations 110 troubleshooting 436
troubleshooting 308 PS error pages 62
unplugging printer 136, 183 PS fonts, included 20
power cord PS Level 3 emulation 20
connector 25
part numbers 446 Q
power supplies
quick copy jobs 57, 69
engine-control system 130
fans 141
high-voltage 138 R
high-voltage, removing and replacing 267 RAM (random-access memory) specifications 20
low-voltage 137 RAM disk
low-voltage, removing and replacing 268 settings 70
part numbers 445 random-access memory (RAM) specifications 20
post charger, removing and replacing 292 recycled media 39
power switch, locating 25 region of origin 22
PowerSave registration
energy consumption 23 settings 64
settings 69 registration assembly
turning on and off 74 diagrams and part numbers 490
ppm (pages per minute) 20 removing and replacing 269
preprinted media specifications 37 registration drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 472
preregistration motor 177 registration motors
pressure roller operations 140
block diagram 109 testing 78
heating operations 136 registration roller
primary charging roller block diagram 109
block diagram 109 cleaning 95
operations 159, 165 registration sensor assembly, removing and replacing 248
print cartridges regulatory information 22
block diagram 109 reinitialization
diagrams 158 hard disk 86
drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 474 NVRAM 87, 88
drive assembly, removing and replacing 282 remanufactured parts 47
motor, testing 78 remote firmware updates
motors, operations 140 downloading 99
non-HP 96 Macintosh 102
operations 160 messages received during 105
part numbers 96, 445 troubleshooting 105
removing 183, 187 UNIX 100
storing 97 Windows, FTP 101
terminology 444 Windows, LPR commands 104
testing 75 Windows, network 100
warranty 50 removing parts 183
print modes 64, 67 replacing parts 183
Resets submenu 74

526 Index ENWW

resetting separation pad
cold reset 89 block diagram 109
NVRAM 87, 88 cleaning 95
page counts 79 operations 174
print modes 68 removing and replacing 295
printer settings 74 separation roller
residual jams, detection operations 179 block diagram 109
residual toner cleaning operations 164, 165 operations 172
resistivity test tools 44 sequences, operations 110
resolution 20 serial number
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 20 locating 22
restoring default settings resetting 79
cold reset 89 servers, HP Jetdirect
NVRAM initialization 87, 88 connector, locating 25
print modes 68 EIO submenu 72
printer 74 included 20
REt (Resolution Enhancement technology) 20 model number 21
retention, job 57, 69 service agreements 48, 51
Retrieve job menu 57 service approach 46
revision level 22 service ID 79, 80
right back cover, removing and replacing 213 Service menu 79
right back fan, removing and replacing 251 settings
right door cold reset 89
diagrams and part numbers 453 saving 88
switch, removing and replacing 297 service ID 80
right front fan, removing and replacing 252 types of 81
right upper cover, removing and replacing 196 setup
rollers box contents 30
cleaning 95 requirements 27
diagrams 109 Sheffield meter 42, 44
feed, operations 169 short-grain paper test 42
high-voltage power supply 138 signals
image formation system 158 flat flexible cable (FFC) 118
motors 139 image mask control 152
pickup operations, tray 2 or 3 172 laser control 150, 151
primary charging operations 159, 165 site requirements 27
transfer operations 163 size
transfer, removing and replacing 193 box 27
tray 1 pickup, removing and replacing 294 custom media 83
rough media, smoothness test 42 default, media 61
detection operations, media 169, 171
S envelopes 35
media supported 32
saving settings 88
scanner motor 154, 155 media, tray settings 59
screwdrivers, required 184 printer 22
skew, laser-beam 157
screws, torque values 184
secondary transfer assembly skin contact, toner 93
diagrams and part numbers 492 skip calibration 89
skip disk 89
removing and replacing 253
secondary transfer roller, diagrams 158 smoothness test, paper 42
security information 324 software
ordering 49
security, web sites 73
sensors settings 81
delivery unit, removing and replacing 239 solenoids
diagrams 131, 142
density and registration, removing and replacing 248
density detection 167 paper path operations 169
diagrams 109, 131, 142 testing 78
tray 1 pickup 174
fuser front paper, removing and replacing 300
fuser PCA, removing and replacing 301 space requirements 27
special media
ITB, removing and replacing 298
paper path 169 embossed 38
temperature and humidity, removing and replacing 266 envelope specifications 35
label specifications 36
testing 76
tray 1 pickup 174 perforated 38
tray 4 439 preprinted 37
storing 39
upper left door, removing and replacing 299
separation guide, cleaning 94 testing 39
separation operations 163 transparency specifications 37

ENWW Index 527

specifications telephone numbers
environmental 23, 24 ordering documentation and software 49
media 31 ordering supplies 47
size, printer 22 service agreements 51
speed 20 support 48
speed specifications 20 temperature
speed/cost settings 69 calibration control 166
spilled toner, cleaning 93 label specifications 36
stabilization, image 166 meter, suppliers 44
stacker sensor, removing and replacing 266
locating 26 specifications 24
Output Setup submenu 71 storing media 39
part numbers 446 temporary settings 81
stages, operations 110 terminology 444
stapler/stacker tests
calibration 79 color band 77
locating 26 components 76, 78
Output Setup submenu 71 Diagnostics menu 75
part numbers 446 image drum 75
supplies, part numbers 445 media 39
static charge eliminator 161, 163 paper path 75
static precautions 183 print stop 77
status sensors 76
supplies 325 theory of operations. See operations
status, supplies 58 thermistors, operations 136
STBY (standby) sequence 111 thermoswitches, operations 136
storage capabilities, verifying 328 timing chart, printer operations 112
storage specifications 24 toner
stored jobs 57, 69 charging operations 159
storing cleaning operations 164, 165
image drums 98 cleaning spilled 93
media 39 collection bottle, removing 183, 191
print cartridges 97 coverage, usage page information 327
suppliers, media test tools 44 first aid measures 93
supplies fusing operations 163
See also print cartridges image formation operations 160
low, settings 70 mode 68
ordering 47, 443 parts terminology 444
part numbers 445 post charger operations 162
resetting 74 transfer operations 161
supplies status page toner cartridges. See print cartridges
printing 58 tools
using 325 media test 44
support required for service 184
centers, phone numbers and websites 48 top bin, locating 25
service agreements 51 top left cover, removing and replacing 201
surface coatings, media 38 top right cover, removing and replacing 199
surface resistivity test tools 44 torque values for screws 184
switches tough paper mode 67
diagrams 142 transfer kit page count, resetting 79
left door, removing and replacing 296 transfer motor test 78
paper-length detection 171 transfer roller
power, locating 25 block diagram 109
right door, removing and replacing 297 operations 163
thermal, operations 136 removing and replacing 193
tray 4 438 transfer unit
synthetic media 38 block diagram 109
System Setup submenu 69 warranty 50
systems, printer 108 transparencies
printer modes 67
T specifications 37
T driver PCA 135 tray 4
TCP/IP protocols 436 drive assembly, diagrams and part numbers 504
lights, interpreting 440
TCP/IP settings 72
T-crg drive assembly, removing and replacing 282 main body, diagrams and part numbers 500
part numbers 446
PCA, diagrams and part numbers 505
sensors, testing 439

528 Index ENWW

trays voltage
behavior modes 69 high-voltage power supply 138
capacities 32 low-voltage power supply 137
custom media settings 83 part numbers 443
detection operations 171 specifications 23
diagrams and part numbers 478 volume onsite service 51
included 20
jam detection operations 178 W
last sheet detection, tray 1 176 WAIT sequence 111
lifting operations 173
warranty 50
locating 25 washing off toner 93
media size detection operations 169, 171 waste toner collection bottle
media supported 32
operations 164, 165
motors, testing 78 removing 183, 191
paper path operations 169 Web JetAdmin, firmware updates 104
paper path test 75
websites
paper-handling menu 59 documentation 49
paper-width detection, tray 1 175 firmware updates 99
pickup operations, cassettes 172
HP media 33
pickup operations, tray 1 174 ordering parts and supplies 47, 443
printable area 85 security, settings 73
registration 64
weekly onsite service 51
sensors, diagrams 133, 142 weight
separation pad, cleaning 95 basis test, media 40
standard paper size, setting 82
equivalence table, paper 40
troubleshooting printer 27
communications 436 Wide A4 settings 62
Diagnostics menu 75
width detection, tray 1 175
firmware updates 105 Windows, updating firmware through
HP Jetdirect print servers 436 FTP 101
power 308
local port 99
service approach 46 LPR commands 104
TrueType fonts 20 network 100
turning off printer 136, 183
wireless printing 21
wiring
U diagrams 114
UNIX firmware updates 100 replacing harnesses 183
unpacking printer 27 wood pulp test kits 43, 44
unplugging printer 136, 183
updating firmware
downloading files 99
Macintosh 102
messages received during 105
troubleshooting 105
UNIX 100
Windows, FTP 101
Windows, local port 99
Windows, LPR commands 104
Windows, network 100
upper covers, removing and replacing
left 198
right 196
upper left door sensor, removing and replacing 299
upper right fan 141
usage page 58
user guides
ordering 49
part numbers 446

V
vacuuming spilled toner 93
vertical feed unit, removing and replacing 240
viewing
current MFP settings 323
directory structures 328

ENWW Index 529

530 Index ENWW
ENWW Index 531
532 Index ENWW
© 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

http://www.hp.com/support/LJ9500

*C8546-90956*
*C8546-90956*
C8546-90956